3RK1105-1BG04-0CA0 - SIEMENS

System Manual · 11/2008

with Supplements · 09/2010

AS-Interface / ASIsafe

as-interface

Introduction

Product portfolio

Getting Started

Operating principle

System extensions

Master

Power supply units

Slaves

Integrated safety systems:

ASIsafe

System accessories

System integration

System diagnosis

Planning and configuration

Appendix

S-Interface

AS-Interface system

System Manual

11/2008

3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

5E01216655-02

The following supplements (Edition 0/2010)

belong to this documentation:

System Expansions

1.1 AS-i Power24V and data decoupling units

1.2 AS-i data decoupling units

ASIsafe: Safe AS-i outputs

2.1 Safe SlimLine module S45F

Safety Guidelines

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent

damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert

symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are

graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION

with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION

without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE

indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into

account.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will

be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to

property damage.

Qualified Personnel

The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and

operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes

in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and

label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage

Note the following:

WARNING

This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only

in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or

recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage,

positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this

publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the

owner.

Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software

described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the

information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent

editions.

Siemens AG

Automation and Drives

Postfach 48 48

90327 NÜRNBERG

GERMANY

Ordernumber: A5E01216655-01

Ⓟ 11/2008

Technical data subject to change

 
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  5 
Table of contents 
Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 17 
1  Preface.........................................................................................................................................17 
2  Guide to the system manual ........................................................................................................18 
3  What is AS-Interface? ..................................................................................................................19 
4  The automation pyramid and deployment of AS-i........................................................................21 
5  Benefits of AS-Interface ...............................................................................................................22 
Product portfolio ...................................................................................................................................... 23 
1  Master ..........................................................................................................................................23 
2  AS-Interface power supply units ..................................................................................................24 
3  Slaves ..........................................................................................................................................25 
4  Motor starters...............................................................................................................................26 
5  LOGO!..........................................................................................................................................27 
6  Integrated AS-i slaves..................................................................................................................28 
7  ASIsafe.........................................................................................................................................29 
8  System components and accessories .........................................................................................30 
Getting Started ........................................................................................................................................ 33 
1  Components required for creating AS-Interface system..............................................................35 
2  Overview of the hardware structure.............................................................................................39 
3  Commissioning the AS-Interface system.....................................................................................39 
4  Addressing the I/O modules.........................................................................................................40 
5  Mounting the SIMATIC and AS-i components on the DIN rail.....................................................41 
6  Connecting the CPU312 to the PS 307 power supply unit..........................................................43 
7  Connecting the CP343-2P master to the AS-i bus ......................................................................44 
8  Connecting the AS-i power supply unit to the AS-i bus/power supply.........................................45 
9  Connecting the K45 modules to the AS-i bus ..............................................................................46 
10 Connecting the proximity switch and contactor to K45 modules .................................................47 
11  Configuring and programming the AS-i system ...........................................................................48 
12  Testing the circuit.........................................................................................................................51 
13  Result ...........................................................................................................................................51 

Table of contents   
  
 AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 
Operating principle................................................................................................................................... 53 
1  ISO/OSI reference model............................................................................................................ 53 
2  Physical layer .............................................................................................................................. 54 
2.1  Elements in the physical layer .................................................................................................... 54 
2.2  The AS-Interface cable ............................................................................................................... 54 
2.3  The AS-Interface power supply................................................................................................... 56 
2.4  The AS-Interface modulation procedure..................................................................................... 58 
2.5  Structure of the AS-Interface system.......................................................................................... 62 
2.6  Alternative structures .................................................................................................................. 63 
2.7  Cable lengths and extending an AS-i network............................................................................ 64 
3  Data link layer ............................................................................................................................. 66 
3.1  The elements of the data link layer ............................................................................................. 66 
3.2  The AS-Interface bus access procedure..................................................................................... 66 
3.3  The AS-Interface message ......................................................................................................... 67 
4  Application layer.......................................................................................................................... 69 
4.1  AS-Interface module parameters ................................................................................................ 69 
4.2  Setting parameters via the ASI_3422 command interface.......................................................... 71 
4.3  Setting parameters via the display/WBM .................................................................................... 72 
System extensions................................................................................................................................... 79 
1  Technical development of the AS-Interface................................................................................ 79 
2  System limits of the AS-Interface specification........................................................................... 80 
3  Extensions of the AS-Interface specification 2.1 ........................................................................ 80 
4  Extensions of the AS-Interface specification 3.0 ........................................................................ 80 
5  AS-Interface master: depending on the AS-Interface specification version ............................... 81 
6  Communication cycle: depending on the AS-Interface specification version ............................. 81 
Master...................................................................................................................................................... 83 
1  SIMATIC integrated masters....................................................................................................... 83 
1.1  Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 83 
1.2  CP 243-2 ..................................................................................................................................... 84 
1.2.1  Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 84 
1.2.2  Order numbers ............................................................................................................................ 85 
1.2.3  Connecting the CP 343-2............................................................................................................ 86 
1.2.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................. 87 
1.2.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................. 91 
1.3  CP 343-2, CP 343-2 P ................................................................................................................ 92 
1.3.1  Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 92 
1.3.2  Order numbers ............................................................................................................................ 94 
1.3.3  Connection .................................................................................................................................. 94 
1.3.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................. 96 
1.3.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................. 99 
2  Routers...................................................................................................................................... 100 
2.1  DP/AS-Interface Link 20E ......................................................................................................... 100 
2.1.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 100 

  Table of contents 
  
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  7 
2.1.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................102 
2.1.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................103 
2.1.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................105 
2.1.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................110 
2.2  DP/AS-i LINK Advanced ............................................................................................................111 
2.2.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................111 
2.2.2    Order numbers .........................................................................................................................114
2.2.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................115 
2.2.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................118 
2.2.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................121 
2.3  DP/AS-i F-Link ...........................................................................................................................123 
2.3.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................123 
2.3.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................128 
2.3.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................129 
2.3.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................131 
2.3.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................138 
2.4  IE/AS-i LINK PN IO ....................................................................................................................140 
2.4.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................140 
2.4.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................144 
2.4.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................145 
2.4.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................148 
2.4.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................151 
Power supply units................................................................................................................................. 153 
1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................153 
2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................156 
3  Connection.................................................................................................................................156 
4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................159 
5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................159 
6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................160 
Slaves.................................................................................................................................................... 163 
1  Setting the AS-i address ............................................................................................................164 
2  Connection.................................................................................................................................166 
2.1  Connecting the shaped cable for AS-i and AUX POWER .........................................................166 
2.2  AS-i connection via M12 connector ...........................................................................................167 
2.3  Connection via terminals............................................................................................................167 
2.4  M12 - standard assignment - digital inputs ................................................................................169 
2.5  M12 - Y assignment - digital inputs............................................................................................170 
2.6  M12 - Y/II assignment - digital inputs.........................................................................................170 
2.7  M8 - assignment - digital inputs .................................................................................................170 
2.8  M12 - standard assignment - digital outputs..............................................................................171 
2.9  M12 - Y assignment - digital outputs .........................................................................................171 
2.10 M12 - Y/II assignment - digital outputs ......................................................................................171 
2.11  M8 - assignment - digital outputs...............................................................................................172 

Table of contents   
  
 AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 
3  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 173 
3.1  LED status displays for modules with two LEDs for AS-i and FAULT ...................................... 173 
3.2  LED status displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT........................................... 174 
3.3  LED status display AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage....................................... 175 
3.4  LED status display for the switching state (yellow)................................................................... 175 
4  Input/output modules................................................................................................................. 176 
4.1  Digital K60 input/output modules - panel IP67.......................................................................... 176 
4.1.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 176 
4.1.2  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 176 
4.1.3  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 177 
4.1.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 178 
4.1.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 178 
4.1.6  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 185 
4.2  Digital input/output modules K60R - panel IP68 / IP69K .......................................................... 186 
4.2.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 186 
4.2.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 187 
4.2.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 187 
4.2.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 189 
4.2.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 189 
4.2.6  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 191 
4.3  K60 compact module data coupler - panel IP67....................................................................... 191 
4.3.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 191 
4.3.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 192 
4.3.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 192 
4.3.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 193 
4.3.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 193 
4.3.6  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 194 
4.4  Digital K45 input/output modules - field IP67............................................................................ 195 
4.4.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 195 
4.4.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 196 
4.4.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 196 
4.4.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 196 
4.4.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 197 
4.4.6  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 201 
4.5  Digital K20 input/output modules - field IP67............................................................................ 202 
4.5.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 202 
4.5.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 203 
4.5.3  Setting the AS-i address ........................................................................................................... 204 
4.5.4  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 205 
4.5.5  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 208 
4.5.6  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 208 
4.5.7  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 211 
4.6  Analog K60 input/output modules - panel IP67......................................................................... 213 
4.6.1  Properties.................................................................................................................................. 213 
4.6.2  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 213 
4.6.3  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 217 
4.6.4  Parameterization ....................................................................................................................... 218 
4.6.5  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 226 
4.6.6  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 232 
4.6.7  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 232 
4.6.8  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 234 

  Table of contents 
  
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  9 
4.7  SlimLine digital input/output module - cabinet IP20...................................................................235 
4.7.1  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................236 
4.7.2  Connection.................................................................................................................................237 
4.7.3  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................238 
4.7.4  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................239 
4.7.5  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................248 
4.8  F90 digital input/output module - cabinet IP20 ..........................................................................250 
4.8.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................250 
4.8.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................253 
4.8.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................254 
4.8.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................255 
4.8.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................255 
4.8.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................259 
4.9  Flat digital input/output module - cabinet IP20...........................................................................260 
4.9.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................260 
4.9.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................261 
4.9.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................261 
4.9.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................261 
4.9.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................262 
4.9.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................263 
5  Modules with special functions ..................................................................................................264 
5.1  Counter module..........................................................................................................................264 
5.1.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................264 
5.1.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................265 
5.1.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................265 
5.1.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................266 
5.1.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................266 
5.1.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................267 
6  Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection....................................................................268 
6.1  AS-Interface motor starter (400 V / 600 V, IP65).......................................................................269 
6.1.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................269 
6.1.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................272 
6.1.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................274 
6.1.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................275 
6.1.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................279 
6.1.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................280 
6.2  AS-Interface motor starters (24 V DC, IP65 / IP67)...................................................................281 
6.2.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................281 
6.2.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................282 
6.2.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................282 
6.2.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................283 
6.2.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................284 
6.2.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................286 
6.3  ECOFAST motor starters...........................................................................................................287 
6.3.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................287 
6.3.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................290 
6.3.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................291 
6.3.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................292 
6.3.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................294 
6.3.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................297 

Table of contents   
  
 AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 
6.4  AS-Interface load feeder modules ............................................................................................ 299 
6.4.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 299 
6.4.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 301 
6.4.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 304 
6.4.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 309 
6.4.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 309 
6.4.6  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 311 
7  AS-Interface for control and signaling devices.......................................................................... 314 
7.1  AS-i F adapter for EMERGENCY STOP control devices 3SB3................................................ 314 
7.1.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 314 
7.1.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 315 
7.1.3  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 316 
7.1.4  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 316 
7.2  Housing and modules for buttons and indicator lights 3SB3 .................................................... 317 
7.2.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 317 
7.2.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 321 
7.2.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 323 
7.2.4  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 327 
7.2.5  Dimension drawings of the housing .......................................................................................... 329 
8  Signaling columns with AS-Interface connection...................................................................... 331 
8.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 331 
8.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 333 
8.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 334 
8.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 335 
8.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 335 
9  AS-Interface connection for LOGO! .......................................................................................... 337 
9.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 337 
9.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 339 
9.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 339 
9.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 340 
9.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 341 
9.6  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 342 
10  Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface............................. 343 
10.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 343 
10.2 Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 344 
10.3  Connecting the electronic module............................................................................................. 344 
10.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 346 
10.5  Technical specifications of the electronic module..................................................................... 348 
Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe........................................................................................................ 349 
1  Safety monitor ........................................................................................................................... 353 
1.1       Overview .................................................................................................................................. 354
1.2  Function..................................................................................................................................... 355 
1.3  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 357 
1.4  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 358 
1.5  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 359 

  Table of contents 
  
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  11 
1.6  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................362 
1.7  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................362 
2  ASIsafe modules........................................................................................................................363 
2.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................363 
2.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................364 
2.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................366 
2.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................369 
2.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................370 
2.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................374 
3  3SF1 position switches with ASIsafe interface ..........................................................................375 
3.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................375 
3.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................377 
3.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................378 
3.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................378 
3.5  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................379 
4  SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays .................................................................................381 
4.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................381 
4.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................385 
4.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................390 
4.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................392 
4.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................399 
4.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................400 
5  SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners ................................................................................................404 
5.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................404 
5.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................408 
5.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................408 
5.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................410 
5.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................412 
5.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................413 
System accessories............................................................................................................................... 415 
1  Extension plug ...........................................................................................................................415 
1.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................415 
1.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................416 
1.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................416 
1.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................417 
1.5  Technical specifications .............................................................................................................418 
1.6  Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................419 
2  Repeaters...................................................................................................................................420 
2.1  Overview ....................................................................................................................................420 
2.2  Order numbers...........................................................................................................................421 
2.3  Connection.................................................................................................................................422 
2.4  Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................424 

Table of contents   
  
 AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 
2.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 424 
2.6  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 424 
3  Extenders .................................................................................................................................. 425 
3.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 425 
3.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 425 
3.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 426 
3.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 427 
3.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 427 
3.6  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 428 
4  Addressing unit ......................................................................................................................... 429 
4.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 429 
4.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 430 
4.3  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 430 
5  Analyzer .................................................................................................................................... 431 
5.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 431 
5.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 432 
5.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 433 
6  Ground fault detection module..................................................................................................434 
6.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 434 
6.2  Checking for ground faults with a voltage measuring instrument ............................................. 435 
6.3 Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 436 
6.4  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 437 
6.5  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 438 
6.6  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 439 
6.7  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 440 
7  Overvoltage protection module ................................................................................................. 441 
7.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 441 
7.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 442 
7.3  Connection ................................................................................................................................ 443 
7.4  Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 443 
7.5  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 444 
7.6  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 445 
8  Other accessories ..................................................................................................................... 446 
8.1  AS-Interface shaped cable........................................................................................................ 446 
8.1.1  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 446 
8.1.2  Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 447 
8.1.3  Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 447 
8.1.4  Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 448 
8.2  Installation material ................................................................................................................... 449 
System integration................................................................................................................................. 451 
1  Integration in open-loop control systems .................................................................................. 451 
1.1  Totally Integrated Automation ................................................................................................... 451 
1.2  Integration of AS-i networks in SIMATIC .................................................................................. 453 

  Table of contents 
  
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  13 
1.3  Integration in third-party controllers ...........................................................................................453 
2  Data storage in the controller.....................................................................................................454 
2.1  Binary data.................................................................................................................................454 
2.2  Safe binary data.........................................................................................................................458 
2.3  Analog data................................................................................................................................461 
3  CP 343-2 integration with STEP 7 .............................................................................................465 
3.1  Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................465 
3.2  Integration procedure.................................................................................................................465 
3.3  Configuring the AS-i master in the rack of the CPU module .....................................................466 
3.4  Parameterizing AS-Interface......................................................................................................467 
3.5  Completing configuration ...........................................................................................................468 
3.6  Switching on the AS-i power supply ..........................................................................................468 
3.7  Addressing AS-i slaves ..............................................................................................................469 
3.8  Saving the configuration ............................................................................................................469 
3.9  Copying starting data blocks......................................................................................................470 
4  CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7...........................................................................................471 
4.1 Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................471 
4.2  Integration procedure.................................................................................................................471 
4.3  Configuring the AS-i master in the rack of the CPU module .....................................................471 
4.4  Parameterizing AS-Interface......................................................................................................473 
4.5  Configuring AS-i slaves..............................................................................................................475 
4.6  Specifying AS-i slaves ...............................................................................................................476 
4.7  Completing configuration ...........................................................................................................479 
4.8  Switching on the AS-i power supply ..........................................................................................479 
4.9  Addressing AS-i slaves ..............................................................................................................479 
4.10  Copying starting data blocks......................................................................................................479 
5  DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7.................................................................480 
5.1  Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................480 
5.2  Integration procedure.................................................................................................................480 
5.3  Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system.........................................................................481 
5.4  Parameterizing DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a PROFIBUS DP slave......................................482 
5.5  Parameterizing AS-Interface......................................................................................................483 
5.6  Configuring AS-i slaves..............................................................................................................485 
5.7  Specifying AS-i slaves ...............................................................................................................487 
5.8  Completing configuration ...........................................................................................................490 
5.9  Switching on the AS-i power supply ..........................................................................................490 
5.10  Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-Interface Link 20E .................................................491 
5.11 Addressing AS-i slaves ..............................................................................................................492 
5.12  Copying starting data blocks......................................................................................................492 
6  DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD......................................................................493 
6.1  Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................493 
6.2  Integration procedure.................................................................................................................493 
6.3  Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system.........................................................................494 

Table of contents   
  
 AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 
6.4  Parameterizing DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a PROFIBUS DP slave..................................... 496 
6.5  Parameterizing AS-Interface..................................................................................................... 497 
6.6  Parameterizing binary AS-i slaves ............................................................................................ 498 
6.7  Completing configuration .......................................................................................................... 499 
6.8  Switching on the AS-i power supply.......................................................................................... 499 
6.9  Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-Interface Link 20E ................................................ 500 
6.10 Addressing AS-i slaves ............................................................................................................. 501 
6.11  Saving the configuration............................................................................................................ 501 
6.12  Copying starting data blocks..................................................................................................... 502 
7  DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7 .................................................................. 503 
7.1  Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 503 
7.2  Integration procedure................................................................................................................ 503 
7.3  Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system........................................................................ 504 
7.4  Parameterizing DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a PROFIBUS DP slave ....................................... 505 
7.5  Parameterizing AS-Interface..................................................................................................... 506 
7.6  Configuring AS-i slaves............................................................................................................. 509 
7.7  Specifying AS-i slaves............................................................................................................... 511 
7.8  Completing configuration .......................................................................................................... 514 
7.9  Switching on the AS-i power supply.......................................................................................... 514 
7.10  Switching on the optional power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced ...................................... 514 
7.11  Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced................................................... 515 
7.12  Addressing AS-i slaves ............................................................................................................. 515 
7.13  Copying starting data blocks..................................................................................................... 516 
8  DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD....................................................................... 517 
8.1  Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 517 
8.2  Integration procedure................................................................................................................ 517 
8.3  Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system........................................................................ 518 
8.4  Parameterizing DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a PROFIBUS DP slave ....................................... 519 
8.5  Parameterizing AS-Interface..................................................................................................... 520 
8.6  Parameterizing the binary address space................................................................................. 521 
8.7  Parameterizing the analog address space................................................................................ 523 
8.8  Completing configuration .......................................................................................................... 525 
8.9  Switching on the AS-i power supply.......................................................................................... 525 
8.10  Switching on the optional power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced ...................................... 526 
8.11  Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced................................................... 526 
8.12  Addressing AS-i slaves ............................................................................................................. 526 
8.13  Saving the configuration............................................................................................................ 527 
8.14  Copying starting data blocks..................................................................................................... 528 
9  DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7 ................................................................................. 529 
9.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 529 
9.2  Integration procedure................................................................................................................ 529 
9.3 Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system........................................................................ 530 
9.4  Parameterizing DP/AS-i F-Link as a PROFIBUS DP slave ...................................................... 532 

  Table of contents 
  
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  15 
9.5  Parameterizing PROFIsafe communication...............................................................................533 
9.6  Parameterizing AS-Interface......................................................................................................535 
9.7  Configuring AS-i slaves..............................................................................................................538 
9.8  Specifying AS-i slaves ...............................................................................................................540 
9.9  Parameterizing ASIsafe slaves..................................................................................................543 
9.10  Completing configuration ...........................................................................................................544 
9.11  Switching on the AS-i power supply ..........................................................................................544 
9.12  Switching on the DP/AS-i F-Link power supply .........................................................................545 
9.13  Setting the PROFIsafe address on the DP/AS-i F-Link .............................................................545 
9.14 Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-i F-Link...................................................................546 
9.15  Addressing AS-i slaves ..............................................................................................................546 
9.16  Copying starting data blocks......................................................................................................547 
9.17  Teaching in code tables for ASIsafe slaves...............................................................................547 
9.18  Information about the user program ..........................................................................................548 
10  DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with GSD.......................................................................................549 
10.1  Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................549 
10.2  Integration procedure.................................................................................................................549 
10.3 Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system.........................................................................550 
10.4  Parameterizing DP/AS-i F-Link as a PROFIBUS DP slave .......................................................552 
10.5  Parameterizing AS-Interface......................................................................................................553 
10.6  Parameterizing ASIsafe slaves..................................................................................................554 
10.7  Parameterizing PROFIsafe communication...............................................................................556 
10.8  Parameterizing binary AS-i slaves.............................................................................................558 
10.9  Completing configuration ...........................................................................................................559 
10.10 Switching on the AS-i power supply ..........................................................................................559 
10.11 Switching on the DP/AS-i F-Link power supply .........................................................................560 
10.12 Setting the PROFIsafe address on the DP/AS-i F-Link .............................................................560 
10.13 Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-i F-Link...................................................................561 
10.14 Addressing AS-i slaves ..............................................................................................................561 
10.15 Saving the configuration ............................................................................................................562 
10.16 Copying starting data blocks......................................................................................................562 
10.17 Teaching in code tables for ASIsafe slaves...............................................................................563 
10.18 Information about the user program ..........................................................................................563 
11  IE/AS-i LINK PN IO - integration with STEP 7 ...........................................................................564 
11.1  Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................564 
11.2  Integration procedure.................................................................................................................564 
11.3  Configuring the PROFINET IO system ......................................................................................565 
11.4  Parameterizing the IE/AS-i LINK PN IO as an IO device ..........................................................567 
11.5  Parameterizing AS-Interface......................................................................................................569 
11.6  Configuring AS-i slaves..............................................................................................................570 
11.7  Specifying AS-i slaves ...............................................................................................................573 
11.8  Completing configuration ...........................................................................................................576 
11.9  Switching on the AS-i power supply ..........................................................................................576 

Table of contents   
  
 AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 
11.10 Switching on the optional power supply for IE/AS-i LINK PN IO .............................................. 576 
11.11 Transferring the device name to IE/AS-i LINK PN IO............................................................... 576 
11.12 Addressing AS-i slaves ............................................................................................................. 577 
12  IE/AS-i LINK PN IO - integration with GSD............................................................................... 578 
12.1  Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 578 
12.2  Integration procedure................................................................................................................ 578 
12.3  Configuring the PROFINET IO system ..................................................................................... 579 
12.4  Parameterizing the IE/AS-i LINK PN IO as an IO device.......................................................... 581 
12.5  Parameterizing AS-Interface..................................................................................................... 583 
12.6  Configuring AS-i slaves............................................................................................................. 584 
12.7  Completing configuration .......................................................................................................... 588 
12.8  Switching on the AS-i power supply.......................................................................................... 588 
12.9  Switching on the optional power supply for IE/AS-i LINK PN IO .............................................. 588 
12.10 Transferring the device name to IE/AS-i LINK PN IO............................................................... 588 
12.11 Addressing AS-i slaves ............................................................................................................. 589 
12.12 Saving the configuration............................................................................................................ 589 
System diagnosis................................................................................................................................... 591 
1 Overview of diagnostic options .................................................................................................591 
2  Diagnostics with SIMATIC......................................................................................................... 593 
3  Reading the diagnosis with SIMATIC ....................................................................................... 595 
3.1  Diagnostic messages in the STEP 7 interface.......................................................................... 595 
3.2  DP slave diagnosis.................................................................................................................... 597 
3.3  System status lists .................................................................................................................... 598 
3.4  Diagnostic data blocks .............................................................................................................. 599 
3.5  Diagnostics blocks for the user program................................................................................... 599 
4  Special features of diagnosis via CP 343-2 and CP 343-2P .................................................... 601 
5 Special features of diagnosis via DP/AS-Interface Link 20E .................................................... 603 
6  Features of diagnosis via DP/AS-i LINK Advanced .................................................................. 606 
7  Special features of diagnosis via DP/AS-i F-Link...................................................................... 609 
8  Special features of diagnosis via IE/AS-i LINK PN IO .............................................................. 614 
Planning and configuration .................................................................................................................... 617 
1  Checklist for beginners.............................................................................................................. 617 
2  Configuration............................................................................................................................. 618 
3 Addressing the I/O modules...................................................................................................... 619 
4  Parameterization ....................................................................................................................... 619 
5  Operation................................................................................................................................... 620 
6  AS-Interface acceptance certificate .......................................................................................... 621 
A  Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 627 
A.1  References................................................................................................................................ 627 

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 17

Introduction 1

1.1 Preface

Purpose of this document

This system manual describes the hardware and software components of the AS-Interface

system. It provides an overview of the individual system components and describes solutions

in which the system continuity of the products (Totally Integrated Automation: TIA) is of

prime importance.

The manual is aimed at planners, configuration engineers, fitters, technologists, and

decision-makers to provide support during planning and implementation. It is also aimed at

service and maintenance technicians who install additional components or carry out fault

analyses.

Validity of this documentation

This documentation describes the version shipped as of August 2007.

Introduction

1.2 Guide to the system manual

AS-Interface system

18 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

1.2 Guide to the system manual

Contents format Content

Table of contents Detailed breakdown of the document with relevant pages/sections

Introduction Overview of the AS-Interface

Notes on safety All the generally applicable safety aspects from legal specifications

Product portfolio Overview of all the AS-Interface system components

Getting Started Basic/introductory information for first-time users

Operating principle Information about the AS-Interface communication system

Master

Power supply units

Slaves

Overview of the system components

Integrated safety equipment:

ASIsafe

Concept for integrating safety-oriented components

System accessories Support accessories for assembly, installation, operation, and diagnosis

System integration Information about integration in SIMATIC and third-party systems

System diagnosis Diagnosis telegrams and data sets

Planning and configuration Overview

Appendix References

Introduction

1.3 What is AS-Interface?

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 19

1.3 What is AS-Interface?

AS-Interface

AS-Interface ("AS-i" for short) stands for actuator sensor interface. It is an industrial field bus

system that retrieves the signals at the lowest field level.

Cost-effective alternative to standard wiring methods: the yellow AS-i cable

● The sensors and actuators no longer need to be connected individually to the controller

via parallel cables, which is an extremely time-consuming process, but simply via one

joint AS-i cable.

● The input signals are gathered from AS-i modules and automatically sent to an AS-i

master, which forwards the data to the controller (e.g. SIMATIC S7). At the same time,

the output signals travel in the opposite direction.

● The AS-i cable also supplies the power for the modules and sensors.

● The modules can be easily connected to the yellow AS-i flat ribbon cable by means of the

insulation displacement method so that they are protected against polarity reversal.

● The following terminal devices can be connected to AS-i modules:

– Binary sensors (e.g. proximity switches, positions switches, pushbuttons)

– Binary actuators (e.g. valves, indicator lights)

– Analog sensors (e.g. temperature sensors (KTY, PTC, NTC), level indicators)

– Analog actuators (e.g. analog displays)

● The following sensors and actuators with integrated AS-i slave can also be connected to

AS-i modules:

– Control devices

– Signal columns

– Motor feeders

– Position switches

Direct assembly

● Since the AS-i field modules are available with housings with a high degree of protection

(e.g. IP67), they can be assembled in the immediate vicinity of sensors and actuators.

AS-i modules and sensors/actuators can be quickly and easily connected using short

prefabricated cables (e.g. M12 or M8 plug-in cables).

● Modules with degree of protection IP20 are available for use in control cabinets.

Introduction

1.3 What is AS-Interface?

AS-Interface system

20 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

AS-i logo

AS-Interface devices have the following logo:

Figure 1-1 The AS-Interface logo

Optimum quantity structure

AS-Interface is optimized in line with the data volume that fulfills the requirements of the

lowest field level. Up to 31 modules (standard slaves) each with four digital inputs and

outputs can be connected for each AS-i network. The cycle time here is max. 5 ms.

The number of modules can be doubled to 62 when modules with an extended addressing

mode (A/B slaves) are used.

Analog input and output modules are also available in addition to digital modules.

Safety-oriented signals (EMERGENCY STOP, door tumbler, two-hand operations etc.) can

also be transferred.

International standard

The AS-Interface concept was elaborated in 1992 by a consortium originally comprising

11 companies, including Siemens AG, in the area of industrial automation. Since then,

approx. 300 companies worldwide have helped create an established system with this

technology.

AS-Interface complies with the international standards EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2 for field

bus communication.

The system properties are defined in an open, manufacturer-independent manner in the AS-i

specifications (AS-i Spec. for short) by the umbrella organization AS-Interface Association.

For more information and contact addresses, please visit the following website:

www.as-interface.net

Introduction

1.4 The automation pyramid and deployment of AS-i

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 21

1.4 The automation pyramid and deployment of AS-i

The automation pyramid levels

The automation pyramid is divided into three levels.

The control level

Here, individual automation islands are connected to each other to create larger units, e.g.:

● Several machines in a hall

● Several halls in a plant

● Several plants in a company at different locations

Data exchange takes place in large data blocks and is not critical from a time perspective.

The field control level

At this level:

● Central and distributed automation devices are used

● Complex field devices are connected

Data is usually exchanged on a byte-dependent basis.

The actuator/sensor level

At this level, the most commonly-used components are connected:

● Binary actuators

● Simple analog devices

Data is usually exchanged on a bit-dependent basis.

Totally Integrated Automation

The Siemens Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) concept covers all the automation levels

and is optimized in line with the interfaces.

Siemens offers:

● AS-Interface communication processors (CP) that can be installed directly in the

SIMATIC rack

● Gateways (links) for transferring data from AS-Interface to PROFIBUS and PROFINET

Introduction

1.5 Benefits of AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

22 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

3ODQWFRQWUROOHYHO

󰩛'DWDYROXPHVLQPHJDE\WHUDQJH

ZLWKRXWUHDOWLPHUHTXLUHPHQW

)LHOGDQGFRQWUROOHYHO

󰩛1HWZRUNLQJWKHFRQWUROOHUV

HJ6LPDWLF6DQGWKHFRPSOH[

QRGHVZLWK3URILEXV

$FWXDWRUVHQVRUOHYHO

󰩛$UHDRIDSSOLFDWLRQ

RI$6,QWHUIDFH

󰩛/RZGDWDYROXPH

HYHQLIPDQ\GHYLFHVDUHFRQQHFWHG

DQGUHDOWLPHUHTXLUHPHQW

7,$,QWHJUDWHG6LHPHQVVROXWLRQSODWIRUP

󰩛1HWZRUNLQJWKHKRVWFRPSXWHUE\

PHDQVRI

,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW

Figure 1-2 Integration of AS-i in the TIA automation pyramid

1.5 Benefits of AS-Interface

The actuator sensor interface offers the following benefits:

● No need for complex cable harnesses to the sensors and actuators

● Smaller control cabinets due to the lack of I/O modules

● Rapid installation thanks to the IP67 housing and AS-i insulation displacement method

● Plug-in methods allows sensors and actuators to be connected without errors

● Signals are mapped in the PLC in the same way as for standard I/O modules

● Comprehensive range of diagnosis options covering even individual modules

● Modules can be replaced while the system is live

These benefits not only help cut the cost of configuration, installation, documentation, and

maintenance, but also reduce downtime.

For more information, see:

www.siemens.de/as-interface

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 23

Product portfolio 2

2.1 Master

As a communications processor (CP) or link, the AS-Interface master acts as an interface

with higher-level controllers. It organizes data exchange on the AS-Interface cable

independently, queries signals, sets parameters, and performs monitoring/diagnostic

functions.

● Up to 62 AS-Interface slaves can be connected.

● Integrated analog value transfer

● Standard operation in the input/output address range

● The individual AS-Interface slaves either can be configured in STEP 7 HW Config, or the

AS-i ACTUAL configuration can simply be adopted as the TARGET configuration

● Monitoring of the power supply on the AS-Interface shaped cable

● User-friendly diagnosis and commissioning

● Degree of protection IP20

Communications processors (CP)

Simple connection to SIMATIC S7-300 with CP343-2 / CP343-2 P or to

SIMATIC S7-200 with CP343-2.

Links to PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO

A compact router integrated in STEP 7 from AS-Interface to PROFIBUS with DP/AS-i Link

Advanced and DP/AS-i Link 20E or with IE/AS-i Link PN IO to PROFINET

● Single and double master to spec. 3.0

● Vertical, Web-based integration (i.e. commissioning and diagnosis can be performed via

a standard Web browser)

● PROFINET link with integrated Ethernet 2-port switch

Product portfolio

2.2 AS-Interface power supply units

AS-Interface system

24 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Safety-related F-link to PROFIBUS DP

Compact router allowing efficient integration of ASIsafe in PROFIsafe

● Degree of protection IP20

● In one device: Fully-fledged AS-i master (Spec. 3.0) for standard and safety signals

● Transfer of safe input signals to PROFIsafe architectures

● Exchange of digital and analog I/O data

● Safety functions parameterized via STEP 7 Distributed Safety

2.2 AS-Interface power supply units

AS-Interface power supply units are primary switched-mode power supply units that

generate a regulated DC voltage of 30 V DC with high control stability and low residual

ripple. They are a key component of the AS-Interface network and allow data and power to

be transferred simultaneously in one cable.

Power supplies

Optimum power for all applications: AS-Interface power supply units

● Degree of protection IP20

● Broad power spectrum (from 3 A DC to 8 A DC)

● Removable terminal blocks

● Integrated overload and ground-fault detection

● Diagnostic memory, signaling contacts and remote reset function, LEDs

● Ultra-wide input range with 8 A version

● CLASS 2 variant available

● Variant with 24 V DC input available

Product portfolio

2.3 Slaves

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 25

2.3 Slaves

Slaves are used to connect the sensors and actuators in the field or in the cabinet unit. A

maximum of 62 slaves can be connected to an AS-i network. The connected slaves

exchange data with the AS-i master cyclically.

K60, K45, and K20 compact modules

The K60, K45, and K20 compact modules reduce installation and commissioning times by up

to 40%.

● Degrees of protection IP65/IP67 or IP68/IP69K available

● Particularly compact dimensions as of a construction width of 20 mm

● ATEX-certified modules for hazardous zone 22 available

● Connection sockets in M8/M12

● Up to 8 inputs and 4 outputs

● A/B technology available (to AS-i spec. 2.1 and AS-i spec. 3.0)

● Polarized contacting

● DIN rail and wall-mounting possible

● Module can be mounted on a baseplate with just one screw

● Diagnostic LEDs

● AS-i/AS-i data coupler with construction type K60

● Rapid connection by means of insulation displacement method (flat cable adapters for

K20)

K60 analog modules

The K60 analog modules allow analog values to be easily integrated.

● Degree of protection IP65/IP67

● Records/supplies analog signals on site

● 1, 2, or 4 channels

● Input modules for up to 4 current sensors, voltage sensors, or temperature sensors

(Pt 100, Ni 100) or resistance measurement

● Output modules for current or voltage

● Analog modules with rapid data transfer in extended address mode (A/B technology) to

spec. 3.0 available

Product portfolio

2.4 Motor starters

AS-Interface system

26 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

SlimLine and flat modules

SlimLine and flat modules can be used in control cabinets and small local switchboxes.

● Degree of protection IP20

● Up to 16 inputs

● A/B technology available (also to AS-i spec. 3.0)

● SlimLine modules with construction widths as of 22.5 mm

● Removable SlimLine terminal blocks safe against finger touch and coded

● Flat modules for small control cabinets and areas with restricted space

● Connection via screw-type or cage-clamp terminals

● DIN rail and wall mounting possible

● Diagnostic LEDs

Counter modules

Counter modules are used for transferring count values for pulses of up to 769 Hz.

● Degree of protection IP20

● For evaluating digital pulses

● Connection via removable screw-type or cage-clamp terminals

2.4 Motor starters

24 V DC starter

Simple motor starter with tried-and-tested K60 module construction type for 24 V DC motors

● Degree of protection IP65/IP67

● Direct-on-line starter, double direct-on-line starter, or reversing starter

● For motors up to 70 W

● Quick-stop function

Product portfolio

2.5 LOGO!

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 27

Compact starter for AS-Interface

Motor starters for AC motors

● No local control cabinets required

● Degree of protection IP65/IP67

● Up to 5.5 kW for 400/500 V AC

● Electromechanical or electronic design

● With optional brake contact

● Hand-held device for local operation available

Motor starters for ECOFAST

Saving space in the control cabinet: the ECOFAST motor starter can be installed near to or

directly on the motor.

● Degree of protection IP65/IP67

● Standardized connector to ECOFAST® specifications (conforms with DESINA)

● Mechanical switching function or as reverse starter with soft start

Load feeders

Prefabricated load feeders facilitate wiring activities in the control cabinet.

● Degree of protection IP20

● Available fully pre-wired or as individual components

● Power range up to max. 7.5 kW

● Can be snapped directly onto busbar systems

●

2.5 LOGO!

Local intelligence with the LOGO! communications module

AS-i interface for LOGO!

● AS-i slave for connecting LOGO!

● LOGO! I/Os can be extended by four inputs/outputs

● Small local control units with an interface to a central controller via AS-i

Product portfolio

2.6 Integrated AS-i slaves

AS-Interface system

28 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

2.6 Integrated AS-i slaves

Pushbuttons/indicator lights

Complete 3SB3 control system with simple AS-Interface connection for your plant.

● Customized, modular structure

● Metal or plastic design

● A/B or standard technology

● Indicator light with integrated LED

Signaling columns

Signaling columns for monitoring production procedures and for providing a visual or

acoustic alarm in emergencies with a simple AS-Interface connection.

● A range of visual and acoustic elements can be combined as required

● Up to four signal elements can be connected via an adapter element

● With LEDs or incandescent lamps

● A/B or standard technology

Communication-capable contactors (55 to 250 kW)

● Contactors (55 to 250 kW)

● Integrated switchover function from automatic to manual/local control

● Control and message signals via AS-Interface

● Remaining life time indicated via AS-Interface

Product portfolio

2.7 ASIsafe

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 29

2.7 ASIsafe

ASIsafe allows safety-oriented signals to be transferred in an AS-Interface network, thereby

enabling EMERGENCY STOP buttons, protective door switches, safety light arrays etc. to

be easily connected to the AS-i network without compromising the simplicity of AS-Interface

wiring.

Safety monitor / expanded safety monitor

The safety monitors allow safety functions to be easily configured.

Safety category to EN 954-1 4

Safety Integrity Level (SIL) to IEC 61508 3

● Core elements of ASIsafe

● Monitors safe nodes and connects safe inputs

● Ensures safe shutdown

● Removable terminal blocks

● Available with 1 or 2 enabling circuits

● Expanded safety monitor with extended RAM and functional scope

● Quick-and-easy configuration of the safety monitor via the PC software asimon

Safe modules

Safe modules K45F, K20F, and SlimLine allow safe signals to be easily integrated, whether

in the control cabinet or field.

● Degrees of protection IP65/IP67 or IP20

● Available as K60, K45, or K20 compact module or SlimLine module

● Two inputs in safety category 2 to EN 954-1 / Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC 61508

or one input in safety category 4 to EN 954-1 / Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC 61508

● Four inputs in safety category 2 to EN 954-1 / Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC 61508

or two inputs in safety category 4 to EN 954-1 / Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC

61508

● Modules available with additional standard outputs

Product portfolio

2.8 System components and accessories

AS-Interface system

30 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

EMERGENCY STOP

Simple, direct connection of tried-and-tested controls to ASIsafe

● Degrees of protection IP65/IP67 or IP20

● EMERGENCY STOP can be connected directly to AS-Interface via integrated modules

● Metal or plastic housing

● Also available as F adapter for snapping on to actuator for front plate mounting

Position switches / cable-operated switches

Direct wiring of safety functions via AS-i

● Degrees of protection IP65 or IP66/67

● Direct connection of position switches or cable-operated switches for detecting safe

signals

● ASIsafe electronics integrated in the housing

● Available with separate actuator or tumbler

● Metal or plastic housing

Non-contact protective equipment

Active personnel protection can be connected directly to ASIsafe.

● Degree of protection IP65

● Can be connected directly and safely to AS-Interface

● Up to safety category 3 to EN 954-1 / Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC 61508 or in

safety category 4 to EN 954-1 / Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 to IEC 61508

– (Laser scanner)

– (Light arrays/curtains)

● Also with integrated muting function

2.8 System components and accessories

Accessories for facilitating assembly, installation, operation, and diagnosis

Range extension

Reduced infrastructure costs, greater range of applications, and greater freedom in plant

design.

● An extension plug is available to extend an AS-i segments to max. 200 m (without

additional power supply unit)

● AS-i network can be extended to include more than one bus segment with AS-i repeater

● Maximum expansion (with star topology) to more than 1000 m possible

Product portfolio

2.8 System components and accessories

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 31

Addressing unit

Simplest method of addressing and parameterizing the slave

● All the nodes in the AS-Interface network can be addressed (standard and A/B slaves)

● Profile codes of the slaves can be read (IO, ID, ID2, and ID1)

● ID1 code can be set

● Parameter bits can be temporarily set or the parameter strings permanently set

● AS-Interface voltage can be measured

● Outputs can be set directly and slave inputs read

● Complete plant configurations can be saved

Analyzer

Quality assessment of an AS-Interface network with function for printing reports as well as

performing on-site analyses and remote diagnose

● Quality and reliability of an AS-Interface installation can be checked

● Data can be transferred to a PC via an RS232 interface

● Software-based evaluation

● Simple, user-friendly operation

● Test reports generated automatically

● Advanced trigger functions enable precise analyses

● Multiple error display enables preventive diagnosis

● Process data (digital, analog, and Safety) can be viewed online

AS-i shaped cable

● Rapid exchange and connection to AS-Interface by means of piercing technique.

● Trapezoidal profile protects against incorrect polarity

● Cables made of materials optimized for different applications

● Special version available to UL class 2

Distributors / M12 feeders

Quick and easy redistribution and branching to the AS-i shaped cable

● Simple distribution of the AS-i shaped cable with a high degree of protection

● Branching from AS-i and Uaux to round cable

● Connection of slaves with M12 bus connection

● Extremely user friendly

Product portfolio

2.8 System components and accessories

AS-Interface system

32 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Special modules

Diagnosing ground faults and protecting against overvoltages on AS-i

● Advanced diagnosis function that detects, displays (LED), and signals (1 changeover

contact) ground faults.

● Greater operational reliability thanks to overvoltage protection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 33

Getting Started 3

What information does Getting Started contain?

The Getting Started chapter is aimed at people who are new to AS-Interface systems.

This chapter provides a step-by-step example showing you how to create a fully-functional

AS-i system.

Example: Creating an AS-Interface system

1. Components required for creating AS-Interface system

2. Commissioning the AS-Interface system

3. Addressing the I/O modules

4. Mounting the AS-i components on the DIN rail

5. Programming the AS-i system in STEP 7

6. Functional test

Functional examples for Safety Integrated

Functional examples with safety technology for AS-Interface can be downloaded from:

www.siemens.de/safety

Getting Started

2.8 System components and accessories

AS-Interface system

34 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

To download, click "Functional examples" in the documentation area.

Getting Started

3.1 Components required for creating AS-Interface system

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 35

3.1 Components required for creating AS-Interface system

Key components of an AS-Interface system

An AS-Interface essentially comprises four components:

1. AS-Interface master

The AS-Interface master (in this example: communications processor CP343-2 P)

controls data exchange with the connected nodes (slaves).

2. AS-Interface slaves/modules

All the nodes that are addressed by the master are called "slaves". In this example, K45

digital I/O modules are used to which the sensor (inductive proximity switch) and an

actuator are connected.

3. AS-Interface cable

The AS-Interface cable, an unshielded two-wire cable, transfers the signals and power

supply for the sensors and actuators connected via AS-Interface. If necessary, the power

supply for actuators can be taken from the black shaped cable.

4. AS-Interface power supply unit

The AS-Interface power supply unit supplies the network electronics (AS-Interface

modules) and connected sensors. The integrated data decoupling ensures that the data

and power are kept separate, which means that data and power can be transferred in one

cable.

Note

AS-Interface power supply units are among the essential and functionally-critical

components of an AS-Interface network and cannot be replaced by conventional power

supply units!

The components required for creating the system described in this example are listed below.

If other components are used, the steps involved may differ from the description provided

here.

Components required for creating a standard AS-Interface system

Components Type Order no. Qty

Rail Length 480 mm 6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0 1

SIMATIC S7-300,

PS 307

Load power supply,

120/230 V AC, 24 V DC, 2A

6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0 1

Getting Started

3.1 Components required for creating AS-Interface system

AS-Interface system

36 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Components required for creating a standard AS-Interface system

Components Type Order no. Qty

SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 312 6ES7312-1AE13-0AB0 1

MICRO MEMORY

CARD F

64 KBYTE 6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0 1

STEP 7 V5.4, or higher,

trial license for 14 days

6ES7810-4CC08-0YA7 1

CP343-2 P AS-Interface

communications processor

6GK7 343-2AH10-0XA0 1

Front connector 20-pole, with screw-type

contacts

6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0 1

Getting Started

3.1 Components required for creating AS-Interface system

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 37

Components required for creating a standard AS-Interface system

Components Type Order no. Qty

AS-Interface power

supply unit IP20

3A power supply unit with

integrated ground-fault and

overload detection

3RX9501-0BA00 1

AS-Interface input

module

K 45

Digital I/O module, IP 67,

4 inputs

3RK1 200-0CQ20-0AA3 1

AS-Interface output

module

K45

Digital I/O module, IP 67,

4 outputs

3RK1 100-1CQ20-0AA3 1

$6L

$8;

3RZHU





Mounting plate for standard rail 3RK1901-2DA00 2

Getting Started

3.1 Components required for creating AS-Interface system

AS-Interface system

38 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Components required for creating a standard AS-Interface system

Components Type Order no. Qty

M12 inductive proximity

switches

15 ... 34 V DC, SN = 4 mm,

PNP, 3 conductors,

nickel-plated brass with M12

connector

3RG4012-3AG01 1

M12-M12 connection

cable

3-pole, with 1m PUR

conductor, black,

3 x 0.34 mm2, straight cable

plug, straight connector

3RX8000-0GF32-1AB0 1

Contactor relay Contactor, AC-3, 3KW/400V,

1OE DC 24V, 3-pole,

module S00, cage-clamp

connection, integrated diode

3RT1015-2VB42 1

Connection cable M12

cable connector – open

cable end

4-pole, with 5m PUR

conductor, black,

4 x 0.34 mm2

3RX8000-0CD42-1AF0 1

AS-Interface shaped

cable

Yellow, rubber, 2 x 1.5 mm2,

length 100 m

3RX9010-0AA00 1

24 V cable (AUX) Black, rubber, 2 x 1.5 mm2,

length 100 m

3RX9020-0AA00 1

AS-Interface

addressing and

diagnostics unit

Connection via M12 socket,

IP40

3RK1 904-2AB01 1

Getting Started

3.2 Overview of the hardware structure

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 39

3.2 Overview of the hardware structure

3UR[LPLW\VZLWFK

$6LSRZHUVXSSO\XQLW

&RQWDFWRU

.PRGXOH

RXWSXWV

.PRGXOH

LQSXWV

<HOORZ

6LFDEOH %ODFN

9FDEOH

$8;

&33

&38

36

6,0$7,&

6

2))

92/7$*(

6(/(&725

32:(5

6,723

Figure 3-1 Hardware structure: basic system

3.3 Commissioning the AS-Interface system

Step-by-step guide to creating a fully-functional AS-Interface system

To commission a fully-functional AS-Interface system, we recommend that you carry out the

following steps:

1. Address the I/O modules with the addressing unit

2. Mount all the components on the DIN rail

3. Connect all the components to the AS-i bus.

4. Program the AS-i system in STEP 7.

5. Carry out a functional test.

Getting Started

3.4 Addressing the I/O modules

AS-Interface system

40 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

3.4 Addressing the I/O modules

Unique addressing

In the as-delivered condition, the address of each I/O module (slave) is set to 0. It is detected

by the master as a new slave that has not yet been addressed and, in this condition, has not

yet been integrated in standard communication/data exchange.

To enable data to be exchanged between the master and slaves, you have to assign a

unique address for all the slaves before creating the interface network. The following

addresses are used in this example:

Input module K 45 = address 1

Output module K 45 = address 2

Note

When addressing the slaves via the addressing socket, you must switch off the AS-i voltage

for safety reasons.

Steps

1. Unscrew the cap for the addressing socket on the

module.

2. Connect the module to the addressing unit

(3RK1904 2AB0).

3. Assign an address to the module.

– Switch the selector switch to ADDR.

– Press . The address of the connected module

is read and displayed.

– Select the address with .

– Transfer the address to the module with .

4. Remove the addressing cable with the cap.

5. Seal the addressing socket with the cap.

±5

Ncm

6. To address the K45 output module, repeat steps

1 to 4. This time, however, choose the address 2.

Getting Started

3.5 Mounting the SIMATIC and AS-i components on the DIN rail

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 41

3.5 Mounting the SIMATIC and AS-i components on the DIN rail

Mounting and grounding the DIN rail

Steps

1. Screw on the mounting rail (screw size: M6). Make sure that you

maintain a clearance of at least 40 mm above and below the DIN

rail.

2. Connect the DIN rail to the protective conductor using the M6

protective conductor screw.

The prescribed minimum cable cross-sectional area for the protective

conductor is 10 mm2.

Mounting the modules on the DIN rail.

Mount the PS 307 power supply unit, CPU 312, and CP 343-2 P AS-i master on a DIN rail one after the other.

Steps

1. Hook the PS 307 power supply unit onto the DIN rail. Push it to the

left until it reaches the grounding screw of the DIN rail and tighten

it.



2. Connect a bus connector (see excerpt of graphic) to the CPU 312

to establish a connection with the other modules.

Getting Started

3.5 Mounting the SIMATIC and AS-i components on the DIN rail

AS-Interface system

42 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Steps

3. Hook the CPU onto the DIN rail (1).

4. Push it along the rail until it reaches the module on the left (2).



5. Now pull it down (3).

6. Screw the module onto the DIN rail (tighten by hand).



① = PS 307

② = CPU 312

7. Insert the micro memory card into the module slot of the CPU 312.



①= PS 307 power supply unit

② = CPU 312

③ = AS-i master CP 343-2 P

8. Mount the AS-i master CP 343-2P on the right next to the CPU. To

do so, repeat steps 3 to 6.

Getting Started

3.6 Connecting the CPU312 to the PS 307 power supply unit

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 43

3.6 Connecting the CPU312 to the PS 307 power supply unit

Steps Result

1. Connect the flexible power cable to the

PS 307 power supply unit:

- Phase L1 to terminal L1

- Neutral conductor to terminal N

- Protective conductor to terminal PE

PS 307 is connected to

the power supply.

2. Check whether the switch for selecting

the line voltage is set in accordance

with the line voltage in your plant. The

power supply is defaulted to a line

voltage of 230 V AC. To change this

setting, open the protective cap, set the

switch to the existing line voltage, and

then close the protective cap.

The line voltage is now

set.

3. Use the connection comb provided to

connect the CPU 312 to the power

supply. Alternatively, use the flexible

cable with a 1 mm2 cross-section. Strip

the ends to approx. 6 mm and press

wire end ferrules onto the ends. Now

connect terminals L1 and N on the

power supply unit to those on the CPU.

The CPU is connected

to the power supply unit.

9















/

/

0/

9&'

①= PS 307 power supply unit

② = CPU 312

③ = MPI interface for connection to PC/PG

④ = 24 V power supply connection

⑤ = Connection cable between PS 307 and

CPU 312

⑥ Black flat ribbon cable, 24 V (AUX power)

⑦ Cable strain relief, 230 V / 120 V

4. Connect the black AS-i auxiliary cable

to the PS 307 power supply unit:

- Brown to terminal L+

- Blue to terminal M

The AS-i auxiliary cable

is connected to the

power supply unit.

Getting Started

3.7 Connecting the CP343-2P master to the AS-i bus

AS-Interface system

44 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

3.7 Connecting the CP343-2P master to the AS-i bus

Steps Result

1. Open the cover on the front of the

CP 343-2 P and push the front

connector onto the module so that

the cables can be connected.

—













① = AS-i+ (brown)

② = AS-i- (blue)

2. Connect the yellow AS-i shaped

cable to the CP:

– Brown to terminal 17 (AS-i +)

– Blue to terminal 18 (AS-i -)

The CP 343-2 P is connected to the

AS-i network.

Getting Started

3.8 Connecting the AS-i power supply unit to the AS-i bus/power supply

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 45

3.8 Connecting the AS-i power supply unit to the AS-i bus/power supply

Steps Result

1. Supply the input side of the power

supply unit ① with 230 V / 120 V:

- Phase L1 to terminal L1

- Neutral conductor to terminal N

- Protective conductor to terminal PE

The power supply unit is supplied

with 230 V.

2. Check whether the switch for selecting

the line voltage (see cut-out section on

the top of the housing) is set in

accordance with the line voltage in your

plant.

The line voltage is now set.





① Input side 230 V / 120 V

② Output side AS-i bus

3. On the output side of the power supply

unit ②, connect the yellow As-i shaped

cable:

– Brown to terminal 11 (AS-i +)

– Blue to terminal 12 (AS-i -)

In industrial operation, terminal 13 (GND)

must be connected to the system ground.

The power supply unit is connected

to the AS-i bus.

Getting Started

3.9 Connecting the K45 modules to the AS-i bus

AS-Interface system

46 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

3.9 Connecting the K45 modules to the AS-i bus

This example shows you how to mount the K45 modules on a DIN rail.

Rapid contacting thanks to piercing technology

Steps Result

$6L

$8;

3RZHU





1. The mounting plate for the module carries the

shaped flat cable. Hook the mounting plate

onto the DIN rail. Insert the yellow ① and

black ② shaped cables.

The mounting plate locks

onto the DIN rail. The

cables are secured.

2. Hook the module ① onto the holding studs on

the mounting plate.

3. Push the module ② onto the mounting plate.

4. Secure the upper part onto the mounting plate

using the screw ③. The contact rods of the

module penetrate the insulation of the shaped

cable and establish contact with the copper

conductors.

The K45 module is

connected to the bus.







5. Carry out steps 1 to 4 for both K45 modules.

Getting Started

3.10 Connecting the proximity switch and contactor to K45 modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 47

3.10 Connecting the proximity switch and contactor to K45 modules

1. Connecting the proximity switch to the K45 input module

Steps

1. Connect the proximity switch to the M12-M12 connection

cable.

2. Plug the M12 connector of the connection cable into the

IN 1 socket on the K45 input module.

2. Connecting the contactor to the K45 output module

Steps

1. Strip the open end of the connection cable (with M12

cable connector).

2. Connect the wires to terminals A1 and A2 on the

contactor:

– A1 = PIN 4 = black wire (switched output)

– A2 = PIN 3 = blue wire (ground)

3. Plug the M12 connector into the OUT 1 socket on the

K45 output module.

Getting Started

3.11 Configuring and programming the AS-i system

AS-Interface system

48 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

3.11 Configuring and programming the AS-i system

Prerequisites for this example

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

● To properly understand the following information, you need a general knowledge of

automation technology and the basic STEP 7 software.

● All the hardware has been set up and connected.

● STEP 7 is installed and fully functioning on your PC/PG.

● The PC/PG is connected to the CPU 312 via the MPI interface.

1. Creating a new project in STEP 7

Steps Result

1. Choose File > New... and name the project "Getting Started", for example. The "Getting Started" project is created.

2. Choose Insert > Station > SIMATIC 300 Station... The SIMATIC 300 station appears in

SIMATIC Manager.

2. Carrying out basic configuration with HW Config

Steps Result

1. Open HW Config by right-clicking the SIMATIC 300 station and then open the object by

right-clicking the mouse. HW Config opens.

2. Drag and drop the following components from the Hardware Catalog area (normally on the

right of the screen) to the HW Config window. These components are stored in the following

directory structures (you can double-check your selection using the order numbers

displayed):

• DIN rail: \SIMATIC 300\RACK-300 (6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0)

• Power supply: \SIMATIC 300\PS-300\PS 307 2A (6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0)

• CPU 312: \SIMATIC 300\CPU-300\CPU 312 (6ES7312-1AE13-0AB0)

• CP 343-2 P: \SIMATIC 300\CP-300\AS-Interface\CP 343-2 P AS-i

(6GK7 343-2AH10-0XA0)

The hardware is

configured.

Getting Started

3.11 Configuring and programming the AS-i system

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 49

3. Saving, compiling, and loading the hardware configuration

Steps Result

1. Choose Station > Save and Compile. The "Getting Started" project is compiled.

2. With the CPU in STOP mode, transfer the configuration by choosing

Target System > Download to Module The "Select Target Module" dialog box is

displayed.

3. Choose the CPU 312. The data is transferred from the PC/PG to

the CPU 312. This completes the basic

configuration for "Getting Started". The

Simatic system has been informed of the

access path to the CP 343-2 P, which

means that the "Download to PG" action

described below can now be carried out.

4. Defining the I/O addresses for the slaves (I/O modules) and loading the AS-i configuration

The CP 343-2 P occupies 16 input bytes and 16 output bytes in the I/O address space of the

S7-300 system. The CP assigns 4-bit inputs and 4-bit outputs to each slave on the AS-i

cable. The S7-300 has write (slave output data) and read (slave input data) access to these

four bits. The first four input bits are reserved.

The following is defined as the start address n: n = 0.

This is used to define the I/O bits:

The sensor is wired to slave 1, IN1, and occupies E 0.0

The contactor is wired to slave 2, OUT1, and occupies A 1.4

I/O byte number Bit 7-4 Bit 3-0

Slave 1 n+0 reserved

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Slave 2 Slave 3 n+1

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Slave 30 Slave 31 n+15

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Getting Started

3.11 Configuring and programming the AS-i system

AS-Interface system

50 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Steps Result

1. In HW Config, double-click the CP 343-2 P to open it. The Properties window is displayed.

2. Choose the Addresses

tab. Set the start address for the inputs and outputs to "0". The CP 343-2 P occupies the set input and

output bytes on the S7-300 system.

3. Choose the AS-i Slave Options

tab. Choose "Upload to PG". The current AS-i configuration is

downloaded to the project file.

4. The Slave Configuration tab shows the AS-i modules (incl. the input and

output addresses) that have been read.

5. Choose Station > Save and Compile. The revised "Getting Started" project is

compiled.

6. With the CPU in STOP mode, transfer the configuration by choosing

Target System > Download to Module The data is downloaded to the CPU 312.

This completes the AS-i configuration for

"Getting Started".

Getting Started

3.12 Testing the circuit

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 51

5. Programming and testing the circuit

Steps Result

1. Double-click the following icons:

– CPU 312 > S7 program > Modules > OB1

The "Properties" dialog box for OB1 is

displayed.

2. In this dialog box, choose the programming language "FUP" and confirm

with OK. The program editor is displayed.

3. Use F2 to insert an "and" box and F7 to insert an "assignment" box.

Assign address E 0.0 to the first input. Delete the second connector.

Assign address A 1.4 to the "assignment" box.

The signal status of the proximity switch is

forwarded to the contactor.

4. To close the editor, choose File > Exit and then "Yes" to confirm that you

want to close the editor. Module OB1 is saved and the editor is

closed.

5. Select station "SIMATIC 300(1)".

6. In the PLC menu, choose Download to transfer the program and

hardware configuration to the CPU. Choose the CPU 312. Confirm all the

subsequent prompts with Yes

The program and configuration are

downloaded from the PC/PG to the

CPU 312.

3.12 Testing the circuit

Testing the circuit

Steps Result

1. Set the operating switch on the CPU 312 to RUN. The STOP LED extinguishes. The RUN

LED switches from flashing to a continuous

light.

2. Activate the proximity switch by moving a metal object (e.g. screwdriver)

toward the head of the proximity switch. The status LED IN1 on the input module

illuminates. The output can be activated via

the S7 program. The status LED OUT1 on

the output module illuminates. The

contactor switches.

3.13 Result

The inputs and outputs on the AS-Interface slaves are interconnected via the STEP 7

program in the same way as for Simatic I/O modules.

Getting Started

3.13 Result

AS-Interface system

52 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 53

Operating principle 4

4.1 ISO/OSI reference model

AS-Interface in the ISO/OSI reference model

Like all communications systems, AS-Interface can be integrated in the ISO/OSI reference

model. The functionality is implemented at layers 1, 2, and 7.

ISO/OSI layer Function Implementation in AS-Interface

Level 7:

Application layer

Makes network services available to

users.

Messages, cycle, profiles, automatic

address assignment

Level 6:

Presentation layer

Converting network data formats to

applications data formats

Level 5:

Session layer

Logging connections on/off

Level 4:

Transport layer

Transparent data formatting for

routers

Level 3:

Network layer

Address formatting, addressing

Level 2:

Data link layer

Data structure, framework,

validation, troubleshooting

Data telegram, start/stop bit, validation,

troubleshooting

Level 1:

Physical layer

Mechanical and electrical connection

for transferring data

Cable, power supply unit, data

decoupling, APM, power supply

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

54 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

4.2 Physical layer

4.2.1 Elements in the physical layer

This chapter provides information on the following:

● The AS-Interface cable and network

● The AS-Interface power supply and data decoupling

● Modulation procedure

4.2.2 The AS-Interface cable

Properties of the AS-Interface cable

● The AS-Interface cable connects all the network nodes.

● The cable has two wires (ASI + and ASI -) and is unshielded.

● The trapezoidal profile with the profiled lug ensures a high degree of protection against

polarity reversal (mechanical code).

● The shaped cable transfers data and power.

● The AS-Interface shaped cable offers a high degree of flexibility when you structure

network topologies, which means they can be optimized in line with physical conditions.

/LQH 6WDU 7UHH

0DVWHU 0DVWHU 0DVWHU

Line, star, tree as well as any other combination of topology configurations are possible.

The nodes can be connected at any point in the network.

Up to 62 slaves, one master, and up to four additional passive nodes (without their own AS-i

address) can be connected to a network.

No shielding is required. The cable must not be twisted. A line terminator is not required.

The total length of the cable is restricted to 100 m. A range of components (e.g. repeater,

extension plug) are available for extending the maximum length of the cable.

The nodes receive their power supply via the same cable with a rated voltage of 24 V DC

and a total current of up to 8 A.

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 55

Electrical specifications for the AS-Interface cable

In principle, any two-wire cable that complies with the following electrical specifications can

be used as an AS-Interface cable.

$6L /v

5v

&v *v

/v 5v

5v

6L /v

5v

5v /v 5v

5v

$6L

$6L

Specification:

● R' < 90 mΩ/m

● L' 400 to 1300 nH/m

● C' < 80 pF/m

● G' < 5 µS/m

⇨ Surge impedance |Z| in the range of 70 to 140 Ω

⇨ Group delay time t' < 8.3 ns/m

Note

An unshielded standard round cable (H05VV-F 2 x 1.5 mm2) in accordance with the AS-i

specifications can also be used for special applications.

Note

Using cables that do not comply with AS-i specifications

If a cable that does not comply with the specifications above (shielded cable in particular) is

used as an AS-i cable, a correction factor of 1.3. must be taken into account when the length

of this cable is calculated.

From an electrical point of view, therefore, approx. 75 m of a non-compliant cable

corresponds 100 m of an AS-i-compliant cable.

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

56 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

4.2.3 The AS-Interface power supply

Functions of the AS-Interface power supply unit

Because both data and energy are transferred via the same cable for AS-Interface, the

power supply is part of the physical layer.

For this reason, AS-Interface power supply units have a special design.

6\PPHWUL]DWLRQ

3ULPDU\

YROWDJH

'DWDGHFRXSOLQJ

9'&

SRZHU

SDFN

*URXQG

$6L

$6L

3(

3(/9

Figure 4-1 AS-Interface power supply unit

Each AS-Interface power supply unit performs four functions.

● Supplies the network with a rated voltage of 30 V DC

To ensure that 24 V DC can also be ensured at the end of the AS-Interface network, the

power supply unit has been specified with a rated voltage of 30 V.

This design permits a voltage drop of approx. 3 V via the AS-Interface cable and another

3 V in all the slaves where the data and power path must be separated again.

In principle, the current supplied to the AS-Interface network can be set as required. In

practice, approx. 8 A is a sensible setting due to the standard conductor cross-sections of

the AS-Interface cables.

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 57

● Protective separation

AS-Interface is designed as a system for low voltages with protection separation (PELV:

"Protective Extra Low Voltage" to IEC 60364-4-41). For this reason, a power supply unit

that takes its primary voltage from 115 V AC or 230 V AC requires protective separation

between the primary and secondary voltage in accordance with the applicable IEC

standards.

The PELV protective measure means that there is no need for a PE conductor. Other

special shock-hazard measures are not required either.

● Balancing the network

AS-Interface is operated as a symmetrical, ungrounded system. To ensure optimum

interference immunity against symmetrical coupled-in noise, the AS-Interface cable must

be designed to be as symmetrical as possible. A balancing circuit can be used for this

purpose. The "ground" connection must be grounded at a suitable point in the machine or

plant. With AS-Interface, only this point can be connected to ground (GND) directly.

Proper balancing means that the cable does not need to be shielded or twisted.

● Data decoupling

The data decoupling network is normally integrated in the AS-Interface power supply unit.

It has two inductors of 50 µH each and two 39 Ω resistors connected in parallel. This

network ensures that data transfer is not short-circuited by the power supply. At the same

time, it converts the current pulses generated by the AS-Interface transmitters to voltage

pulses that can be detected by the AS-Interface receivers.

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

58 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

4.2.4 The AS-Interface modulation procedure

How alternating pulse modulation (APM) works

7UDQVPLWWHU

5HFHLYHU

'DWD

GHFRXSOLQJ

$6,QWHUIDFHQHWZRUN

3RZHU

VXSSO\XQLW

To transfer data, AS-Interface uses alternating pulse modulation (APM) with virtually

sine2-shaped current/voltage pulses, which means that the following prerequisites are

fulfilled:

● The message signal is superimposed on the power supply for the actuators and sensors

and must be free of DC current.

● The transmitter must be able to generate the signal as efficiently as possible.

● Since the AS-Interface cable has a steeply-rising damping characteristic over the

frequency, the message signal must have a narrow band.

APM transfers the data serially in the baseband and is free of DC current.

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 59

The individual steps involved in alternating pulse modulation (APM)



1. Send bit sequence



2. With this coding type, the information regarding the level

switch is in the center of the bit. With a logical zero, the

signal in the center of the bit switches from "high" to "low"

(and vice versa with a logical one).

The send bit sequence is recoded as a bit sequence that

carries out a phase change whenever the send signal

changes (Manchester coding).



3. This bit sequence is converted to a send current.



4. The send current is converted by the inductor in the AS-i

power supply unit to a voltage, which can be detected by the

receiver:

When the send current increases, this results in a negative

voltage pulse (and vice versa).



5. The receiver detects these voltage signals on the cable

and converts them to the send bit sequence; it interprets the

first negative pulse as the start bit of a message.



6. Bit sequence received

The special shaping of the send current pulses means that the radiation of high-frequency

electromagnetic waves is reduced to the extent that cables that the non-shielded AS-i cable

complies with the prescribed limit values.

Alternating pulse modulation and the required topology criteria enable bit times of 6 µs and,

in turn, a gross transmission rate of 167 kbit/s to be achieved.

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

60 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Permissible limit values for alternating pulse modulation

9ROWDJH>0@

7LPH>wV@











 

Response from slave near power supply unit

9ROWDJH>0@

7LPH>wV@

Response from slave far from power supply

unit

The AS-Interface data transfer amplitude can fluctuate within relatively wide limits. The

differences result from the tree-like branched network and the cable, which is terminated at

just one end by the power supply unit.

Thanks to this stable operating principle, AS-Interface permits a high degree of flexibility with

regard to the topology.

Limit values within a telegram

Permissible amplitude fluctuations:

35% of Umax



 















Permissible overshooting:

max. 30% of amplitude Umax

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 61

Limit values for the pulse edges



 















Permissible fluctuations of the pulse edges

with respect to time:

(n x 3 µs) + 1/-0.5 µs

(measured from the first negative edge)

Note

Radiated emissions:

Due to the narrow spectral bandwidth of sine2 pulse modulation used for AS-i and the

symmetrical design, radiated emissions from the AS-i system are minimal. Other devices are

not affected.

Noise immunity:

The symmetrical design and the coding method used (Manchester coding, APM (alternating

pulse modulation)) ensure that AS-i is highly immune to noise. In noisy industrial

environments, transmission errors are impossible to avoid. These are detected by the coding

procedure, however, and rejected as invalid. This means that the data made available to

users is always reliable.

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

62 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

4.2.5 Structure of the AS-Interface system

System components

An AS-i system essentially comprises three components:

● A master

● An AS-i power supply unit

● Nodes (slaves with integrated AS-i connection / AS-i modules)

3RZHU6XSSO\

6ODYH6ODYH

6ODYH

$6L0DVWHU

636

Figure 4-2 Structure of the AS-i system

The AS-i master

The AS-i master controls data exchange with the connected nodes by means of cyclic

polling.

During a cycle, four data bits are exchanged with each slave in both the input and output

direction.

AS-i power supply unit

Thanks to integrated data decoupling, the AS-i power supply unit allows data and energy to

be transferred simultaneously via a two-wire cable.

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 63

4.2.6 Alternative structures

Direct or distributed structure

AS-Interface can be integrated as required in the existing structure with communications

processors and routers.

AS-Interface connected directly to the controller

As a communications processor (CP), the master is an integral part of the controller

(e.g. ET 200, SIMATIC S7-200 and SIMATIC S7-300).

3RZHU6XSSO\6ODYH6ODYH

6ODYH 6ODYH

$6L0DVWHU

6ODYH

636

Figure 4-3 Direct connection to the controller

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

64 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

AS-Interface as a subsystem

If AS-Interface is configured as a subsystem on a higher-level bus system, routers (links)

(e.g. IE/AS-i LINK PN IO, DP/AS-i LINK Advanced or DP/AS-Interface Link 20E) are used as

the AS-Interface master.

This configuration allows functional units to be set up and commissioned before the central

controller is fully programmed.

PROCESS FIELD BUS

3RZHU6XSS\

3RZHU6XSS\3RZHU6XSS\

$GYDQFHG

636 636

'3$6L/,1.

,($6L/,1.31,2

6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYH

HYDO6HYDO6

6ODYH 6ODYH

6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYH6ODYH

Figure 4-4 AS-Interface as a subsystem

4.2.7 Cable lengths and extending an AS-i network

Figure 4-5 Network extension - so far max. 100 m per segment

An AS-i line can be up to 100 m long without additional components. Repeaters can be

used, however, to increase the length of the line. Two repeaters can be connected in series,

which can extend the network to 300 m (line structure). A separate AS-i power supply must

be provided in each new segment.

Operating principle

4.2 Physical layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 65

Figure 4-6 Network extension - now with AS-i extension plug, max. 200 m per segment

An extension plug can be used to double the length of an AS-i line to 200 m. Since repeaters

cannot be connected in series when they are used in conjunction with AS-i extension plugs,

this results in a maximum distance of 400 m between the master and slave and a maximum

cable extension of 600 m (master in the center of the network). Repeaters can be connected

in parallel in a star configuration each with up to 200 m long segments.

Figure 4-7 Network extension - now with AS-i extension plug, max. 200 m per segment, only one repeater connected in

series

The network can be extended even further if additional network components are used. An

extender can increase the length of the AS-Interface cable by 100 m. When this is used,

however, the first subline must not contain any slaves.

Operating principle

4.3 Data link layer

AS-Interface system

66 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

4.3 Data link layer

4.3.1 The elements of the data link layer

This chapter provides information on the following:

● The AS-Interface bus access procedure

● The AS-Interface message

● Data backup

4.3.2 The AS-Interface bus access procedure

Master/slave procedure with cyclic polling

67 , ,

,

,

,

3% (% 67 , ,

,

,

,

3% (% 67 , ,

,

,

,

3% (%

67 , ,

,

,

,

3% (%

&% $

$ $$ $ , 67 , ,

,

,

,

3% (%

&% $

$ $$ $ , 67 , ,

,

,

,

3% (%

&% $

$ $$ $ ,

5HVSRQVH

6ODYH$

5HVSRQVH

6ODYH$ 5HVSRQVH

6ODYH$

&DOORIDOOVODYHV

0DVWHUFDOO 0DVWHUFDOO 0DVWHUFDOO

5HVSRQVHRIDOOVODYHV

6ODYH$ 6ODYH$ 6ODYH$

$6,QWHUIDFH

0DVWHU

In the master/slave procedure with cyclic polling, the master polls all the connected slaves

one after the other at defined intervals and reads the responses.

Operating principle

4.3 Data link layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 67

Cycle time for AS-Interface

The bit time for AS-i is 6 µs. A transaction (master call and slave response normally take

156 µs). With 31 slaves and one management call per cycle, the cycle time is 5 ms.

The cycle time comprises different intervals:

● Times with exact duration

– Master call: 14 bit times exactly

– Slave response: 7 bit times exactly

● Waiting and synchronization times with non-fixed duration

– Master interval: at least 2 bit times, max. 10 bit times

– Slave interval:

under normal circumstances, synchronized: 1.5 to 2 bit times

during startup, non-synchronized: 4 bit times

4.3.3 The AS-Interface message

Structure

,

,

,

,

$

$

$

$

ELWDGGUHVV

ELWLQIRUPDWLRQ

$

,





,

,

,

,



ELWLQIRUPDWLRQ

0DVWHUFDOO ELWWLPHV 6ODYHUHVSRQVH ELWWLPHV

An AS-Interface message comprises the following elements:

● Master call: each master call comprises exactly 14 bit times

● Master interval: at least 2 bit times, max. 10 bit times

● Slave response: each slave response comprises exactly 7 bit times

● Slave interval:

– under normal circumstances with synchronized slave: 1.5 to 2 bit times

– During startup with non-synchronized slave: 4 bit times

Operating principle

4.3 Data link layer

AS-Interface system

68 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Structure of master call to standard slave

67 , ,

,

,

,

3% (%

&% $

$ $$ $ ,

67 Start bit Marks the beginning of the master call. The following always applies: ST = 0

&% Control bit Indicates the type of call in the information bits

0 = data/parameter/addressing call

1 = command call

$



$

Address These 5 address bits contain the address of the slave that is being called

,



,

Information Depending on the call type, these 5 information bits contain the information sent to the slave.

3%

Parity bit This means that the sum of all "1s" in the master call must be even

(the end bit is not counted here).

(%

End bit Marks the end of the master call. The following always applies: EB = 1

Structure of the standard slave response

67 , ,

,

,

,

3% (%

67 Start bit Marks the beginning of the slave response. The following always applies: ST = 0

,



,

Information These 4 bits contain the information sent to the master.

3%

Parity bit This means that the sum of all "1s" in the slave response must be even

(the end bit is not counted here).

(%

End bit Marks the end of the slave response. The following always applies: EB = 1

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 69

4.4 Application layer

4.4.1 AS-Interface module parameters

When the system is started up, the master sends parameters to each slave in order to define

its physical properties. The parameters are stored temporarily in the slave. The slave sends

a parameter echo, which means that is ready to exchange data with the master.

Parameter bits

Parameter bits are usually called "parameters" for short. These parameters can be used to

set the properties of the slaves (e.g. the signal range for A/B slaves, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA). A

parameter set comprising 4 parameter bits (default value: 1111bin) is defined for each slave

in the master. The properties of most digital slaves are predefined and cannot be changed.

The default value is usually sent for these slaves. With A/B slaves, only 3 bits are available

because the highest bit is used for determining the address.

To find out which parameter bits can be used to set which slave properties, see the

operating instructions issued by the slave manufacturer.

In the SIMATIC system, you can set the slave properties in plain text via HW Config for all

the current masters. The parameter bits are then set accordingly by the system. This means

that you do not have to refer to the parameter lists in the operating instructions.

Configured parameters / permanent parameters

The parameter sets defined in the master are stored in a permanent memory in the master,

that is, the parameter bits are not lost when the master is switched off.

Current parameters / parameter image

When the master is switched on or once Profibus/Profinet communication has begun (e.g.

insert/remove plug or download the HW Config data to the station), the parameter bits are

copied from the permanent memory to a volatile memory in the master. These are then

transferred to the individual slaves.

When the master is switched on, each slave automatically receives the current parameter

bits from the master. These are then stored in a volatile memory, that is, these values are

lost in the event of a power failure.

Parameter bits cannot be read from the slave. In the parameter image, the master stores the

values that were last written to the slaves.

Note

If parameters are sent to the slave by means of the addressing unit, the slave "forgets" these

parameters as soon as it is disconnected from the addressing unit. The parameters active in

the slave are always defined by the connected AS-i master.

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

70 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Parameter echo

If the master sends parameter bits to the slave, the slave responds with a parameter echo.

The parameter echo is a block of 4 bits in each slave, but it cannot be read directly. In

principle, it is completely independent of the parameter bit values that are sent. The master

saves the parameter echo to a volatile memory. Once the parameter echo has been sent,

the slave begins exchanging data cyclically. If a slave fails, the master sets the parameter

echo, which is stored internally, to the default value 1111 bin.

Parameter string

Only special AS-i slaves (with the slave profile 7.2 or 7.4) contain the parameter string.

No AS-i slaves from Siemens currently use this parameter string.

The parameter string is stored in the slave permanently (non-volatile) and can be written or

read. It comprises several parameter bytes with a length of up to 220 bytes. For more

information about the parameter string, see the operating instructions issued by the slave

manufacturer.

Data cannot be exchanged cyclically when the parameter string is being transferred from the

master to the slave (or vice versa). For this reason, the system must be switched to

parameter string exchange mode. The parameter bits and parameter echoes which, as a

result, are not actually available to users, are required for this purpose.

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 71

4.4.2 Setting parameters via the ASI_3422 command interface

ASI_3422 command interface

This function block can be used to transfer changes from the PLC to the permanent memory

in the master and read them back to the PLC.

The FC can be adapted for non-SIMATIC systems (see the instructions in the link description

provided by the manufacturer).

You can download the FC function block "ASI_3422" from the following address:

www.siemens.de/automation/service&support

Commands available in the ASI_3422 command interface

Call

00hex • Writes the parameters for an individual slave to the permanent memory.

• This does not affect the parameter image.

• No data is forwarded to the slave.

01hex • Reads the parameters for an individual slave from the permanent memory.

• Independent of the content of the parameter image and status of the slave.

39hex • Reads the complete configuration of the AS-i bus, including all the current parameters from the

parameter images of all the slaves.

19hex • Same as call 39hex, but for older masters (without A/B slaves, spec. 2.0)

3Ahex • Writes the complete configuration of the AS-i bus to the master, that is, parameters are overwritten in the

permanent memory and copied automatically to the parameter image, which is then forwarded

automatically to the slaves.

• This call performs a full reset on the AS-i bus, that is, all the slaves are momentarily "switched off" and

then restart cyclic data exchange.

1Ahex • Same as call 3Ahex, but for older masters (without A/B slaves, spec. 2.0)

Note

With more recent masters, this call is executed in both configuration mode and protected

mode.

With older masters, this call is only executed in configuration mode, that is, the master may

have to be switched from protected mode to configuration mode (e.g. via call 0Chex - set

operating mode).

3Chex • Writes the current parameters for all slaves to the parameter image.

• This does not affect the permanent memory.

• The master only transfers the parameters whose values have changed vis-à-vis the previous parameter

image to the slaves (i.e. slaves whose parameters have not changed do not send a parameter echo to

the master).

1Chex • Same as call 3Chex, but for older masters (without A/B slaves, spec. 2.0)

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

72 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

03hex • Writes the current parameters for an individual slave to the parameter image.

• This does not affect the permanent memory.

• The master transfers the parameters to the slaves regardless of whether the parameter value has been

changed and forwards the parameter echo received from the slave directly in the command response to

the user.

04hex • Copies the parameter image to the permanent memory.

4.4.3 Setting parameters via the display/WBM

DP/AS-i Link Advanced and IE/AS-i Link PN IO offer a range of functions via WBM that can

be used via an Internet browser.

A Java script is required for this purpose, which is stored in the links and loaded by the

browser.

Prerequisites

An IP address with a suitable subnet screen form must be set in the link (DP/AS-i Link

Advanced or IE/AS-i Link PN IO).

To access the link via WBM, you need a PC with an Internet browser. We recommend

Microsoft Internet Explorer (as of version 6.0).

Java must be active in the browser so that the script can be executed.

The PC must be connected to the LAN connection of the link by means of a standard or

crossed Ethernet cable (autocrossing).

Note

In this configuration, the PC is not connected to the LAN (company network).

To enable both the LAN and link to be used at the same time, a second network card or a

USB Ethernet adapter are recommended.

If you require direct integration in the LAN, contact your network administrator.

Note

The browser must be set in such a way that whenever it accesses a page, it always

downloads the latest version from the server. In Internet Explorer, you can set this by

choosing Tools > Internet Options... > General and then "Settings..." under "Temporary

Internet files".

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 73

Note

Firewall

When a firewall is used, you must ensure that the following ports can be accessed:

• TFTP port 69

• http port 80/TCP

• SNMP port 161/UDP

• SNTP port 25

• Trap port 162/UDP

Setting the IP address/subnet screen form on the link

1. Deactivate DHCP:

In the link display, choose the sub-menu IND. ETHERNET > DHCP.

Deselect the checkbox.

2. Set the IP address

Choose the sub-menu ETHERNET > IP Address.

Enter the IP address using the cursor keys, e.g.:

192.168.000.001

1. Set the subnet address

Choose the sub-menu ETHERNET > Subnet Mask.

Enter the subnet address using the cursor keys, e.g.:

255.255.255.000

1. Set the gateway address

Choose the sub-menu ETHERNET > Gateway.

Enter the gateway address using the cursor keys e.g.:

000.000.000.000

These settings must be compared with the network settings on the PC.

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

74 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Network settings on the PC

1. On your PC, choose Start > Settings > Control Panel > Network Connections.

Choose a connection and display its properties

on the General tab. This connection uses the following element "Internet Protocol

(TCP/IP)". Display its properties.

2. Select "Use Following IP Address" and enter the IP address and subnet mask e.g.:

IP Address 192.168.000.010

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.000

Starting the WBM

To start the WBM, enter the following data in your browser:

http://<IP address of the link>

For example:

http://192.168.000.001

The WBM starts with the system configuration menu. You now have read access to the

menus.

You have to log in if you want to make any changes.

Note

The screenshots are from Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6.0. If you are using a different

browser (e.g. Netscape, Mozilla etc.), the menus may differ.

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 75

In this screen, make the following settings:

● Name

● Password

The factory default settings are as follows:

Name admin

Password admin

Confirm your entries by choosing "Login".

NOTICE

You must change your password for security reasons. When the factory settings are

restored, the password is also reset.

Note

You cannot make any changes without logging in.

If you do not carry out any actions for more than five minutes (this default setting can be

changed), the system logs you off automatically.

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

76 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

"AS-i Slaves Total Configuration" tab

The menu is divided into two areas and covers all the slaves detected on this line:

● Detected:

All the slaves detected on this line are listed here, including their configuration (display

fields).

● Configured:

You can set the configuration data for the slaves here.

① = Parameter image

② = Permanent parameters

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 77

"AS-i Slave Diagnostics" tab

This menu contains all the relevant data for the selected slave.

Operating principle

4.4 Application layer

AS-Interface system

78 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

"AS-i Slave current parameters" tab

In this menu, you can set the parameter bits. The parameter echo is returned.

Note that these changes are only valid until the DP master is started. The system is then

restarted with the configured parameter values.

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 79

System extensions 5

5.1 Technical development of the AS-Interface

 6ODYHV

 PV %XV]\NOXV

ವ

 6ODYHVPV

$QDORJSURILOH

,PSURYHGGLDJQRVWLFV

ವ

6DIHW\0RQLWRU

6DIHLQSXWVODYHV

ವ

','2LQ$%WHFKQRORJ\

','2LQ$%LQWHFKQRORJ\

$GGLWLRQDODQDORJSURILOHV

7UDQVIHURIVHULDO

GDWD

ವ

6SHHGIOH[LELOLW\



$6L6SHF9



$6L6SHF9



   

$6,VDIH

$6L6SHF9

16$BD

Figure 5-1 AS-i technical development: Levels of the AS-Interface Complete Specification

System extensions

5.2 System limits of the AS-Interface specification

AS-Interface system

80 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

5.2 System limits of the AS-Interface specification

AS-Interface

specification

Max. no. of slaves No. of digital

inputs

No. of digital

outputs

digital analog ASIsafe

Version 2.0 31 31 31 31 × 4 = 124 31 × 4 = 124

Version 2.1 62 31 31 62 × 4 = 248 62 × 3 = 186

Version 3.0 62 62 31 62 × 8 = 496 62 × 8 = 496

5.3 Extensions of the AS-Interface specification 2.1

● AS-Interface specification 2.1 enables the number of network nodes to be double from

31 to 62. The "advanced addressing" function can be used to split the 31 addresses

supported in an AS-Interface network.

● If this function is used for all 31 slaves, this means that max. 62 nodes can be

implemented in an AS-Interface network. The A/B slaves can be equipped with a

maximum of four inputs and three outputs. Advanced addressing can be used for digital

slaves but not for analog slaves or safety-oriented slaves (ASIsafe).

● AS-Interface specification V2.1 also features an integrated analog value transfer function.

Integrated here means that the AS-i master is responsible for compiling the analog values

over several AS-i cycles. This relieves the workload on the user program. Depending on

the master, the values can now be transferred to the PLC by means of a transfer call or

transferred to the process image. Analog values can be accessed here just as easily as

digital values. The integrated analog value transfer function can be used with analog

slaves that support profiles 7.3 and 7.4.

5.4 Extensions of the AS-Interface specification 3.0

● AS-Interface specification 3.0 enables a maximum of 1000 digital inputs/outputs to be

connected (profile S-7.A.A: 8DI/8DO as A/B slave).

● New profiles allow advanced addressing to be used for analog slaves too.

● "Fast analog profiles" accelerate the speed at which analog values are transferred.

● Flexible use of analog modules: resolution (12/14 bits) and single/double channel can be

set as required.

● Asynchronous serial protocol 100 baud or 50 baud bidirectional.

System extensions

5.5 AS-Interface master: depending on the AS-Interface specification version

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 81

5.5 AS-Interface master: depending on the AS-Interface specification

version

To operate A/B slaves in an AS-Interface network, master modules that comply with

specification 2.1 at least must also be used.

A/B technology is supported by SIMATIC S7 masters and the DP/AS-Interface links from

Siemens. Only standard and A slaves (= A/B slave with an A address) can be operated on

masters that do not support specification 2.1.

The default sub-address of A/B slaves is "A".

The new masters to specification 3.0 support all the new slave profiles and are also

downward compatible.

AS-Interface specification Available masters

Version 2.1 S7-200 (CP 243-2), S7-300 (CP 343-2, 343-2P),

DP/AS-i Link 20E

Version 3.0 DP/AS Link Advanced or IE/AS-i Link PN IO

For the AS-Interface specification applicable to the relevant slave, see "Selection and

ordering data".

For the exact slave profile, see "Technical specifications".

5.6 Communication cycle: depending on the AS-Interface specification

version

AS-Interface specification Max. cycle time Slave profile

Version 2.0 5 ms S-X.0, S-X.1, S-X.F

Version 2.1 5 ms for 31 slaves

10 ms for 62 slaves

S-X.A, S-7.3, S-7.4, S-7.F

Version 3.0 As for version 2.1, and profile specific,

10 ms for inputs/outputs (e.g. 20 ms for

4DI/4DO and 40 ms for 8DI/8DO)

S-7.5.5; S-7.A.5, S-B.A.5; S-7.A.7,

S-7.A.8; S-7.A.9, S-7.A.A, S-6.0

Standard slaves are polled in each cycle (max. cycle time: 5 ms). If just one A or B slave is

installed at an address, this slave is also polled in each cycle (max. cycle time: 5 ms). If an

A/B slave pair is installed at an address, the A slave is polled in the first cycle and the

B slave is polled in the next cycle (max. cycle time: 10 ms). If only a standard and/or A slave

is installed in a network, the cycle time is the same as that for standard masters (max. cycle

time: 5 ms).

System extensions

5.6 Communication cycle: depending on the AS-Interface specification version

AS-Interface system

82 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

The AS-Interface specification for the relevant slave is specified in "Technical specifications"

along with the exact slave profile.

Any combination of slave types can be used in the same AS-Interface network.

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 83

Master 6

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

6.1.1 Overview

AS-Interface master operating modes

Each AS-i master has two operating modes:

● Configuration mode

● Protected mode

Configuration mode

Configuration mode is used for commissioning an AS-i installation:

● The AS-i master can exchange data with any AS-i slave connected to the AS-i cable

(except for the AS-i slave with address "0").

● New AS-i slaves on the bus are immediately detected, activated, and included in cyclic

data exchange.

● The AS-i master cannot issue any error messages to the PLC via the slaves.

If the AS-i master is operated in configuration mode when a plant is in production mode, all

the I/O data can be freely exchanged with the PLC, although any fault messages are

suppressed.

Protected mode

In protected mode, the AS-i master only exchanges data with the configured AS-i slaves.

If any discrepancies between the target and actual configuration are identified, the AS-i

master can output a fault message to the PLC automatically.

Potential discrepancies:

● The AS-i slave is configured but is either not available or defective.

● The AS-i slave is configured but the wrong AS-i slave type has been connected.

● The AS-i slave has not been configured but is available on the bus.

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

84 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

6.1.2 CP 243-2

6.1.2.1 Overview

Master connection for CPUs 22x for the state-of-the-art SIMATIC S7-200 generation

The CP 243-2 is the AS-Interface master for the state-of-the-art SIMATIC S7-200

generation. The communications processor (6GK1 243-2AX01-0AX0) supports the extended

AS-Interface specification V2.1 and offers the following functions:

● Supports up to 62 AS-Interface slaves and features an integrated analog value transfer

function (in accordance with the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1)

● Supports all the AS-Interface master functions in accordance with the extended

AS-Interface specification V2.1.

● Displays indicating the operating state and LEDs on the front plate indicating the

operational readiness of the connected slaves.

● Fault indications (including AS-Interface voltage errors, configuration errors) by means of

LEDs on the front plate.

● Compact housing in keeping with the design of the state-of-the-art SIMATIC S7-200

generation.

Benefits

● SIMATIC S7-200 offers greater flexibility and a wider range of applications thanks to the

increased number of

● Available digital and analog inputs/outputs

● Commissioning times reduced thanks to the simple configuration process at the touch of

a button.

● The LED displays help reduce downtime and service times in the event of a fault.

● CP status

– All the connected slaves and their operational readiness are displayed.

– The AS-Interface supply voltage is monitored.

Scope of application

The CP 243-2 is the AS-Interface master connection and is designed exclusively for the

CPUs 22x of the state-of-the-art SIMATIC S7-200 generation. The AS-Interface dramatically

increases the number of available digital inputs and outputs for S7-200 (max. 248 DI /

186 DO for each CP).

Integrated analog value processing also means that analog values (max. 31 analog slaves

for each CP, each with up to 4 channels) are also available on the AS-Interface for the

S7-200. Up to two 243-2 CPs can be operated on the S7-200 simultaneously.

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 85

Structure

The CP 243-2 is connected to the S7-200 in the same way as an expansion module. It is

equipped with:

● Two terminal connections for connecting the AS-Interface cable directly.

● LEDs on the front plate for indicating the operating state and operational readiness of all

the connected and activated slaves.

● Two pushbuttons for indicating the status information of the slaves, switching the

operating state, and adopting the existing actual configuration as a target configuration.

Function

The CP 243-2 supports all the functions defined in the extended AS-Interface specification

V2.1, which means that dual address assignments (A-B) allow up to 62 digital or 31 analog

slaves to be operated on the AS-Interface.

Thanks to integrated analog value processing, the analog values can be accessed just as

easily as digital values.

In the process image for the S7-200, the CP 243-2 is assigned one digital input byte (status

byte), one digital output byte (control byte), and eight analog input words and 8 analog

output words. As a result, the CP 243-2 occupies two slots. The status and control byte can

be used to set the operating mode of the CP 243-2 via the user program.

Depending on the operating mode, the CP 243-2 defines the I/O data for the AS-Interface

slave or diagnostic values, or enables master calls (e.g. re-addressing the slaves) in the

analog address space of the S7-200.

Configuration

All the connected AS-Interface slaves can be configured at the touch of a button. No further

configuration settings need to be made for the CP.

6.1.2.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

CP 243-2 communications processor

For connecting SIMATIC S7-200 (2nd generation) to

AS-Interface with a bus connector

6GK7 243-2AX01-0XA0

Manual for CP 243-2

Including AS-Interface basics and disk with sample

programs

• German

• English

• French

• Spanish

• Italian

6GK7243-2AX00-8AA0

6GK7243-2AX00-8BA0

6GK7243-2AX00-8CA0

6GK7243-2AX00-8DA0

6GK7243-2AX00-8EA0

(or can be downloaded from the Internet)

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

86 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

6.1.2.3 Connecting the CP 343-2

Slots on the S7-200

The CP 243-2 can be inserted in the S7-200 automation system (CPUs 22x) in any of the

slots for expansion modules.

Note restrictions

The restrictions imposed by the CPU or power supply used apply, however. These relate to

the following areas:

● Expandability with more than one expansion module (for more information about this, see

the "SIMATIC S7-200" system manual, order no. 6ES7298-8FA24-8AH0 or available as

an Internet download).

● Electrical configuration

The maximum current consumption from the S7 backplane bus must not be exceeded. To

determine this, use the calculation table in the "SIMATIC S7-200" system manual

(order no. 6ES7298-8FA24-8AH0, or available as an Internet download).

Connections to the AS-i cable

$6LFDEOH )XQFWLRQDOJURXQG

 

Figure 6-1 Connecting the AS-i cable

The following connections are located on the front of the CP 243-2 under the lower cover of

the front flap:

● Two connections to the AS-i cable (bridged internally)

● One connection for functional ground

The two connections for AS-i cables are bridged internally in the CP 243-2, which means

that the CP 243-2 can be "looped in" to the AS-i cable.

CAUTION

The load-carrying capacity of the AS-i connection contacts is max. 3 A. If this value is

exceeded on the AS-i cable, the CP 243-2 must not be "looped in" to the AS-i cable but

must instead be connected via a spur line (only one connection occupied on the CP 243-2).

The CP 243-2 must be connected to the protective conductor via the ground terminal.

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 87

Note

Functional ground (terminal )

The CP 243-2 has one connection for functional ground. This connection must be connected

to the protective conductor with as little resistance as possible.

6.1.2.4 Diagnostics



3XVKEXWWRQV

6(7

3XVKEXWWRQV

'LVSOD\

$6LFDEOHFRQQHFWLRQ

%VODYHGLVSOD\

6WDWXVGLVSOD\

*URXSGLVSOD\

6ODYHGLVSOD\















&3

$6,QWHUIDFH0DVWHU

6(7

'LVSOD\

&0&(53:5

$-3$3)6)%

Figure 6-2 CP 243-2 front plate

The following are located on the front plate of the CP 243-2:

● The indicator/display elements (group display, status display, slave and B slave display)

● Connection of the AS-i cable

● SET button

● DISPLAY pushbutton

● Unassigned terminal block

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

88 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Switching display statuses – DISPLAY pushbutton

You can switch between the status display (default setting) and the slave display using the

DISPLAY pushbutton. When you press the pushbutton repeatedly, the system switches to

the next display status and then finally back to the original status.

In the slave display, you can see the slaves on the AS-Interface. Five slaves are displayed

simultaneously. To switch to the next group of five slaves, press DISPLAY. The standard or

A slaves are displayed first followed by the B slaves (the "B" LED lights up).

The system switches back to the status display in the following cases:

● Once the final group has been displayed (slave 30B, 31B) and you press DISPLAY

● If you do not press DISPLAY for a long period (approx. 8 minutes)

Meaning of the LEDs

Two rows of LEDs are located on the front of the CP 243-2.

● The LEDs CM, AUP, CER, APF, PWR, and SF in the top row represent the status

display.

The "B" LED indicates the B slaves. When the slave display is active, this LED also lights

up when B slaves are displayed.

● The first five LEDs in the bottom row indicate the connected slaves (slave display).

The remaining three LEDs indicate the slave group.

The meaning of the LEDs depends on the status of the group displays.

If none of the LEDs in the group display is lit, this means that the status display is active

(i.e. the LEDs CM, AUP, CER, APF, PWR, and SF show the status of the CP 243–2).

If at least one of the LEDs in the group display is lit, the system switches to the slave display

(exception: the "PWR" LED is lit).

SET button

The SET button is required for configuring the CP 243-2.

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 89

Status display

When the status display is active, none of the group LEDs is lit.

The status display is the preselected standard display when the CP 243-2 is in its initial

state.

The LEDs have the following meaning:

LED

label

LED

color

Status Meaning

CM Yellow Configuration

mode

This indicates the operating mode of the CP 243-2.

• LED ON: configuration mode

• Display OFF: Protected mode

Configuration mode is only required commissioning the CP 243-2. In configuration

mode, the CP 243-2 activates all the connected AS-i slaves and exchanges data with

them. For more information about configuration mode, see the manual "CP 243-2

AS-Interface Master".

AUP Green Autoprog

available

When the CP 243 2 is in protected mode, this indicates that the address of an AS-i

slave can be programmed automatically. Automatic address programming makes it

easier to replace a defective AS-i slave on the AS-i cable. For more information

about this, see the manual "CP 243-2 AS-Interface Master".

CER Yellow Configuration

error

This LED indicates whether the slave configuration detected on the AS-i cable

matches the target configuration (LPS) in the CP 243-2. If any discrepancies are

detected, the CER LED lights up.

The CER LED lights up in the following cases:

• If a configured AS-i slave is not detected on the AS-i cable (e.g. the slave has

failed).

• If an AS-i slave that has not yet been configured is detected on the AS-i cable.

• If a connected AS-i slave has different configuration data (I/O configuration ID

code, extended ID1 code, extended ID2 code) to the AS-i slave configured in the

CP 243-2.

• When the CP 243-2 is in the offline phase

APF Red AS-i power

failure

Indicates that the voltage from the AS-i power supply unit on the AS-i cable is too low

or has failed.

PWR Green Power The PWR LED (power) indicates that the CP 243-2 is supplied with power.

SF Red System error This LED lights up in the following cases:

• The CP 243-2 detects an internal error (e.g. EEPROM defective).

• The CP 243-2 is currently unable to switch modes when the user requires this

(e.g. an AS-i slave with the address "0" exists)

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

90 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Slave display

To switch to the slave display, press the DISPLAY pushbutton. You can also switch from

group to group by pressing DISPLAY. The slave display is active when at least one group

LED is lit.

The slave display has the following properties:

● If the CP 243–2 is in configuration mode, all the detected AS-i slaves are displayed.

● If the CP 243–2 is in protected mode, all the active AS-i slaves are displayed. In protected

mode, the relevant LED starts flashing if AS-i slaves have either failed or if they have

been detected but not configured.

Details of the display statuses

The AS-i slaves are displayed in groups of five. The three group LEDs indicate (binary

coded) which group of five is being displayed. The five LEDs in the slave display then

indicate the detected or active AS-i slaves within this group.

To determine which slaves are active, find the group (row) in which the boxes equate to the

group LEDs that are lit. The LEDs in the slave display that are currently lit indicate which

slaves within this group are currently active.

If a group of B slaves is displayed, the "B" LED also lights up.

Example of a slave display



7KHLQWHUVHFWLRQV

PDUNVODYH

DQGVODYH

/('FROXPQ *URXS















&3

$6,QWHUIDFH0DVWHU

6(7

'LVSOD\

&0&(53:5

$-3$3)6)%

Figure 6-3 Example of a slave display

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 91

In the above image, you can see the following:

● The 2nd group LED is lit, that is, the 2nd row from the top (21 = 2dec; 2nd group of 5;

slaves 5–9).

● If the 2nd and 4th LEDS in the slave display are also lit, this means that slave 6 and 8 are

active.

● If the "B" LED is also lit, this means in this example that slave 6B and 8B are active.

6.1.2.5 Technical specifications

Technical specifications

AS-Interface specification V2.1

Interfaces

• Assignment of analog address space in

addressing unit Accordingly, 2 I/O modules

(8 DI/8 DO and 8 AI/8 AO)

• AS-Interface connection Terminal connection

Current consumption

• Via backplane bus Typ. 220 mA at 5 V DC

• Via AS-Interface from the AS-Interface

shaped cables Max. 100 mA

Power loss Approx. 2 W

Permissible ambient conditions

• Operating temperature

• Horizontal installation 0°C to +55°C

• Vertical installation 0°C to +45°C

• Transport / storage temperature -40°C to +70°C

• Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25°C

Design

• Module format S7-22x expansion module

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 71.2 x 80 x 62 (H+16 mm with holes for wall

mounting)

• Weight Approx. 250 g

• Space requirements 1 slot

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

92 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

6.1.3 CP 343-2, CP 343-2 P

6.1.3.1 Overview

Difference between the CP 343-2 and CP 343-2 P

The functions supported by the two device types CP 343-2 and CP 343-2 P are largely the

same. The CP 343-2 P, however, features additional configuration options in STEP 7.

For this reason, the CP 343-2 P module must not be considered as a replacement for the

CP 343-2, which will continue to be available.

In the following description, a distinction is only made between the types when different

performance features are described. Unless otherwise indicated, this information provided

for CP 343-2 applies to both device types.

Master connection for SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M

The CP 343-2 is the AS-Interface master for SIMATIC S7-300 programmable logic controller

and the distributed I/O device ET 200M. The communications processor offers the following

functions:

● Supports up to 62 AS-Interface slaves and features an integrated analog value transfer

function (in accordance with the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1)

● Supports all the AS-Interface master functions in accordance with the extended

AS-Interface specification V2.1.

● Displays indicating the operating state and LEDs on the front plate indicating the

operational readiness of the connected slaves.

● Fault indications (including AS-Interface voltage errors, configuration errors) by means of

LEDs on the front plate.

● Compact housing in keeping with the design of the SIMATIC S7-300.

● CP 343-2 P only: supports the configuration of the AS-Interface network with STEP 7 as

of V5.2.

Benefits

● Commissioning times reduced thanks to the simple configuration process at the touch of

a button.

● Flexible, distributed structures can be created when the device is implemented in the DP

slave ET 200M.

● The LED displays help reduce downtime and service times in the event of a fault:

– Status of the AS-Interface network

– Connected slaves and their operational readiness

– The AS-Interface supply voltage is monitored.

● Cuts the cost of storage and spare parts storage because the CP can be used for both

the SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M.

● With the option of connecting 62 slaves along with integrated analog value processing,

this device is suitable even for complex applications.

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 93

● CP 343-2 P only: improved system documentation and support during servicing because

the AS-Interface configuration is documented in the STEP 7 project.

Scope of application

The CP 343-2 is the AS-Interface master connection for SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M. The

connection to the AS-Interface permits a maximum of 248 DI/186 DO to be accessed for

each CP.

Integrated analog value processing also allows simple analog signals (max. 31 analog

slaves for each CP, each with up to 4 channels) to be evaluated.

The CP 343-2 functionality is identical to that of the CP 343-2 P, which means that an old S7

application program can be used without any restrictions with the new CP. The AS-Interface

configuration can also be downloaded/uploaded with the STEP 7 hardware configuration.

Features

The CP 343-2 is connected to the S7-300 in the same way as an expansion module. It is

equipped with:

● Two terminal connections for connecting the AS-Interface cable directly.

● LEDs on the front plate for indicating the operating state and operational readiness of all

the connected and activated slaves.

● Pushbuttons for indicating the status information of the slaves, switching the operating

state, and adopting the existing actual configuration as a target configuration.

Function

The CP 343-2 supports all the functions specified in the extended AS-Interface specification

V2.1, which means that dual address assignments (A-B) allow up to 62 digital or 31 analog

slaves to be operated on the AS-Interface. Integrated analog value processing provides easy

access to the analog values.

In I/O mode, the CP 343-2 is assigned 16 bytes in the analog address space of the SIMATIC

S7-300. The I/O data for the standard and A slaves is stored in this area. You can access

the binary values of B slaves in the user program using the system function blocks SFC 58

"write_data_record" / SFC 59 "read_data_record" with data record number 150.

A and B slaves comply with the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1. A function call

(FC) for the AS-Interface master calls (e.g. write parameters, read diagnostic values) is

available on the disk provided with the manual.

Configuration

All the connected AS-Interface slaves can be configured at the touch of a button. No further

configuration settings need to be made for the CP.

The CP 343-2 P supports configuration of the AS-Interface network with STEP 7 as of V5.2.

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

94 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

6.1.3.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

CP 343-2 communications processor

For connecting SIMATIC ET 200X to the AS-Interface;

without front connector

6GK7 343-2AH00-0XA0

CP 343-2 P communications processor

For connecting SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M to the

AS-Interface; without front connector

6GK7 343-2AH10-0XA0

Front connector

20-pole, with screw-type contacts

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

6.1.3.3 Connection

Permissible slots on the CP 343-2 in SIMATIC AS-300 and ET 200M

In principle, the CP can be inserted in any slot for I/O modules in the AS-300 and ET 200M

automation systems.

The restrictions imposed by the CPU or power supply used apply, however. These relate to

the following areas:

● Expandability with more than one rack (multi-tier configuration of the AS only possible as

of CPU 314)

● Electrical configuration, that is, the total current consumption from the S7 backplane bus

For more details about this, see the relevant SIMATIC system manuals.

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 95

Connecting the AS-i cable

The front connector for connecting the AS-i cable is located under the cover on the front of

the CP 343-2.

6LEURZQ

6LEOXH









Figure 6-4 Front connector assignment for the CP 343-2 and CP 343-2 P

The CP is equipped with internal connections for two AS-i cables. These connections are

bridged internally in the CP, which means that the CP 343-2 can be "looped in" to the AS-i

cable.

CAUTION

The load-carrying capacity of the connection contacts is max. 4 A. If this value is exceeded

on the AS-i cable, the CP 343-2 must not be "looped in" to the AS-i cable but must instead

be connected via a spur line (only one connection pair occupied on the CP 343-2).

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

96 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

6.1.3.4 Diagnostics

581

$3)

&(5

$83





6(7





















Figure 6-5 CP 343-2 front plate

The following are located on the front plate of the CP 343-2:

● The display elements (group display, status display, and slave display)

● Front connector for connecting the AS-i cable

● SET button

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 97

CP 343-2 status display

When the CP 343-2 is operating normally (the group display LEDs are not lit up), you can

read its status.

LED label Meaning

SF System error

This LED lights up in the following cases:

• The CP 343-2 is in protected mode and an AS-i configuration error is present (e.g. slave failure)

• The CP 343-2 detects an internal error (e.g. EEPROM defective)

• The CP 343-2 is currently unable to switch modes (e.g. a slave with the address "0" exists)

RUN Indicates that the CP has booted properly.

APF AS-i power failure.

Indicates that the voltage supplied by the AS-i power supply unit via the AS-i cable is too low or has

failed.

CER Configuration error

This LED indicates whether the slave configuration detected on the AS-i cable matches the target

configuration (LPS) in the CP. If not, the CER LED lights up.

The CER LED lights up in the following cases:

• If a configured AS-i slave is not detected on the AS-i cable (e.g. the slave has failed).

• If a slave that has not yet been configured is detected on the AS-i cable.

• If a connected slave has different configuration data (I/O configuration, ID code) to the slave

configured in the CP 343-2.

• When the CP is in the offline phase.

AUP Autoprog available

When the CP 343-2 is in protected mode, this indicates that the address of a slave can be programmed

automatically. Automatic address programming makes it easier to replace a defective slave on the AS-i

cable.

CM Configuration mode

This indicates the operating mode.

Display ON: Configuration mode

Display OFF: Protected mode

SET button

The SET button is required for configuring the CP 343-2 in standard mode. This button is

only active when the AS is in STOP mode.

If the CP 343-2 is in configuration mode (CM LED lights up), the CP 343-2 is configured

automatically when you press this button. Configuration is carried out as follows:

1. The CP 343-2 saves the existing slave configuration, which is indicated via the display of

the active slaves, as the target configuration in a non-volatile memory.

2. The CP 343-2 then switches to protected mode.

When the CP 343-2 is in protected mode (the CM LED does not light up), the CP switches

automatically to configuration mode when you press the button.

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

98 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Slave display

The detected/active slaves are indicated by LEDs 0 to 9 and LEDs 10+, 20+, and B. The

active slaves are displayed in groups of 10. The switchover is time controlled. LEDs 10+ and

20+ indicate which group of 10 is currently indicated by LEDs 0 to 9. If LED B lights up, this

indicates that the slaves detected or activated are in the extended address space B.

The slave display has the following properties:

● If the CP 343–2 is in configuration mode, all the detected AS-i slaves are displayed.

● When the CP 343–2 is in protected mode, all the activated AS-i slaves are displayed with

a continuous light. The relevant LED starts flashing if AS-i slaves have either failed or if

they have been detected but not configured.

Examples of slave displays

































































































Figure 6-6 Sample displays for detected/activated AS-i slaves

Example (from left to right) Meaning of the display

1 The slaves with addresses 1, 2, and 5 have been

detected/activated.

2 The slaves with addresses 20, 21, and 22 have been

detected/activated.

3 The slave with address 31B has been detected/activated.

4 The slaves with addresses 10B and 17B have been

detected/activated.

Master

6.1 SIMATIC integrated masters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 99

6.1.3.5 Technical specifications

Technical specifications

AS-Interface specification V 2.1

Bus cycle time 5 ms with 31 slaves

10 ms with 62 slaves

Interfaces

• Assignment of analog address space in

addressing unit 16 bytes I/O and P bus S7-300

• AS-Interface connection S7-300 front connector with terminal connection

Power supply +5 V DC via backplane bus

Current consumption

• Via backplane bus Typ. 200 mA with 5 V DC

• Via AS-Interface from the AS-Interface

shaped cables Max. 100 mA

Power loss 2 W

Permissible ambient conditions

• Operating temperature 0°C to +60°C

• Transport / storage temperature -40°C to +70°C

• Max. relative humidity 95% at +25°C

Design

• Module format S7-300 design

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 40 x 125 x 120

• Weight Approx. 190 g

• Space requirements 1 slot

Configuration software (for CP 343-2 P) Optional. STEP 7 as of V5.2

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

100 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

6.2 Routers

6.2.1 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

6.2.1.1 Overview

Data exchange between the PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E connects the PROFIBUS DP to the AS-Interface. It performs the

following functions:

● PROFIBUS DP slave and AS-Interface master

● Supports up to 62 AS-Interface slaves and features an integrated analog value

transmission function (in accordance with the extended AS-Interface Specification V2.1)

● Supports all the AS-Interface master functions in accordance with extended AS-Interface

Specification V2.1 (i.e. master class M3).

● Power supply via the AS-Interface cable, which means that no additional power supply is

required.

● Enables the AS-Interface configuration to be loaded to STEP 7 (as of V5.2).

Benefits

● Reduced installation costs because the power is supplied entirely via the AS-Interface

cable, which means that no additional power supply is required.

● Short commissioning times thanks to easy configuration at the touch of a button.

● The LED indicators help reduce downtime and service times if a slave fails.

● Quick and easy commissioning by reading the AS-Interface configuration (as of ES03)

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 101

*B,.B'(B

HJ6

ZLWK&38'3

'3$6,QWHUIDFH

/LQN(

$6,QWHUIDFHSRZHUVXSSO\XQLW

3DVVLYHPRGXOHV

ZLWKRXW$,6&VODYH

$FWLYHPRGXOHV

ZLWK$,6&VODYH

5HSHDWHU



$6,QWHUIDFHSRZHUVXSSO\XQLW

$FWXDWRUVHQVRUZLWKVODYH$6,& $FWXDWRUVHQVRUZLWKRXWVODYH$6,&

%UDQFK ([WHQGHUFDQQRW

FXUUHQWO\

EHXVHG



$6LQWHUIDFHFDEOH

Figure 6-7 Transition from the PROFIBUS DP to the AS-Interface via DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

Scope of application

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is a PROFIBUS DP slave (to EN 50 170) and AS-Interface master

(to EN 50 295) and enables the AS-Interface to be operated on the PROFIBUS DP.

Simple PROFIBUS masters can exchange I/O data with the AS-Interface cyclically. Masters

with acyclic services can exchange I/O data and carry out master calls. DP/AS-Interface Link

20E cannot be used in conjunction with the extender.

Design

● Compact housing with degree of protection IP20 for mounting on DIN rails.

● LEDs on the front plate for indicating the operating state and operational readiness of all

the connected and activated slaves.

● The PROFIBUS DP address can be set at the touch of a button.

● LED for the PROFIBUS DP slave address, DP bus error, and diagnosis.

● Two buttons for switching the operating state and adopting the existing actual

configuration as the target configuration.

● The power is supplied via the AS-Interface shaped cable.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

102 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Function

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E enables a DP master to access all the slaves in an AS-Interface

segment. In accordance with extended specification (V2.1), up to 62 slaves each with four

inputs and three outputs can now be connected.

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is normally assigned 32 bytes of input data and 32 bytes of output

data in the DP master in which the I/O data for the connected AS-Interface slaves is stored.

The input/output buffer can be compressed so that only the required memory in the

DP master is used.

PROFIBUS DP masters can also trigger AS-Interface master calls via the acyclic PROFIBUS

services (e.g. write parameters, change addresses, read diagnostic values).

Configuration

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E can be configured on the PROFIBUS with STEP 7 or

COM PROFIBUS.

The type and GSD files are also supplied with the manual, which means that configuration

can also be carried out with STEP 7 versions in which DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is not yet

available as standard.

The AS-Interface segment can be configured by means of STEP 7 or simply by adopting the

ACTUAL configuration. Commissioning can also be performed without PROFIBUS.

When DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is configured with STEP 7, the AS-Interface configuration

can be uploaded to STEP 7 as of V5.2.

6.2.1.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

Router between the PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface with

degree of protection IP20

6GK1 415-2AA01

DP/AS-Interface LINK 20E manual

Including type and GSD files

• German

• English

• French

• Spanish

• Italian

6GK1971-2DS01-0AA0

6GK1971-2DS01-0AA1

6GK1971-2DS01-0AA2

6GK1971-2DS01-0AA3

6GK1971-2DS01-0AA4

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 103

6.2.1.3 Connection

Connections

DP/AS-i Link 20E has the following connections:

● Two connections to the AS-i cable (jumpered internally)

● One connection for functional ground

● One connection to PROFIBUS (9-pin SUB D socket)

The connections are located under the top cover on the front panel of DP/AS-i Link 20E.

Connections to the AS-i cable

DP/AS-i Link 20E has two connections (jumpered internally in DP/AS-i Link 20E) for AS-i

cables.

This allows DP/AS-i Link 20E to be "looped in" to the AS-i cable.

CAUTION

Maximum load-carrying capacity

The maximum load-carrying capacity of the AS-i connection contacts is 3 A. If this value is

exceeded on the AS-i cable, DP/AS-i Link 20E must not be "looped in" to the AS-i cable but

must instead be connected via a spur line (one connection pair only occupied by DP/AS-i

Link 20E).

DP/AS-i Link 20E is supplied with power entirely from the AS-Interface.

The current consumption from the AS-Interface is 200 mA.

 

)XQFWLRQDOJURXQG

XQDVVLJQHG

&RQQHFWLRQV

6L

&DEOHV

352),%86'3

Figure 6-8 Connecting the AS-i cables

CAUTION

Connections 6 and 7 on the terminal block are unassigned and must remain so.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

104 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Note

Functional ground (terminal )

DP/AS-i-Link 20E features a connection for functional ground. This connection must be

connected to the protective conductor with as little resistance as possible.

Connection to the PROFIBUS DP

The system is connected to the PROFIBUS DP via a 9-pin SUB D socket.

WARNING

When laying and installing the PROFIBUS DP cable and bus connector, refer to the

instructions provided in "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks"

(order no.: 6GK1970-5CA20-0AA0, or can be downloaded from the Internet).

Bus connectors with the cable outlets at different angles (0°, 30°, and 90°) are available for

connecting PROFIBUS DP. See also the notes in the manual "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS

Networks".

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 105

6.2.1.4 Diagnostics

 

$'5

3:5

$3)

&(5

$83











352),%86'3

'3$6,QWHUIDFH/LQN(

;



6(7 ',63/$<

*.$$

&RQQHFWLQJSDUW

IURQWFRYHURSHQ

*URXSGLVSOD\

6ODYHGLVSOD\

&RQWURO

6(7EXWWRQ ',63/$<EXWWRQ )L[LQJKROH

)RUZDOOPRXQWLQJ

/DEHOLQJILHOG

/('DUUD\

6WDWXVGLVSOD\

*URXSVODYHGLVSOD\

'LVSOD\FRPSRQHQW

Figure 6-9 Front view of DP/AS-i Link 20E

The following can be found on the front panel of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E:

● The display section (group, status, and slave display)

● Under a cover on the front: the connecting part for the connections to the AS-i cable,

functional ground, and PROFIBUS

● Under another cover on the front: the control with the SET and DISPLAY buttons

Reading the diagnosis on the device

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E has the following display modes:

● Status display of the master

● Slave display for the AS-i slaves

● PROFIBUS address display

You can use the DISPLAY button to switch from one display mode to the next or switch

within the slave display.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

106 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Status display

When DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is in the initial state (e.g. once it has been switched on), you

can read its status information from the LEDs (the three LEDs in the group display do not

light up green and the ADR LED does not light up at all).

LED Color Status Meaning

BF Red Bus failure Indicates a fault on PROFIBUS DP.

This LED lights up in the following cases:

• The connection between the DP master and DP/AS-i Link 20E

is interrupted or the DP master is not active.

• DP/AS-i Link 20E has been incorrectly

configured/parameterized by the DP master.

SF Red System error This LED lights up in the following cases:

• In protected mode: a diagnostic alarm (incoming) was

triggered in the DP master.

• DP/AS-i Link 20E detects an internal fault (e.g. EEPROM is

defective).

• DP/AS-i Link 20E cannot currently execute the required mode

switchover when the SET button is pressed (e.g. a slave exists

with the address 0).

PWR Green Run This LED lights up when DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is supplied

with power.

APF Red AS-i power failure Indicates that the voltage supplied by the AS-i power supply unit

via the AS-i cable is too low.

Note:

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is supplied with power entirely from the

AS-Interface. This means that if the AS-i voltage fails completely,

this cannot be indicated by "AS-i power failure". You can identify

this status when the "PWR" LED is not lit up.

CER Yellow Configuration error This LED indicates whether the slave configuration detected on

the AS-i cable matches the target configuration in DP/AS-i Link

20E. If not, the CER LED lights up.

The CER LED lights up in the following cases:

• If a configured AS-i slave is not detected on the AS-i cable

(e.g. the slave has failed).

• If an AS-i slave that has not yet been configured is detected on

the AS-i cable.

• If a connected AS-i slave has different configuration data (I/O

configuration, ID code) to the AS-i slave configured in DP/AS-i

Link 20E.

• When DP/AS-i Link 20E is in offline mode.

AUP Green Autoprog available When DP/AS-i Link 20E is in protected mode, this LED indicates

that the address of an AS-i slave can be programmed

automatically. Automatic address programming makes it easier to

replace a defective AS-i slave on the AS-i cable.

CM Yellow Configuration mode This display indicates the DP/AS-i Link 20E operating mode.

• Display ON: Configuration mode

• Display OFF: Protected mode

Configuration mode is only required for commissioning DP/AS-i

Link 20E. In configuration mode, DP/AS-i Link 20E activates all

the connected AS-i slaves and exchanges data with them.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 107

Slave display for AS-i slaves

To switch from the status display for the master to the status display for the slaves, press the

DISPLAY button.

The AS-i slaves are displayed in groups of five. The top three group LEDs indicate which

group of five is displayed by lighting up green. A further distinction is made between:

● Static: AS-i standard slaves and A slaves

● Flashing: B slaves

The LEDs below light up green to indicate which AS-i slaves within the group have been

detected or are active.

To switch from group to group, press the DISPLAY button.

The system switches back to the status display in the following cases:

● Once the last group has been displayed (AS-i slave 30, 31) and when you press the

DISPLAY button twice (i.e. switch to the PROFIBUS address display and then to the

status display).

● If the DISPLAY button is not pressed for approx. 8 minutes.

Characteristics of the slave display

● If DP/AS-i Link 20E is in configuration mode, all the detected AS-i slaves are displayed.

● If DP/AS-i Link 20E is in protected mode, all the active AS-i slaves are displayed. In

protected mode, the relevant LED starts flashing if AS-i slaves have either failed or if they

have been detected but not configured.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

108 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Example of a slave display

*URXSGLVSOD\

/('V

'LVSOD\FRPSRQHQW

6ODYHGLVSOD\

/('V

'3$6,QWHUIDFH/LQN

*.$$















$'5

581

$3)

&(5

$83

;



Figure 6-10 Example: slave display on DP/AS-i Link 20E

In the above image, you can see the following:

● The group LEDs select the second group of five.

● Within this group, the 5 LEDs at the bottom indicate the active AS-i slaves 6 and 8.

Displaying and setting the PROFIBUS address

If the top LED in the group display (ADR) is red, the 7 LEDs below this indicate the

PROFIBUS address of DP/AS-i Link 20E in binary form.

To set the PROFIBUS address of DP/AS-i Link 20E, carry out the following steps:

1. Disconnect the DP master (e.g. unplug the PROFIBUS connector or switch the DP

master to STOP).

Note

The PROFIBUS address can only be set in this operating state.

2. Switch the DP/AS-i Link 20E display by pressing the DISPLAY button repeatedly until the

ADR LED lights up red. (Note: from the status display, you have to press the button

15 times.)

DP/AS-i Link 20E indicates the current PROFIBUS address with the seven LEDs at the

bottom.

3. When you press the DISPLAY button, DP/AS-i Link 20E returns to the status display and

the set PROFIBUS address is retained.

If you press the SET button, however, you can reset the PROFIBUS address. When the

BF LED flashes, this indicates the most significant bit in the PROFIBUS address.

4. When you press SET, this bit is set (LED on); when you press DISPLAY, however, the bit

is reset (LED off). The display then switches to the SF LED (next address bit in the

PROFIBUS address).

5. Using the same procedure as described in the previous step, you can now set/reset the

individual bits in the PROFIBUS address one after the other.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 109

6. When all the bits have been entered, the display for the set address bits switches rapidly

from red to green or yellow to green (flashing). When you press SET again, the set

PROFIBUS address is adopted by DP/AS-i Link 20E. If you press DISPLAY, however, the

new address is rejected. You now have to enter the new address again (see steps 4

and 5).

The significance of the address bits in the PROFIBUS address indicated by the LEDs is

explained in the following example:

$'5

581

$3)

&(5

$83

/DEHOLQJILHOG

6WDWXVGLVSOD\

/('DUUD\

5HG

*UHHQ

6LJQLILFDQFHRIWKH

DGGUHVVELWV

,QWKLVH[DPSOH

WKH/('VLQGLFDWH

352),%86DGGUHVV

 















In the example above, PROFIBUS address 69 was set using SET and DISPLAY.

The highest possible address is 126. Note that address 126 is reserved for special functions

(address assignment) on the PROFIBUS. Addresses 1 to 125 can be used for exchanging

data with the DP master.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

110 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

6.2.1.5 Technical specifications

Technical specifications

AS-Interface bus cycle time 5 ms for 31 slaves;

10 ms for 62 slaves

PROFIBUS transmission rate Max. 12 Mbit/s

Supported AS-Interface master profiles M3 (in accordance with Complete AS-Interface

Specification V2.1)

Configuration of AS-Interface Using the buttons on the front plate or with

STEP 7 V5.1 SP2

Interfaces

• AS-Interface connection Terminal contacts

• Connection to PROFIBUS 9-pin SUB D socket

Power supply

• From the AS-Interface cable In accordance with AS-Interface Specification

EN 50 295

Current consumption

• From the AS-Interface cable Max. 250 mA

Load-carrying capacity

5 V DC at the PROFIBUS connection Max. 90 mA

Current consumption from AS-i 200 mA

Power loss 3.7 W

Degree of protection IP20

Permissible ambient conditions

• Operating temperature

• Horizontal installation 0°C to +60°C

• Vertical installation 0°C to +45°C

Transport/storage temperature -40°C to +70°C

Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25°C

Operating altitude 3000 m above sea level

Design

• Module format S7-200 design

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 90 x 80 x 60

• Weight Approx. 200 g

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 111

6.2.2 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

6.2.2.1 Overview

Data exchange between AS-Interface and PROFIBUS DP

● Compact router between PROFIBUS (DP slave) and AS-Interface.

● Single and double AS-Interface master (to AS-Interface Specification V3.0) for connecting

62 AS-Interface slaves in each case and integrated analog value transmission.

● Integrated, high-performance ground-fault monitoring for the AS-Interface cable.

● User-friendly on-site diagnosis and commissioning functions via a graphical display and

controls or via a Web interface with a standard browser.

● Optimum TIA integration via STEP 7, integration in engineering tools from third-party

vendors via the PROFIBUS type file (GSD).

● Vertical integration (standard Web interface) via Industrial Ethernet.

● Power supplied via the AS-Interface cable or with 24 V DC (optional).

● Modules can be exchanged without the PG by means of C-PLUG (optional).

Benefits

● Quick PLC-independent commissioning by means of simple configuration at the touch of

a button and testing the AS-Interface line via the display or WBM. (Page 72)

● User-friendly diagnosis via the display or Web interface and easy replacement of

modules by means of the exchange medium C-PLUG helps reduce downtime and service

times if a slave fails.

● Reduced installation costs because the power is supplied entirely via the AS-Interface

cable, which means that no additional power supply is required.

● Reduced engineering overhead through convenient configuration of Siemens slaves per

slave catalog in HW-Config (STEP 7)

● Lower costs for high quantity frameworks as result of the dual AS-Interface master

Scope of application

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is a PROFIBUS DPV1 slave (to EN 50 170) and AS-Interface

master (in accordance with AS-Interface Specification V3.0 to EN 50 295) and enables

transparent data access to the AS-Interface from PROFIBUS DP.

PROFIBUS DP masters can exchange I/O data with the AS-Interface cyclically. DP masters

with acyclic services can also carry out AS-Interface master calls. DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

is, therefore, suitable for distributed configurations and for integrating a lower-level

AS-Interface network.

The AS-Interface single master version of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is suitable for

applications with typical volumes of data.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

112 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

The AS-Interface double master version of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is suitable for

applications with large volumes of data. In this case, the double data volumes can be

processed on two separate AS-Interface lines.

3&ZLWK

62)71(7'3 6

HJZLWK&3

6

ZLWK&3([WHQGHG

2SHUDWLRQ

0RQLWRULQJ

'3$6L

/LQN

$GYDQFHG

:KHQ'3$6L/,1.$GYDQFHGLVXVHG

DVGRXEOHPDVWHU

3RZHUVXSSO\

XQLW /2*2

(7VDIHVODYH

ZLWK(0(5*(1&<6723

6DIHW\

PRQLWRU

6DIHVODYH

ZLWK(0(5*(1&<6723

6ODYH /DVHU

VFDQQHU 6DIHW\

PRQLWRU

(76 (7SUR 3*HJ

ZLWK&3$

*B,.B'(B

3RZHUVXSSO\

XQLW

Figure 6-11 Integration of AS-Interface in PROFIBUS via DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as single/double master

Design

Robust plastic housing with degree of protection IP20 for mounting on DIN rails.

● Compact design

– Display on the front plate for accurately indicating the operating state and operational

readiness of all the connected and activated AS-Interface slaves.

– Six buttons for commissioning and testing the AS-Interface line directly on DP/AS-i

LINK Advanced.

– LEDs for indicating the operating state of PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface.

– Integrated Ethernet port (RJ45 socket) for user-friendly commissioning, diagnosing,

and testing of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced via a Web interface with a standard browser.

– Power supplied via the AS-Interface shaped cable or with 24 V DC (optional).

– Low installation depth due to lowered plug fitting.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 113

● Easy installation on standard DIN rail

● Operation without fan or battery

● Rapid replacement of devices by means of the exchange medium C-PLUG (not

supplied).

Function

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced provides the PROFIBUS DP master with cyclic access to the

I/O data for all slaves in a lower-level AS-Interface segment. According to the extended

AS-Interface Specification (V3.0), up to 62 slaves each with four inputs and four outputs (or

eight inputs and eight outputs) as well as analog slaves on each AS-Interface line can be

connected.

In the DP master, DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is normally assigned 62 input and 62 output bytes

in which the I/O data for the connected digital AS-Interface slaves is stored. The input/output

buffer can be compressed so that only the required I/O memory in the DP master system is

used. The integrated function for analyzing analog signals is just as simple to use as the

function for accessing digital values, which means that communication modules no longer

have to be called up.

PROFIBUS DP V1 masters can also trigger AS-Interface master calls via the acyclic

PROFIBUS services (e.g.: write parameters, change addresses, read diagnostic values).

An operator display in AS-i Link allows you to commission the lower-level AS-Interface line.

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is equipped with an additional Ethernet port that allows you to

leverage the benefits of the integrated Web server, thereby making it even easier to use the

operator display. The firmware can also be upgraded free of charge.

The optional C-PLUG allows you to replace modules without a PG, thereby minimizing

downtime if a fault occurs.

Diagnostics

A comprehensive range of diagnostic functions are available via LEDs, displays, controls, a

Web interface, or STEP 7. These include:

● Operating state of the link

● State of the link as a PROFIBUS DP slave

● Diagnosis of the AS-Interface network

● Telegram statistics

● Standard diagnosis pages for rapid access to diagnostic data by means of a standard

browser

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

114 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Configuration

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be configured with STEP 7 as of version V5.4 or simply by

copying the actual configuration on the display.

Alternatively, DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be integrated by means of the PROFIBUS type

file (GSD) in the engineering tool:

● COM PROFIBUS

● Older STEP 7 versions (older than V5.4)

● Engineering tools from third-party vendors

When configuration is carried out with STEP 7, the AS-Interface configuration can be

uploaded to STEP 7 as of V5.4. Siemens AS-Interface slaves can also be easily configured

in HW Config (slave catalog).

6.2.2.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

Router between PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface; master

profiles M3 and M4, extended AS-Interface Specification

V3.0; degree of protection IP20; manual on CD-ROM,

German, English, Spanish, Italian

Single master with display

6GK1 415-2BA10

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

Router between PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface; master

profiles M3 and M4, extended AS-Interface Specification

V3.0; degree of protection IP20; manual on CD-ROM,

German, English, Spanish, Italian

Double master with display

6GK1 415-2BA20

C-PLUG

Exchange medium for replacing the devices quickly and

easily if a fault occurs; for recording configuration and

application data, can be used in SIMATIC NET products

with C-PLUG slot

6GK1 900-0AB00

IE FC RJ45 PLUG 90

RJ45 connector for Industrial Ethernet with a robust metal

housing and integrated insulation displacement/terminal

contacts for connecting the Industrial Ethernet C installation

cables; with 90° cable outlet (e.g. for ET 200S)

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0 (1 package with 1 piece)

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0 (1 package with 10 pieces)

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0 (1 package with 50 pieces)

RS 485 bus connector with diagonal cable outlet (35°)

With screw terminal

max. transmission rate: 12 Mbit/s

• Without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA60-0XA0

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 115

6.2.2.3 Connection

Connections

DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced features the following connections:

● Two separate connections to the AS-i cable (with double master)

● One connection for an alternative 24 V DC power supply (optional) and functional ground

● One connection to PROFIBUS (9-pin SUB D socket)

● One LAN connection (RJ45) (can be assigned optionally)

Connections to the AS-i cable(s) and power supply

DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced has two connections for AS-i cables (lines 1 and 2).

They are each connected via a 4-pin connector each with two + and two - terminals

(jumpered internally).

This allows DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced to be "looped in" to the AS-i cable.

CAUTION

Maximum load-carrying capacity

The maximum load-carrying capacity of the AS-i connection contacts is 3 A. If this value is

exceeded on the AS-i cable, DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced must not be "looped in"

to the AS-i cable but must instead be connected via a spur line (one connection pair only

occupied by DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced).

DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced can receive its entire power supply from the

AS-Interface (AS-i line 1 only). The current consumption from the AS-Interface here is

250 mA at 30 V.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

116 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Alternatively, DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced can be supplied via a separate power

supply unit (24 V DC).

352),%86

&RQQHFWLRQ

/$1FRQQHFWLRQ

3RZHUVXSSO\

FRQQHFWLRQ9'&

$6LOLQH

FRQQHFWLRQ

$6LOLQH

FRQQHFWLRQ

'3$6L/,1.

$GYDQFHG

$6L$6L

(6& 2.

$3)

&(5

$83

Figure 6-12 Connecting the AS-i cable(s) and power supply

Connector assignment for the AS-i line

PIN no. line 1 Signal

1 AS-i 1 +

2 AS-i 1 -

3 AS-i 1 +

4 AS-i 1 -

PIN no. line 2 Signal

1 AS-i 2 +

2 AS-i 2 -

3 AS-i 2 +

4 AS-i 2 -

PIN 1 and 3 as well as PIN 2 and 4 are jumpered internally with each other.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 117

Connector assignment for the power supply

PIN no. line 1 Signal

1 Power +

2 Power -

3 PE

Note

Functional ground - PE

DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced features a connection for functional ground. This

connection is required if the integrated ground-fault monitoring function is used. It must be

connected to the protective conductor with as little resistance as possible.

Connection to PROFIBUS DP

The system is connected to the PROFIBUS DP via a 9-pin SUB D socket.

WARNING

When laying and installing the PROFIBUS DP cable and bus connector, refer to the

instructions provided in "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks"

(order no.: 6GK1970-5CA20-0AA0, or can be downloaded from the Internet).

Bus connectors with the cable outlets at different angles (0°, 30°, and 90°;

recommended: 30°) are available for connecting PROFIBUS DP. See also the notes in the

manual "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks".

Connector assignment for the PROFIBUS-RS485 interface

PIN no. Designation Function

1 n.c. reserved

2 n.c. reserved

3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B

4 RTS Request to send

5 GND Ground

6 VCC (5 V) Power supply

7 n.c. reserved

8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A

9 n.c. reserved

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

118 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LAN connection

A PC (or network) can be connected via an RJ45 socket (an optional 90° FC connector can

also be used). The LAN connection for DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced is used for

carrying out configuration via Web-based management and for diagnostic purposes, for

example. DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced supports autocrossing (i.e. crossed and

uncrossed cables can be used).

Connector assignment for the LAN connection

PIN no. Signal

1 RDP

2 RDN

3 TDP

4 n.c.

5 n.c.

6 TDN

7 n.c.

8 n.c.

6.2.2.4 Diagnostics

'3$6L/,1.

$GYDQFHG

$6L$6L

(6& 2.

$3)

&(5

$83

/('V

'3$6L/,1.$GY

/('V

$6LOLQH

$6LOLQH

&RQQHFWLRQ

$6LOLQH

&RQQHFWLRQ

5HOHDVH

VOLGH

3RZHUVXSSO\

FRQQHFWLRQ9

352),%86FRQQHFWLRQ

'LVSOD\

.H\ERDUG

/('/,1.

/$1FRQQHFWLRQ

:%0FRQILJXUDWLRQ

/('5;7;

F3/8*

RSWLRQDO

Figure 6-13 Front view of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced (double master)

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 119

The following LEDs are located on the front of DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced:

● Indicators for DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced

– SF: System error

– BF: Bus fault

– ON

● Indicators for the AS-i line

– SF = AS-i system error

– APF = AS-i power failure

– CER = Configuration error

– AUP = Automatic address programming

– CM = Configuration mode

– ON

Meaning of the DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced LEDs

LED Color Status Meaning

SF Red System error (link) This LED lights up in the following cases:

• In protected mode: a diagnostic alarm (incoming) was triggered

in the DP master.

• DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced detects an internal fault

(e.g. EEPROM is defective).

BF Red Bus fault Indicates a fault on PROFIBUS DP.

This LED flashes in the following cases:

• The connection between the DP master and DP/AS-INTERFACE

LINK Advanced is interrupted or the DP master is not active.

• DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced has been incorrectly

configured/parameterized by the DP master.

ON Green This LED lights up when DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced is

supplied with voltage.

Meaning of the AS-i line LEDs

LED Color Status Meaning

SF Red System error (line) This LED lights up in the following cases:

• In protected mode: a diagnostic alarm (incoming) was triggered

in the DP master.

APF Red AS-i power failure Indicates that the voltage supplied by the AS-i power supply unit on

the AS-i cable is too low or is faulty.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

120 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LED Color Status Meaning

CER Yellow Configuration error This LED indicates whether the slave configuration detected on the

AS-i cable matches the target configuration in DP/AS-INTERFACE

LINK Advanced. If any discrepancies are detected, the CER LED

lights up.

The CER LED lights up in the following cases:

• A configured AS-i slave is not detected on the AS-i cable

(e.g. the slave has failed).

• An AS-i slave that has not yet been configured is detected on the

AS-i cable.

• A connected AS-i slave has different configuration data

(I/O configuration, ID code) to the AS-i slave configured in

DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced.

• DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced is in offline mode.

AUP Green Autoprog available When DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced is in protected mode,

this LED indicates that the address of an AS-i slave can be

programmed automatically. Automatic address programming makes

it easier to replace a defective AS-i slave on the AS-i cable.

CM Yellow Configuration mode This display indicates the DP/AS-Interface operating mode.

LINK Advanced signals:

• Display ON: Configuration mode

• Display OFF: Protected mode

Configuration mode is only required for commissioning

DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced. In configuration mode,

DP/AS-INTERFACE LINK Advanced activates all the connected AS-i

slaves and exchanges data with them.

ON Green This LED lights up when the AS-i line is supplied with voltage.

Keyboard

You can use the operator input keys to switch operating mode. The lower-level AS-i line can

also be configured using the operator input keys and display.

Display

The graphical display has a resolution of 128 x 64 pixels.

The lower-level AS-i line is configured using the display together with the keyboard, which

means that commissioning and diagnosis can be carried out locally.

The following display appears when the device is switched on or if no user inputs are made

over a long period:

Figure 6-14 Logo on the display

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 121

Note

Error message

If a fault occurs during operation, an error message is output even if the logo was displayed

beforehand.

As soon as any keyboard input is made, the main menu appears from which you can

navigate in the menu structure.

If an entry in the list is selected (inverse display), a ticker text automatically appears after a

short period with further information (not in the main menu).

6.2.2.5 Technical specifications

Technical specifications

Transmission rates on each AS-Interface line

• AS-Interface bus cycle time 5 ms for 31 slaves;

10 ms for 62 slaves

• PROFIBUS transmission rate Max. 12 Mbit/s

• Ethernet transmission rate 10/100Mbit/s, autosensing

Interfaces

• AS-Interface connection 2 x 2-pin terminal contacts (plug-in type)

• Single master 2 x 2-pin terminal contacts (plug-in type)

• Double master (2 AS-i lines) 2 x 4-pin terminal contacts (plug-in type)

• Connection to PROFIBUS 1 x 9-pin SUB D socket

• Connection to Ethernet (optional) 1 x RJ45 socket / autocrossing

• Optional: 24 V DC power supply 3-pin terminal contacts (plug-in type) incl.

functional ground for integrated ground-fault

monitoring

• Slot for exchange medium C-PLUG

Display 128 x 64 pixels with backlighting

Keys Membrane keyboard (6 keys)

Power supply

• From the AS-Interface shaped cable (line 1) In accordance with AS-Interface Specification

EN 50 295

• Optional: 24 V DC 24 V DC, protective conductor

Current consumption

• From the AS-Interface shaped cable Max. 250 mA

Load-carrying capacity

5 V DC at the PROFIBUS connection Max. 70 mA

Power loss 7.5 W

Degree of protection IP20

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

122 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Technical specifications

Permissible ambient conditions

• Operating temperature

o Horizontal installation 0°C to +60°C

o Vertical installation 0°C to +45°C

Transport/storage temperature -30°C to +70°C

Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25°C

Operating altitude 3000 m above sea level

Design

• Installation On DIN rail

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 90 x 132 x 88.5

• Weight Approx. 380 g

Supported AS-Interface master profiles M1, M2, M3, and M4 (in accordance with

Complete AS-Interface Specification V3.0)

AS-Interface configuration By means of buttons on the front plate,

via Web interface (WBM)

with STEP 7 as of version V5.4,

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 123

6.2.3 DP/AS-i F-Link

6.2.3.1 Overview

Link between PROFIsafe and ASIsafe

● Compact, safety-oriented router between the PROFIBUS (DP slave) and AS-Interface.

● Monitors the inputs of safety-oriented binary AS-i slaves (ASIsafe slaves) and forwards

data via PROFIsafe. No need for additional safety-oriented components for AS-Interface

(e.g. additional cables, safety monitor).

● AS-i master in accordance with AS-Interface Specification V3.0, master profile M4, for

connecting up to 62 AS-i slaves and integrated analog value transmission.

● Direct integration in PROFIBUS networks. Integration in PROFINET environments via the

PROFINET/PROFIBUS gateway (IE/PB Link) or via SIMATIC S7-315 F PN/DP,

S7-317 F PN/DP, or S7-416F-3 PN/DP.

● Optimum TIA integration in STEP 7 via Object Manager, integration in engineering tools

from third-party vendors via the PROFIBUS type file (GSD).

● Local diagnosis via LEDs and display with operator input keys.

● Module exchange without PG because startup data is transferred via the PROFIBUS DP

master.

Benefits

● Gaps in (bus-based) safety technology closed: safety-oriented signals (EMERGENCY

STOP, door tumbler, light curtains etc.) collected with AS-i and transferred to higher-level

F PLC. This enables:

– Quick installation, easy commissioning: benefits of AS-i can now be systematically

leveraged in the field for Safety Integrated.

– Cost-effective solution because ASIsafe is ideally suited for collecting "fewer but

distributed failsafe bits".

● Price benefit: as a fully-fledged AS-i master in accordance with Specification V3.0, large

volumes of project data can be processed in the AS-i network (496 inputs and outputs in

each case, up to 62 analog slaves).

● Long-term investment security:

– Integration in PROFIBUS networks as with DP/AS-i Links Advanced or 20E

– Backward compatibility to spec. V2

– Open for state-of-the-art automation concepts with AS-i

● Quick commissioning with simple configuration at the touch of a button (code sequences

of ASIsafe slaves can also be taught in at the touch of a button).

● User-friendly configuration of all Siemens slaves via the slave catalog in HW Config

(STEP 7) helps reduce engineering work, especially for the ASIsafe slaves modeled on

PROFIsafe slaves.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

124 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

● Safety logic programming with the familiar, powerful commands of the Distributed Safety

package from the failsafe SIMATIC PLC in F-FUP or F-FOP (incl. TÜV-certified function

blocks for standard safety applications) helps cut costs.

● Can also be used in machine tools with SINUMERIK 840 D SL in conjunction with the

Profibus type file (GSD).

● User-friendly diagnosis via the display and easy replacement of modules (only a few

settings need to be made via the operator input keys; configuration tool not required) help

reduce downtime and service times.

Network integration

DP/AS-i F-Link can be used in a number of different configurations:

● Integration in PROFIBUS networks under SIMATIC F-PLC

352),%86

$6,QWHUIDFH

+0,

6,0$7,&

(76

6,0$7,&

6)

'3$6L

)/LQN

6SHF

)', $,$2

','2

16%B

0RWRU

2SWLRQDO

0RWRU$6,VDIH

0RGXOH 6,5,86

&DEOHSXOO

VZLWFK

6,5,86

3RVLWLRQ

VZLWFK

6,0$7,&

/LJKW

FXUWDLQ

$QDORJ

,2PRGXOH

.

'LJLWDO

,2PRGXOH

.5

'LJLWDO

,2PRGXOH

.

6DIHW\

PRQLWRU

6,5,86

(0(5

*(1&<

6723

6,5,86

(0(5

*(1&<

6723

Figure 6-15 Configuration 1: Integration in PROFIBUS networks under SIMATIC F-PLC

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 125

● Integration in PROFINET networks under SIMATIC F-PLC

(SIMATIC S7-315 F PN/DP, S7-317 F PN/DP, or S7-416F-3 PN/DP)

2SWLRQDO

16%B

352),%86

352),1(7

$6,QWHUIDFH

+0,

6,0$7,&

6)

31'3 6,0$7,&

6)

6,0$7,&

(7SUR

6,0$7,&

(76

0RWRU

'3$6L

)/LQN

6SHF

)', $,$2

','2

0RWRU

$6,VDIH

0RGXOH 6,5,86

&DEOHSXOO

VZLWFK

6,5,86

3RVLWLRQ

VZLWFK

6,0$7,&

/LJKW

FXUWDLQ

$QDORJ

,2PRGXOH

.

'LJLWDO

,2PRGXOH

.5

'LJLWDO

,2PRGXOH

.

6DIHW\

PRQLWRU

6,5,86

(0(5

*(1&<

6723

6,5,86

(0(5

*(1&<

6723

Figure 6-16 Configuration 2: Integration in PROFIBUS networks under SIMATIC F-PLC (SIMATIC S7-315 F PN/DP,

SIMATIC S7-317 F PN/DP, SIMATIC S7-416 F PN/DP)

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

126 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

● Alternative integration in PROFINET networks under SIMATIC F-PLC via IE/PB Link

,(3%/LQN

16%B

0RWRU

$6,VDIH

0RGXOH 6,5,86

&DEOHSXOO

VZLWFK

6,5,86

3RVLWLRQ

VZLWFK

6,0$7,&

/LJKW

FXUWDLQ

$QDORJ

,2PRGXOH

.

'LJLWDO

,2PRGXOH

.5

'LJLWDO

,2PRGXOH

.

6DIHW\

PRQLWRU

6,5,86

(0(5

*(1&<

6723

6,5,86

(0(5

*(1&<

6723

352),1(7

352),%86

$6,QWHUIDFH

+0,

)&38

&RQWUROOHU

6,0$7,&

(76

6,0$7,&

(76

'3$6L

)/LQN

6SHF

2SWLRQDO

)', $,$2

','2

Figure 6-17 Configuration 3: Alternative integration in PROFINET networks under SIMATIC F-PLC via IE/PB Link

● Integration under SINUMERIK Power Line and Solution Line by means of PROFIBUS

type file (GSD) (available soon).

● Integration under failsafe controllers from third-party vendors, by means of the

PROFIBUS type file (GSD).

Scope of application

DP/AS-i F-Link is a PROFIBUS DP-V1 slave (to EN 50170) and AS-i master (in accordance

with AS-Interface Specification V3.0 to EN 50295) and enables transparent data access to

AS-Interface from the PROFIBUS DP. DP/AS-i F-Link is also the only AS-i master with which

safety-oriented input data can be transferred from ASIsafe slaves to a failsafe CPU with the

PROFIBUS DP master via the PROFIsafe protocol. Additional safety-oriented cabling or

monitoring is not required (in particular, no AS-Interface safety monitor is required).

Depending on the slave type, binary or analog values can be transferred. All slaves that

comply with AS-Interface Specification V3.0 can be operated as AS-i slaves.

PROFIBUS DP masters to DP-V0 or DP-V1 can exchange I/O data with lower-level AS-i

slaves cyclically. PROFIBUS DP masters with acyclic services to DP-V1 can also carry out

AS-i master calls (parameters, diagnosis). In addition to the digital I/O data, analog data is

also stored in a high-performance memory in the cyclic I/O area (during configuration with

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 127

Object Manager in STEP 7) of a failsafe S7-300/416 F-CPU (communication modules do not

need to be called separately).

In configuration mode, DP/AS-i F-Link reads the configuration data of the I/O devices on the

AS-Interface. Slave addresses can be set and code sequences of secure AS-i slaves taught

in via the display and operator input keys.

During operation, four LEDs and the display provide detailed diagnostic information which, if

necessary, can be used to localize faults immediately. A user program enables diagnosis

data sets to be read and made available to a higher-level operator control and monitoring

system (e.g. WinCC).

Design

● Stable, tried-and-tested plastic housing with degree of protection IP20 for DIN rail or wall

mounting.

● Compact design

– Display on the front for indicating the operating state and operational readiness of all

the connected and activated AS-Interface slaves.

– Two buttons on the front for commissioning and retrieving diagnostic data.

– Four LEDs for indicating the operating state of the device, PROFIBUS DP, and the

AS-Interface network.

– Front PROFIBUS DP connection with SUB D connector.

– Removable terminal blocks for connecting the AS-i +/- and power supply (by 24 V DC

PELV power supply unit); low width (45 mm).

● Simple installation on a DIN rail or on the wall.

● Operation without fan or battery.

● Rapid replacement of devices in the event of a fault.

Communications principle

The PROFIBUS DP master communicates with the AS-i slaves via DP/AS-i F-Link. The AS-i

communication objects are mapped to a contiguous data area for input and output data in

the PROFIBUS DP master. DP/AS-i F-Link manages two interfaces here:

● Interface with the PROFIBUS DP master: PROFIBUS DP

● Interface with the AS-i slaves: AS-Interface

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

128 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Configuration

DP/AS-i F-Link can be configured with STEP 7 as of version V5.4 SP1 or simply by copying

the actual configuration on the display.

Alternatively, DP/AS-i F-Link can be integrated by means of the PROFIBUS type file (GSD)

in the engineering tool.

When DP/AS-i F-Link is configured with STEP 7, the AS-Interface configuration can be

uploaded to STEP 7 as of V5.4 SP1.

Siemens AS-Interface slaves can also be easily configured in HW Config (slave catalog).

Programming

Unlike the AS-Interface safety monitor, DP/AS-i F-Link is simply a gateway with no separate

safety logic.

The safety function is programmed at the level of the higher-level failsafe DP master, e.g.:

● With Distributed Safety as of version V5.4 SP1 for SIMATIC S7-300F/416F

● With SAFETY INTEGRATED "SI-Basic" or "SI-COMFORT" NCU software for

SINUMERIK 840D SL.

6.2.3.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

DP/AS-i F-Link router PROFIBUS DP/AS-i

For safety-oriented data transmission from

ASISafe to PROFIBUS DP - PROFISAFE

Master profile M3/M4 in acc. with extended AS-I

Spec. 3.0

Degree of protection IP20

Screw terminals

3RK3141-1CD10

DP/AS-i F-Link router PROFIBUS DP/AS-i

For safety-oriented data transmission from

ASISafe to PROFIBUS DP - PROFISAFE

Master profile M3/M4 in acc. with extended AS-I

Spec. 3.0

Degree of protection IP20

Spring-loaded terminals

3RK3141-2CD10

DP/AS-i F-Link manual

German

Can be downloaded from the Internet

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 129

6.2.3.3 Connection

CAUTION

Switch off the supply voltage

Before starting work, disconnect the device from the supply.

NOTICE

Cable cross-sections and tightening torques

Note the maximum cable cross-sections and tightening torques:

What do I need? Specification and value

for removable terminal blocks

with screw terminals

Specification and value

for removable terminal blocks

with spring-loaded terminals

Screwdriver Cross-tip screwdriver

Size: PZ 2 (⌀ 5 … 6 mm)

Torque: 0.8 … 1.2 Nm

Flat-bladed screwdriver

Size: 0 or 1 (width to 3 mm) for

raising the terminal springs

Rigid cable Maximum number of cables x

cable cross-section:

1 x 0.5 … 4.0 mm2

2 x 0.5 … 2.5 mm2

Max. no. of cables x cable

cross-section:

2 x 0.25 … 1.5 mm2

Flexible cable with end

sleeve/cable lug

Max. no. of cables x cable

cross-section:

1 x 0.5 … 2.5 mm2

2 x 0.5 … 1.5 mm2

Max. no. of cables x cable

cross-section:

2 x 0.25 … 1.5 mm2

Flexible cable Not permitted Max. no. of cables x cable

cross-section:

2 x 0.25 … 1.5 mm2

Note

Functional ground - PE

Functional ground (FE) must be connected to the protective ground conductor PE with as

little resistance as possible.

Requirements

● The connection cables from the PELV power supply unit and AS-i cables are correctly

stripped to a length of 10 mm.

● Flexible cables with end sleeves or cable lugs are provided for connections to screw

terminal blocks.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

130 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Assignment of terminal blocks

Image Description Description

ASi- AS-i terminal for blue wire in

AS-i cable

ASi+ AS-i terminal for brown wire in

AS-i cable

L+ 24 V DC

M Ground to 24 V DC

/0)(

$6L

$6L

FE Functional ground

Connection for screw terminal blocks (MLFB: 3RK3141-1CD10)

Step Instructions Image

1 Insert the relevant cable into the square

opening of the screw terminal as far as it will

go.

2 Hold the cable in the screw terminal.

3 Tighten the screw of the terminal in which

the cable in inserted.

4 Pull the cable to ensure it is secure.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 131

Connection for spring-loaded terminal blocks (MLFB: 3RK3141-2CD10)

Step Instructions Image

1 Insert the 3 mm flat-bladed screwdriver for

loosening the terminal springs until it

engages in the square opening of the

spring-loaded terminal. Observe a 10°

horizontal angular deviation of the

screwdriver to the oval opening.

2 Insert the cable into the oval opening until it

engages.

3 Hold the cable in the spring-loaded terminal.

4 Remove the screwdriver.

5 Pull the cable to ensure it is secure.

~10°

3 mm

6.2.3.4 Diagnostics





















Figure 6-18 Front view of DP/AS-i F-Link

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

132 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

1 Removable terminal block

ASi-: connection for ASi - (blue wire in yellow AS-i cable)

2 Removable terminal block

ASi+: connection for ASi- (brown wire in yellow AS-i cable)

3 Cover for service and system interface (factory side)

4 PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB D 9-pin)

5 Removable terminal block

L+: 24 V DC

M: Ground to 24 V DC

FE: Functional ground

6 SET button: Confirm

MODE button: Selection

7 Labeling strip

8 Display: Two lines, red dot matrix display

9 RESET button: Factory setting (via coded operation)

10 DEVICE LED

AS-i LED

BF LED

SF LED

Meaning of the LEDs

DP/AS-i F-Link features the following four LEDs for indicating the current status and any

error messages:

LED Meaning

DEVICE Device status

ASi AS-i voltage / status

BF Bus fault (PROFIBUS DP)

SF Group fault

When the device is restarted, it carries out a self-test of the LEDs:

● All LEDs light up for 3 s.

● The two-colored DEVICE and ASi LEDs light up yellow.

Note

Defective device

If neither the LEDs nor the display light up when the power supply and AS-i voltage are

switched on, the device is defective.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 133

LED display DEVICE

Display Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF No 24 V DC power supply Check the 24 V DC power supply of the

DP / AS-i F-Link.

Green Device OK —

Flashing green Device in power up (self-test, configuration and

teaching of code sequences)

—

Yellow PROFIsafe address invalid or incorrect Enter the correct PROFIsafe address of the

DP / AS-i F-Link via the menu on the display.

Flashing yellow Factory settings not yet complete Switch the 24 V DC power supply of the

DP / AS-i F-Link off and then on again.

Flickering yellow Procedure for making factory settings —

Red Device defective Replace the defective DP / AS-i F-Link.

Flashing

red/green

Device defective Replace the defective DP / AS-i F-Link.

Flickering red Procedure for making factory settings —

LED display ASi

Display Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF AS-i voltage is too low or has failed Check the power supply for the AS-i slaves.

Green Device is in "protected" mode —

Flashing green AS-i configuration error Reconfigure the AS-i slave specified on the

display.

Yellow Device is in "configuration" mode —

Red No AS-i slave connected to AS-Interface. Connect an AS-i slave to AS-Interface.

This display does not appear in "Config" mode

(ASi LED yellow).

LED display BF

Display Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF PROFIBUS DP OK —

Red PROFIBUS DP connector not plugged in during

power up

Plug in the PROFIBUS DP connector during

power up.

Flashing red PROFIBUS DP parameterization/configuration

error

• Check the PROFIBUS DP connectors and

terminating resistors.

• Reconfigure the PROFIBUS DP node specified

in the display.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

134 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LED display SF

Display Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF No group fault —

Red Group fault, including the AS-i slaves Read out data record 92.

Buttons

The buttons on the front of DP/AS-i F-Link have the following function:

Button Meaning

MODE • Scroll down through messages and menu options by pressing it once.

• Jump back one entry with double-click.

• Increase the switching speed by pressing and holding it (> 1 s).

SET • Confirm a menu option or call up a further range of options.

• Change from status mode to menu mode.

MODE + SET • Return to the menu option "EXIT" by pressing both buttons at the same time in menu

mode.

RESET • Restore the factory settings in accordance with a predefined scheme.

Operating state of the display

The display has two operating states:

● Status mode (standard mode) with error and status messages for DP/AS-i F-Link and the

connected buses.

● Menu mode with the display menu.

In this mode, you can query and change settings as well as call up specific error

messages.

You can switch from menu mode to status mode in two different ways:

● Wait 30 s and the operating state switches automatically.

● Press the "MODE" and "SET" buttons at the same time and then press "SET" to confirm

"EXIT".

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 135

Display on screen (no menu in standard mode)

1st row 2nd row Meaning

Status message - / Parameter No fault, status display.

- No fault present

Parameter A fault with parameter is present.

Fault message flashing

Parameters,

continuous

underscore

A fault with more than one parameter is present (e.g. AS-i addresses 0, 1,

1A, 1B, 2, 2A, 2B, etc.).

- More than one type of fault is present, arranged according to priority.

Parameter More than one type of fault is present; a parameter for the current fault

type exists; the last parameter of a fault type is shown.

Fault message

flashing, continuous

underscore

Parameters,

continuous

underscore

More than one type of fault is present; more than one parameter for the

current fault type exists.

Querying the fault messages

The following options are available for querying fault messages:

● Scroll through all the parameters and fault messages with the "MODE" button.

● If you do not press anything, the display will automatically jump back to the fault with the

highest priority after 30 seconds.

● An outgoing fault disappears from the display immediately and the next pending fault

message appears.

Meaning of the fault and status messages

Display Possible cause Possible remedial measures

RUN▫

▫▫▫▫▫

No fault, everything is OK and DP / AS-i F-Link is

in "protected" mode.

RUNc

CFG▫▫

No fault, everything is OK and DP / AS-i F-Link is

in "configuration" mode

APF▫

▫▫▫▫▫

AS-i voltage is too low or has failed

(AS-i Power Fail)

Can occur in parallel with "BF▫▫" or "BF▫c"

messages.

Check the power supply.

Permissible values between ASi+ and ASi- are

26.5 DC to 31.5 V DC

OFFL

▫▫▫▫▫

DP / AS-i F-Link is in offline mode (no data traffic

on the AS-i bus)

Can occur in parallel with "BF▫▫" or "BF▫c"

messages

Not displayed in "APF▫" message.

Switch DP / AS-i F-Link to online mode

(e.g. with the command "set_offline_mode").

WAIT

▫▫▫▫▫

DP / AS-i F-Link in detection phase (ramp-up)

Can occur in parallel with "BF▫▫" or "BF▫c"

messages.

Wait until ramp-up is complete. Connect an AS-i

slave to the AS-i bus if this has not already been

done.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

136 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Display Possible cause Possible remedial measures

AS-i configuration error, deviation from TARGET

configuration (automatic address programming

switched off or more than one fault is present)

Can occur in parallel with "BF▫▫", "BF▫c",

"CODE", "PFF▫", or "PFFc" messages.

• Error type "f"

Remove the slave from the configuration or

connect the configured slave to the AS-i bus.

• Error type "E"

Modify the configured slave profile in

accordance with the available slave.

• Error type "D"

Reconfigure the specified slave.

Re 1) Example display; 2nd row structured as follows:

Character for fault type, left-justified AS-i address, right justified, e.g.

f Address configured but not found 0 Standard module with address 0

D Address found but not configured 0AB A / B module with address 0

1 Standard module with address 1

1A A / B module with address 1A

CER▫

f▫▫311)

E Address found and configured, but configured

profile (IO-ID-ID1-ID2) does not correspond to

the available module. 31B A / B module with address 31B

AS-i configuration error (automatic address

programming activated).

Can occur in parallel with "BF▫▫", "BF▫c",

"CODE", "PFF▫", or "PFFc" messages.

Connect the specified AS-i slave to the AS-i bus.

Re 2) Example display; 2nd row structured as follows:

Character for fault type, left-justified AS-i address, right justified, e.g.

f Address configured but not found. 1 Standard module with address 1

D Address found but not configured. 1A A / B module with address 1A

AUP▫

f▫▫312)

E Address found and configured, but configured

profile (IO-ID-ID1-ID2) does not correspond to

the available module.

31B A / B module with address 31B

Code sequence error and DP / AS-i F-Link in

"safety" mode.

Can occur in parallel with "BF▫▫" or "PFF▫"

messages.

• Check the wiring of the AS-i slave.

• Start teach-in for the code sequences.

• Replace the AS-i slave.

As soon as a configuration error occurs ("CER▫", "AUP▫"), the safety component of DP / AS-i F-Link no

longer monitors the AS-i bus, which means that code sequence errors are no longer detected or

reported.

Re 3) Example display; 2nd row structured as follows:

Character for fault type, left-justified AS-i address, right justified, e.g.

1 Standard module with address 1 c Address sends code sequence that does not

correspond to the taught sequence. 31 Standard module with address 31

CODE

c▫▫313)

Conditions for displaying code sequence errors:

• DP / AS-i F-Link is in protected mode.

• The module is configured as an active safety module.

• The module sends a code sequence that DP / AS-i F-Link does not expect.

No display for code sequences 0000, 00xx, or xx00 because they represent the standard operating

state when the contacts are open.

PFF▫

p▫▫314)

I/O fault and DP / AS-i F-Link is in "protected"

mode

Can occur in parallel with "BF▫▫", "CER▫",

"AUP▫", or "CODE" messages.

Rectify the cause of the I/O fault on the AS-i slave.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 137

Display Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Re 4) Example display; 2nd row structured as follows:

Character for fault type, left-justified AS-i address, right justified, e.g.

1 Standard module with address 1

1A A / B module with address 1A

p Address signals I/O (periphery) fault flag

(PFF).

31B A / B module with address 31B

PFFc

p▫▫314)

I/O fault and DP / AS-i F-Link in "configuration"

mode.

Can occur in parallel with "BF▫c" messages.

Rectify the cause of the I/O fault on the AS-i slave.

PROFIBUS DP fault and DP / AS-i F-Link is in

"protected" mode.

Can occur in parallel with CER▫", "AUP▫",

"CODE", "PFF▫", or other messages.

Reconfigure the specified PROFIBUS DP node.

Re 5) Example display; 2nd row structured as follows:

BF▫▫

DP▫285)

"DP", left-justified PROFIBUS DP address (0 ... 126), right justified

BF▫c

DP▫285)

PROFIBUS DP fault and DP / AS-i F-Link is in

"configuration" mode.

Can occur in parallel with "PFF▫" or other

messages.

Reconfigure the specified PROFIBUS DP node.

BF▫▫

F-PAR

Invalid parameters for PROFIsafe and

DP / AS-i F-Link in "protected" mode.

Can occur in parallel with "CER▫" and "AUP▫"

messages.

Check that the "F_Dest_Add" parameter on the

PROFIsafe tab matches the set PROFIsafe

address.

BF▫c

F-PAR

Invalid parameters for PROFIsafe and

DP / AS-i F-Link in "configuration" mode.

Can occur in parallel with "PFFc" or other

messages.

Check that the "F_Dest_Add" parameter on the

PROFIsafe tab matches the set PROFIsafe

address.

Fault detected at ramp-up, or ramp-up not

successfully completed.

For example, PROFIBUS DP connector not

plugged in before switching on supply voltage

Connect the PROFIBUS DP connector to the

PROFIBUS DP interface.

DP / AS-i F-Link is in "configuration" mode. Change to protected mode.

Configuration fault pending (planned <> actual) Eliminate the configuration fault.

CT▫▫

NOK▫▫

Can occur in parallel with "BF▫▫", "CER▫", or "CFG▫▫" messages.

Invalid code sequence and DP / AS-i F-Link in

"protected" mode

Can occur in parallel with "CER▫", "AUP▫", or

"PFF▫" messages.

• Check the wiring of the AS-i slave.

• Replace the AS-i slave.

Re 6) Example display; 2nd row structured as follows:

Character for fault type, left-justified AS-i address, right justified, e.g.

1 Standard module with address 1 c Address sends code sequence that does not

correspond to the guidelines on permissible

code sequences. 31 Standard module with address 31

CTER

c▫▫316)

Conditions for displaying "CTER":

• DP / AS-i F-Link is in protected mode.

• The module is configured as an active safety module.

• The module sends an invalid code sequence to DP / AS-i F-Link that violates at least one

requirement regarding the validity of code sequences.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

138 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Display Possible cause Possible remedial measures

CT▫▫

c▫▫316)

A valid code sequence cannot be taught in for the

ASIsafe slave displayed.

Close the input contacts of the ASIsafe slave

displayed.

MENU Display in "menu mode". Status message, switch to normal mode:

• Automatic switchover after 30 s

• Press "MODE" + "SET" simultaneously.

Confirm the display "EXIT" by pressing "SET".

Key: "▫" = space

6.2.3.5 Technical specifications

Technical specifications

Transfer rates on each AS-Interface line

• AS-Interface bus cycle time 5 ms for 31 slaves;

10 ms for 62 slaves or in acc. with the Complete

AS-Interface Specification V3.0

• PROFIBUS transfer rate Max. 12 Mbit/s

Interfaces

• AS-Interface connection Via removable terminal blocks (with screw or

spring-loaded terminals)

• Connection to PROFIBUS-DP 1 x 9-pin SUB D socket

• Connection to Ethernet 1 x RJ45 socket

• 24 V DC power supply (PELV) 3-pin terminal contacts incl. functional earth, via

removable terminal blocks (with screw-type or

spring-loaded terminals)

Display 2 lines of 4 characters (red LED dot matrix)

Operation Via three keys (Set / Mode / Reset)

Power supply

• From AS-Interface In accordance with AS-Interface Specification

EN 50 295

• 24 V DC (PELV) 24 V DC, protective conductor

Current consumption

• From 24 V DC Max. 110 mA

Degree of protection IP20

Permissible ambient conditions

• Operating temperature -20°C to +50°C

Transport/storage temperature -40°C to +85°C

Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25°C

Operating altitude 2000 m above sea level

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 139

Technical specifications

Design

• Assembly On DIN rail

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 45 x 104 x 120

• Weight Approx. 300 g

Supported AS-Interface master profiles M1, M2, M3, and M4 (in accordance with

complete AS-Interface Specification V3.0)

AS-Interface configuration Via keys on front plate,

with STEP 7 as of version V5.4 SP1 for SIMATIC

S7-300F/416F

Safety function programming With Distributed Safety as of version V5.4 SP1

for SIMATIC S7-300F/416F

with SAFETY INTEGRATED "SI-Basic" or

"SI-COMFORT" NCU software for SINUMERIK

840D SL

Approvals CE, TÜV, UL (requested), AS-Interface certificate

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

140 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

6.2.4 IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

6.2.4.1 Overview

Transparent data access to AS-Interface from Industrial Ethernet

● Compact router between Industrial Ethernet (PROFINET IO device) and AS-Interface

● Single and double AS-Interface master (to AS-Interface Specification V3.0) for connecting

62 AS-Interface slaves in each case and integrated analog value transfer

● High-performance, integrated analog value transmission

● Integrated ground-fault monitoring for the AS-Interface cable

● User-friendly on-site diagnosis and commissioning functions via a graphical display and

controls or via a Web interface with a standard browser.

● Optimum TIA integration via STEP 7, integration in engineering tools from third-party

vendors via the PROFINET type file (GSDML)

● Vertical integration (standard Web interface (Page 72)) via Industrial Ethernet

● Power supplied via the AS-Interface cable or with 24 V DC (optional).

● Modules can be exchanged without the PG by means of C-PLUG (optional).

Benefits

● Quick commissioning by means of simple configuration at the touch of a button and

testing the AS-Interface line via the display or Web interface.

● User-friendly diagnosis via the display or Web interface help reduce downtime and

service times if a slave fails.

● Reduced installation costs because the power is supplied entirely via the AS-Interface

cable, which means that no additional power supply is required.

● User-friendly configuration of Siemens slaves by dragging/dropping them to HW Config

(STEP 7) helps reduce engineering work.

Scope of application

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is a PROFINET IO device (to IEC 61158) and AS-Interface master (in

accordance with AS-Interface Specification V3.0 to EN 50 295) and enables transparent data

access to the AS-Interface from Industrial Ethernet.

PROFINET IO controllers can exchange I/O data with the AS-Interface cyclically. Acyclic

services also enable AS-i master calls to be carried out (parameters, diagnosis). IE/AS-i

LINK PN IO is, therefore, suitable for distributed configurations and for integrating a

lower-level AS-Interface network.

The AS-i single master version of IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is suitable for applications with typical

volumes of data.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 141

The AS-i double master version of IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is suitable for applications with large

volumes of data. In this case, the double data volumes can be processed on two separate

AS-i lines.

ZLWK62)71(731,2 6

HJZLWK&3

6

ZLWK&3

$GYDQFHG

2SHUDWLRQ

0RQLWRULQJ

:KHQ,($6L/,1.31,2LVXVHG

DVGRXEOHPDVWHU

6DIHVODYH

ZLWK(0(5*(1&<6723

6DIHW\

PRQLWRU

6DIHVODYH

ZLWK(0(5*(1&<6723

/DVHU

VFDQQHU 6DIHW\

PRQLWRU

3RZHU

VXSSO\

XQLW

3RZHU

VXSSO\

XQLW

/2*2

6ODYH

(7SUR(76

6&$/$1&(

;

*B,.B'(B

,($6L

/,1.

31,2

Figure 6-19 Integration of AS-Interface in PROFINET via IE/AS-i LINK PN IO as single/double master

An upstream IWLAN client module (e.g. SCALANCE W746-1PRO) can be used for the

wireless integration of an AS-Interface line in the PROFINET environment. Examples of

applications here include those that were previously implemented with fault-prone ground

cables or contact conductors. This helps cut maintenance costs.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

142 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

5DGLRFHOO 5DGLRFHOO

)LHOG3*

1RWHERRN

ZLWK&3

'ULYHUOHVVWUDQVSRUWDWLRQV\VWHP

6&$/$1&(

:352 6&$/$1&(

:352

6

6,0$7,&+0,

&OLHQW0RGXOH

6&$/$1&(

:352

,($6L

/,1.

31,2

*B,.B'(B

Figure 6-20 Wireless communication between Industrial Ethernet and As-Interface components

Design

● Robust plastic housing with degree of protection IP20 for mounting on DIN rails.

● Compact design

– Display on the front plate for accurately indicating the operating state and operational

readiness of all the connected and activated AS-Interface slaves.

– Buttons for commissioning and testing the AS-Interface line directly on IE/AS-i LINK

PN IO

– LEDs for indicating the operating state of PROFINET IO and AS-Interface.

– Integrated two-port switch (RJ45 socket) for the connection to Industrial Ethernet

supports the line topology without an external switch.

– User-friendly commissioning, diagnosis, and testing of IE/AS-i LINK PN IO via a Web

interface with a standard browser.

– Power supplied via the AS-Interface shaped cable or with 24 V DC (optional).

– Low installation depth due to lowered plug fitting.

● Easy installation on standard DIN rail.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 143

● Operation without fan or battery.

● Rapid replacement of devices by means of the exchange medium C-PLUG

(not supplied).

Function

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO provides the PROFINET IO master with cyclic access to the I/O data for

all slaves in a lower-level AS-Interface segment. According to the extended AS-Interface

Specification (V3.0), up to 62 slaves each with four inputs and four outputs as well as analog

slaves on each AS-Interface line can be connected.

In the IO controller, IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is normally assigned 62 input and 62 output bytes in

which the I/O data for the connected AS-Interface slaves is stored. The input/output buffer

can be compressed so that only the required I/O memory in the IO controller system is used.

The integrated function for analyzing analog signals is just as simple to use as the function

for accessing digital values.

PROFINET IO controllers can also trigger AS-Interface master calls via the acyclic

PROFINET services (e.g.: write parameters, change addresses, read diagnostic values).

An operator display in AS-Interface Link allows you to commission the lower-level AS-i line.

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is equipped with two switched Ethernet ports that allow you to leverage

the benefits of the integrated Web server, thereby making it even easier to use the operator

display. The firmware can also be upgraded.

The optional C-PLUG allows you to replace modules without a PG, thereby minimizing

downtime if a fault occurs.

Diagnostics

A comprehensive range of diagnostic functions are available via displays, controls, a Web

interface, or STEP 7. These include:

● Operating state of the link

● State of the link as a PROFINET IO device

● Diagnosis of the AS-Interface network

● Telegram statistics

● Standard diagnosis pages for rapid access to diagnostic data by means of a standard

browser

Configuration

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO can be configured with STEP 7 as of version V5.4 SP2 or simply by

copying the actual configuration on the display.

Alternatively, IE/AS-i LINK IO can be integrated by means of the PROFINET type file (GSD)

in the engineering tool:

● STEP 7 versions older than V5.5 SP2

● Engineering tools from third-party vendors

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

144 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

When configuration is carried out with STEP 7, the AS-Interface configuration can be

uploaded to STEP 7 as of V5.4 SP2. Siemens AS-i slaves can also be easily configured in

HW Config (slave catalog).

6.2.4.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

Router between Industrial Ethernet and AS-Interface;

Master profiles M3 and M4, extended AS-Interface

Specification V3.0; degree of protection IP20;

Manual available on CD-ROM,

German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

Single master with display

6GK1 411-2AB10

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

Router between Industrial Ethernet and AS-Interface;

Master profiles M3 and M4, extended AS-Interface

Specification V3.0; degree of protection IP20;

Manual available on CD-ROM,

German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

Double master with display

6GK1 411-2AB20

Accessories

C-Plug

Exchange medium for replacing the devices quickly and

easily if a fault occurs; for recording configuration and

application data, can be used in SIMATIC Net products with

C-PLUG slot

6GK1 900-0AB00

IE FC RJ45 Plug 90

RJ45 connector for Industrial Ethernet with a robust metal

housing and integrated insulation displacement/terminal

contacts for connecting the Industrial Ethernet FC

installation cables; with 90° cable outlet (e.g. for ET 200S)

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0 (1 package with 1 piece)

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0 (1 package with 10 pieces)

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0 (1 package with 50 pieces)

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 145

6.2.4.3 Connection

Connections

IE/AS-i LINK features the following connections:

Two separate connections to the AS-i cable (with double master)

One connection for an alternative 24 V DC power supply (optional) and functional ground

Two LAN RJ45 connections as independent switch ports (one on PROFINET IO and one, for

example, for the WBM configuration)

Connections to the AS-i cable(s) and power supply

IE/AS-i LINK has two connections for AS-i cables (lines 1 and 2). They are each connected

via a 4-pin connector each with two + and two - terminals (jumpered internally).

This allows IE/AS-i LINK to be "looped in" to the AS-i cable.

CAUTION

Maximum load-carrying capacity

The maximum load-carrying capacity of the AS-i connection contacts is 3 A. If this value is

exceeded on the AS-i cable, IE/AS-INTERFACE LINK PN IO must not be "looped in" to the

AS-i cable but must instead be connected via a spur line (one connection pair only

occupied by IE/AS-i LINK).

IE/AS-i LINK can receive its entire power supply from the AS-Interface (AS-i line 1 only). The

current consumption from the AS-Interface here is 320 mA at 30 V.

Alternatively, IE/AS-i LINK can be supplied via a separate power supply unit (24 V DC).

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

146 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

s,($6L/,1.31,2

$6L$6L

(6& 2.

$3)

&(5

$83

$6LOLQH

&RQQHFWLRQ $6LOLQH

&RQQHFWLRQ

3RZHUVXSSO\

FRQQHFWLRQ9

/$1FRQQHFWLRQ

/$1FRQQHFWLRQ

Figure 6-21 Connecting the AS-i cable(s) and power supply

Connector assignment for the AS-i line

PIN no. line 1 Signal

1 AS-i 1 +

2 AS-i 1 -

3 AS-i 1 +

4 AS-i 1 -

PIN no. line 2 Signal

1 AS-i 2 +

2 AS-i 2 -

3 AS-i 2 +

4 AS-i 2 -

PIN 1 and 3 as well as PIN 2 and 4 are jumpered internally with each other.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 147

Connector assignment for the power supply

PIN no. line 1 Signal

1 Power +

2 Power -

3 PE

Note

Functional ground - PE

IE/AS-INTERFACE LINK PN IO features a connection for functional ground. This connection

is required if the integrated ground-fault monitoring function is used. It must be connected to

the protective conductor with as little resistance as possible.

LAN connections (PROFINET IO, PC with WBM)

The connections to PROFINET and a PC (or network) are established via two RJ45 sockets

(recommended: 90° FC connector).

A LAN connection is provided for the PROFINET system. The second LAN connection for

IE/AS-i LINK is used for configurations via Web-based management and for diagnostic

purposes, for example. Both LAN connections are identical.

IE/AS-i LINK supports autocrossing (i.e. crossed and uncrossed cables can be used).

Connector assignment for the LAN connection

PIN no. Signal

1 RXP

2 RXN

3 TXP

4 n.c.

5 n.c.

6 TXN

7 n.c.

8 n.c.

n.c. = not used

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

148 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

6.2.4.4 Diagnostics

s,($6L/,1.31,2

$6L$6L

(6& 2.

$3)

&(5

$83

/('V

,($6L/,1.$GY

/('V

$6LOLQH

$6LOLQH

&RQQHFWLRQ

$6LOLQH

&RQQHFWLRQ

5HOHDVH

VOLGHIRU

',1UDLO

DVVHPEO\

3RZHUVXSSO\

FRQQHFWLRQ9

F3/8*

RSWLRQDO 'LVSOD\

/('/,1.

/$1FRQQHFWLRQ

;

.H\ERDUG

/('5;7;

/('/,1.

/$1FRQQHFWLRQ

;

/('5;7;

Figure 6-22 Front view of IE/AS-i LINK PN IO (double master)

The following LEDs are located on the front of IE/AS-i LINK:

● Indicators for the LAN connections (for X1 and X2 in each case)

– LINK: connection to the Ethernet partner

– RX/TX: Data traffic

● Indicators for IE/AS-i LINK

– SF: System error

– BF: Bus fault

– ON: IE/AS-i LINK power supply

● Indicators for the AS-i line

– SF: AS-i system error

– APF: AS-i power failure

– CER: Configuration error

– AUP: Automatic address programming

– CM: Configuration mode

– ON: AS-i line power supply

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 149

Meaning of the IE/AS-i LINK LEDs

LED Color Status Meaning

SF Red System error (link) This LED lights up in the following cases:

• In protected mode: a diagnostic alarm (incoming) was

triggered in the PROFINET IO controller.

• IE/AS-i LINK has detected an internal fault (e.g. EEPROM is

defective).

BF Red Bus fault This LED flashes in the following cases:

• The connection between the PROFINET IO controller and

IE/AS-i LINK is interrupted or the PROFINET IO controller is

not active.

• IE/AS-i LINK has been incorrectly parameterized/configured by

the PROFINET IO controller.

ON Green — This LED lights up when IE/AS-i LINK is supplied with voltage.

Meaning of the AS-i line LEDs

LED Color Status Meaning

SF Red System error (line) In protected mode: a diagnostic alarm (incoming) was triggered in

the PROFINET IO controller.

APF Red AS-i power failure Indicates that the voltage supplied by the AS-i power supply unit

on the AS-i cable is too low or is faulty.

CER Yellow Configuration error This LED indicates whether the slave configuration detected on

the AS-i cable matches the target configuration in IE/AS-i LINK. If

any discrepancies are detected, the CER LED lights up.

The CER LED lights up in the following cases:

• A configured AS-i slave is not detected on the AS-i cable (e.g.

the slave has failed).

• An AS-i slave that has not yet been configured is detected on

the AS-i cable.

• A connected AS-i slave has different configuration data

(I/O configuration, ID code) to the AS-i slave configured in

IE/AS-i LINK.

• IE/AS-i LINK is in offline mode.

AUP Green Autoprog available When IE/AS-i LINK is in protected mode, this LED indicates that

the address of an AS-i slave can be programmed automatically.

Automatic address programming makes it easier to replace a

defective AS-i slave on the AS-i cable.

CM Yellow Configuration mode This display indicates the IE/AS-i LINK operating mode.

• Display ON: Configuration mode

• Display OFF: Protected mode

Configuration mode is only required for commissioning IE/AS-i

LINK. In configuration mode, IE/AS-i LINK activates all the

connected AS-i slaves and exchanges data with them.

ON Green — This LED lights up when IE/AS-i LINK is supplied with voltage.

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

150 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Keyboard

You can use the operator input keys to switch operating mode. The lower-level AS-i line can

also be configured using the operator input keys and display.

Display

The graphical display has a resolution of 128 x 64 pixels.

The lower-level AS-i line is configured with the display/WBM together with the keyboard,

display/wbm (Page 72) which means that commissioning and diagnosis can be carried out

locally.

The following display appears when the device is switched on or if no user inputs are made

over a long period:

Figure 6-23 Logo on the display

Note

Error message during operation

If a fault occurs during operation, an error message is output even if the logo was displayed

beforehand.

As soon as any keyboard input is made, the main menu appears in which you can navigate

in the menu structure.

If an entry in the list is selected (inverse display), a ticker text automatically appears after a

short period with further information (not in the main menu).

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 151

6.2.4.5 Technical specifications

Technical specifications

Transmission rates on each AS-Interface line

• AS-Interface bus cycle time 5 ms for 31 slaves;

10 ms for 62 slaves

• Ethernet transmission rate 10/100 Mbit/s, autosensing

Interfaces

• AS-Interface connection 1 x 4-pin terminal contacts (plug-in type)

• Single master 1 x 4-pin terminal contacts (plug-in type)

• Double master (2 AS-i lines) 2 x 4-pin terminal contacts (plug-in type)

• Connection to Ethernet 2 x RJ45 sockets (switchports)

• Optional: 24 V DC power supply 3-pin terminal contacts (connectable) incl.

functional earth for internal earth-fault monitoring

Display 128 x 64 pixels with backlighting

Keys Membrane keyboard

Power supply

• From the AS-Interface shaped cable In accordance with AS-Interface Specification

EN 50 295

• Optional 24 V DC

Current consumption

• From the AS-Interface shaped cable Max. 250 mA

Load-carrying capacity max. 3A

• Power loss 7.5 W

Degree of protection IP20

Permissible ambient conditions

• Operating temperature

• Horizontal installation 0°C to +60°C

• Vertical installation 0°C to +45°C

Transport/storage temperature -30°C to +70°C

Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25°C

Operating altitude 3000 m above sea level

Design

• Installation On DIN rail

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 90 x 132 x 88.5

• Weight Approx. 380 g

Supported AS-Interface master profiles M1, M2, M3, and M4 (in accordance with

AS-Interface Specification V3.0)

AS-Interface configuration By means of buttons on the front plate,

with STEP 7 as of version V5.4 SP2

via Web interface

Master

6.2 Routers

AS-Interface system

152 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 153

Power supply units 7

7.1 Overview

Space-saving power supply units and data decoupling

AS-Interface power supply units are among the most important components of an

AS-Interface network. They supply the electronic network components (AS-Interface

modules and AS-Interface masters) as well as the connected sensors. Integrated data

decoupling in the AS-Interface power supply units ensure that data and energy are kept

separate but that AS-Interface can transfer data and energy along the same cable.

Benefits

● Compact design saves space in the cabinet/field.

● Increased output power allows additional AS-Interface nodes to be connected.

● Integrated ground-fault and overload detection functions make the application more

reliable, which does away with the need for additional components.

● Diagnostic memory, remote indication, and remote reset allow faults in the system to be

quickly detected, thereby reducing downtimes.

● Spring-loaded connection system allow the devices to be installed quickly and securely.

● Terminal blocks can be quickly replaced, thereby reducing downtimes.

● The ultra-wide range input of the 8 A version allows single and dual-phase operation,

which means that a neutral conductor is not required.

● UL/CSA ensures that the device can be used worldwide.

Power supply units

7.1 Overview

AS-Interface system

154 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Structure

Signaling

contacts

RESET

button

Remote

RESET

For 3RX95.. types only

AS-i +

Switched

Ground fault detection

LEDs

EMC filtering

inrush current

limiting

Input rectifica-

tion

Voltage conversion

Data links

Electronic switch with

overload detection

Figure 7-1 Basic structure of the AS-Interface power supply units

AS-Interface power supply units are primary-side regulated DC power supply units. The

primary switched-mode regulators generate a regulated DC voltage of 30 V DC with high

control stability and low residual ripple.

The AS-Interface two-wire cable transfers data and energy simultaneously. For this reason,

AS-Interface power supply units must ensure that the AS-Interface network is supplied with

power while the data is decoupled.

Standard power supply units are not suitable here, which is why standard power supply units

must not be used for supplying an AS-Interface network. AS-Interface power supply units

supply the network electronics (AS-Interface masters and AS-Interface modules) as well as

all the connected sensors. Graded power supply units from 2 to 8 A are available depending

on the power requirements of the AS-Interface network.

As shown in the block diagram, the new generation of AS-Interface power supply units

(3RX95...) with IP20 also features integrated ground-fault and overload detection.

Function: features of the latest generation of power supply units 3RX95..:

● Compact design

Available in widths of 50/70/120 mm, the latest devices are among the most compact

AS-Interface power supply units available offering a very high degree of power density.

Thanks to the small surface area of these devices, other devices can be mounted on the

DIN rail next to the power supply unit. As a result, they can be installed directly next to

other devices (unlike other compact power supply units).

Power supply units

7.1 Overview

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 155

● Increased power

The new devices have an output current of 3 / 5 / 8 A.

● Integrated ground-fault detection

Ground-fault detection to EN 60204-1 is obligatory for AS-Interface. The new generation

of AS-Interface power supply units all feature integrated ground-fault detection that

reliably detects and reports ground faults. Additional contacts also allow users to

determine whether the AS-Interface voltage is to be switched off directly if a ground fault

occurs, thereby preventing the machines from starting unintentionally and, in turn,

preventing the system from being damaged if a fault occurs.

● Remote reset and remote indication

The detected ground fault can be signaled and evaluated on a central controller via

brought-out signal contacts. The stored diagnostic data can be reset locally using the

reset button. It can also be reset, however, by a controller via a reset input.

● Integrated overload detection

An output-side overload is detected and signaled via a diagnostics LED.

● Diagnostic memory

A ground fault and output-side overload are stored in a diagnostic memory until the

system is reset and signaled via the appropriate LEDs. This makes it easier to diagnose

faults in an AS-Interface network because the service personnel can immediately identify

the potential source of system faults (even after a fault has occurred).

● Diagnostic LEDs

The status of the AS-Interface power supply unit can be determined locally on the power

supply unit via three differently-colored LEDs:

– Overload LED, red

– Ground-fault detection LED, yellow

– OK status LED, green (output voltage ≥ 26.5 V)

● Ultra-wide range input with 8 A

The ultra-wide range input from 120 to 500 V with the 8 A variant means that the device

can be used in virtually any network in the world. In addition, this variant does not require

a neutral conductor because the device can be connected directly between 2 phases in a

network.

● Removable terminal blocks with spring-loaded connection

The power supply unit is equipped with three terminal blocks: one block for the input side,

one for the output side, and one for the information terminals. These can be removed if

required, thereby enabling the power supply unit to be quickly and easily replaced if a

fault occurs. The spring-loaded connection system used for the terminals also enables

the cable strands to be quickly and securely connected.

Power supply units

7.2 Order numbers

AS-Interface system

156 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

7.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

AS-Interface power supply unit IP20

• Single output IP20

• With integrated ground-fault detection

6GK7142-2AH00-0XA0

Output current Input voltage

3 A 115 / 230 V AC (switchable) 3RX9 501-0BA00

3 A 24 V DC 3RX9 501-1BA00

5 A 115 / 230 V AC (switchable) 3RX9 502-0BA00

8 A 115 / 230 ... 500 V AC

(switchable)

3RX9 503-0BA00

7.3 Connection

Selecting the installation location

● The power supply unit must be installed vertically to ensure sufficient heat dissipation.

● A clearance of at least 50 mm should be maintained above and below the device.

● The device is clipped on to a 35 mm DIN rail.

Connecting a 3 A / 24 V DC IN power supply unit (3RX9 501-1BA00)

To implement the ground-fault monitoring function, the device must be connected to GND.

The device is equipped with a primary-side internal fuse.

All terminals can be removed if required.

Power supply units

7.3 Connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 157

FRP





2.



)DXOW

FRP



*1'

$6Lದ

$6L

$6L6:,7&+('

 '&9P$

'&9P$



1& 

12



1& 

12

/



/

0

   

9

9ದ

5(6(7

,1387

9 9



2.2YHUORDG

()'

5(6(7

*1'

$6L $6L

5HVHW $6L

,1 0

()'

&RP 1& 12

O87387

{

Power supply units

7.3 Connection

AS-Interface system

158 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Connecting 3 A (3RX9 501-0BA00), 5 A (3RX9 502-0BA00), and 8 A (3RX9 503-0BA00) power

supply units

The power supply (120 / 130 V AC) must be connected in accordance with VDE 0100 and

VDE 0160. The network must be fused with max. 20 A (USA) or 16 A (IEC). The device is

equipped with a primary-side internal fuse.

All terminals can be removed if required.

,1387

/13(

123

10 11 12 13

O.K.Overload

EFD

RESE T

GND

AS-i+ AS -i-

Reset AS -i+

IN M24

EFD

Com N.C. N.O.

OUTPUT

/

*1'

$6L

$6L

$6L6:,7&+('

'&9P$

'&9P$

5(6(7

/

0

FRP





1& 

12

/



2. )DXOW

FRP





1& 

12



Power supply units

7.4 Diagnostics

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 159

7.4 Diagnostics

Status display via LEDs

You can determine the status of the AS-Interface power supply units via the three LEDs at

the bottom of the devices.

The following table provides an overview of the status displays:

"OK" LED "Overload" LED "EFD" LED Operating status

ON, green OFF OFF Status OK

(with 3RX9 501 / 2 / 3-0BA00: output voltage ≥ 26.5 V)

OFF OFF OFF No voltage on the device

ON, green Flashing, red OFF Overload detected

ON, green OFF ON, yellow Ground fault detected

7.5 Technical specifications

AS-Interface power supply unit

Single output IP20

Output current

3 A

Output current

3 A

Output current

5 A

Output current

8 A

3RX9 501-0BA00 3RX9 501-1BA00 3RX9 502-0BA00 3RX9 503-0BA00

Input data

• Primary voltage Ue 120 / 230 V AC 24 V DC 120 / 230 V AC 120 / 230 ... 500 V AC

• Working voltage range 85 ... 132 /

176 ... 253 V AC

20 ... 29 V DC 85 ... 132 /

176 ... 253 V AC

85 ... 132 /

176 ... 550 V AC

• Line frequency range 47 ... 63 Hz - 47 ... 63 Hz 47 ... 63 Hz

• Mains buffering at

aNenn > 20 ms > 10 ms > 20 ms > 20 ms

• Primary rated current 1.6 / 0.9 A 4.5 A 2.7 / 1.5 A 4.4 / 2.4 A

Output data

• Rated output voltage

a rated30 30 V DC 30 V DC 30 V DC 30 V DC

• Residual ripple / spikes < 50 mVpp

(10 ... 500 kHz)

< 300 mVpp

(0 ... 10 kHz)

< 50 mVpp

(10 ... 500 kHz)

< 300 mVpp

(0 ... 10 kHz)

< 50 mVpp

(10 ... 500 kHz)

< 300 mVpp

(0 ... 10 kHz)

< 50 mVpp

(10 ... 500 kHz)

< 300 mVpp

(0 ... 10 kHz)

• Rated output current

a rated 3 A 3 A 5 A 8 A

• Current limitation activation

point typ. 3.5 A typ. 3.5 A typ. 5.5 A typ. 8.5 A

Power supply units

7.6 Dimension drawings

AS-Interface system

160 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

AS-Interface power supply unit

Single output IP20

• Efficiency at full load typ. 84% typ. 84% typ. 87% typ. 87%

Ambient conditions

• Storage/transport temperature -25 ... +80 °C -25 ... +80 °C -25 ... +80 °C -25 ... +80 °C

• Ambient temperature during

operation -10 ... +70 °C -10 ... +70 °C -10 ... +70 °C -10 ... +70 °C

• Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

• Degree of pollution 2 2 2 2

• Humidity class Climate class DIN 50010, max. relative humidity 100 %, without condensation

• EMC noise emissions

Class B IEC 61000-6-3 IEC 61000-6-3 IEC 61000-6-3 IEC 61000-6-3

• EMC noise immunity EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11

7.6 Dimension drawings

NSA0_00412a

125

Figure 7-2 Front view of 3RX9 501-0BA00, 3RX9 501-1BA00

Power supply units

7.6 Dimension drawings

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 161

NSA0_00413

125

Figure 7-3 Front view of 3RX9 502-0BA00

NSA0_00414

Figure 7-4 Front view of 3RX9 503-0BA00

Power supply units

7.6 Dimension drawings

AS-Interface system

162 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

NSA0_00415a

Figure 7-5 Side view of 3RX9 501-0BA00

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 163

Slaves 8

Overview of the I/O modules

The following I/O modules are available for AS-Interface:

Digital I/O modules for use in the field

● Degree of protection IP67

– I/O modules - K60

– I/O modules - K45

– I/O modules - K20

● Degree of protection IP68 / IP69K

– I/O modules - K60R

Analog I/O modules for use in the field

● Degree of protection IP67

– I/O modules - K60

Digital I/O modules for use in the cabinet

● Degree of protection IP20

– SlimLine modules of the S22.5 and S45 series

– F90 module

– Flat module

Digital I/O modules as specific integration solutions

● Degree of protection IP00 or with housing

– Communication modules for PCB installation

Modules with special functions

● Counter modules

Housing and front panel module for AS-Interface

● AS-Interface housing with standard components

● Customized AS-Interface housing

● AS-Interface front panel module

8WD4 signaling columns

AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

Contactor with AS-Interface

Slaves

8.1 Setting the AS-i address

AS-Interface system

164 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.1 Setting the AS-i address

Unique addressing

In the as-delivered condition, an I/O module (slave) has the address 0. It is detected by the

master as a new slave that has not yet been addressed and, in this condition, has not yet

been integrated in standard communication/data exchange.

To enable data to be exchanged between the master and slaves, you have to assign a

unique address for each slave (i.e. each slave address must be different) when

commissioning the AS-Interface network.

You can choose the addresses as required:

● In address range 1 to 31, for slaves with standard addressing mode

● In address range 1A to 31A and 1B to 31B, for slaves with extended addressing mode

(A/B slaves, as of AS-i Spec. 2.1)

Addresses can also be assigned once the devices have been installed.

Addressing the slaves

You can set the slave address in different ways:

● Offline with the addressing unit via the addressing socket or at the AS-i connection.

Recommended when assigning addresses for the entire system. The direct connection

between the slave and addressing unit ensures that the slave modules are not mixed up.

● Online by the AS-i master and in the PLC configuration software.

Recommended for assigning addresses to individual slaves if an addressing unit is not

available. Before assigning addresses, you must ensure that each address exists only

once in the AS-i network, that is, several new, additional modules (with address 0 in

as-delivered condition) must not be connected to the AS-i cable.

CAUTION

As soon as you have assigned a valid address, the master can start cyclic data

communication, that is, outputs can be set or inputs read that result in follow-up switching

operations. Make sure that the system does not enter a hazardous state (e.g. switch off the

AS-i voltage as a precaution).

Slaves

8.1 Setting the AS-i address

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 165

Offlline addressing with the addressing unit using a K45 module as an example

1 Unscrew the cover cap for the addressing socket on the

module.

2 Connect the module to the addressing unit (3RK1904 2AB0).

3 Assign an address to the module.

• Switch the selector switch to ADDR.

• Press . The address of the connected module is read

and displayed.

• Select the address by choosing .

• To transfer the address to the module, choose .

4 Remove the addressing cable.

5 Seal the addressing socket with the cover cap.

3RK1904-2AB01

±5

Ncm

Slaves

8.2 Connection

AS-Interface system

166 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.2 Connection

AS-Interface bus and auxiliary voltage (AUX POWER)

Depending on the design of the I/O module, the following options are available for

connecting the AS-i bus and AUX POWER.

● With the shaped cable for AS-i (yellow) and AUX POWER (black) by means of the

insulation displacement method (piercing)

● With round cables and standard M12 connectors

● Wiring as required to screw-type or spring-loaded terminals

Actuators and sensors

● Connection via standard M12 or M8 connectors for modules for use in the field (degree of

protection ≥ IP67, compact modules K20, K45, and K60).

● Connection via screw or spring-loaded terminals for modules for use in the cabinet

(degree of protection IP20, SlimLine modules, F90 module and flat module)

8.2.1 Connecting the shaped cable for AS-i and AUX POWER

Proceed as follows:

1 Secure the module on a flat surface.

2 Insert the yellow AS-i shaped cable and, if

necessary, the black shaped cable for AUX

POWER into the cutouts on the mounting plate

of the compact modules (K60 and K45).

3 Hook the module onto the holding studs on the

mounting plate.

5..$

s1FP

ದ1P











Secure the compact module to the mounting

plate. This also ensures that contact is

established with the shaped cables by means

of the insulation displacement method.

Slaves

8.2 Connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 167

8.2.2 AS-i connection via M12 connector

When round cables are used, AS-Interface is connected to an M12 connector.







1 = UAS-i +

2 = AUX power –

3 = UAS-i –

4 = AUX power +

M12 sockets that are not required must be sealed with screw caps (3RK1901-1KA00) to

ensure that the required degree of protection is maintained.

8.2.3 Connection via terminals

Screw terminals

To screw/unscrew the screw terminals, you need a PZ2 screwdriver. The tightening torque

should be between 0.8 and 1.2 Nm.

For the connection cross-sections and stripping lengths, see the table.

Connection type Connection cross-sections

1 x 0.5 ... 4.0 mm² / 2 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²

1 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm² / 2 x 0.5 ... 1.5 mm²

Slaves

8.2 Connection

AS-Interface system

168 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Spring-loaded terminals

Step Explanation

1 You need a 3 mm flat-bladed screwdriver.

2 To release the clamping springs, insert the screwdriver as far as it will

go into the square opening of the spring-loaded terminal. Position the

screwdriver at an angle of 10° with respect to the oval opening.

3 Insert the cable into the oval opening as far as it will go.

4 Hold the cable in the spring-loaded terminal.

5 Remove the screwdriver.

6 Pull the cable to ensure it is secure.

~10°

For the connection cross-sections and stripping lengths, see the table.

Connection type Connection cross-sections

2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²

Removable terminals

The SlimLine modules are equipped with removable terminals, which makes it easier to

replace the device if required. The terminals are coded to prevent confusion.

CAUTION

Before replacing the terminals, you must disconnect the system and device from the power

supply.

Slaves

8.2 Connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 169

Replacing the removable terminals

Step Description

a Undo the interlock.

b Remove the terminal.

c Insert the new terminal.

d Push the terminal into the device until the interlock audibly engages.

Coding

A, B, C, D:

Figure 8-1 Replacing the removable terminals

8.2.4 M12 - standard assignment - digital inputs

1 Supply L+

2 Input signal (jumpered with pin 4)

3 Supply L–

4 Input signal (jumpered with pin 2)

5 Ground connection

Slaves

8.2 Connection

AS-Interface system

170 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.2.5 M12 - Y assignment - digital inputs

1 Supply L+

2 Input signal 2

3 Supply L–

4 Input signal 1

5 Ground connection

8.2.6 M12 - Y/II assignment - digital inputs

1 Supply L+ Supply L+

2 Input signal 2 Unassigned

3 Supply L– Supply L–

4 Input signal 1 Input signal 2

Socket 1 Socket 2

alternative

5 Ground connection Ground connection

Note

Input signal 2 can be wired to either socket 1 only or socket 2 only.

8.2.7 M8 - assignment - digital inputs

1 Supply L+

3 Supply L–







4 Input signal

Slaves

8.2 Connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 171

8.2.8 M12 - standard assignment - digital outputs

Circuit diagram Pin Assignment

1 Unassigned

2 Unassigned

3 Supply L–

4 Output signal







5 Ground connection

8.2.9 M12 - Y assignment - digital outputs

1 Unassigned

2 Output signal 2

3 Supply L–

4 Output signal 1







5 Ground connection

8.2.10 M12 - Y/II assignment - digital outputs

1 Unassigned Unassigned

2 Output signal 2 Unassigned

3 Supply L– Supply L–

4 Output signal 1 Output signal 2

Socket 1 Socket 2

DOWHUQDWLYH













5 Ground connection Ground connection

Note

Output signal 2 can be wired to either socket 1 only or socket 2 only.

Slaves

8.2 Connection

AS-Interface system

172 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.2.11 M8 - assignment - digital outputs

1 Unassigned

3 Supply L–

4 Output signal

Slaves

8.3 Diagnostics

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 173

8.3 Diagnostics

Status display

The status of a module is indicated by the LEDs by either a continuous or flashing light,

which enables the module to be diagnosed at a glance:

● For AS-i communication

depending on the design, via two LEDs or via a dual LED

● For the auxiliary voltage UAUX

with a green LED

● For the switching state of the inputs and outputs

with yellow LEDs

The following section provides an overview of the LED status displays for the input/output

modules.

8.3.1 LED status displays for modules with two LEDs for AS-i and FAULT

AS-i FAULT Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green OFF Normal operation,

AS-i communication OK

Green Red No AS-i communication:

• The master is switched off or

offline.

• The slave is not configured in

the master.

• The incorrect slave type is

connected.

• The slave has the wrong

address.

Ensure AS-i communication:

• Switch on the master or switch it to online

mode.

• Reconfigure the master.

• Connect the correct module.

• Check/correct the slave address.

Green Flashing red Sensor supply overload

(Slave is in RESET mode

and switches off completely)

Unplug the sensor cables from the input

sockets, user sensors with a lower overall

current consumption,

check the sensors/cables.

Flashing green Red The slave has the address 0

(as-delivered condition)

Assign an address that is not 0.

Flashing green Flashing red

(alternating flashing)

Output overload

(the slave switches off all the

outputs)

Unplug the actuator cables from the output

sockets,

check the actuators and cables.

OFF OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with

incorrect polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage, connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx. 30 V DC)

With SlimLine modules, the FAULT LED is not labeled. It is located directly under the AS-i

LED.

The status "output overload" (green/red alternate flashing) is not displayed by all modules.

Slaves

8.3 Diagnostics

AS-Interface system

174 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

With analog modules, the following assignment applies:

AS-i FAULT Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Flashing green Flashing red

(alternating flashing)

No analog data exchange (triple

exchange) on AS-i

Use AS-i master to AS-i Spec. 2.1 or more

The AS-i master is waiting for

analog output data from the PLC

(with analog output modules only)

Set CPU to RUN,

send data set with analog output data to the

AS-i master (CP 343-2, CP 343-2P, Link

20E).

Sensor supply overload

(with analog input modules only)

Unplug the sensor cables from the input

sockets, user sensors with a lower overall

current consumption,

check the sensors and cables.

8.3.2 LED status displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT

AS-i/FAULT Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

AS-i communication OK

—

Red No AS-i communication:

• The master is switched off or offline.

• The slave is not configured in the master.

• The incorrect slave type is connected.

• The slave has the wrong address.

Ensure AS-i communication:

• Switch on the master or switch it to online mode.

• Reconfigure the master.

• Connect the correct module.

• Check/correct the slave address.

Flashing red Sensor supply overload

(Slave is in RESET mode

and switches off completely)

Unplug the sensor cables from the input sockets,

user sensors with a lower overall current

consumption, check the sensors/cables.

Yellow/red flashing The slave has the address 0

(as-delivered condition)

Assign an address that is not 0.

Green/red flashing Output overload

(the slave switches off all the outputs)

Unplug the actuator cables from the output sockets,

check the actuators and cables.

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage, connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx. 30 V DC)

The status "output overload" (green/red flashing) is not displayed by all modules.

Slaves

8.3 Diagnostics

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 175

8.3.3 LED status display AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage

AUX POWER Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

24 V DC auxiliary voltage OK

—

OFF • No auxiliary voltage

• Auxiliary voltage connected with

incorrect polarity

• Auxiliary voltage too low

• Auxiliary supply 24 V DC

• Connect it properly

• Measure the auxiliary voltage (approx. 24 V DC)

Modules that are not equipped with an auxiliary voltage connection do not have an AUX

POWER LED (e.g. pure input modules, modules with relay outputs).

SlimLine modules with a width of 22.5 mm do not have an AUX POWER LED.

8.3.4 LED status display for the switching state (yellow)

IN x (F-IN x) / OUT x Meaning

Yellow Signal activated

OFF Signal deactivated

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

176 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4 Input/output modules

8.4.1 Digital K60 input/output modules - panel IP67

8.4.1.1 Overview

Standard K60 compact modules

● K60 compact modules with max. four digital inputs and four digital outputs.

These compact modules contain the communications electronics and the standard M12

connections for inputs and outputs. Up to four sensors and four actuators can be

connected to the compact module.

● K60 compact modules with max. eight digital inputs and two digital outputs.

These modules have eight digital inputs with an M12 connector.

The module requires two AS-Interface addresses for processing all the inputs and

outputs. Addresses are assigned here using a double addressing socket.

● K60 compact modules with four digital inputs and outputs in accordance with AS-i

Specification 3.0.

AS-i Specification 3.0 extends the AS-Interface bus system to include a range of new

features.

Extended address mode (A/B addresses) allows 62 nodes to be connected to an AS-i

network. This means that, even in the case of A/B slaves, four outputs can now be used

(instead of just three outputs as defined in Specification 2.1). In the maximum

configuration of an AS-i network, therefore, this means that 248 inputs and 248 outputs

are available.

Note, however, that these modules can only be operated with a new master in

accordance with AS-i Specification 3.0 (e.g. new DP/AS-i LINK Advanced or IE/AS-i LINK

PN IO) and that the cycle times for the outputs in this case can be a maximum of 20 ms.

● K60 compact modules for use in potentially explosive areas (ATEX).

Two versions of the K60 modules are available for use in potentially explosive areas

(zone 22) in accordance with classification II 3D (dust in the air, non-conductive dust).

The version with four inputs and four outputs has the ID (Ex) II 3D T75 °C IP65X, the

version with four inputs has the ID (Ex) II 3D T60 °C IP65X.

Certain factors must be taken into account to ensure that these devices function safely

and reliably. In particular, suitable measures must be taken to protect the module against

mechanical damage. For further conditions for ensuring safe and reliable operation, see

Technical specifications (Page 178).

8.4.1.2 Connection

For information on connecting the AS-i bus and auxiliary voltage UAUX as well as the

actuators and sensors, see Connection (Page 166).

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 177

8.4.1.3 Order numbers

K60 compact modules

Inputs/outputs Type Assignment Current-carrying

capacity per output

Order no.

8 inputs / 2 outputs A/B slave Special

assignment

2 A 3RK2400–1HQ00–0AA3

8 inputs Standard slave Y-II assignment — 3RK1200–0DQ00–0AA3

8 inputs A/B slave Y-II assignment — 3RK2200–0DQ00–0AA3

4 inputs / 4 outputs Standard slave Y-II assignment 2 A 3RK1400–1DQ00–0AA3

4 inputs / 4 outputs Standard slave Standard

assignment

2 A 3RK1400–1CQ00–0AA3

4 inputs / 4 outputs Standard slave Y-II assignment 1 A 3RK1400–1DQ01–0AA3

4 inputs / 4 outputs Standard slave Standard

assignment

1 A 3RK1400–1DQ03–0AA3

4 inputs / 4 outputs A/B slave (Spec 3.0). Y-II assignment 2 A 3RK2400–1DQ00–0AA3

4 inputs / 3 outputs A/B slave Y-II assignment 2 A 3RK2400–1FQ03–0AA3

4 inputs / 2 outputs Standard slave Y-II assignment 2 A 3RK1400–1MQ00–0AA3

4 inputs Standard slave Y-II assignment — 3RK1200–0CQ00–0AA3

2 x 2 inputs / 2 x 2 outputs Standard slave Y-II assignment 1 A 3RK1400–1DQ02–0AA3

4 outputs Standard slave Y-II assignment 2 A 3RK1100–1CQ00–0AA3

4 Ein- /4 Ausgänge

Ausf. ATEX (Ex) II 3D X

Standard slave Y-II assignment 2 A 3RK1400–1DQ05–0AA3

4 inputs

version ATEX (Ex) II 3D X

Standard slave Y-II assignment — 3RK1200–0CQ05–0AA3

Accessories

Description Comments Order numbers

K60 mounting plate For wall mounting 3RK1901-0CA00

K60 mounting plate For DIN rail mounting 3RK1901-0CB01

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

178 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.1.4 Diagnostics

LEDs for AS-i and FAULT

The module has two LEDs for AS-i and FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with two LEDs for AS-i and FAULT (Page 173) .

LED display AUX POWER

The module also has an LED for AUX POWER; for a description, see LED status display

AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage (Page 175).

Status display for the switching state

The switching state of the AS-i inputs and outputs is indicated by a yellow LED; see LED

status display for the switching state (yellow) (Page 175).

8.4.1.5 Technical specifications

Operating voltage in acc. with

AS-Interface Specification

26.5 to 31.6 V

Input circuit PNP

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload proof

Sensors 2 and 3 conductors

Voltage range 20 to 30 V

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 mA

Outputs

Output type Electronics

Short-circuit protection Integrated

Inductive interference protection Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply Via black AS-Interface flat cable

Watchdog Integrated

AS-Interface certificate Awarded (or planned for new devices)

Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding (or planned for new devices)

Degree of protection IP67

Ground connection PIN5 of each M12 socket is connected to the ground clamp in the mounting

plate by means of a pin.

Ambient temperature –25 to +85°C

Storage temperature –40 to +85°C

Connection Via the mounting plate for compact module K60

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 179

Note

An external additional power supply (AUX POWER) of between 20 and 30 V DC is required

for supplying the output circuits. The additional power supply must comply with VDE 0106

(PELV), protection class III.

Order no. 3RK2400–1HQ00–0AA3 3RK1200–0DQ00–0AA3 3RK2200–0DQ00–0AA3

Slave type A/B slave Standard slave A/B slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.1

No. of inputs/outputs 8 inputs / 2 outputs 8 inputs 8 inputs

Socket assignment Special assignment Y-II assignment Y-II assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.A.E (addr. 1)

7.A.E (addr. 2)

0.1.F (addr. 1)

0.1.F (addr. 2)

0.A.E (addr. 1)

0.A.E (addr. 2)

ID1 code (factory setting) 7 (addr. 1 and 2) F (addr. 1 and 2) 7 (addr. 1 and 2)

Total power consumption ≤ 300 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Current-carrying capacity for

all inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying

capacity per output:

12/13 DC

2 A — —

Max. total current per

module

4 A — —

Data bit assignments

Socket 1 PIN 4 = IN1(D0) (addr. 1)

PIN 2 = IN2(D1) (addr. 1)

Socket 2 PIN 4 = IN2(D1) (addr. 1)

Socket 3 PIN 4 = IN3(D2) (addr. 1)

PIN 2 = IN4(D3) (addr. 1)

Socket 4 PIN 4 = IN4(D3) (addr. 1)

Socket 5 PIN 4 = IN1(D0) (addr. 2)

PIN 2 = IN2(D1) (addr. 2)

Socket 6 PIN 4 = IN2(D1) (addr. 2)

Socket 7 PIN 4 = OUT1(D0) (addr. 2)

PIN 2 = IN3(D2) (addr. 2)

Socket 8 PIN 4 = OUT2(D1) (addr. 2)

PIN 2 = IN4(D3) (addr. 2)

No. of I/O sockets 8 x M12

Note The modules require two addresses.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

180 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1400–1DQ00–0AA3 3RK1400–1CQ00–0AA3 3RK1400–1DQ01–0AA3

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Socket assignment Y-II assignment Standard assignment Y-II assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.F.F 7.0.F 7.F.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F F

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Current-carrying capacity

for all inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying

capacity per output:

12/13 DC

2 A 2 A 1 A

Max. total current per

module

4 A 4 A 4 A

Data bit assignments

Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

PIN2/4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

Socket 2 PIN4 = IN2(D1) PIN2/4 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN2(D1)

Socket 3 PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

PIN2/4 = IN3(D2) PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

Socket 4 PIN4 = IN4(D3) PIN2/4 = IN4(D3) PIN4 = IN4(D3)

Socket 5 PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT2(D1)

PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT2(D1)

Socket 6 PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4 = OUT2(D1)

Socket 7 PIN4 = OUT3(D2)

PIN2 = OUT4(D3)

PIN4 = OUT3(D2) PIN4 = OUT3(D2)

PIN2 = OUT4(D3)

Socket 8 PIN4 = OUT4(D3) PIN4 = OUT4(D3) PIN4 = OUT4(D3)

No. of I/O sockets 8 x M12 8 x M12 8 x M12

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 181

Order no. 3RK1400–1DQ03–

0AA3

3RK2400–1DQ00–

0AA3

3RK2400–1FQ03–

0AA3

3RK1400–1MQ00–

0AA3

Slave type Standard slave A/B slave

(Spec. 3.0)

A/B slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 3.0 AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs/

4 outputs

4 inputs/

4 outputs

4 inputs/

3 outputs

4 inputs/

2 outputs

Socket assignment Standard Y-II assignment Y-II assignment Y-II assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.0.F 7.A.7 7.A.2 7.F.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F 7 7 F

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Current-carrying capacity

for all inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying

capacity per output:

12/13 DC

1 A 2 A 2 A 2 A

Max. total current per

module

4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A

Data bit assignments

Socket 1 PIN2/4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

Socket 2 PIN2/4 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN2(D1)

Socket 3 PIN2/4 = IN3(D2) PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

Socket 4 PIN2/4 = IN4(D3) PIN4 = IN4(D3) PIN4 = IN4(D3) PIN4 = IN4(D3)

Socket 5 PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT2(D1)

PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT2(D1)

PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT2(D1)

Socket 6 PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4 = OUT2(D1)

Socket 7 PIN4 = OUT3(D2) PIN4 = OUT3(D2)

PIN2 = OUT4(D3)

PIN4 = OUT3(D2) Not assigned

(sealed)

Socket 8 PIN4 = OUT4(D3) PIN4 = OUT3(D2) Not assigned

(sealed)

Not assigned

(sealed)

No. of I/O sockets 8 x M12 8 x M12 7 x M12 6 x M12

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

182 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1200–0CQ00–0AA3 3RK1400–1DQ02–0AA3 3RK1100–1CQ00–0AA3

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs 2 x 2 inputs / 2 x 2 outputs 4 outputs

Socket assignment Y-II assignment Y-II assignment Y-II assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.1.F 7.F.F 8.1.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F F

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Current-carrying capacity

for all inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying

capacity per output:

12/13 DC

— 1 A 2 A

Max. total current per

module

— 4 A 4 A

Data bit assignments

Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

—

Socket 2 PIN4 = IN2(D1) Not assigned (sealed) —

Socket 3 PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

—

Socket 4 PIN4 = IN4(D3) Not assigned (sealed) —

Socket 5 Not assigned (sealed) PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT2(D1)

PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT2(D1)

Socket 6 Not assigned (sealed) Not assigned (sealed) PIN4 = OUT2(D1)

Socket 7 Not assigned (sealed) PIN4 = OUT3(D2)

PIN2 = OUT4(D3)

PIN4 = OUT3(D2)

PIN2 = OUT4(D3)

Socket 8 Not assigned (sealed) Not assigned (sealed) PIN4 = OUT4(D3)

No. of I/O sockets 4 x M12 4 x M12 4 x M12

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 183

Version ATEX (Ex) II 3D X

Order no. 3RK1400–1DQ05–0AA3 3RK1200–0CQ05–0AA3

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs

Socket assignment Y-II assignment Y-II assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.F.F 0.1.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Current-carrying capacity

for all inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying

capacity per output:

12/13 DC

2 A —

Max. total current per

module

4 A —

Data bit assignments

Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

Socket 2 PIN4 = IN2(D1)

Socket 3 PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

Socket 4 PIN4 = IN4(D3)

Socket 5 PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT2(D1)

Not assigned (sealed)

Socket 6 PIN4 = OUT2(D1) Not assigned (sealed)

Socket 7 PIN4 = OUT3(D2)

PIN2 = OUT4(D3)

Not assigned (sealed)

Socket 8 PIN4 = OUT4(D3) Not assigned (sealed)

No. of I/O sockets 8 x M12 4 x M12

Proper usage In potentially explosive are zone 22 according to classification II 3D (dust atmosphere,

non-conductive dust), shock resistance: 1 Joule; compliance with Guideline 94/9/EG (ATEX)

is verified by compliance with standards EN 50281-1-1 and EN 60947-5-2

Identification (Ex) II 3D T75°C IP65X (Ex) II 3D T60°C IP65X

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

184 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Restrictions for safe

operation

Suitable measures must be taken to protect the module against mechanical damage.

All M12 connectors are protected against unauthorized removal by means of a safety clip,

whereby the connectors can only be removed by destroying the safety clip. A suitable safety

clip is available from

Binder GmbH + Co., Elektrische Bauelemente KG, P.O. Box 1152, 74148 Neckarsulm,

Tel. 07132/325-0, Fax 07132/325-150,

info@binder-connector.de, article no. 16-0977-000.

All unassigned M12 sockets must be sealed using screw caps 3RK1 901-1KA01

(tamper-proof version) in such a way that they cannot be removed by hand.

The module can only be addressed using addressing unit 3RK1 904-2AB01 outside

potentially explosive zone 22.

Once the module has been addressed, the addressing socket must be sealed using the

screw cap provided (3RK1 901-1KA01 (tamper-proof version)) in such a way that it cannot

be removed by hand.

If an additional power supply (AUX POWER) is required, it must comply with VDE 0106

(PELV), protection class III.

Installation and

commissioning

The devices are permitted for use in temperatures of between –25 and +85°C.

The devices must only be set up, connected, and commissioned by qualified specialists.

Improper conduct can result in serious personal and/or material damage.

Knowledge of the classification assignments to the permitted potentially explosive areas is

essential.

Plug-in connections and AS-Interface cables must not be connected/disconnected when the

system is live.

The devices are maintenance free.

No modifications or repairs must be made to the devices.

All the relevant points outlined in this document must be observed when the devices are

replaced.

See also installation regulations EN 60079-14 / EN 50281-1-2.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 185

8.4.1.6 Dimension drawings

K60 compact module

6LGHYLHZ

:LWKPRXQWLQJSODWH

5.&$













K60 mounting plates

● Wall mounting: 3RK1901-0CA00

● DIN rail mounting: 3RK1901-0CB01











º

 







5.&$

5.&%



Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

186 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.2 Digital input/output modules K60R - panel IP68 / IP69K

8.4.2.1 Overview

Modules with a degree of protection IP67 are not suitable for use in areas subject to

continuously high levels of humidity (e.g. when drilling emulsions, cutting oils, or

high-pressure cleaners are used). Instead, the K60R compact module with degree of

protection IP68/IP69K is the ideal solution here.

IP68/IP69K tests

The K60R modules are subject to the following tests:

● More stringent test than IP67:

90 min at a depth of 1.8 m in water (IP67: 30 min at a depth of 1 m in water)

● Salt water test:

immersed in salt water for five months, at a depth of 20 cm at room temperature

● Test with oil highly prone to creep:

five months fully immersed in oil at room temperature

● Test with drilling emulsion:

five months at room temperature (constituents of drilling emulsion: anionic and non-ionic

emulsifiers, paraffined, low-aroma mineral oil, boric acid alkanolamines, corrosion

inhibitors, oil content: 40 %)

● Test in oil bath (oil: Excelence 416) with fluctuating temperature of the oil bath:

130 cycles at 15 to 55°C, two months

● Cleaning with high-pressure cleaner to IP69K:

80 to 100 bar, distance of 10 to 15 cm, time per side > 30 sec, water temperature: 80°C

To simulate requirements as realistically as possible, the modules were artificially aged by

subjecting them to 15 temperature cycles at -25/+85°C prior to the tests. During the tests,

the modules were connected with 3RX1 connection cables. Unassigned connections were

sealed with screw caps (3RK1 901-1KA00).

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 187

8.4.2.2 Order numbers

K60R compact modules

Inputs/outputs Type Assignment Order no.

4 inputs / 4 outputs Standard slave Standard assignment 3RK1400-1CR00-0AA3

Accessories

Name Comments Order no.

K60 mounting plate For wall mounting 3RK1901-0CA00

K60 mounting plate For DIN rail mounting 3RK1901-0CB01

Screw cap M12 For IP67 modules 3RK1901-1KA00

4 x M12 branch AS-i and UAUX 4 x M12 socket IP67 (delivery incl. coupling module) 3RK1901-1NR00

M12 branch AS-i and UAUX With M12 socket IP67/68/69K, max. 4 A 3RK1901-1NR20

M12 branch AS-i and UAUX 1 m cable with M12 angle plug IP67/68/69K, max. 4 A 3RK1901-1NR21

M12 branch AS-i and UAUX 2 m cable with M12 angle plug IP67/68/69K, max. 4 A 3RK1901-1NR22

Addresing cable M12 For addressing unit 3RK1904-2AB00 3RK1901-3RA00

IP68 T-distributor AS-i + 24 V DC For M12 round cable 1 X M12 connector , 2 X M12 box 3RK1901-1TR00

8.4.2.3 Connection

PD[P

.5 .5.5 .5

5.75

,3

,3

5;&'$)P

5;&($)P

Figure 8-2 K60R connection variants

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

188 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

In the IP67 environment, the standard components are connected by means of flat ribbon

cables. Spur lines are branched to the IP68 environment via an AS-Interface M12 branch

(3RK1901-1NR..). The module is connected by means of round cables with an M12 cable

plug. Instead of an addressing socket, the module is now equipped with an M12 bus

connection for this purpose. The AS-Interface bus cable and 24 V DC auxiliary voltage are

both routed in a 4-pole round cable, which must not contain a grounding conductor. The

ground connection is established via the mounting plate.

Only cables with integral M12 connectors can be used in the IP68 environment.

Prefabricated versions of these cables are available as M12 cable connectors/plugs:

● 3RX8000-0GF42-1AA6: 0.5 m long

● 3RX8000-0GF42-1AB0: 1.0 m long

● 3RX8000-0GF42-1AB5: 1.5 m long

The maximum length of the cable between the IP68 T-distributor and the module must not

exceed 1.5 m.

When longer cables are required to connect the distributor and K60R module, cables that

can be cut as required and have an M12 cable plug and open cable end can be used, fitted

with an M12 connector (straight: 3RX8000-0CD45; angle: 3RX8000-0CE45) and connected

to the distributor. Two different versions of this cable are available:

● 3RX8000-0CB42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 cable plug

● 3RX8000-0CC42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 angle cable plug

If more than one K60R module is to be connected to a spur line, they can be distributed

further by means of a T-distributor (3RK1901-1TR00) with degree of protection IP68.

The following general conditions must be taken into account:

● The installation guidelines for AS-Interface must always be observed. The max.

permissible current for all M12 connection cables is restricted to 4 A. The cross-section of

these cables is only 0.34 mm². To connect the K60R modules, the M12 connection

cables mentioned above can be used for the spur lines. The voltage drop induced by the

ohmic resistance (approx. 0.11 Ω/m) must be taken into account.

● The following maximum lengths apply to round cable connections whereby AS-i and UAUX

are routed in the same cable:

– For each spur line from the branch to the module: max. 5 m

– Total of round cable components in one AS-Interface network: max. 20 m

Note

Screw caps and M12 connections must be tightened with the correct torque.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 189

8.4.2.4 Diagnostics

LEDs for AS-i and FAULT

The module has two LEDs for AS-i and FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with two LEDs for AS-i and FAULT (Page 173) .

LED display AUX POWER

The module also has an LED for AUX POWER; for a description, see LED status display

AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage (Page 175).

Status display for the switching state

The switching state of the AS-i inputs and outputs is indicated by a yellow LED; see LED

status display for the switching state (yellow) (Page 175).

8.4.2.5 Technical specifications

K60R compact module

Order no. 3RK1400-1CR00-0AA3

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Socket assignment Standard assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.0.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F

Operating voltage in acc. with AS-Interface

Specification

26.5 to 31.6 V

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Input circuit PNP

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload proof

Sensors 2 and 3 conductors

Voltage range 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for all inputs

(TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 mA

Outputs

Output type Electronic

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

190 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1400-1CR00-0AA3

Current-carrying capacity on each output

12/13 DC

Typ. 2 A

Max. total current for each module 4 A

Short-circuit protection Integrated

Inductive interference protection Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply Joint round cable connection with AS-Interface

connection via M12 socket contact

Watchdog Integrated

Assignment of the data bits

Socket 1

Socket 2

Socket 3

Socket 4

Socket 5

Socket 6

Socket 7

Socket 8

PIN2/4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2/4 = IN2(D1)

PIN2/4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2/4 = IN4(D3)

PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN4 = OUT2(D1)

PIN4 = OUT3(D2)

PIN4 = OUT4(D3)

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding

Degree of protection IP68/IP69K with mounting plate

3RK1901-0CA00

IP68 test conditions: see "IP68/IP69K tests"

(Page 186).

The degree of protection is only achieved when

all of the M12 connections are tightened with the

correct torque. I/O sockets that are not required

must be sealed with screw caps

(3RK1 901-1KA00).

Ground connection PIN5 of each M12 socket is connected to the

earthing clamp in the mounting plate by means

of a pin.

Ambient temperature °C –25 to +85

Storage temperature °C –40 to +85

No. of I/O sockets 8 x M12

Status displays

I/O display LED yellow

Display UAUX LED green

AS-Interface/diagnostics display LED green/red

Note

An external additional power supply (AUX POWER) of between 20 and 30 V DC is required

for supplying the output circuits. The additional power supply must comply with VDE 0106

(PELV), protection class III.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 191

8.4.2.6 Dimension drawings

K60R compact module

The dimensions of the K60R compact modules are the same as those of the standard K60

compact modules.

The mounting plates for the K60 modules can also be used for the K60R modules.

8.4.3 K60 compact module data coupler - panel IP67

8.4.3.1 Overview

This module is equipped with two AS-i slaves that are connected to two different AS-i

networks. Each of the two integrated slaves has four virtual inputs and four virtual outputs.

This is the easiest and most cost-effective way of enabling the bidirectional transfer of four

data bits between two AS-i networks. The data coupler requires an address in each AS-i

network.

Depending on the number of nodes, each AS-i network functions with a different cycle time,

which means that the two AS-i networks are never synchronous. For this reason, only

standard data and not safety-oriented data (ASIsafe) can be transferred via the AS-i data

coupler.

The two AS-i networks are electrically isolated in the device.

The output bits from AS-i network 1 are read as input bits in AS-i network 2 (and vice versa).

The statuses of the outputs are indicated by LEDs.

NOTICE

Two AS-i networks must not be electrically connected.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

192 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.3.2 Order numbers

K60 compact module data coupler

MLFB Inputs/outputs Type Assignment

3RK408–8SQ00–0AA3 4 inputs / 4 outputs (virtual) Standard slave —

Accessories

MLFB Name Comments

3RK1 901-0CA00 K60 mounting plate For wall mounting

3RK1 901-0CB01 K60 mounting plate For DIN rail mounting

8.4.3.3 Connection

The device is connected via the AS-i cables for the two AS-i networks.

The yellow shaped cable from AS-i network 1 is fed into the upper cutout ("AS-i") on the

mounting plate.

The yellow shaped cable from AS-i network 2 is fed into the lower cutout (reserved for

"AUX POWER" on other K60 modules) on the mounting plate.

A black shaped cable (24 V DC) is not required.

No actuators or sensors are connected to the data coupler.

1.8 –0.2 Nm

3RK1901-1KA00

30 ± 5 Ncm

0 0 A C 0 - 1 0 9 1 K R 3

1 0 B C 0 - 1 0 9 1 K R 3

AUX POWER

AS-Interface

Figure 8-3 K60 data coupler: connecting the AS-i shaped cable

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 193

See the table below for the data bit assignments:

Slave in AS-i network 1 Slave in AS-i network 2

D0 (OUT) D0 (IN)

D1 (OUT) D1 (IN)

D2 (OUT) D2 (IN)

D3 (OUT) D3 (IN)

D0 (IN) D0 (OUT)

D1 (IN) D1 (OUT)

D2 (IN) D2 (OUT)

D3 (IN) D3 (OUT)

8.4.3.4 Diagnostics

LEDs for AS-i/FAULT1 and AS-i/FAULT2

For diagnostic purposes, the module has two dual LEDs for AS-i/FAULT, which indicate the

status of the two AS-i buses; see LED status displays for modules with a dual LED for

AS-i/FAULT (Page 174) .

Status display for the switching state

The switching state of the AS-i inputs and outputs is indicated by a yellow LED; see LED

status display for the switching state (yellow) (Page 175).

8.4.3.5 Technical specifications

K60 compact module data coupler

Each of the two integrated slaves has the following technical specifications:

Order no. 3RK1408-8SQ00-0AA3

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs/ 4 outputs (virtual)

Socket assignment —

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.F.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F

Total power consumption ≤ 70 mA

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

194 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.3.6 Dimension drawings

K60 compact module data coupler

Side view

With mounting plate

3RK1 901-0CA00

4.5

152

Figure 8-4 K60 compact module data coupler

K60 mounting plates

● Wall mounting: 3RK1901-0CA00

● DIN rail mounting 3RK1901-0CB01











º

 







5.&$

5.&%



Figure 8-5 K60 mounting plates

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 195

8.4.4 Digital K45 input/output modules - field IP67

8.4.4.1 Overview

The range of 'large' K60 compact modules now includes the K45 compact module series

to extend the lower end of the product range.

The K45 modules, which are significantly smaller, offer all the existing benefits of the K60

compact modules. They have the same surface area as the user modules. The installation

depth, however, is just 2/3 of that of the user module, which makes it the perfect complement

to the range of compact modules.

Despite its small size, however, all the modules feature easy-to-read labeling strips and an

integrated addressing socket.

● K45 compact modules with four digital inputs.

These compact modules house the communications electronics and standard M12

connections or M8 screw-type or snap-on connections for the inputs. Up to four sensors

can be connected to the compact module.

● K45 compact modules with max. four digital outputs.

These modules have up to four digital outputs with an M12 connector.

● K45 compact modules with two digital inputs and outputs.

These modules each have two digital inputs and outputs with an M12 connector.

K45 compact modules are available as standard or A/B slaves.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

196 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.4.2 Order numbers

K45 compact modules

Inputs/outputs Type Assignment Connection MLFB

4 inputs Standard slave Standard assignment M12 3RK1200-0CQ20-0AA3

4 inputs Standard slave Standard assignment M8 screw 3RK1200-0CT20-0AA3

4 inputs Standard slave Standard assignment M8 snap-on 3RK1200-0CU20-0AA3

4 inputs A/B slave Standard assignment M12 3RK2200-0CQ20-0AA3

4 inputs A/B slave Standard assignment M8 screw 3RK2200-0CT20-0AA3

4 inputs A/B slave Standard assignment M8 snap-on 3RK2200-0CU20-0AA3

2x2 inputs A/B slave Y assignment M12 3RK2200-0CQ22-0AA3

2 inputs / 2 outputs Standard slave Standard assignment M12 3RK1400-1BQ20-0AA3

2 x (1 input / 1 output) Standard slave Y assignment M12 3RK1400-0GQ20-0AA3

4 outputs Standard slave Standard assignment M12 3RK1100-1CQ20-0AA3

3 outputs A/B slave Standard assignment M12 3RK2100-1EQ20-0AA3

2 outputs / 2 inputs A/B slave Standard assignment M12 3RK2400-1BQ20-0AA3

Accessories

MLFB Designation Comments

3RK1901-2EA00 K45 mounting plate Wall mounting

3RK1901-2DA00 K45 mounting plate DIN rail mounting:

8.4.4.3 Connection

For information on connecting the AS-i bus and auxiliary voltage UAUX as well as the

actuators and sensors, see Connection (Page 166).

8.4.4.4 Diagnostics

LED for AS-i/FAULT

The module has one dual LED for AS-i/FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT (Page 174) .

LED display AUX POWER

The module also has an LED for AUX POWER; for a description, see LED status display

AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage (Page 175).

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 197

Status display for the switching state

The switching state of the AS-i inputs and outputs is indicated by a yellow LED; see LED

status display for the switching state (yellow) (Page 175).

8.4.4.5 Technical specifications

K45 compact modules

Joint technical specifications of the digital I/O modules IP67 – K45

Operating voltage in acc. with AS-Interface Specification 26.5 to 31.6 V

Reverse polarity protection UAS-i Integrated

Input circuit PNP

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload proof

Sensors 2 and 3 conductors

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 1)

Switching level - high ≥ 1 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 mA

Outputs

Output type Electronics

Short-circuit protection Integrated

Inductive interference protection Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply Via black AS-Interface flat cable

Watchdog Integrated

AS-Interface certificate Available (or planned for new devices)

Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding (or planned for new devices)

Degree of protection IP67 (IP65 with M8 snap-on connection)

Ground connection Via PIN5 on M12 sockets and outgoing feeder via 2.8 mm flat

connector (no ground connection on M8 sockets)

Ambient temperature –25 to +85 °C

Storage temperature –40 to +85 °C

Connection Via the mounting plate for compact module K45

1) For 3RK2 400-1BQ20-0AA3 Umin = 16.5 V

Note

An external additional power supply (AUX POWER) of between 20 and 30 V DC is required

for supplying the output circuits. The additional power supply must comply with VDE 0106

(PELV), protection class III.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

198 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1200-0CQ20-0AA3 3RK1200-0CT20-0AA3 3RK1200-0CU20-0AA3

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs

Socket assignment Standard assignment Standard assignment Standard assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.0.F 0.0.F 0.0.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F F

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Current-carrying capacity for

all inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Assignment of the data bits

Socket 1 PIN4/2 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)

Socket 2 PIN4/2 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN2(D1)

Socket 3 PIN4/2 = IN3(D2) PIN4 = IN3(D2) PIN4 = IN3(D2)

Socket 4 PIN4/2 = IN4(D3) PIN4 = IN4(D3) PIN4 = IN4(D3)

No. of I/O sockets 4 x M12 4 x M8 screw locking 4 x M8 snap locking

Order no. 3RK2200-0CQ20-0AA3 3RK2200-0CT20-0AA3 3RK2200-0CU20-0AA3

Slave type A/B slave A/B slave A/B slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.1

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs

Socket assignment Standard assignment Standard assignment Standard assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.A.0 0.A.F 0.A.0

ID1 code (factory setting) 7 7 7

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Current-carrying capacity for

all inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Assignment of the data bits

Socket 1 PIN4/2 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)

Socket 2 PIN4/2 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN2(D1)

Socket 3 PIN4/2 = IN3(D2) PIN4 = IN3(D2) PIN4 = IN3(D2)

Socket 4 PIN4/2 = IN4(D3) PIN4 = IN4(D3) PIN4 = IN4(D3)

No. of I/O sockets 4 x M12 4 x M8 screw locking 4 x M8 snap locking

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 199

Order no. 3RK2200-0CQ22-0AA3 3RK1400-1BQ20-0AA3 3RK1400-0GQ20-0AA3

Slave type A/B slave Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 2 x 2 inputs 2 inputs /

2 outputs

2 x (1 input / 1 output)

Socket assignment Y assignment Standard assignment Y assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.A.2 3.0.F 3.F.F

ID1 code (factory setting) 7 F F

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Current-carrying capacity for

all inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 2)

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

— 2 A 1) 0.2 A 2)

Max. total current for each

module

— 3 A 0.2 A 2)

Reverse polarity protection

UAUX

N/A By means of coding UAUX not required

Assignment of the data bits

Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

PIN4/2 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT3(D2)

Socket 2 — PIN4/2 = IN2(D1) —

Socket 3 — PIN4 = OUT3(D2) —

Socket 4 PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

PIN4 = OUT4(D3) PIN4 = IN2(D1)

PIN2 = OUT4(D3)

No. of I/O sockets 2 x M12 4 x M12 2 x M12

1) With version "E12", the typical current-carrying capacity per output increases from 1.5 to 2 A

2) Aggregate current for all inputs and outputs: max. 200 mA.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

200 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1100-1CQ20-0AA3 3RK2100-1EQ20-0AA3 3RK2400-1BQ20-0AA3

Slave type Standard slave A/B slave A/B slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.1

No. of inputs/outputs 4 outputs 3 outputs 2 outputs / 2 inputs

Socket assignment Standard assignment Standard assignment Standard assignment

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 8.0.F 8.A.0 B.A.0

ID1 code (factory setting) F 7 7

Total power consumption ≤ 45 mA ≤ 45 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Current-carrying capacity for

all inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

1 A 1 A 2 A

Max. total current for each

module

3 A 3 A 3 A

Reverse polarity protection

UAUX

By means of coding By means of coding By means of coding

Assignment of the data bits

Socket 1 PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4/2 = IN3(D2)

Socket 2 PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4/2 = IN4(D3)

Socket 3 PIN4 = OUT3(D2) PIN4 = OUT3(D2) PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

Socket 4 PIN4 = OUT4(D3) Not available PIN4 = OUT2(D1)

No. of I/O sockets 4 x M12 3 x M12 4 x M12

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 201

8.4.4.6 Dimension drawings

K45 compact modules

303445

Figure 8-6 Dimensions of the K45 compact module

K45 mounting plates

● DIN rail mounting:

● Wall mounting

 

























Figure 8-7 K45 mounting plates (DIN rail mounting on left, wall mounting on right)

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

202 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.5 Digital K20 input/output modules - field IP67

8.4.5.1 Overview

K20 compact modules

The range of AS-Interface compact modules has now been extended to include the K20

compact modules which, with a width of just 20 mm, are characterized by their slimline

design. Due to their small dimensions, these modules are particularly suitable for

applications involving industrial robots in production engineering where space for the

modules is extremely limited.

The K20 modules are connected to AS-Interface using a round cable with an M12 cable plug

instead of the AS-Interface flat ribbon cable. The AS-Interface bus cable and 24 V DC

auxiliary supply are routed in a joint round cable, which allows for an extremely compact

design.

Since the round cable is so flexible, the modules can also be easily installed on moving

machine parts, an application for which they are particularly suitable because their

non-encapsulated design makes them extremely light.

When ground cables are used, many users choose to lay the AS-Interface bus cable in a

round cable. In this case, K20 modules can be connected directly to the round cable. An

adapter from the flat ribbon cable to the round cable is not required.

The range of K20 compact modules comprises not only standard AS-Interface modules but

also an ASIsafe version for connecting safety-oriented sensors (e.g. EMERGENCY STOP

buttons or protective door monitoring). As far as is technically feasible, all AS-Interface K20

modules support the extended address mode (A/B addresses) in accordance with

AS-Interface Specification 2.1, which allows 62 nodes to be connected to an AS-Interface

network. In extended address mode, the K20 module with four inputs and four outputs

operates in accordance with AS-Interface Specification 3.0 which, for the first time, also

permits four outputs for an A/B slave and, in turn, 248 inputs and 248 outputs in the

maximum configuration of an AS-i network.

To save even more space, the sensors and actuators can be connected via M8 connectors.

Alternatively, an M12 connection with a Y assignment is also available.

Installation

The K20 modules are secured with two screws. A mounting plate is not required. The

modules can be installed not only on the front but also on the side, which saves space and

provides them with additional protection (e.g. on DIN rails).

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 203

8.4.5.2 Order numbers

K20 compact modules

Inputs/outputs Type Assignment Connection Order no.

4 inputs / 4 outputs Standard slave Standard assignment 8 x M8 3RK1400-1CT30-0AA3

4 inputs A/B slave Y assignment 2 x M12 3RK2200-0CQ30-0AA3

4 inputs A/B slave Standard assignment 4 x M8 3RK2200-0CT30-0AA3

2 inputs / 2 outputs A/B slave Y assignment 2 x M12 3RK2400-1BQ30-0AA3

2 inputs / 2 outputs A/B slave Standard assignment 4 x M8 3RK2400-1BT30-0AA3

4 inputs / 4 outputs A/B slave (Spec. 3.0) Standard assignment 8 x M8 3RK2400-1CT30-0AA3

Accessories

Name Comments Order no.

M12 screw cap for IP67 modules AS-Interface accessories 3RK1901-1KA00

M8 screw cap for IP67 modules AS-Interface accessories 3RK1901-1PN00

AS-Interface distributor (standard) for

AS-I shaped cable

Distribution function, isolating function, sealing

function (M.SEP. seal) IP67, max. 7 A incl. mounting

plate

3RK1901-1NN00

AS-Interface distributor (compact) for

AS-I shaped cable

Distribution function, isolating function,

IP 67/68/69K, max. 6 A

3RK1901-1NN10

AS-Interface 4 x M12 branch AS-i

and UAUX

4 x M12 socket IP67 (delivery incl. coupling module) 3RK1901-1NR00

AS-Interface M12 branch AS-i

without UAUX

With M12 socket IP67/68/69K, max. 4 A 3RK1901-1NR10

AS-Interface M12 branch AS-i

without UAUX

1 m cable with M12 angle plug IP67/68/69K, max. 4 A 3RK1901-1NR11

AS-Interface M12 branch AS-i

without UAUX

2 m cable with M12 angle plug IP67/68/69K, max. 4 A 3RK1901-1NR12

AS-Interface M12 branch AS-i and

UAUX

With M12 socket IP67/68/69K, max. 4 A 3RK1901-1NR20

AS-Interface M12 branch AS-i and

UAUX

1 m cable with M12 angle plug IP67/68/69K, max. 4 A 3RK1901-1NR21

AS-Interface M12 branch AS-i and

UAUX

2 m cable with M12 angle plug IP67/68/69K, max. 4 A 3RK1901-1NR22

IP68 T-distributor AS-i + 24 V DC for

M12 round cable 1 x M12 connector

AS-Interface accessories, 2 x M12 box 3RK1901-1TR00

Addressing cable M12 for addressing

unit 3RK1904-2AB00

AS-Interface accessories 3RK1901-3RA00

AS-Interface transition from AS-i

cable to M12 socket

— 3RX9801-0AA00

SIMATIC DP, Y connector for distr.

I/O ET 200X

For double connection of I/O by means of single cable

to ET 200X 5-pin M12

6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

204 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.5.3 Setting the AS-i address

The K20 modules are addressed via the same socket as for the bus connection. The module

is addressed by connecting it to the addressing unit (e.g. 3RK1 904-2AB01) with a standard

M12 connection cable (2 or 3-pin) (e.g. 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5). If the older version of the

addressing unit (3RK1 904-2AB00) is used, a special addressing cable (3RK1 901-3RA00) is

required to connect the module to the addressing unit. Once the address has been set, the

addressing cable is unplugged and the module is connected to the bus cable. Four or

five-pin connection cables must not be used for addressing purposes.

As far as technically possible, all K20 modules (not ASIsafe versions) support extended

address mode and can be addressed with an A or a B address. In this way, up to 62 slaves

can be connected to an AS-Interface network. The version with four inputs and four outputs

(3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3) functions in accordance with the new AS-Interface Specification

3.0, which means that A/B slaves can use four outputs (instead of just three as is the case

with Specification 2.1). Note, however, that this module can only be operated with a new

master in accordance with AS-Interface Specification 3.0 (e.g. new DP/AS-i LINK Advanced)

and the cycle times for the outputs in this case can reach a maximum of 20 ms.

3RK1904-2AB01

3RX8000-0GF32-1AA6

3RX8000-0GF32-1AB0

3RX8000-0GF32-1AB5

1: ASi+

2: AUX- (3RK.400-...)

3: ASi-

4: AUX+ (3RK.400-...)

AS-Interface

1 ... 31

(1A ... 31B)

ASI+

ASI-

4132

Figure 8-8 K20 addressing

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 205

8.4.5.4 Connection

The different methods of connecting the K20 modules to the AS-Interface bus cable and the

24 V DC auxiliary voltage are shown in the following table:

Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20 K20 module

AS-i without Uaux AS-i with Uaux

Plus M12 branch

with integral cable

3RK1901-1NR11 (1 m)

3RK1901-1NR12 (2 m)

3RK1 901-1NR11 (1 m)

3RK1 901-1NR12 (2 m)

Plus M12 branch with socket

Plus separate M12 cable 1)

3RX9 801-0AA00

3RK1 901-1NR10

3RK1 901-1NR20

Plus 4 x M12 branch

Plus separate M12 cable 1)

3RK1 901-1NR00

1) Prefabricated versions of these cables are available as M12 cable connectors/plugs:

3RX8000-0GF42-1AA6: 0.5 m long

3RX8000-0GF42-1AB0: 1.0 m long

3RX8000-0GF42-1AB5: 1.5 m long

When longer cables are required to connect the distributor and module, cables that can be cut as required and have an

M12 cable plug and open cable end can be used, fitted with an M12 connector (straight: 3RX8000-0CD45; angle:

3RX8000-0CE45) and connected to the distributor. Two different versions of this cable are available:

3RX8000-0CB42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 cable plug

3RX8000-0CC42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 angle cable plug

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

206 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Connection examples for K20 modules

The following general conditions must be taken into account:

● The installation guidelines for AS-Interface must always be observed. The max.

permissible current for all M12 connection cables is restricted to 4 A. The cross-section of

these cables is only 0.34 mm². To connect the K20 modules, the M12 connection cables

mentioned above can be used for the spur lines. The voltage drop induced by the ohmic

resistance (approx. 0.11 Ω/m) must be taken into account.

● The following maximum lengths apply to round cable connections whereby AS-i and

UAUX are carried in the same cable:

– For each spur line from the branch to the module: max. 5 m

– Total of round cable components in one AS-Interface network: max. 20 m

Connection via

4 x M12 branch

(3RK1 901-1NR00)

(AS-i/Uaux)

for I/O modules

Connection via

M12 branch

(3RK1 901-1NR2.)

(AS-i/Uaux)

for I/O modules

Connection via

M12 branch

(3RK1 901-1NR1.)

(AS-i without Uaux)

for modules

with inputs

Distribution via

M12 T branch

(3RK1 901-1TR00)

≤ 1.5 m

≤ 5 m

Figure 8-9 K20 connection examples

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 207

Figure 8-10 AS-Interface M12 branches and distributor (closed)

Figure 8-11 AS-Interface M12 branches and distributor (open)

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

208 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.5.5 Diagnostics

LED for AS-i/FAULT

The module has one dual LED for AS-i/FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT (Page 174)

LED display AUX POWER

The module also has an LED for AUX POWER; for a description, see LED status display

AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage (Page 175).

Status display for the switching state

The switching state of the AS-i inputs and outputs is indicated by a yellow LED; see LED

status display for the switching state (yellow) (Page 175).

8.4.5.6 Technical specifications

Order no. 3RK2200-0CT30-0AA3 3RK2200-0CQ30-0AA3 3RK2400-1BT30-0AA3

Slave type A/B slave A/B slave A/B slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.1

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 2 inputs / 2 outputs

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.A.0 0.A.2 B.A.0

ID1 code (factory setting) 7 7 7

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Input circuit PNP PNP PNP

Current-carrying capacity for all

inputs (TU ≤ 40°C)

200 mA 200 mA 150 mA

Current-carrying capacity for all

inputs (TU ≤ 55 °C)

150 mA 150 mA 70 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 mA

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Sensors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

Voltage range 16.5 to 30 V 16.5 to 30 V 16.5 to 30 V

Outputs

Output type — — Electronic

Typ. current-carrying capacity per

output: 12/13 DC

— — 1 A

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 209

Order no. 3RK2200-0CT30-0AA3 3RK2200-0CQ30-0AA3 3RK2400-1BT30-0AA3

Max. total current for each module — — 1 A

Short-circuit protection — — Integrated

Inductive interference protection — — Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply — — Joint round cable

connection with

AS-Interface connection

via M12 socket contact

Watchdog — — Integrated

Assignment of the data bits

Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)

PIN2 = IN2(D1)

PIN4 = IN3(D2)

Socket 2 PIN4 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

PIN4 = IN4(D3)

Socket 3 PIN4 = IN3(D2) Not available PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

Socket 4 PIN4 = IN4(D3) Not available PIN4 = OUT2(D1)

Socket 5 Not available Not available Not available

Socket 6 Not available Not available Not available

Socket 7 Not available Not available Not available

Socket 8 Not available Not available Not available

No. of I/O sockets 4 x M8 2 x M12 4 x M8

AS-Interface certificate Available Available Available

Approvals UL/CSA available soon UL/CSA available soon UL/CSA available soon

Degree of protection IP65/67 IP65/67 IP65/67

Ground connection Not available Not available Not available

Ambient temperature –25 to +70 °C –25 to +70 °C –25 to +70 °C

Storage temperature –40 to +85 °C –40 to +85 °C –40 to +85 °C

Note

An external additional power supply (AUX POWER) of between 20 and 30 V DC is required

for supplying the output circuits of the compact module (3RK2400-1BT30-0AA3). The

additional power supply must comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection class III.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

210 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK2400-1BQ30-0AA3 3RK1400-1CT30-0AA3 3RK2400-1CT30-0AA3

Slave type A/B slave Standard slave A/B slave (Spec. 3.0)

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 3.0

No. of inputs/outputs 2 inputs / 2 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

No. of I/O sockets 2 x M12 8 x M8 8 x M8

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 B.A.2 7.0.E 7.A.7

ID1 code (factory setting) 7 F 7

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Input circuit PNP PNP PNP

Current-carrying capacity for all

inputs

(TU ≤ 40°C)

150 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Current-carrying capacity for all

inputs

(TU ≤ 55 °C)

70 mA 150 mA 150 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 mA

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Sensors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

Voltage range 16.5 to 30 V 16.5 to 30 V 16.5 to 30 V

Outputs

Output type Electronic Electronic Electronic

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

1 A 1 A 1 A

Max. total current for each

module

1 A 2 A at T = 40°C 2 A at T = 40°C

Short-circuit protection Integrated Integrated Integrated

Inductive interference protection Integrated Integrated Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply Joint round cable

connection with

AS-Interface connection via

M12 socket contact

Joint round cable

connection with

AS-Interface connection via

M12 socket contact

Joint round cable

connection with

AS-Interface connection via

M12 socket contact

Watchdog Integrated Integrated Integrated

Assignment of the data bits

Socket 1 PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1(D0)

Socket 2 PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

PIN2 = OUT2(D1)

PIN4 = IN2(D1) PIN4 = IN2(D1)

Socket 3 Not available PIN4 = IN3(D2) PIN4 = IN3(D2)

Socket 4 Not available PIN4 = IN4(D3) PIN4 = IN4(D3)

Socket 5 Not available PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1(D0)

Socket 6 Not available PIN4 = OUT2(D1) PIN4 = OUT2(D1)

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 211

Order no. 3RK2400-1BQ30-0AA3 3RK1400-1CT30-0AA3 3RK2400-1CT30-0AA3

Socket 7 Not available PIN4 = OUT3(D2) PIN4 = OUT3(D2)

Socket 8 Not available PIN4 = OUT4(D3) PIN4 = OUT4(D3)

AS-Interface certificate Available Available soon Available soon

Approvals UL/CSA available soon UL/CSA available soon UL/CSA available soon

Degree of protection IP65/67 IP65/67 IP65/67

Ground connection Not available Not available Not available

Ambient temperature –25 to +70 °C –25 to +70 °C –25 to +70 °C

Storage temperature –40 to +85 °C –40 to +85 °C –40 to +85 °C

Note

An external additional power supply (AUX POWER) of between 20 and 30 V DC is required

for supplying the output circuits for compact modules 3RK2400-1BQ30-0AA3,

3RK1400-1CT30-0AA3, and 3RK2400-1CT30-0AA3. The additional power supply must

comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection class III.

8.4.5.7 Dimension drawings









º

º 







 







º

K20 compact module with 2 M12 sockets

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

212 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

























º

º 

K20 compact module with 4 M8 sockets

º

º º

º









 













K20 compact module with 8 M8 sockets

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 213

8.4.6 Analog K60 input/output modules - panel IP67

8.4.6.1 Properties

The most important properties of the K60 analog modules

● Analog modules can be integrated in AS-Interface just as easily as digital modules.

● Analog values can be easily recorded and output locally.

● Preprocessing the analog value transmission in the master allows the analog values to be

evaluated quickly and easily.

● Up to four values can be recorded via an analog module.

Specification 3.0 with fast analog modules (to profile 7.A.9) also offers the following features:

● A/B technology (i.e. up to 62 analog modules can each be connected to one AS-i

master).

● Variable operation: 12-bit or 14-bit resolution, single or double channel, can be selected

via the ID1 code.

● Transfer times twice as fast on average (three or four cycles only depending on the

selected resolution).

● Simplified analog value processing with masters that comply with Specification 3.0

(DP/AS-i LINK Advanced).

8.4.6.2 Overview

AS-Interface analog modules in the K60 compact series record or supply analog signals

locally. These modules are connected to the higher-level controller via an AS-Interface

master in accordance with Specification 2.1 or 3.0.

Inputs Outputs

A/B1) Standard 2) Standard

Measured

variable

Signal range

1 / 2 channel 2 channel 4 channels 2 channel

± 20 mA X X X X

4 - 20 mA X X X X

Current

0 - 20 mA X X X X

± 10 V X X X X

1 - 5 V X X X X

Voltage

0 - 10 V — — — X

PT100 — X X —

Ni100 — X X —

Temperature /

resistance

0 - 600 Ω — X X —

1) AS-i Spec. 3.0 (faster transfer, switch between 1 / 2 channels, switch between 12 / 14 Bit)

2) AS-i Spec. 2.1 2.1

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

214 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

The input modules to profile 7.3/7.4 are available with two or four input channels. The

two-channel module can also be switched for use with just one input channel, which means

that the analog value is available more quickly. To switch the module, a jumper is connected

to socket 3. Analog modules to profile 7.A.9 achieve transfer times twice as fast as those to

profile 7.3/7.4. Among other things, you can use the ID1 code to select whether the module

is operated with one channel or two.

The output modules are available as two-channel modules as standard.

The input and output channels are electrically isolated vis-à-vis the AS-Interface network.

If sensors with increased power requirements (total ≥ 46 mA) are to be connected when

analog input modules are used, additional power must be supplied via the auxiliary voltage

rather than via the internal supply (flat cable, black). When the auxiliary power is connected,

the sensor supply is short-circuit proof (max. 500 mA). No auxiliary power is required for

output and resistor/thermoresistor modules. The auxiliary power cable can be "looped in" for

other modules, however.

The "AS-Interface Analog Modules Profile 7.3, Profile 7.A.9" manual contains extensive

descriptions of the modules along with their technical specifications and detailed information

about operation.

Function

Data transfer to analog profile 7.3/7.4

&38

7KHYDOXHVFDQEHDFFHVVHGXVLQJWKHLQWHJUDWHG

VWDQGDUGIXQFWLRQEORFNV6)&DQG6)&

$6,QWHUIDFH

0DVWHU $QDORJPRGXOH $QDORJYDOXH

$XVHU

SURJUDPF\FOH

ZLWKV\VWHP

IXQFWLRQFDOO 6FUHHQV

$6,QWHUIDFH

F\FOHV

HDFKPD[PV

&RQYHUVLRQ

1RWH

*B16$B;;B

With analog profile 7.3/7.4, at least seven AS-Interface cycles are required to transfer all the

data. In this case, a master that complies with extended Specification V2.1 (or higher) must

be used.

When input modules are used, the complete analog value is available in the AS-Interface

master. Preprocessing is then carried out in the master.

The next time this system function is called up, the user program copies the analog value as

a value to the user program.

The same sequence in reverse applies to analog value transfer for the output modules.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 215

The total processing time (ttotal) for the complete transfer process from 1/2 inputs is

calculated as follows:

● Conversion time tc

● AS-i transfer time ttransfer (with cycle times of 5 ms / 10 ms)

● PLC transfer time tPLC

This results in the following maximum times until the analog value with profile 7.3/7.4 is

available:

1 channel 2 channels 4 channels

Total transfer time Max. 95 ms Max. 235 ms Max. 435 ms

Data transfer to analog profile 7.A.9

&38

ZLWKRUELWVGHSHQGLQJRQUHVROXWLRQ

:LWK$%WHFKQRORJ\

$6,QWHUIDFH

0DVWHU $QDORJPRGXOH $QDORJYDOXH

$XVHU

SURJUDPF\FOH

ZLWKV\VWHP

IXQFWLRQFDOO 7KUHHRUIRXU

$6,QWHUIDFH

F\FOHV

HDFKPD[PVRU

PV

&RQYHUVLRQ





*B16$B;;B

With analog profile 7.A.9, just three or four AS-Interface cycles are required for transferring

the data. In this case, a master that complies with Specification 3.0 must be used.

1 channel 2 channels

Standard A/B Standard A/B

12 bits 14 bits 12 bits 14 bits 12 bits 14 bits 12 bits 14 bits

Total transfer time ~ 55 ms ~ 65 ms ~ 85 ms ~ 105 ms ~ 145 ms ~ 160 ms ~ 190 ms ~ 220 ms

The maximum times that elapse before the analog value is available with profile 7.A.9

depend on the selections made (resolution, no. of channels, A/B technology).

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

216 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Coding

The resolution and channel are selected with the ID1 code.

I/O code: 7hex

ID code: Ahex

ID2 code: 9hex

ID1 code: see table:

ID1 IN 1 IN 2 14 bits 12 bits

0 X — X —

1 X — — X

2 X — X —

3 X — X —

4 X X X —

5 X X X —

6 X X — X

7 X X X —

Profile overview of the input modules

Measurement type No. of inputs Order no. Slave profile

1, 2 3RK1207-1BQ40-0AA3 S7.3

4 3RK1207-1BQ44-0AA3 S7.3

Current measurement

1, 2 3RK2207-1BQ50-0AA3 7.A.9

1, 2 3RK1207-2BQ40-0AA3 S7.3

4 3RK1207-2BQ44-0AA3 S7.3

Voltage measurement

1, 2 3RK2207-2BQ50-0AA3 7.A.9

1, 2 3RK1207-3BQ40-0AA3 S7.3 Resistance/thermoresistance

measurement 4 3RK1207-3BQ44-0AA3 S7.3

Module overview: input modules

Profile overview of output modules

Output No. of outputs Order no.

Current output 2 3RK1107-1BQ40-0AA3 S7.3

Voltage output 2 3RK1107-2BQ40-0AA3 S7.3

Module overview: output modules

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 217

8.4.6.3 Order numbers

Input modules (Each module has two coding elements)

Inputs/outputs Type Application Code setting Order no.

4 inputs Analog slave Current measurement B1 3RK1207-1BQ44-0AA3

4 inputs Analog slave Voltage measurement B2 3RK1207-2BQ44-0AA3

4 inputs Analog slave Thermoresistance B3 3RK1207-3BQ44-0AA3

1, 2 inputs Analog slave Current measurement B1 3RK1207-1BQ40-0AA3 1)

1, 2 inputs Analog slave Current measurement B1 3RK2207-1BQ50-0AA3 2)

1, 2 inputs Analog slave Voltage measurement B2 3RK1207-2BQ40-0AA3 1)

1, 2 inputs Analog slave Voltage measurement B2 3RK2207-2BQ50-0AA3 2)

1, 2 inputs Analog slave Thermoresistance B3 3RK1207-3BQ40-0AA3 1)

1) Operation with 1 input only with jumper (Page 226) 3RK1901-1AA00 possible

2) OPeration with 1, 2 inputs can be configured via ID1 code

Output modules (Each module has two coding elements)

Type Module variant Code setting Order no.

Analog slave Current output B4 3RK1107-1BQ40-0AA3

Analog slave Voltage output B5 3RK1107-2BQ40-0AA3

Accessories

Name Order no.

K60 mounting plate for screw fixing 3RK1901-0CA00

K60 mounting plate for DIN rail installation 3RK1901-0CB00

Jumper for operation with 1 input

(for the following modules only: 3RK1207-1BQ40-0AA3, 3RK1207-2BQ40-0AA3,

3RK1207-3BQ40-0AA3)

3RK1901-1AA00

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

218 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.6.4 Parameterization

For a detailed description of how to set parameters with AS-i, see Parameterization

(Page 619).

The parameters are sent to the AS-i master via the CPU. Function block FC "ASI_3422"

(FC 7) is required for the S7-300 controller.

FC 7 is available on a disk supplied with the manual for CP-343-2 and Link 20 E. When the

CPU is booted, FC 7 should execute the command "write_extended_parameter_list" (3CH),

for example.

(This is integrated in HW Config as of SIMATIC STEP 7, V 5.4.)

Modules that comply with slave profile 7.A.9 require a "V3 Extended Master" profile M4.

Parameter settings for input modules

The following table shows the individual parameter settings for the analog input modules.

Default value for new modules: 1 1 1 1

Parameter bit 1)

P3 P2 P1 P0

Current input Voltage input Resistance 3)

X X 1 1 4 ... 20 mA, 4 wires ±10 V, 4 wires Pt 100 standard, 4 wires

X X 1 0 4 ... 20 mA, 2 wires 1 ... 5 V, 4 wires 0 ... 600 Ω, 4 wires

X X 0 1 ±20 mA, 4 wires Reserved 2) Pt 100 climate, 4 wires

X X 0 0 Reserved 2) Reserved 2) Ni 100 standard, 4 wires

X 1 X X Without smoothing

X 0 X X With smoothing

1 X X X Filter 50 Hz 1)

0 X X X Filter 60 Hz 1)

1) For modules with order number 3RK2207 and fast analog modules to spec. 3.0, parameter bit P3

is not used; the modules are set permanently to filter 50 Hz.

2) With this parameter combination, the default range is the same as that for X X 1 1.

3) 2 and 3-wire connection: see Connection (Page 226).

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 219

Current measurement range ±20 mA

(Parameter setting XX01)

Measured value Units Range

± 20 mA in % Dec. Hex.

> 23.52 mA >117.589 32767 7FFF Overflow

23.52 mA 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

20 mA

723.4 nA

0 mA

-723.4 nA

-20 mA

100

0.003617

-0.003617

-100

27648

-1

-27648

6C00

0001

0000

FFFF

9400

Nominal range

-23.51 mA -117.593 -27649

-32512

93FF

8100

Underrange

< -23.51 mA <-117.593 -32768

(+32767)

8000

(7FFF)

Underflow

(for certain AS-i masters)

Current measurement range 4 to 20 mA

(Parameter setting XX11 for 4-wire connection)

(Parameter setting XX10 for 2-wire connection)

Measured value Units Range

4 to 20 mA in % Dec. Hex.

> 22.81 mA >117.589 32767 7FFF Overflow

22.81 mA 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

20 mA

4 mA + 578.7 nA

4 mA

100

0.003617

27648

6C00

0001

0000

Nominal range

1.185 mA -17.593 -1

-4864

FFFF

ED00

Underrange

< 1.185 mA <-17.593 32767 7FFF Wire breakage

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

220 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Voltage measurement range ±10 V

(Parameter setting XX11)

Range Units Range

± 10 V in % Dec. Hex. > 11.759 V

>117.589 32767 7FFF Overflow

11,759 V 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

10 V

361.7 µV

0 V

-361.7 µV

-10 V

100

0.003617

-0.003617

-100

27648

-1

-27648

6C00

0001

0000

FFFF

9400

Nominal range

-11.759 V -117.593 -27649

-32512

93FF

8100

Underrange

< -11.759 V <-117.593 -32768 (+32767) 8000

(7FFF)

Underflow

(for certain AS-i masters)

Voltage measurement range 1 to 5 V

(Parameter setting XX10)

Range Units Range

1 to 5 V in % Dec. Hex.

> 5.704 V >117.589 32767 7FFF Overflow

5,704 V 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

5 V

1 V + 144.7 µV

1 V

100

0.003617

27648

6C00

0001

0000

Nominal range

0.296 V -17.593 -1

-4864

FFFF

ED00

Underrange

< 0.296 V <-17.593 32767 7FFF Wire breakage

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 221

Thermoresistor Pt 100

Standard range (linear) -200 to +850°C (Parameter setting XX11)

Units Range

-200 to +850°C Dec. Hex.

Range

> 1000°C 32767 7FFF Overflow

1000°C 1) 8501 2135 Overrange

850 °C

...

0.1 °C

0 °C

-0.1 °C

...

-200 °C

8500

-1

-2000

2134

0001

0000

FFFF

F830

Nominal range

-243°C 1) -2001 F82F Underrange

< -243°C -32768

(+32767)

8000

(7FFF)

Underflow

(for certain AS-i masters)

1) In the overrange/underrange, the gradient of the characteristic is maintained when the linear nominal range is exited.

Climatic range (linear) -120 to +130°C (Parameter setting XX01)

Units Range

-120 to +130°C Dec. Hex.

Range

> 155°C 32767 7FFF Overflow

155°C 1) 13001 32C9 Overrange

130 °C

...

0.01 °C

0 °C

-0.01 °C

...

-120 °C

13000

-1

-12000

32C8

0001

0000

FFFF

D120

Nominal range

-145°C 1) -12001 D11F Underrange

< -145°C -32768

(+32767)

8000

(7FFF)

Underflow (for certain AS-i masters)

1) In the overrange/underrange, the gradient of the characteristic is maintained when the linear nominal range is exited.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

222 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Thermoresistor Ni 100

Standard range (linear) -60 to +250 °C (Parameter setting XX00)

Units Range

-60 to +250 °C Dec Hex.

Range

> 295°C 32767 7FFF Overflow

295°C 1) 2501 9C5 Overrange

250 °C

...

0.1 °C

0 °C

-0.1 °C

...

-60 °C

2500

-1

-600

9C4

0001

0000

FFFF

FDA8

Nominal range

-105°C 1) -601 FDA7 Underrange

< -105°C -32768

(+32767)

8000 (7FFF) Underflow

(for certain AS-i masters)

1) In the overrange/underrange, the gradient of the characteristic is maintained when the linear nominal range is exited.

Resistance measurement

Range 0 ... 600 Ω (Parameter setting XX10)

Range Units

0 to 600 Ω in % Dec. Hex.

Range

> 705.53 Ω >117.589 32767 7FFF Overflow

705.53 Ω 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

600 Ω

...

21.7 mΩ

0 Ω

100

0.003617

27648

6C00

0001

0000

Nominal range

-17.593

-1

-4864

FFFF

ED00

Underrange

1) <-17.593 -32768

(+32767)

8000 (7FFF) Underflow

(for certain AS-i masters)

1) Reverse polarity of constant current IC+, IC-

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 223

Parameter settings for output modules

The following table shows the individual parameter settings for the analog output modules.

Parameter bit P3 P2 P1 P0 Current output Voltage output

1 1 1 1 4 ... 20 mA ± 10 V

1 1 1 0 ± 20 mA 0 ... 10 V

1 1 0 1 0 ... 20 mA Reserved 1)

1 1 0 0 Reserved 1) 1 ... 5 V

1) With this parameter combination, the default range is the same as that for 1 1 1 1.

Current output ranges

Range ±20 mA (parameter setting 1110)

Output value Units

± 20 mA in % Dec Hex.

Range

0 mA 118.5149

117.593

32767

32512

7FFF

7F00

Overflow

23.52 mA 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

20 mA

723.4 nA

0 mA

-723.4 nA

-20 mA

100

0.003617

-0.003617

-100

27648

-1

-27648

6C00

0001

0000

FFFF

9400

Nominal range

-23.52 mA -117.593 -27649

-32512

93FF

8100

Underrange

0 mA -117.596

-118.519

-32513

-32768

80FF

8000

Underflow

Range 0 to 20 mA (parameter setting 1101)

Output value Units

0 to 20 mA in % Dec Hex.

Range

0 mA 118.5149

117.593

32767

32512

7FFF

7F00

Overflow

23.52 mA 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

20 mA

723.4 nA

0 mA

100

0.003617

27648

6C00

0001

0000

Nominal range

0 mA -117.593 -1

-32512

FFFF

8100

0 mA -117.596

-118.519

-32513

-32768

80FF

8000

Impermissible range,

underflow

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

224 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Range 4 to 20 mA (parameter setting 1111)

Output value Units

4 to 20 mA in % Dec. Hex.

Range

0 mA 118.5149

117.593

32767

32512

7FFF

7F00

Overflow

22.81 mA 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

20 mA

4 mA + 578.7 nA 4 mA

100

0.003617

27648

6C00

0001

0000

Nominal range

4 mA - 578.7 nA

0 mA

-25 -1

-6912

FFFF

E500

Underrange

0 mA -117.593 -6913

-32512

E4FF 8100

0 mA -117.596

-118.519

-32513

-32768

80FF 8000

Impermissible range,

underflow

Note

The lowest possible resolution for the D/A converter is 11.57 µA. The current resulting from

the units received, therefore, only changes in steps of 11,57 µA.

Voltage output ranges

Range ±10 V(parameter setting 1111)

Output value Units

± 10 V in % Dec. Hex.

Range

0 V 118.5149

117.593

32767

32512

7FFF

7F00

Overflow

11.76 V 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

10 V

361.7 µV

0 V

-361.7 µV

-10 V

100

0.003617

-0.003617

-100

27648

-1

-27648

6C00

0001

0000

FFFF

9400

Nominal range

-11.76 V -117.593 -27649

-32512

93FF

8100

Underrange

0 V -117.596

-118.519

-32513

-32768

80FF

8000

Underflow

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 225

Range 0 to 10 V (parameter setting 1110)

Output value Units

0 to 10 V in % Dec. Hex.

Range

0 V 118.5149

117.593

32767

32512

7FFF

7F00

Overflow

11,76 V 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

10 V

361.7 µV

0 V

100

0.003617

27648

6C00

0001

0000

Nominal range

0 V -117.593 -1

-32512

FFFF

8100

Impermissible range, underflow

0 V -117.596

-118.519

-32513

-32768

80FF

8000

Range 1 to 5 V (parameter setting 1100)

Output value Units

1 to 5 V in % Dec. Hex.

Range

0 V 118.5149

117.593

32767

32512

7FFF

7F00

Overflow

5,7 V 117.589 32511

27649

7EFF

6C01

Overrange

5 V

1 V +144.7 µV

1 V

100

0.003617

27648

6C00

0001

0000

Nominal range

1 V -144.7 µV

0 V

-25 -1

-6912

FFFF

E500

Underrange

0 V -117.593 -6913

-32512

E4FF

8100

Impermissible range, underflow

0 V -117.596

-118.519

-32513

-32768

80FF

8000

Note

The lowest possible resolution for the D/A converter is 5.787 mV.

The voltage resulting from the units received, therefore, only changes within 5.787 mV.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

226 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.6.5 Connection

Block diagrams

Structure of input module for current measurement

$'

8+HOSb

&RQYHUWHU

ZLUHVHQVRU

6XSSO\IURP

DQDORJPRGXOH

([WHUQDOVXSSO\

ZLUHVHQVRU

)RUSDUDPHWHUVHWWLQJ

IRUZLUHFRQQHFWLRQ

:LULQJDSSOLHV

ZKHQWU  SHU

)RUSDUDPHWHUVHWWLQJ

IRUZLUHFRQQHFWLRQ

3DUDPHWHU

LVVZLWFKHGWKURXJK

3LQ)(RIWKH0VRFNHWLVFRQQHFWHGWRWKHSODWHRQWKHPRXQWLQJSODWH

7KHLQWHUQDOWUDQVLVWRUWULVVZLWFKHGWKURXJKIRUSDUDPHWHUVHWWLQJ;;IRUZLUHFRQQHFWLRQ

IRULQSXW,1DQGRQO\

7UIRULQSXW,1DQGRQO\MXPSHUPXVWEHVHWIRULQSXW,1DQG

$VVRRQDV8+HOSLVSUHVHQWWKHYROWDJH

IRUWKH'&'&FRQYHUWHULVGLVFRQQHFWHG

,QWHUIDFH

$6

',))23





0

',))23

/









$6L

9P$

9P$













,1

,1

*1'

/

,1

,1

*1'

,1

,1

5

0

















7U

%U%U

)(







,1

,1



Figure 8-12 Block diagram: current measurement

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 227

Structure of input module for voltage measurement

$'

+HOSb

&RQYHUWHU

ZLUHVHQVRU

6XSSO\IURP

DQDORJPRGXOH

([WHUQDOVXSSO\

$VVRRQDV8

+HOS

LVSUHVHQW

WKHYROWDJHIRUWKH'&'&FRQYHUWHULVGLVFRQQHFWHG

-XPSHULVUHTXLUHGWRSUHYHQWWKHGLIIHUHQFHLQSXWDPSOLILHUIURPEHLQJRYHUGULYHQ

7KLVFDQEHDFKLHYHGE\PHDQVRID+]ULSSOHYROWDJH FDXVHGE\WKHH[WHUQDOVHQVRUVXSSO\

7KHULSSOHYROWDJHZRXOGRWKHUZLVHWULJJHUDPHDVXUHPHQWHUURU

3LQ)(RQWKH0VRFNHWLV

0HWDOSODWHRIWKHPRXQWLQJSODWH

FRQQHFWHGWR

)(',))23

',))23 $6

/









$6L

9P$

9P$













,1

,1

*1'

/

,1

,1

*1'

,QWHUIDFH

,1

,1

N

0

%U

N

)(







,1

,1

Figure 8-13 Block diagram: voltage measurement

Structure of input module for resistance measurement

$'

&RQYHUWHU

ZLUHVHQVRU

ZLUHVHQVRUZLUHVHQVRU

-XPSHUFDQDOVR

EHSODFHGEHWZHHQ,1DQG,FRQVW

7RPLQLPL]HPHDVXUHPHQWHUURUVIRUDQG

VKRUW

3LQ)(RIWKH0VRFNHWLVFRQQHFWHGWRWKHSODWHRQWKHPRXQWLQJSODWH

ZLUHVHQVRUV

8VHFRQQHFWLRQFDEOH

OLHJHQ

P$

0

P$

%U

',))23

',))23 $6

,FRQVW









$6L













,1

,1

,FRQVW

,FRQVW

,1

,1

,FRQVW

,QWHUIDFH

,1

,1

3W1Lവ

9

)(









,1

,1

Figure 8-14 Block diagram: resistance measurement

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

228 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Structure of input module for current output

3LQ3(RQWKH0VRFNHW

0HWDOSODWHRIWKHPRXQWLQJSODWH

LVFRQQHFWHGWR

$VVLJQPHQW

3LQ)(RQWKH0VRFNHWLVFRQQHFWHGWR

0HWDOSODWHRIWKHPRXQWLQJSODWH

$6,QWHUIDFH

'$

1&









&RQYHUWHU

$6L









287

1&

*1'

287

287

1&

287

1&

*1'

ืവ

)( 















287

1&

*1'

1&

)(









Figure 8-15 Block diagram: current output

Structure of input module for voltage output

3LQ3(RQWKH0VRFNHW

0HWDOSODWHRIWKHPRXQWLQJSODWH

LVFRQQHFWHGWR

$VVLJQPHQW

3LQ)(RQWKH0VRFNHWLVFRQQHFWHGWR

0HWDOSODWHRIWKHPRXQWLQJSODWH



$6,QWHUIDFH

'$

1&









&RQYHUWHU

$6L









287

1&

*1'

287

287

1&

287

1&

*1'

ุNവ

)( 















287

1&

*1'

1&

)(







Figure 8-16 Block diagram: voltage output

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 229

Pin assignment for inputs/outputs

Input modules

3ROH6XSSO\/9'&



3ROH6XSSO\0JURXQG

3ROH&DEOHVKLHOGLQJ

)(IXQFWLRQDOJURXQG

$OOSLQDVVLJQPHQWVZLWKRXWDQH[WHUQDO

VHQVRUVXSSO\

16$BE







3LQ,

3LQ,

1

1ದ

Figure 8-17 Current input: 4-wire sensor

3ROH6XSSO\/9'&

3ROH6XSSO\0JURXQG

3ROH&DEOHVKLHOGLQJ

)(IXQFWLRQDOJURXQG

$OOSLQDVVLJQPHQWVZLWKRXWDQH[WHUQDO

VHQVRUVXSSO\

-XPSHUIURP WR0

FDQDOVREHVHWLQWHUQDOO\

E\PHDQVRISDUDPHWHUV



Qದ

16$BF







3LQ,1

3LQ,1ದ



Figure 8-18 Current input: 2-wire sensor

3ROH6XSSO\/9'&



3ROH6XSSO\0JURXQG

3ROH&DEOHVKLHOGLQJ



)(IXQFWLRQDOJURXQG

$OOSLQDVVLJQPHQWVZLWKRXWDQH[WHUQDO

VHQVRUVXSSO\

16$BE







3LQ,1

3LQ,1ದ

Figure 8-19 Voltage input: 4-wire sensor

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

230 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

3ROH&DEOHVKLHOGLQJ

$OOSLQDVVLJQPHQWVZLWKRXWDQH[WHUQDO

VHQVRUVXSSO\







16$BE

3W

3LQ

3LQ,1



3LQ

3LQ,1ದ

FRQVW

FRQVWದ

Figure 8-20 Thermoresistor: 4-wire sensor

3ROH&DEOHVKLHOGLQJ

$OOSLQDVVLJQPHQWVZLWKRXWDQH[WHUQDO

VHQVRUVXSSO\

16$BF





 3W

3LQ

3LQ,1



3LQ

3LQ,1ದ

FRQVW

FRQVWದ

Figure 8-21 Thermoresistor: 3-wire sensor

3ROH&DEOHVKLHOGLQJ

$OOSLQDVVLJQPHQWVZLWKRXWDQH[WHUQDO

VHQVRUVXSSO\

16$BF





3W

3LQ

3LQ,1



3LQ

3LQ,1ದ

FRQVW

FRQVWದ

Figure 8-22 Thermoresistor: 2-wire sensor

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 231

Output modules

3ROH&DEOHVKLHOGLQJ

$OOSLQDVVLJQPHQWVZLWKRXWDQH[WHUQDO

VHQVRUVXSSO\

16$BD







Figure 8-23 Analog current output

3ROH&DEOHVKLHOGLQJ

$OOSLQDVVLJQPHQWVZLWKRXWDQH[WHUQDO

VHQVRUVXSSO\

16$BD







Figure 8-24 Analog voltage output

Wiring the two-channel input modules with one input

The modules with order numbers 3RK1207-.BQ40-0AA3 with two inputs can also be

operated with one input. This increases the speed at which the input signal is transferred.

To do so, pin 1 and pin 2 must be connected to each other at socket 3. A jumper

(3RK1901-1AA00) can also be used for this purpose.







Socket 2 (IN2), which is not used, must be sealed with a screw cap.

5.$$

,1 ,1







5.%4$$

Figure 8-25 Operation with one input

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

232 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.6.6 Diagnostics

LEDs for AS-i and FAULT

The module has two LEDs for AS-i and FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with two LEDs for AS-i and FAULT (Page 173) .

LED display AUX POWER

The module also has an LED for AUX POWER; for a description, see LED status display

AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage (Page 175).

Status display for the switching state

The switching state of the AS-i inputs and outputs is indicated by a yellow LED; see LED

status display for the switching state (yellow) (Page 175).

8.4.6.7 Technical specifications

Order no.

Current measurement 3RK1207-1BQ44-0AA3 3RK1207-1BQ40-0AA3 3RK2207-1BQ50-0AA3

Voltage measurement 3RK1207-2BQ44-0AA3 3RK1207-2BQ40-0AA3 3RK2207-2BQ50-0AA3

Temperature / resistance

measurement

3RK1207-3BQ44-0AA3 3RK1207-3BQ40-0AA3 —

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave A/B slave (Spec. 3.0)

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 3.0

No. of inputs 4 2 2

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.3.E 7.3.D 7.A.9

ID1 code (factory setting) F F 7

Number format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S7

Operating voltage in acc. with

AS-Interface Specification

26.5 to 31.6 V

Optional supply for sensors via UAUX

(for current/voltage measurement only)

24 to 30 V

Total power consumption of module

from AS-i, including connection of

sensors

150 mA

Current-carrying capacity for all inputs

(without UAUX supply)

Max. 46 mA

Current-carrying capacity for all inputs

(with UAUX supply) (for current/voltage

measurement only)

Max. 500 mA

Approvals UL/CSA/shipbuilding

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 233

Order no.

Current measurement 3RK1207-1BQ44-0AA3 3RK1207-1BQ40-0AA3 3RK2207-1BQ50-0AA3

Voltage measurement 3RK1207-2BQ44-0AA3 3RK1207-2BQ40-0AA3 3RK2207-2BQ50-0AA3

Temperature / resistance

measurement

3RK1207-3BQ44-0AA3 3RK1207-3BQ40-0AA3 —

Degree of protection IP67

Ambient temperature –20 to +60 °C

Storage temperature –40 to +85 °C

Connection Via the mounting plate for compact module K60

Measurement ranges (variable) for current measurement: 4 to 20 mA, +/– 20 mA

Measurement ranges (variable) for voltage measurement: +/– 10 V, 1 to 5 V

Measurement ranges (variable) for temperature/resistance measurement:

Pt100 standard range (–200.0 to +850.0°C),

Pt100 climatic range (–120.00 to +130.00°C),

Ni100 standard range (–60.0 to +250.0°C),

Resistance measurement (0 to 600 Ω)

Order no.

Current output 3RK1107-1BQ40-0AA3

Voltage output 3RK1107-2BQ40-0AA3

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.1

No. of outputs 2

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.3.5

ID1 code (factory setting) F

Number format SIMATIC S7

Operating voltage in acc. with

AS-Interface Specification

26.5 to 31.6 V

Total power consumption of module

from AS-i

150 mA

Approvals UL/CSA/shipbuilding

Degree of protection IP67

Ambient temperature –20 to +60 °C

Storage temperature –40 to +85 °C

Connection Via the mounting plate for compact module K60

Output ranges (variable) for current output: +/– 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Output ranges (variable) for voltage output: +/– 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

234 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.6.8 Dimension drawings



 







6LGHYLHZ

:LWKPRXQWLQJSODWH

5.&$

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 235

8.4.7 SlimLine digital input/output module - cabinet IP20

SlimLine modules of the S22.5 and S45 series

The AS-Interface module series for the SlimLine cabinet with degree of protection IP20

saves space in cabinets or in distributed on-site boxes. The main feature of these modules is

that they are extremely slim (width of between 22.5 and 45 mm).

Screw or spring-loaded terminals can be used to connect standard sensors/actuators and

the AS-Interface cable.

All modules are equipped with LEDs on the front, which indicate the status of the module.

An addressing socket on the front also allows the module to be addressed once it has been

installed.

In addition to the digital input/output modules, S22.5 modules are available with special

functions. These include:

● Counter module

● Ground fault detection module

The new AS-Interface Specification 3.0 extends the AS-Interface bus system to include a

range of new features. Extended address mode (A/B addresses) allows 62 nodes to be

connected to an AS-Interface network. With extended address mode to Specification 3.0,

A/B slaves can now, for the first time, support four outputs (instead of just three outputs as

defined in Specification 2.1). In the maximum configuration of an AS-Interface network,

therefore, this means that 248 inputs and 248 outputs are available in an AS-Interface

network.

Modules with four inputs and four outputs as A/B slaves in accordance with Specification 3.0

are also available for the cabinet as SlimLine module S45.

Note

Note that the modules to spec. 3.0 can only be operated with a new master to AS-Interface

specification 3.0 (e.g. a new DP/AS-i LINK Advanced or IE/AS-i LINK PN IO) and that the

cycle times for the outputs in this case must not exceed 20 ms.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

236 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.7.1 Order numbers

SlimLine Module S22.5

Inputs/outputs Type Connection

type

Sensors Output MLFB

4 outputs Standard slave Screw terminals — Transistor PNP

(1 A)

3RK1100-1CE00-0AA2

4 outputs Standard slave Spring-loaded

terminal

— Transistor PNP

(1 A)

3RK1100-1CG00-0AA2

4 inputs Standard slave Screw terminals 2 conductors — 3RK1200-0CE00-0AA2

4 inputs Standard slave Screw terminals 2 and 3 conductors — 3RK1200-0CE02-0AA2

4 inputs Standard slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 conductors — 3RK1200-0CG00-0AA2

4 inputs Standard slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 and 3 conductors — 3RK1200-0CG02-0AA2

2 inputs /

2 outputs

Standard slave Screw terminals 2 conductors Transistor PNP 3RK1400-0BE00-0AA2

2 inputs /

2 outputs

Standard slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 conductors Transistor PNP 3RK1400-0BG00-0AA2

2 inputs /

2 outputs

Standard slave Screw terminals 2 conductors Relay 3RK1402-0BE00-0AA2

2 inputs /

2 outputs

Standard slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 conductors Relay 3RK1402-0BG00-0AA2

4 inputs A/B slave Screw terminals 2 and 3 conductors — 3RK2200-0CE02-0AA2

4 inputs A/B slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 and 3 conductors — 3RK2200-0CG02-0AA2

SlimLine modules S45

Inputs/outputs Type Connection type Sensors Output MLFB

4 inputs /

4 outputs

Standard slave Screw terminals 2 and 3 conductors Transistor PNP

(1 A)

3RK1400-1CE00-0AA2

4 inputs /

4 outputs

Standard slave Screw terminals 2 and 3 conductors Transistor PNP

(2 A)

3RK1400-1CE01-0AA2

4 inputs /

4 outputs

Standard slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 and 3 conductors Transistor PNP

(1 A)

3RK1400-1CG00-0AA2

4 inputs /

4 outputs

Standard slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 and 3 conductors Transistor PNP

(2 A)

3RK1400-1CG01-0AA2

4 inputs /

4 outputs

Standard slave Screw terminals 2 and 3 conductors Relay 3RK1402-3CE00-0AA2

4 inputs /

4 outputs

Standard slave Screw terminals 2 and 3 conductors

floating

Transistor PNP

(1 A)

floating

3RK1402-3CE01-0AA2

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 237

4 inputs / 4

outputs

Standard slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 and 3 conductors Relay 3RK1402-3CG00-0AA2

4 inputs / 4

outputs

Standard slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 and 3 conductors

floating

Transistor PNP

(1 A) floating

3RK1402-3CG01-0AA2

4 inputs / 4

outputs

A/B slave Screw terminals 2 and 3 conductors Transistor PNP

(2 A)

3RK2400-1CE01-0AA2

4 inputs / 4

outputs

A/B slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 and 3 conductors Transistor PNP

(2 A)

3RK2400-1CG01-0AA2

4 inputs / 3

outputs

A/B slave Screw terminals 2 and 3 conductors Transistor PNP

(2 A)

3RK2400-1FE00-0AA2

4 inputs / 3

outputs

A/B slave Spring-loaded

terminal

2 and 3 conductors Transistor PNP

(2 A)

3RK2400-1FG00-0AA2

Accessories

MLFB Description Comments

3RP1902 Sealable cover For devices with 1 or 2 changeover contacts

3RP1902 Adapter for screw fixing For devices with 1 or 2 changeover contacts

8WA2807 Screwdriver Blade 2.5 x 0.5 mm, green

8.4.7.2 Connection

SlimLine module S22.5

6HQVRU/

6HQVRU/ 6HQVRU/

$6,Q,1

$6,Q 

$''5



,1







$6,QWHUIDFH

,1

,1

,1

,1



,1 ,1









6,QWHUIDFH

6,QWHUIDFH

287



$6,Q ,1

$6,Q 

$''5



,1







$6,QWHUIDFH

,1

,1

287

287



287 287







/

0

$6,QWHUIDFH

$6,QWHUIDFH



$8;32:(59'& 

6

287

287



Figure 8-26 S22.5 connection

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

238 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

SlimLine modules S45

6HQVRU/313

6HQVRU/313

&RQVXPHU

Figure 8-27 S45 connection

8.4.7.3 Diagnostics

LED for AS-i/FAULT

The module has one dual LED for AS-i/FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT (Page 174)

LED display AUX POWER

The module also has an LED for AUX POWER; for a description, see LED status display

AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage (Page 175).

Status display for the switching state

The switching state of the AS-i inputs and outputs is indicated by a yellow LED; see LED

status display for the switching state (yellow) (Page 175).

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 239

8.4.7.4 Technical specifications

General technical specifications

Operating voltage in acc. with

AS-Interface Specification

26.5 to 31.6 V

Input circuit PNP

AS-Interface certificate Available (or planned for new devices)

Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding (or planned for new devices)

Degree of protection IP20

Ambient temperature –25 to +70 °C

Storage temperature –40 to +85 °C

Note

An external additional power supply (AUX POWER) of between 20 and 30 V DC is required

for supplying the output circuits. The additional power supply must comply with VDE 0106

(PELV), protection class III.

SlimLine module S22.5

Order no. 3RK1200-0CE00-0AA2 3RK1200-0CE02-0AA2 3RK2200-0CE02-0AA2

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave A/B slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs

Connection type Screw connection Screw connection Screw connection

Connection for sensors 2 conductors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.0.F 0.0.F 0.A.0

ID1 code (factory setting) F F 7

Total power consumption ≤ 50 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

— 200 mA 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1 IN1 IN1

Data bit D1 IN2 IN2 IN2

Data bit D2 IN3 IN3 IN3

Data bit D3 IN4 IN4 IN4

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

240 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

SlimLine module S22.5

Order no. 3RK1200-0CG00-0AA2 3RK1200-0CG02-0AA2 3RK2200-0CG02-0AA2

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave A/B slave

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs

Connection type Spring-loaded terminals Spring-loaded terminals Spring-loaded terminals

Connection for sensors 2 conductors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.0.F 0.0.F 0.A.0

ID1 code (factory setting) F F 7

Total power consumption ≤ 50 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

— 200 mA 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1 IN1 IN1

Data bit D1 IN2 IN2 IN2

Data bit D2 IN3 IN3 IN3

Data bit D3 IN4 IN4 IN4

SlimLine module S22.5

Order no. 3RK1400-0BE00-0AA2 3RK1402-0BE00-0AA2 3RK1400-0BG00-0AA2

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to

Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 2 inputs / 2 outputs 2 inputs / 2 outputs 2 inputs / 2 outputs

Connection type Screw connection Screw connection Spring-loaded connection

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 3.0.F 3.0.F 3.0.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F F

Connection for sensors 2 conductors 2 conductors 2 conductors

Output type Transistor PNP (2 A) Relay Transistor PNP (2 A)

Total power consumption ≤ 50 mA ≤ 50 mA ≤ 50 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

— — —

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 241

Order no. 3RK1400-0BE00-0AA2 3RK1402-0BE00-0AA2 3RK1400-0BG00-0AA2

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

2 A — 2 A

Max. total current for each

module

4 A — 4 A

Short-circuit protection Integrated External back-up fuse Integrated

Inductive interference protection Integrated N/A Integrated

Reverse polarity protection Not integrated N/A Not integrated

External 24 V DC power supply Via terminals:

Terminal 7 = "+"

Terminal 10 = "–"

N/A Via terminals:

Terminal 7 = "+"

Terminal 10 = "–"

th — 6 A —

AC-15 — 3 A —

13, 24 V DC — 1 A —

13, 110 V DC — 0.2 A —

13, 230 V DC — 0.1 A —

Watchdog Integrated Integrated Integrated

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1 IN1 IN1

Data bit D1 IN2 IN2 IN2

Data bit D2 OUT1 OUT1 OUT1

Data bit D3 OUT2 OUT2 OUT2

Connection Screw connection Screw connection Spring-loaded terminals

SlimLine module S22.5

Order no. 3RK1402-0BG00-0AA2 3RK1100-1CE00-0AA2 3RK1100-1CG00-0AA2

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to

Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 2 inputs / 2 outputs 4 outputs 4 outputs

Connection type Spring-loaded terminals Screw connection Spring-loaded terminals

Connection for sensors 2 conductors — —

Output type Relais

changeover contact,

floating

Transistor PNP (1 A) Transistor PNP (1 A)

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 3.0.F 8.0.F 8.0.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F F

Total power consumption ≤ 50 mA ≤ 40 mA ≤ 40 mA

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

242 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1402-0BG00-0AA2 3RK1100-1CE00-0AA2 3RK1100-1CG00-0AA2

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload

proof

— —

Voltage range 20 to 30 V — —

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

— — —

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V — —

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA — —

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

— 1 A 1 A

Max. total current for each

module

— 2 A 2 A

Short-circuit protection External back-up fuse

required

Integrated Integrated

Inductive interference protection N/A Integrated Integrated

Reverse polarity protection N/A Integrated Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply N/A Screw connection:

Terminal 7 = "+"

Terminal 10 = M

Screw connection:

Terminal 7 = "+"

Terminal 10 = M

th 6 A — —

AC-15 3 A — —

13, 24 V DC 1 A — —

13, 110 V DC 0.2 A — —

13, 230 V DC 0.1 A — —

Watchdog Integrated Integrated Integrated

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1 OUT1 OUT1

Data bit D1 IN2 OUT2 OUT2

Data bit D2 OUT1 OUT3 OUT3

Data bit D3 OUT2 OUT4 OUT4

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 243

SlimLine modules S45

Order no. 3RK1400-1CE00-0AA2 3RK1400-1CE01-0AA2 3RK1402-3CE01-0AA2

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Connection type Screw connection Screw connection Screw connection

Connection for sensors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

(floating)

Output type Transistor PNP (1 A) Transistor PNP (2 A) Transistor PNP (1 A)

floating

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.0.F 7.0.F 7.0.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F F

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 40 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

1 A 2 A 1 A

Max. total current for each

module

4 A 4 A 4 A

Short-circuit protection Integrated Integrated Integrated

Inductive interference protection Integrated Integrated Integrated

Reverse polarity protection Integrated Integrated Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply Terminal 13 = L24+

Terminal 19 = M24

Terminal 13 = L24+

Terminal 19 = M24

Sensor supply:

Terminal 13 = U_s+

Terminal 19 = U_s–

Actuator supply:

Terminal 14 = L+

Terminals 20 to 24 = M

Watchdog Integrated Integrated Integrated

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1

Data bit D1 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2

Data bit D2 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3

Data bit D3 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4

The module "3RK1 402-3CE01-0AA2" is equipped with four floating inputs and four floating switching outputs. An external

additional supply of 20 to 30 V to VDE 0106 (PELV) protection class III is required for the input and output circuits.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

244 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

SlimLine modules S45

Order no. 3RK1402-3CE00-0AA2 3RK1400-1CG00-0AA2 3RK1400-1CG01-0AA2

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Connection type Screw connection Spring-loaded terminals Spring-loaded terminals

Connection for sensors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

Output type Relay Transistor PNP (1 A) Transistor PNP (2 A)

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.0.F 7.0.F 7.0.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F F

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Short circuit and overload

proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

— 1 A 2 A

Max. total current for each

module

— 4 A 4 A

Short-circuit protection External

back-up fuse 6 A gL/gG

Integrated Integrated

Inductive interference protection N/A Integrated Integrated

Reverse polarity protection — Integrated Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply N/A Terminal 13 = L24+

Terminal 19 = M24

Terminal 13 = L24+

Terminal 19 = M24

th 5 A — —

AC-15 3 A — —

13, 24 V DC 1 A — —

13, 110 V DC 0.2 A — —

13, 230 V DC 0.1 A — —

Watchdog Integrated Integrated Integrated

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1

Data bit D1 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2

Data bit D2 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3

Data bit D3 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 245

SlimLine modules S45

Order no. 3RK1402-3CG01-0AA2 3RK1402-3CG00-0AA2

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Connection type Spring-loaded terminals Spring-loaded terminals

Connection for sensors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

Output type Transistor PNP (1 A) Relay

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.0.F 7.0.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F

Total power consumption ≤ 40 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload proof Short circuit and overload proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

200 mA 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

1 A —

Max. total current for each

module

4 A —

Short-circuit protection Integrated External back-up fuse 6 A gL/gG

Inductive interference protection Integrated N/A

Reverse polarity protection Integrated Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply Sensor supply:

Terminal 13 = U_s+

Terminal 19 = U_s–

Actuator supply:

Terminal 14 = L+

Terminals 20 to 24 = M

N/A

th — 5

AC-15 — 3

13, 24 V DC — 1

13, 110 V DC — 0.2

13, 230 V DC — 0.1

Watchdog Integrated Integrated

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

246 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1402-3CG01-0AA2 3RK1402-3CG00-0AA2

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1

Data bit D1 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2

Data bit D2 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3

Data bit D3 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4

The module "3RK1 402-3CG01-0AA2" is equipped with four floating inputs and four floating switching outputs. An external

additional supply of 20 to 30 V to VDE 0106 (PELV) protection class III is required for the input and output circuits.

SlimLine modules S45

Order no. 3RK2400-1FE00-0AA2 3RK2400-1FG00-0AA2

Slave type A/B slave A/B slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.1

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 3 outputs 4 inputs / 3 outputs

Connection type Screw connection Spring-loaded terminals

Connection for sensors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

Output type Transistor PNP (2 A) Transistor PNP (2 A)

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.A.0 7.A.0

ID1 code (factory setting) 7 7

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload proof Short circuit and overload proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

200 mA 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

2 A 2 A

Max. total current for each

module

4 A 4 A

Short-circuit protection Integrated Integrated

Inductive interference protection Integrated Integrated

Reverse polarity protection Integrated Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply Terminal 13 = L24+ Terminal 19 = M24 Terminal 13 = L24+ Terminal 19 = M24

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 247

Order no. 3RK2400-1FE00-0AA2 3RK2400-1FG00-0AA2

th — —

AC-15 — —

13, 24 V DC — —

13, 110 V DC — —

13, 230 V DC — —

Watchdog Integrated Integrated

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1

Data bit D1 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2

Data bit D2 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3

Data bit D3 IN4 IN4

SlimLine modules S45

Order no. 2400-1CE01-0AA2 2400-1CG01-0AA2

Slave type A/B slave (Spec. 3.0) A/B slave (Spec. 3.0)

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 3.0 AS-i Spec. 3.0

Connection type Screw connection Spring-loaded terminals

Connection for sensors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

Output type Transistor PNP (2 A) Transistor PNP (2 A)

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.A.7 7.A.7

ID1 code (factory setting) 7 7

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload proof Short circuit and overload proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

200 mA 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Outputs

Typ. current-carrying capacity

per output: 12/13 DC

2 A 2 A

Max. total current for each

module

4 A 4 A

Short-circuit protection Integrated Integrated

Inductive interference protection Integrated Integrated

Reverse polarity protection Integrated Integrated

External 24 V DC power supply Terminal 13 = L24+

Terminal 19 = M24

Terminal 13 = L24+

Terminal 19 = M24

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

248 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 2400-1CE01-0AA2 2400-1CG01-0AA2

th — —

AC-15 — —

13, 24 V DC — —

13, 110 V DC — —

13, 230 V DC — —

Watchdog Integrated Integrated

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1

Data bit D1 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2

Data bit D2 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3

Data bit D3 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4

8.4.7.5 Dimension drawings

Module S22.5







DEFGH

5.( 

5.* ಧಧ





  

 



 





[











Figure 8-28 Dimensions of the SlimLine module S22.5

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 249

Module S45











 











[

[



DEFG

5.(



5.* ಧಧ

  

 

Figure 8-29 Dimensions of the SlimLine module S45

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

250 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.8 F90 digital input/output module - cabinet IP20

8.4.8.1 Overview

F90 module

The F90 module is available in the following versions:

● 4 inputs / 4 outputs

– Current-carrying capacity 1 A

– Current-carrying capacity 2 A

● 4 inputs / 4 outputs 2 A, floating

● 16 inputs

With either screw terminals or Combicon connector.

Operating principle of the F90 module with 16 inputs

The 16 inputs are divided into four groups each comprising four inputs.

Only one group at a time can be active. The PLC activates each group one after the other

and reads the four items of input data to the process image for the inputs (PII). The user

program assigns the input data to the relevant groups, that is, the output image (POI) of the

PLC must match the set output on the module otherwise input data will be read by the wrong

group.

If the AS-Interface transfer procedure is not functioning properly, it can take up to three

AS-Interface cycles (15 ms) before the output image (OI) of the slave matches the output

image of the master and, in turn, the PLC. It can also take up to three AS-Interface cycles to

transfer the input image of the slave. If more than three consecutive AS-Interface cycles are

required to send telegrams to the relevant slave, a "configuration error" is output on the

master. The input image in the master is set to "zero" and the error bit in the PLC is set.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 251

Example: Behavior of the OI and II in the master and slave when AS-Interface transfer is faulty

Cycle

Key:

A Output image

EA Input image

MA Master call

PAA Process image of outputs

PA Process image of inputs

SA Slave response

PLC Programmable logic controller

PLC

E invalid due to switchover

time in module

MA or SA faulty

MA or SA not faulty

Master Module Comments

AS-

Interface-

PAA PAE AA AA EA

1000 xxxx

1 1000 xxxx 0111 xxxx xxxx xxxx

2 1000 xxxx 0111 xxxx xxxx xxxx

3 1000 xxxx 0111 EEEE 1000 EEEE

4 1000 xxxx 0111 xxxx 1000 EEEE

5 1000 xxxx 0111 xxxx 1000 EEEE

6 1000 xxxx 0111 EEEE 1000 EEEE

1000 EEEE 0111

Figure 8-30 F90 cycle

In this example, the OI and II in the master and slave do not match until after six

AS-Interface cycles. The PLC cycle is asynchronous vis-à-vis the AS-Interface cycle, which

is why the time required for the OI and II of the master and PLC to match increases by one

AS-Interface cycle and one PLC cycle.

Formula for the cycle time:

4 x ((6 x 5 ms) + 5 ms + 10 ms) =180 ms

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

252 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Note

The following function blocks (FB) are available for the flow sequence:

• FB 21 (E16-2433) for the AS-Interface master CP2433 (AG S5-95 U)

• FB 22 (E16-2430) for the AS-Interface master CP2430 (AG S5-115 U)

• FC 22 for S7

The time between two calls of the FB for a module must be at least 30 ms in order to ensure

that the switching statuses of the inputs are read reliably.

Note

If you require programming examples, contact the Technical Assistance team

(tel. (0911) 895-5900) or visit the following Web page:

http://www.siemens.de/as-interface

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 253

8.4.8.2 Order numbers

F90 module

Type Order no.

AS-Interface F90 module, digital, 4I/4O, 2/3 conductors, 4 x 1 input,

max. 200 mA, PNP, 4 x 1 output, electr., 2 A, 24 V DC connection via screw

terminals

3RG9002-0DA00

AS-Interface F90 module, digital, 4I/4O, 2/3 conductors, 4 x 1 input,

max. 200 mA, PNP, 4 x 1 output, electr., 1 A, 24 V DC connection via screw

terminals

3RG9002-0DB00

AS-Interface F90 module, digital, 4I/4O, 2/3 conductors, floating, 4 x 1 input,

max. 200 mA, PNP, 4 x 1 output, electr., 2 A, 24 V DC connection via screw

terminals

3RG9002-0DC00

AS-Interface F90 module, digital, 16I (multiplexing) 16 x 1 input, 2 conductors,

connection via screw terminals, function block required

3RG9002-0DE00

AS-Interface F90 module, digital, 4I/4O, 2/3 conductors, 4 x 1 input, max.

200 mA, PNP, 4 x 1 output, electr., 2 A, 24 V DC connection via COMBICON

3RG9004-0DA00

AS-Interface F90 module, digital, 4I/4O, 2/3 conductors, 4 x 1 input, max.

200 mA, PNP, 4 x 1 output, electr., 1 A, 24 V DC connection via COMBICON

3RG9004-0DB00

AS-Interface F90 module, digital, 4I/4O, 2/3 conductors, floating, 4 x 1 input,

max. 200 mA, PNP, 4 x 1 output, electr., 2 A, 24 V DC connection via

COMBICON

3RG9004-0DC00

AS-Interface F90 module, digital, 16I (multiplexing) 16 x 1 input, 2 conductors,

connection via COMBICON, function block required

3RG9004-0DE00

Accessories

Type Order no.

COMBICON connector set for 4I/4O modules with COMBICON connection.

4 x 5-pin connector for connecting standard sensors/actuators

2 x 4 pin connector for AS-i and external auxiliary power supply

3RX9810-0AA00

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

254 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.8.3 Connection

6,QWHUIDFH

$6,QWHUIDFHದ











///

/











$6,QWHUIDFH





   





,



9

2

2

9



,



,



9

2

2

9



,











5;$$

Figure 8-31 Connecting the F90 module, 4I/4O screw connection (left), 16I COMBICON connection

(right)

L+

L- L-

IN1

OUT4

IN4

OUT3

IN3

AS-i

21 26

Figure 8-32 Terminal assignment for F90 4I-4O

Figure 8-33 Terminal assignment for F90 16I

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 255

8.4.8.4 Diagnostics

LED for AS-i/FAULT

The module has one dual LED for AS-i/FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT (Page 174)

8.4.8.5 Technical specifications

Order no. 3RG9002-0DB00 3RG9002-0DA00 3RG9004-0DB00 3RG9004-0DA00

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Connection type Screw terminals Screw terminals Combicon connection Combicon connection

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.0.F 7.0.F 7.0.F 7.0.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F F F

Connection for sensors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

Input circuit PNP PNP PNP PNP

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via

AS-Interface

Short circuit and

overload proof

Short circuit and

overload proof

Short circuit and

overload proof

Short circuit and

overload proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity

for sensor supply

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Outputs

Output type Electronics Electronics Electronics Electronics

Typ. current-carrying

capacity per output:

12/13 DC

1 A 2 A 1 A 2 A

Max. total current for each

module

4 A 6 A 4 A 6 A

Short-circuit protection Integrated External back-up fuse Integrated

Inductive interference

protection

Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated

Reverse polarity protection Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated

Watchdog Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated

External 24 V DC power

supply

Via terminals Via terminals Via plug connector Via plug connector

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

256 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RG9002-0DB00 3RG9002-0DA00 3RG9004-0DB00 3RG9004-0DA00

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1

Data bit D1 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2

Data bit D2 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3

Data bit D3 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding

Degree of protection IP20

Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85 °C

Indicators

Inputs/outputs Yellow LEDs

AS-i voltage LED green

Order no. 3RG9002-0DC00 3RG9004-0DC00

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Connection type Screw terminals Combicon connection

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.0.F 7.0.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F

Connection for sensors 2 and 3 conductors 2 and 3 conductors

Input circuit PNP PNP

Total power consumption ≤ 30 mA ≤ 30 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via

AS-Interface

Short circuit and overload proof Short circuit and overload proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity

for sensor supply

200 mA 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Outputs

Output type Electronics Electronics

Typ. current-carrying

capacity per output:

12/13 DC

2 A, floating 2 A, floating

Max. total current for each

module

4 A 6 A

Short-circuit protection Integrated Integrated

Inductive interference

protection

Integrated Integrated

Watchdog Integrated Integrated

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 257

Order no. 3RG9002-0DC00 3RG9004-0DC00

External 24 V DC power

supply

Via terminals Via plug connector

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1 IN1/OUT1

Data bit D1 IN2/OUT2 IN2/OUT2

Data bit D2 IN3/OUT3 IN3/OUT3

Data bit D3 IN4/OUT4 IN4/OUT4

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding

Degree of protection IP20

Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85 °C

Displays

Inputs/outputs Yellow LEDs

AS-i voltage LED green

Note: The module is equipped with four floating inputs and four floating switching outputs. An external additional supply of

20 to 30 V to VDE 0106 (PELV) protection class III is required for the input and output circuits.

Order no. 3RG9002-0DE00 3RG9004-0DE00

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave

Geeignet für AS-i Master

nach Spec. ... (oder höher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 16 inputs 16 inputs

Connection type Screw terminals Combicon connection

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.F.F 7.F.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F

Connection for sensors Mechanical contacts Mechanical contacts

Input circuit PNP PNP

Total power consumption ≤ 70 mA ≤ 70 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via

AS-Interface

Short circuit and overload proof Short circuit and overload proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity

for sensor supply

200 mA 200 mA

Signal 1 Uin 20 ... 30 V ≥ 3 mA 20 ... 30 V ≥ 3 mA

Group signal

Current-carrying capacity

Iout

≤ 25 mA ≤ 25 mA

Output voltage Uout 20 ... 30 V 20 ... 30 V

Watchdog Integrated Integrated

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

258 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RG9002-0DE00 3RG9004-0DE00

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 Data bit D0 group signal G1 (D0) inputs I 1.1 to I 1.4 (D0 to D3)

Data bit D1 Data bit D1 group signal G2 (D1) inputs I 2.1 to I 2.4 (D0 to D3)

Data bit D2 Data bit D2 group signal G3 (D2) inputs I 3.1 to I 3.4 (D0 to D3)

Data bit D3 Data bit D3 group signal G4 (D3) inputs I 4.1 to I 4.4 (D0 to D3)

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding

Degree of protection IP20

Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85 °C

Displays

Inputs/outputs Yellow LEDs

AS-i voltage LED green

Note:

1. The module is equipped with four input groups. Each input group has four inputs and one group signal for supplying the

inputs with power. The input groups are activated separately when the controller sets the relevant group signal. The

switching statuses of the assigned inputs are then read.

2. Function block required.

Note

An external additional power supply (AUX POWER) of between 20 and 30 V DC is required

for supplying the output circuits. The additional power supply must comply with VDE 0106

(PELV), protection class III.

Setting the AS-i address

The address can be assigned via the integrated addressing socket.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 259

8.4.8.6 Dimension drawings

 



Figure 8-34 F90 module dimensions

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

260 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.9 Flat digital input/output module - cabinet IP20

8.4.9.1 Overview

The flat module for cabinets with degree of protection IP20 is equipped with four inputs and

four outputs.

The module is fitted with LEDs on the front, which indicate the status of the module.

Installation

The modules can be secured using the integrated lugs.

Figure 8-35 Installing the flat modules

Setting the AS-i address

An integrated addressing socket allows the module to be addressed once it has been

installed.

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 261

5.$%

$6,QWHUIDFH

Figure 8-36 Addressing the flat modules

8.4.9.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

AS-Interface flat module, 4I/4O, with screw connection, 4 X 1 input, PNP, 4 X outputs 45 mA,

24 V DC supply of outputs via AS-i cable

3RK1400-0CE00-0AA3

8.4.9.3 Connection

Connecting the flat modules for installation in cabinets

Screw terminals can be used to connect standard sensors/actuators and the AS-Interface

cable.

8.4.9.4 Diagnostics

LED for AS-i/FAULT

The module has one dual LED for AS-i/FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT (Page 174)

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

262 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.4.9.5 Technical specifications

Order no. 3RK1400-0CE00-0AA3

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Connection type Screw terminals

AS-i slave profile IO.ID 7.F

ID2, ID1 code not available (substitute values: F, F)

Connection for sensors 2 and 3 conductors

Input circuit PNP

Total power consumption ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Sensor supply via

AS-Interface

Short circuit and overload proof

Voltage range 20 to 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

200 mA

(total current for all inputs and outputs: max. 200 mA)

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 5 mA

Outputs

Output type Electronics

Typ. current-carrying

capacity per output:

12/13 DC

200 mA

(total current for all inputs and outputs: max. 200 mA)

Short-circuit protection Integrated

Inductive interference

protection

Integrated

Watchdog Integrated

External 24 V DC power

supply

Not required (all inputs and outputs are supplied via the AS-Interface cable)

Assignment of the data bits

Data bit D0 IN1/OUT1

Data bit D1 IN2/OUT2

Data bit D2 IN3/OUT3

Data bit D3 IN4/OUT4

AS-Interface certificate Available

Degree of protection IP20

Ambient temperature -25 ... +85 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85 °C

Displays

AS-i voltage LED green

FAULT LED red

Slaves

8.4 Input/output modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 263

8.4.9.6 Dimension drawings

/('$6L)$8/7

º













Figure 8-37 Dimensions of the flat module

Slaves

8.5 Modules with special functions

AS-Interface system

264 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.5 Modules with special functions

Overview

The following modules with special functions are available for AS-Interface:

● Counter module:

counts input pulses.

8.5.1 Counter module

8.5.1.1 Overview

Counter module

This module is used for transferring hexadecimal count values (LSB=D0, MSB=D3) to a

higher-level controller, whereby the count value is incremented by one every time a valid

count pulse is received at terminal 8. The module counts from 0 to 15 and then starts again

at 0. The controller adopts the current value and determines the pulse count between two

host calls by calculating the difference from the previous value. The difference is added

together to yield the total number of count pulses.

To transfer unique values, no more than 15 count values must be present between two host

calls or AS-Interface master calls at terminal 8. The maximum permissible transfer frequency

is calculated from these times:

fTrmax = 15 / Tmax

Tmax: max. possible transfer time from slave to host

A further condition for the maximum frequency is the required pulse shape. To ensure that

the counter adopts a pulse as being "valid", a low must be applied for at least 300 µs and a

high for at least 1 ms at the input. This results in a controller-independent maximum

frequency of:

fZmax = 1 / 1.3 ms = 769 Hz for the counter module (see the following diagram).

,1

PV wV W

Figure 8-38 Time criteria for the counter module

If the time criteria specified in the diagram is violated, the count value is rejected.

Slaves

8.5 Modules with special functions

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 265

The counter is only active for the reset parameter P2 (default). When P2 is set, the counter is

deleted and the incoming count pulses are not registered until P2 is reset.

Setting the AS-i address

The AS-i address can be set with the addressing unit on the addressing socket.

8.5.1.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

Counter module, screw terminal connection 3RK1200-0CE03-0AA2

Counter module, spring-loaded terminal 3RK1200-0CG03-0AA2

8.5.1.3 Connection

7HUPLQDOb%XVFRQQHFWLRQ$6L

7HUPLQDOb%XVFRQQHFWLRQ$6L

7HUPLQDObXQDVVLJQHG

7HUPLQDOb6HQVRUVXSSO\

7HUPLQDOb&RXQWLQSXW

7HUPLQDOb6HQVRUVXSSO\

,1

$6L

$''5

$6L

$6L

,1





Figure 8-39 Counter module terminals

Connection cross-sections

Cable Screw terminals Spring-loaded terminals

Single-core: 1 x 0.5 ... 4.0 mm²

2 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²

2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²

Finely stranded with wire end ferrule 1 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²

2 x 0.5 ... 1.5 mm²

2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²

Finely stranded without wire end ferrule — 2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²

AWG cables, single or multi-core 2 x 20 to 14 2 x 24 to 16

Slaves

8.5 Modules with special functions

AS-Interface system

266 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.5.1.4 Diagnostics

LED for AS-i/FAULT

The module has one dual LED for AS-i/FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT (Page 174)

8.5.1.5 Technical specifications

Order no. Screw terminals Spring-loaded terminals

Connection type 3RK1200-0CE03-0AA2 3RK1200-0CG03-0AA2

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 1 input

Operating voltage in acc. with

AS-Interface Specification

26.5 ... 31.6 V

Rated operating voltage —

AS-i slave profile IO.ID 0.F

ID2, ID1 code not available (substitute values: F, F)

Total power consumption from

AS-Interface

≤ 170 mA

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA, shipbuilding

Degree of protection IP20

Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85 °C

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload proof

Voltage range 20 ... 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for sensor

supply

90 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V

Switching level - low ≤ 5 V

Input current - high ≥ 10 mA

Input current - low ≤ 2 mA

Assignment of the terminals 7: = +

9: = –

8: = IN1

Slaves

8.5 Modules with special functions

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 267

8.5.1.6 Dimension drawings







[









[







5.( 

5.*

ಧ





Figure 8-40 Counter module dimensions

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

268 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

The functionality of the AS-Interface is not restricted to I/O modules only.

AS-Interface can be integrated directly for switching devices:

AS-Interface motor starter

● Electromechanical compact starters DS and RS

● Electronic compact starters EDS and ERS

Motor starter and load feeders IP65/67

● Motor starter (24 V DC)

– Single direct-on-line starter (without brake or connectable quick-stop function)

– Double direct-on-line starter (with brake and connectable quick-stop function)

– Reversing starter (with brake and connectable quick-stop function)

ECOFAST starters

● ECOFAST starter RS (electromechanical)

● ECOFAST starter ERSS (reversing soft starter, electronic)

● ECOFAST starter R2SS (duo reversing starter, electronic)

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 269

8.6.1 AS-Interface motor starter (400 V / 600 V, IP65)

8.6.1.1 Overview

Compact starter

The AS-Interface compact starter is a fully pre-wired (internally) load feeder with degree of

protection IP65 designed for switching and protecting all types of three-phase loads up to

5.5 kW at 400/500 V AC (electromechanical compact starters DS and RS) and up to 2.2 kW

(electronic compact starters EDS and ERS), usually standard induction motors with direct

operation mode or reversing duty. It comprises either an electromechanical switchgear

assembly or an electronic overload protection system and motor starter protector unit. The

overload/short-circuit protection device is located under a sealable, transparent cover and

can be diagnosed here. Two LEDs located to the left of the cover are used for diagnosing

AS-Interface and the auxiliary power.

(QHUJ\IHHG

0DLQFLUFXLW

6LFDEOH

8$8;FDEOH

&RPSDFWVWDUWHU

Figure 8-41 Sample configuration with two compact starters

Three power connectors (-X1, -X2, -X3) are used for supplying (-X1) and routing (-X3) the

load power supply (energy bus) as well as for connecting the load itself (-X2). Prefabricated

power connection cables can be used to connect compact starters that are directly adjacent

to each other. The maximum number of starters that can be supplied via one power cable

depends on the maximum permissible aggregate current (max. 4 mm2 = approx. 35 A).

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

270 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

(QHUJ\FRQQHFWRU;

IRUVXSSO\LQJWKH

ದ FRQVXPHU

VXSSO\YROWDJH

ದ 7KHEUDNLQJYROWDJH

IRUYHUVLRQZLWK

EUDNLQJFRQWDFW9'&

7UDQVSDUHQWFRYHU

,QWHUORFN

$GGUHVVLQJVRFNHW

(QHUJ\VRFNHW;

)RUORRSWKURXJK

ದ FRQVXPHU

VXSSO\YROWDJH

ದ 7KHEUDNLQJYROWDJH

IRUYHUVLRQZLWK

EUDNLQJFRQWDFW9'&

(QHUJ\VRFNHW;

)RUORRSWKURXJK

ದRIFRQVXPHU

ದRIEUDNH

&LUFXLWEUHDNHU

ದ5RFNHUVZLWFK

ದ7HVWRSHQLQJ

/('V

ದ&RPPXQLFDWLRQ

ದ$X[LOLDU\SRZHU

ದ'HYLFHVWDWXV

6XE'VRFNHW

IRU

KDQGKHOGGHYLFHRQO\

0VRFNHW;

VHQVRUV

(QHUJ\FRQQHFWRU;

IRUVXSSO\LQJWKH

ದ FRQVXPHU

VXSSO\YROWDJH

ದ7KHEUDNLQJYROWDJH

IRUYHUVLRQZLWK

EUDNLQJFRQWDFW9'&

7UDQVSDUHQWFRYHU

,QWHUORFN

$GGUHVVLQJVRFNHW

5RWDU\HQFRGLQJVZLWFK DQG

IRUVHWWLQJWKH

RSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW

5RWDU\HQFRGLQJVZLWFK

7(675(6(7%XWWRQ

7ULSSLQJ5(027(/2&$/

6XE'VRFNHW

IRU

KDQGKHOGGHYLFHRQO\

/('V

ದ&RPPXQLFDWLRQ

ದ$X[LOLDU\SRZHU

ದ'HYLFHVWDWXV

(QHUJ\VRFNHW;

)RUORRSWKURXJK

ದRIFRQVXPHU

ದ 7KHEUDNH

(QHUJ\VRFNHW;

)RUORRSWKURXJK

ದ FRQVXPHU

VXSSO\YROWDJH

ದ7KHEUDNLQJYROWDJH

IRUYHUVLRQZLWK

EUDNLQJFRQWDFW9'&

/('V

ದ5($'<

ದ581

ದ)$8/7

ದ29(5/2$'

0VRFNHW;

IRUFRQQHFWLQJ

VHQVRUV

IRUFRQQHFWLQJ

&RPSDFWVWDUWHUV'656

&RPSDFWVWDUWHUV('6(56

ದ6FDOHIRURSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW

6,(0(16

$6L

$8;3:5

67$7(

6,(0(16

$6L

$8;3:5

67$7(

Figure 8-42 DS/RS and EDS/ERS compact starters

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 271

DS/RS compact starters (electromechanical)

Electromechanical compact starters comprise a standard switchgear assembly with SIRIUS

circuit breakers for short-circuit/overload protection and SIRIUS contactor(s) for switching

under normal operating conditions. Electromechancal starters not only offer a number of

benefits including safe, electrical isolation during switch-off or in the event of a trip and

integrated, non-fused short-circuit protection, but are also reasonably priced. The

electromechanical versions can also be used to switch direct currents.

Configuration note: in temperature-critical applications, you are advised to operate

circuit-breakers in the lower setting range.

EDS/ERS compact starters (electronic)

Electronic compact starters EDS (direct-on-line starters) and ERS (reversing starters)

comprise an electronic overload protection system and an electronic motor starter protector

unit.

The benefits of these electronic compact starters include a broad setting range for overload

protection (just two variants cover a power range of up to 2.2 kW at 400/500 V AC), a highly

wear resistant motor starter protector unit, a current detector (for monitoring the power

connectors), emergency operation in the event of overload, and a remote reset function via

AS-Interface after an overload trip.

The ERS compact starter is designed for direct startup in reversing duty. The electronic

overload protection system and the tripping behavior in the event of an overload are set

directly on the device.

Version with brake contact

All compact starters are available with an optional, separately-controlled brake contact for

electrically-operated motor brakes. For motor brakes supplied externally, the 24 V DC is

supplied together with the load voltage via the power connector at -X1. The power is routed

via -X3 to supply the next compact starter at -X1. The 24 V DC for the brakes is only

jumpered in the devices with a brake contact. During configuration, make sure that these

starters are positioned next to each other.

All compact starters can be equipped with a brake contact for 500 V DC with a 400 AC brake

contact.

Hand-held device

The hand-held device allows the compact starter to be operated locally and completely

autonomously when the auxiliary power is present. In addition to standard manual operation,

it is, therefore, possible for local switching operations and test runs during

pre-commissioning (e.g. for testing the motor direction) to be performed with a functioning

automation level if the PLC/bus system fails (emergency operation). A connection cable can

be used to connect the hand-held device directly to the socket under the transparent cover

on the compact starter.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

272 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Free inputs

The compact starters are also equipped with two free inputs. The input signals are forwarded

directly to the higher-level controller and not evaluated in the compact starter.

The M12 socket has a Y assignment. The signal inputs are located on PIN 2 and 4. This

enables an optical proximity switch to be connected, which supplies a signal and the

message "dirty".

An M12 Y coupler plug can be used to divide the signal inputs over two M12 sockets, which

means that two separate sensors can be connected.

Setting the AS-i address

As with the input/output modules, the AS-i address of the starter can be assigned via the

addressing socket on the front (under the transparent cover).

8.6.1.2 Order numbers

Compact starter

Type Order no.

EDS compact starter

Electronic direct-on-line starter with two free digital inputs

3RK1322- xx S12-0AA x

ERS compact starter

Electronic reversing starter with two free digital inputs

3RK1322- xx S12-1AA x

Order no. extension for:

AC motor

4-pin at 400 V AC

Standard power P

Setting range of overcurrent

release

kW A

0.18 ... 0.8 0.6 ... 2.18 0A

0.75 ... 2.2 2.0 ... 5.95 0B

DS compact starter

Electromechanical direct-on-line starter,

with two free digital inputs

3RK1322- xx S02-0AA x

RS compact starter

Electromechanical reversing starter,

with two free digital inputs

3RK1322- xx S02-1AA x

Order no. extension for:

AC motor

4-pin at 400 V AC

Standard power P

Setting range of overcurrent

release

kW A

<0,06 0.14 ... 0.20 0B

0.06 0.18 ... 0.25 0C

0.09 0.22 ... 0.32 0D

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 273

Type Order no.

0.10 0.28 ... 0.40 0E

0.12 0.35 ... 0.50 0F

0.18 0.45 ... 0.63 0G

0.21 0.55 ... 0.80 0H

0.25 0.70 ... 1.0 0J

0.37 0.9 ... 1.25 0K

0.55 1.1 ... 1.6 1A

0.75 1.4 ... 2.0 1B

0.90 1.8 ... 2.5 1C

1.1 2.2 ... 3.2 1D

1.5 2.8 ... 4.0 1E

1.9 3.5 ... 5.0 1F

2.2 4.5 ... 6.3 1G

3.0 5.5 ... 8.0 1H

4.0 7.0 ... 10 1J

5.5 9.0 ... 12 1K

Standard version 0

Version with brake contact for 24 V DC / 3 A external supply 1

Version with brake contact for 400 V AC / 0.5 A supply for brake

rectifier

Version with brake contact for DC-side brake switching with

500 V DC / 0.2 A

Accessories

Type Order no.

M12 coupler plug

for connecting actuators or sensors (5-pin)

3RX8000-0CD55

M12 angle coupler plug

for connecting actuators or sensors (5-pin)

3RX8000-0CE55

M12 Y coupler plug

for double connection of sensors by means of single cable (5-pin)

6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0

M12 screw caps

for sealing unassigned input/output sockets

(one set contains ten screw caps)

3RX9802-0AA00

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

274 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.6.1.3 Connection

Voltages / signals Connection type

AS-i cable Insulation displacement method (flat cable)

UAUX cable Insulation displacement method (flat cable)

Free inputs M12 socket, Y assignment

Power supply, motor cable (main circuit) Han Q 8/0 connectors/sockets

Assignment of the inputs DI 0 - DI 3

Input Status Meaning Possible measures

0 Manual mode

Simultaneous activation of CW and CCW

rotation

For DS / RS only:

Overload/short-circuit trip

For DS / RS only:

Compact starter defective

For EDS / ERS only:

Tripped signal

Note:

No automatic shutdown for TRIPPING in

REMOTE setting.

Shutdown must be initiated by

user program.

For EDS / ERS only:

No current flow despite activation.

Device fault

Use hand-held device to switch to automatic

mode.

Correct user program.

Close circuit breaker.

Replace compact starter.

Briefly press RESET/TEST button (< 2 s)

or remote reset via positive

pulse on output bit DO3.

Check:

Motor connector/cable unplugged,

auxiliary voltage < 18 V,

failure of 2 phases,

current asymmetry,

carry out self-test,

compact starter defective → replace.

DI 0 "ready"

1 Device ready and in automatic mode —

0 Contactor OFF (DS / RS)

No current flow (EDS / ERS)

— DI 1 "running"

1 Contactor ON (DS / RS)

Current flow present (EDS / ERS)

—

0 No input signal IN1 — DI 2 "special

information 1" 1 Free input signal IN1 present —

0 No input signal IN2 — DI 3 "special

information 2" 1 Free input signal IN2 present —

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 275

Assignment of outputs DO 0 - DO 3

Output Status Activation

0 CW rotation OFF DO 0 "run forward"

1 CW rotation ON

0 CCW rotation OFF DO 1 "run reverse"

1 CCW rotation ON

0 Open brake contact

(brake voltage OFF)

DO 2 "special command 1"

1 Close brake contact

(brake voltage ON)

0 Remote reset OFF (EDS / ERS only) DO 3 "special command 2"

1 Remote reset ON (EDS / ERS only)

8.6.1.4 Diagnostics

The compact starters are equipped with LEDs for indicating error statuses, which enables

comprehensive diagnostic activities to be carried out directly on the device.

Dual LED: AS-i

AS-i Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

AS-i communication OK

—

Red No AS-i communication:

• The master is switched off or offline.

• The slave is not configured in the master.

• The incorrect slave type is connected.

• The slave has the wrong address.

Ensure AS-i communication:

• Switch on the master or switch it to online mode.

• Reconfigure the master.

• Connect the correct module.

• Check/correct the slave address.

Flashing red Sensor supply overload

(AS-i slave is in RESET mode and switches

off completely)

Unplug the sensor cables from the input sockets, use

sensors with a lower overall current consumption,

check the sensors/cables.

Yellow/red flashing The AS-i slave has the address 0

(on delivery)

Assign an address that is not 0.

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage, connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx. 30 V DC)

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

276 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LED: AUX PWR (AUX POWER)

AUX PWR Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

24 V DC auxiliary voltage OK

—

OFF No auxiliary voltage,

auxiliary voltage connected with incorrect polarity,

auxiliary voltage too low

Switch on 24 V DC auxiliary voltage, connect

properly,

measure auxiliary voltage (approx. 24 V DC)

Note

If the auxiliary voltage has not been switched on, the motor starter shuts down the main

circuit.

LED: STATE

STATE Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF No activation, no fault —

Green Control signal present:

CW or CCW,

via AS-i master or hand-held device

—

Red General error, e.g.:

• Sensor supply overload

• Circuit breaker tripped

• Activation of CCW rotation for direct-on-

line starter DS

• Simultaneous activation of CW and

CCW rotation

Rectify fault:

• Unplug the sensor cables from the input

sockets, use sensors with a lower overall

current consumption,

check the sensors/cables, switch on master

and set to online mode.

• Check the motor, close the circuit breaker.

• Check/correct activation of CCW/CW

rotation.

Flashing yellow Compact starter switched to manual mode

("local") with hand-held device and hand-

held device removed.

Deactivate manual mode:

• Connect hand-held device and switch to

bus mode ("remote").

• Switch 24 V auxiliary voltage on/off

Depending on the model, the "yellow flashing" status is the same as the "green flashing" status.

The "red" status is not indicated for the electronic compact starters EDS/ERS.

For EDS/ERS, this status is indicated by additional LEDs on the tripping unit under the transparent cover.

Additional LEDs for compact starters EDS / ERS

The compact starters EDS / ERS have additional LEDs under the transparent cover on the

tripping unit:

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 277

LED: READY

READY Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF No auxiliary voltage

or other fault

Switch on 24 V auxiliary voltage

or look at the other LEDs.

Green Device is ready for operation. —

The READY (green) LED can also light up when the self-test is triggered. See notes for OVERLOAD.

LED: RUN

RUN Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF Main circuit OFF

or current flow < 20 % of rated value.

—

Yellow Main circuit ON,

i.e. current flow > 20 % of rated value.

—

LED: FAULT

FAULT Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF Main circuit ready —

Red Main circuit OFF, e.g. due to:

• Failure of 2 phases

• No current flow despite activation (e.g.

motor connector unplugged)

• Auxiliary voltage too low (< 18 V)

• Simultaneous activation of CW and

CCW rotation

Rectify fault:

• Check power cable.

• Check motor cable, motor.

• Check auxiliary voltage.

• Check/correct activation of CCW/CW

rotation.

The FAULT (red) LED can also light up when the self-test is triggered. See notes for OVERLOAD.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

278 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LED: OVERLOAD

OVERLOAD Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF No overload in main circuit. —

Red Overload trip in main circuit:

• When TRIPPING = LOCAL: automatic

shutdown

• When TRIPPING = REMOTE: shutdown

must be performed by user program

• Remove overload (check drive/motor).

• Briefly press RESET/TEST button (< 2 s) or

carry out remote reset via positive pulse on

output bit DO3.

Flashing red Overcurrent detected but no overload trip

yet.

• Shut down motor.

• Remove overload (check drive/motor).

The "OVERLOAD red flashing" display can also occur when the self-test trips.

(1) Press the RESET/TEST button (> 2 s) when the main circuit has been shut down. Flashing frequency. Bus activation is

blocked.

(3) When the self-test has finished, "OVERLOAD red flashing" is indicated with a slow flashing frequency.

(3a) If "FAULT red" is indicated at the same time, an error occurred during the test. When you have rectified the problem,

repeat the procedure as of step (1).

(3b) If "READY green" is indicated at the same time, the test was successful.

(4) Briefly press the RESET/TEST button (< 2 s) to enable bus activation. "OVERLOAD" extinguishes.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 279

8.6.1.5 Technical specifications

Control circuit

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of assigned inputs/outputs

of which freely available

4 inputs / 4 outputs

2 inputs

AS-i slave profile IO.ID 7.D (for compact starters DS/RS)

7.E (for compact starters EDS/ERS)

ID2, ID1 code not available (substitute values: F, F)

Overall current consumption from AS-i

without wiring of free inputs

≤ 270 mA

typ. 70 mA

Free inputs

input circuit

PNP

Current-carrying capacity for all inputs 200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤1.5 mA / ≥ 6 mA

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload proof

Sensors 2 and 3 conductors

Voltage range 20 – 30 V

Assignment of the data bits See the table in section Connection (Page 274)

Main circuit

Rated operating voltage Ue

• To DIN VDE 0106, part 1014

• To CSA and UL

500 V AC, tolerance up to 575 V AC

up to 600 V AC

Current ranges See table for order numbers (Page 272) for the compact

starters.

Brake circuit

Brake voltage

• Compact starters DS and RS

• Compact starters EDS and ERS

24 V DC, 500 V DC (depending on the version)

24 V DC, 400 V AC, 500 V DC (depending on the version)

For all the relevant technical specifications, see the "AS-Interface Compact Starter" manual

(see Bibliography (Page 627), doc. ID: 6008647).

Note

In the specified documentation, the extension "2I" in the product designation means that the

compact starter has two 2 free inputs (e.g. "compact starter DS2I"). In the catalog, however,

the short product designation is used (e.g. "compact starter DS"). The two product

designations are interchangeable and refer to the same product.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

280 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.6.1.6 Dimension drawings

DS/RS and EDS/ERS compact starters









































Figure 8-43 Dimensions of compact starter

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 281

8.6.2 AS-Interface motor starters (24 V DC, IP65 / IP67)

8.6.2.1 Overview

24 V DC motors and the associated sensors can be be connected quickly and easily on site

with the AS-Interface K60 24 V DC motor starters for the lowest power range up to 70 watt.

A total of three different variants are available in the following versions:

● Single direct-on-line starter (without brake, with connectable quick-stop function)

● Double direct-on-line starter (with brake and connectable quick-stop function)

● Reversing starter (with brake and connectable quick-stop function)

M12 connectors are used to connect DC motors to the module. The yellow AS-Interface

cable is all that is required for supplying the sensors and electronics in the module. An

auxiliary voltage (24 V DC), which is supplied via the black AS-Interface cable, is required for

supplying the outputs only.

Quick-stop function

All AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starters are equipped with a quick-stop function, which can

be connected/disconnected as required via a switch integrated in the module. Quick stop

allows a connected motor to be switched off immediately when the sensor signal (high) is

present without the need for a "diversion" via the PLC control program. The switch for the

quick-stop function is located next to the input sockets and is protected by an M12 screw

cap.

Switch position 0 to 3: quick stop OFF

Switch position 4 to 9: quick stop ON

When quick stop is activated ("ON"), the assigned output OUT1 (OUT2; OUT1 for reversing

starters in reversing duty) is switched off without the intervention of the higher-level PLC

when signal "1" is present at the associated input IN1 (IN3).

Brake

Double direct-on-line starters and single reversing starters are equipped with an integrated,

fixed brake function, that is, as soon as the output signal has been set to "0", the motor is

slowed down when the motor connection is short-circuited. This function cannot be used to

control mechanical brakes.

Single direct-on-line starters are not equipped with a brake function, which means that the

motor coasts to standstill once it has been switched off.

Commissioning via integrated buttons

Buttons integrated in the module (located under the output socket) can be used to switch on

the associated motor directly. The buttons are protected by an M12 screw cap.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

282 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Note

A motor controlled via the PLC program cannot be switched off using this function.

8.6.2.2 Order numbers

IP65/IP67 motor starters

Type Order no.

Single direct-on-line starter 3RK1400-1NQ01-0AA4

Double direct-on-line starter 3RK1400-1MQ01-0AA4

Single reversing starter 3RK1400-1MQ03-0AA4

Accessories

Type Order no.

Mounting plate for wall mounting 3RK1901-0CA00

Mounting plate for DIN rail mounting 3RK1901-0CB01

8.6.2.3 Connection

Single direct-on-line starter

6HQVRU

6HQVRU

6HQVRU

6HQVRU

0RWRU

,QSXW,1,1 4XLFNVWRSIRU

2XWSXWRIIRQ

,QSXW,1,1

2XWSXW287

3XVKEXWWRQV

PDQXDOPRGH

$GGU







Figure 8-44 Single direct-on-line starter

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 283

Double direct-on-line starter

4XLFNVWRSIRU

287RIIRQ

4XLFNVWRSIRU

287RIIRQ

2XWSXW287

,QSXW,1,1

,QSXW,1,1

2XWSXW287

%XWWRQVPDQXDO

PRGH287 %XWWRQVPDQXDO

PRGH287

6HQVRU

6HQVRU

6HQVRU

6HQVRU

0RWRU

$GGUHVV 0RWRU

Figure 8-45 Double direct-on-line starter

Single reversing starter

4XLFNVWRSIRU

3UHIHUUHGGLUHFWLRQ

4XLFNVWRSIRU

5HYHUVLQJGXW\

,QSXW,1,1

,QSXW,1,1

2XWSXW287

3XVKEXWWRQV

PDQXDOPRGH

SUHIHUUHGGLUHFWLRQ

3XVKEXWWRQV

PDQXDOPRGH

5HYHUVLQJGXW\

6HQVRU

6HQVRU

6HQVRU

6HQVRU

0RWRU

3UHIHUUHGGLUHFWLRQ

5HYHUVLQJGXW\

$GGUHVV

Figure 8-46 Single reversing starter

8.6.2.4 Diagnostics

The LEDs (Page 173) on the DC motor starters are the same as those for the standard K60

compact modules.

If an output short circuits, it is switched off without a feedback message being sent to the

master (no display via LEDs). The module is ready for operation again when the affected

output is first switched off and then switched to the required operating status.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

284 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.6.2.5 Technical specifications

Order no. 3RK1400-1NQ01-0AA4

Single direct-on-line starter

3RK1400-1MQ01-0AA4

Double direct-on-line starter

3RK1400-1MQ03-0AA4

Single reversing starter

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 4 inputs (for sensors)

1 output (for motor)

4 inputs (for sensors)

2 outputs (for motors)

4 inputs (for sensors)

1 output (for motor,

CW/CCW rotation)

Quick-stop function ✓ ✓ ✓

Integrated brake function — ✓ ✓

Operating voltage in acc.

with AS-Interface

Specification

26.5 ... 31.6 V

Reverse polarity protection

U_AS-i

Integrated

AS-i slave profile IO.ID 7.F

ID2, ID1 code not available (substitute values: F, F)

No. of I/O sockets 3 x M12 4 x M12 3 x M12

Total power consumption

from AS-Interface

≤ 270 mA

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA

Degree of protection IP67

Ground connection Available

Ambient temperature -25 ... +55 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85 °C

Inputs

Input circuit PNP

Sensor supply via

AS-Interface

Short circuit and overload proof

Sensors 3 conductors

Voltage range 20 ... 30 V

Current-carrying capacity for

sensor supply

200 mA (Tu ≤ 40°C) / 150 mA (Tu ≤ 55°C)

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V

Switching level - low ≤ 5 V

Socket assignment

Inputs

Y assignment

1 = sensor supply L+

2 = data input IN2 (IN4)

3 = sensor supply L–

4 = data input / quick stop IN1 (IN3)

5 = ground connection

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 285

Order no. 3RK1400-1NQ01-0AA4

Single direct-on-line starter

3RK1400-1MQ01-0AA4

Double direct-on-line starter

3RK1400-1MQ03-0AA4

Single reversing starter

Outputs

Output type Electronics

Short-circuit protection Integrated

Inductive interference

protection

Integrated

External 24 V DC power

supply

Via black AS-Interface flat cable

Watchdog Integrated

Rated current-carrying

capacity on each output

(typical)

3 A (Tu ≤ 55°C) 1 x 3 A (Tu ≤ 55°C)

2 x 2 A (Tu ≤ 55°C)

2.5 A (Tu ≤ 55°C)

Voltage drop

(without supply cable)

0.6 V 1.2 V

Max. ramp time

DC motor

80 ms

Max. motor starting current

(restricted within module)

4.5 A

Motor type 24 V DC motor with brushgear

Socket assignment

Outputs

Special assignment

1 = voltage L+

2 = unassigned

3 = unassigned

4 = switching output (negative switching)

5 = ground connection

For reversing starters, the polarity is reversed in reversing duty.

Assignment of the data bits

Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1 (D0 / quick stop1)

PIN2 = IN2 (D1)

Socket 2 PIN4 = IN3(D2)

PIN2 = IN4(D3)

PIN4 = IN3 (D2 / quick stop2)

PIN2 = IN4 (D3)

Socket 3 PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1(D0) PIN4 = OUT1

(D0 = CW,

D1 = CCW)

Socket 4 — PIN4 = OUT2(D1) —

Note Max. switching frequency for

controlling one 10 W DC

motor, for example (UAUX =

28.8 V/duty cycle = 50%):

Tu max: 55°C

Max. switching frequency/h:

1500

Max. switching frequency for

controlling two 10 W DC

motors, for example (UAUX =

28.8 V/duty cycle = 50%):

Tu max: 55°C

Max. switching frequency/h:

1500

Max. switching frequency for

controlling one 10 W DC

motor, for example (UAUX =

28.8 V/duty cycle = 50%):

Tu max: 55°C

Max. switching frequency/h:

1000

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

286 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.6.2.6 Dimension drawings

The dimensions of the DC motor starters are the same as those of the standard K60

compact modules.

The mounting plates for the K60 modules can be used for installation purposes.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 287

8.6.3 ECOFAST motor starters

8.6.3.1 Overview

ECOFAST starters

The AS-Interface ECOFAST starter is a fully pre-wired (internally) load feeder with degree of

protection IP65 designed for switching and protecting all types of three-phase load up to

4 kW at 400/500 V AC (electromechanical starters), up to 5.5 kW (electronic soft starters or

electronically switching starters), and up to 1.5 kW (electronic speed controllers), usually

standard three-phase motors in direct operation mode or reversing duty.

All ECOFAST starters support reversing duty.

The starter comprises either an electromechanical switchgear assembly or an electronic

overload protection system and motor starter protector unit.

Seven LEDs integrated in the cover are used for diagnosing AS-Interface and the auxiliary

power.



$6LFDEOH

8$8;FDEOH

3RZHUEXV

3RZHU7SLHFH

Figure 8-47 Sample configuration with two ECOFAST starters

The Han Q4/2 power connector is used for supplying the consumer power supply (energy

bus). Prefabricated power connection cables and a power T unit can be used to connect

ECOFAST starters. The maximum number of starters that can be supplied via one power

cable depends on the maximum permissible aggregate current (max. 6 mm2 = approx. 40 A).

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

288 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

ECOFAST starters connections and LEDs

① Power socket for connecting:

• The motor

• The brake

• The thermistor

② M12 sockets for connecting two sensors each

③ Addressing socket

④ LEDs

⑤ Local device interface for:

• Parameterization

• Diagnostics

• Hand-held device

⑥ Connection (insulation displacement method) for:

• AS-i

• AUX power



$6L

ဓ

$8;

3:5

6WDWH

'HYLFH

,1

,1

①

②

③

④

⑤

⑥

⑦

⑦ Power connector for the supply voltage

Variants

● ECOFAST RS starters (electromechanical)

Electromechanical starters comprise a standard switchgear assembly with SIRIUS circuit

breakers for overload protection and SIRIUS contactor(s) for switching under normal

operating conditions. Internal fuses provide short-circuit protection. Benefits of

electromechanical starters include safe, electrical isolation during switch-off or in the

event of a trip, the broad setting range (just two variants cover a power range up to 4 kW

at 400/500 V AC), and remote reset via AS-Interface after an overload trip. They are also

reasonably priced.

● ECOFAST ERSS starters (electronic)

Electronic ERSS starters (reversing soft starters) comprise an electronic overload

protection system and an electronic motor starter protector unit.

The benefits of these electronic ECOFAST starters include a broad setting range for

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 289

overload protection (just two variants cover a power range of up to 5.5 kW at

400/500 V AC), a highly wear resistant motor starter protector unit, a current detector (for

monitoring the power connectors), and a remote reset function via AS-Interface after an

overload trip.

ERSS starters are designed to be started directly in reversing duty and for soft start mode

(as well as reversing duty). Electronic overload protection and the switch-off behavior in

the event of an overload are set directly on the device via the local interface.

● ECOFAST R2SS starters (electronic)

Electronic R2SS starters (duo reversing soft starters) comprise an electronic overload

protection system and an electronic motor starter protector unit. The R2SS starters can

cover a power range of up to 1.5 kW at 400/500 V AC.

The benefits of these electronic starters include a highly wear resistant motor starter

protector unit, a current detector (for monitoring the power connectors), the capability to

run at two speeds, and remote reset via AS-Interface after an overload trip.

The R2SS starter is designed to be started directly in reversing duty as well as with soft

start startup/braking. Electronic overload protection and the switch-off behavior in the

event of an overload are set directly on the device via the local interface.

Version with brake contact

All ECOFAST starters are available with an optional, separately-controlled brake contact for

electrically-operated motor brakes. The output voltage is 400 V AC.

Version with temperature sensor

If required, ECOFAST starters can be equipped with an optional function for evaluating a

temperature sensor. Either a thermoclick or type A PTC can be used as a temperature

sensor.

Hand-held device

The hand-held device allows ECOFAST starters to be operated locally and completely

autonomously when the auxiliary power is present. In addition to standard manual operation,

it is, therefore, possible for local switching operations and test runs during

pre-commissioning (e.g. for testing the motor direction) to be performed with a functioning

automation level if the PLC/bus system fails (emergency operation). A connection cable can

be used to connect the hand-held device directly to the local interface on the ECOFAST

starter.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

290 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Free inputs

ECOFAST starters are also equipped with two free inputs. The input signals are forwarded

directly to the higher-level controller, and can also be evaluated directly in the ECOFAST

starter.

The M12 socket has a Y assignment. The signal inputs are located on PIN 2 and 4. This

enables an optical proximity switch to be connected, which supplies a signal and the

message "contamination".

An M12 Y coupler plug can be used to divide the signal inputs over two M12 sockets, which

means that two separate sensors can be connected.

Parameterizing the ECOFAST starter

The "Motor Starter ES 2006" (or more recent version) or "Switch ES Motorstarter" (name of

the predecessor version) software is required for parameterizing the ECOFAST starters.

The motor starters are set to the maximum rated current (factory setting).

8.6.3.2 Order numbers

ECOFAST motor starters

Setting range Motor protection / switching Brake Order no.

— 3RK1323-2AS54-1AA0 0.3 A - 9 A (4 kW) Temperature sensor / mechanical

400 V AC 3RK1323-2AS54-1AA3

ECOFAST motor starters, high feature

Setting range Motor protection / switching Brake Order no.

0.3 A - 3 A (1.1 kW) — 3RK1323-5BS44-3AA0

2.4 A - 9 A (4 kW) — 3RK1323-5CS44-3AA0

0.3 A - 3 A (1.1 kW) 400 V AC 3RK1323-5BS44-3AA3

2.4 A - 9 A (4 kW)

Thermal motor model / mechanical

400 V AC 3RK1323-5CS44-3AA3

0.3 A - 3 A (1.1 kW) — 3RK1323-6BS74-3AA0

2.4 A - 12 A (5.5 kW) — 3RK1323-6DS74-3AA0

0.3 A - 3 A (1.1 kW) 400 V AC 3RK1323-6BS74-3AA3

2.4 A - 12 A (5.5 kW)

Full motor protection /

Electronic, soft

400 V AC 3RK1323-6DS74-3AA3

0.6 A - 4 A (1.5 kW) Full motor protection / Electronic,

soft (duo reversing soft starter)

400 V AC 3RK1323-6ES84-3AA3

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 291

8.6.3.3 Connection

Voltages / signals Connection type

AS-i cable Insulation displacement method (flat cable)

UAUX cable Insulation displacement method (flat cable)

Free inputs M12 socket, Y assignment

Power supply (main circuit) Han Q 4/2 connectors/sockets

Motor cable Han 10E socket

$6LFDEOH

&RPPXQLFDWLRQDQG

XQFRQQHFWHGDX[LOLDU\SRZHU

&RQQHFWHGDX[LOLDU\SRZHU

0RWRUVWDUWHUV

$6LFRYHU



$6Lದ

$8;3:5ದ

$8;3:5

$6L

$;3:5

Figure 8-48 ECOFAST starters, ASI connection

Assignment of the inputs DI 0 - DI 3

Input Process image Status Signal

0 NO DI 0 Ready (automatic)

1 YES

0 NO DI 1 Motor on

1 YES

0 OPEN DI 2 IN1 (input 1)

1 24 V is present

0 OPEN DI 3 IN2 (input 2)

1 24 V is present

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

292 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Assignment of outputs DO 0 - DO 3

Output Process image Status Signal

0 OFF DO 0 Motor CW

1 ON

0 OFF DO 1 Motor CCW

1 ON

0 OFF DO 2 Brake

1 ON

0 ➜ 1 ACTIVE (trip reset)

0 OFF (creep feed)

DO 3 Trip reset / creep feed 1)

1 ON (creep feed)

1) Double assignment DO.3 with trip reset and creep feed.

Trip reset: Edge controlled with rising edge from [0] ➜ [1]

Creep feed: Level controlled [0] and [1] when D 0.0 or D 0.1 are triggered at the same time.

8.6.3.4 Diagnostics

The ECOFAST starters are equipped with LEDs to indicate error statuses,

which enables comprehensive diagnostic activities to be carried out directly on the device.

AS-i Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

AS-i communication OK

—

Red No AS-i communication:

• The master is switched off or offline.

• The slave is not configured in the master.

• The incorrect slave type is connected.

• The slave has the wrong address.

Ensure AS-i communication:

• Switch on the master or switch it to online mode.

• Reconfigure the master.

• Connect the correct module.

• Check/correct the slave address.

Yellow/red flashing The AS-i slave has the address 0

(on delivery)

Assign an address that is not 0.

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage, connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx. 30 V DC)

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 293

LED: AUX PWR (AUX POWER)

AUX PWR Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

24 V DC auxiliary voltage OK

—

OFF No auxiliary voltage,

auxiliary voltage connected with incorrect polarity,

auxiliary voltage too low

Switch on 24 V DC auxiliary voltage, connect

properly,

measure auxiliary voltage (approx. 24 V DC)

LED: SF

SF Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF No error —

Red Group / I/O error,

e.g. ➜ motor switched off.

Group warning

e.g. ➜ motor not switched off.

Cancel the motor CW/CCW control command.

LED: STATE (switching status)

STATE Meaning

OFF Switching element OFF

Green Switching element ON by means of control / operator control and monitoring

Flashing green Ramp operation

Flickering green Switching element and brake output ON through input action

Red Switching status ≠ switching command

Flashing yellow Manual mode: Connection aborted

Yellow Switching element and brake output OFF through input action

LED: DEVICE (device status)

DEVICE Meaning

OFF Supply voltage not switched on < 18 V DC

Green Device OK and "normal operation"

Flashing green Device not initialized (send device for repair)

Yellow Internal trip

Flashing yellow General warning (e.g. overload, asymmetry)

Red Device defective (send device for repair)

Flashing red Self-test: current flowing or FW download

Flickering red Self-test: No current flow

Flickering red for

approx. 5 s

Factory settings restored

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

294 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.6.3.5 Technical specifications

AS-Interface

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.D.0 (for ECOFAST starter RS)

7.E.0 (for ECOFAST starters ERSS, R2SS)

ID1 code (factory setting) F

Overall current consumption from

AS-i without wiring of free inputs

≤ 270 mA

typ. 60 mA

Assignment of the data bits See the table in section Connection (Page 291)

Auxiliary voltage

Auxiliary power (AUX POWER) 20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC

Current consumption 15 mA - 110 mA (depending on status)

Polarity protection Yes (but device does not function)

Short-circuit/overload protection Yes, multifuse 0.5 A, self-restoring fuse, reset through power OFF

Undervoltage detection < 17 V DC

Digital Inputs

Input circuit PNP

Current-carrying capacity for all

inputs

200 mA

Switching level - high ≥ 10 V

Input current low/high ≤1.5 mA / ≥ 7 mA

Sensor supply via AS-Interface Short circuit and overload proof

Sensors 2 and 3 conductors

Voltage range 20 – 30 V

Brake output 400 V AC

Voltage range 200 V AC (-10%) to 460 V AC (+10%)

Current-carrying capacity AC 15: 500 mA

Short-circuit protection Fusible link at 1 A / 500 V AC, at 1 A / 500 V AC, ICu = 1 kA

Main circuit

Rated operating voltage 400 V AC

CLASS Tripping time with 7.2 x Ie: 10: 8 s | 20: 16 s | 30: 24 s

Rated insulation voltage 500 V AC to IEC 60947-1

Rated surge voltage 4 kV to IEC 60947-1

Safe isolation 300 V AC between auxiliary and main power

Frequency 50 Hz (-10%) to 60 Hz (+10%)

ON period (ED) 100%

Utilization category 1 (device destroyed after short-circuit)

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 295

AS-Interface

Current measurement

Measuring accuracy ± 7.5% of the parameterized rated operational current

Measuring range 10 x the parameterized rated operational current

The technical specifications are available in full in the "ECOFAST Motor Starter"

(doc. ID = 21465498 (Page 627)) and "ECOFAST Motor Starter High Feature"

(doc. ID = 19065401 (Page 627)) manuals in the bibliography.

Setting the AS-i address

The addressing socket can be used to assign the AS-i address of the starter in the same

way as for I/O modules.

Parameterizing the ECOFAST starter

The "Motor Starter ES 2006" (or more recent version) or "Switch ES Motorstarter" (name of

the predecessor version) software is required for parameterizing the ECOFAST starters.

The 3RK1323-2xxxx-xxxx starters are equipped with a temperature sensor connection for

monitoring the motor and do not process the input signals further internally. This means that

these starters do not need to be parameterized.

Factory settings

Parameters Value Device

Basic parameters

Rated operating current Max. rated current 1), 2), 3)

Rated voltage 400 V AC (50 Hz) 3)

Rated power 1.5 kW 3)

Rated frequency 50 Hz 3)

Rated speed 1400 rpm 3)

Load type 3-pole 1), 2), 3)

Protection against voltage failure Activated 1), 2), 3)

Motor protection

Thermal motor model CLASS 10 1), 2), 3)

Idle time 0 1), 2), 3)

Response to overload Switch off without restart 1), 2), 3)

Recovery time 1.5 min. 1), 2), 3)

Temperature sensor Deactivated 1), 2), 3)

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

296 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Parameters Value Device

Current limit values

Response to no-current detection Deactivate 1), 2), 3)

Blocking current 800 % of Ie 1), 2), 3)

Response to current limit value violation Warning 1), 2), 3)

Lower current limit 18,75 % of Ie 1), 2), 3)

Upper current limit 112,5 % of Ie 1), 2), 3)

Asymmetry

Asymmetry Deactivate 1), 2), 3)

Asymmetry limit value 30 % 1), 2), 3)

Inputs

Input delay 10 msec 1), 2), 3)

Input 1 signal Unlatch 1), 2), 3)

Input 1 level NO contact 1), 2), 3)

Input 1 action No action 1), 2), 3)

Input 2 signal Unlatch 1), 2), 3)

Input 2 level NO contact 1), 2), 3)

Input 2 action No action 1), 2), 3)

Input 3 signal Unlatch 1), 2), 3)

Input 3 level NO contact 1), 2), 3)

Input 3 action No action 1), 2), 3)

Input 4 signal Unlatch 1), 2), 3)

Input 4 level NO contact 1), 2), 3)

Input 4 action No action 1), 2), 3)

Reversing starter control function

Reversing starter lock-out time 0 sec 1), 2), 3)

Mechanical braking 4)

Brake release delay time on starting 0.0 sec 2), 3)

Brake holding time on stopping 0.0 sec 2), 3)

Electrical braking 4)

Brake torque (electrical braking) 40 % 1), 2), 3)

Brake time (electrical braking) 0.0 sec 1), 2), 3)

Control function: soft starter

Startup mode Control function: soft starter 2)

Starting voltage 40 % 2)

Current limiting value (control function: soft

starter)

450 % 2)

Starting time 5 sec 2)

Coasting down time 0 sec 2)

Stop voltage 40 % 2)

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 297

Parameters Value Device

Control function: regulating rheostat

Control techniques V/f characteristic + 4Q operation 3)

Setpoint fmax 70 Hz 3)

Setpoint f1 50 Hz 3)

Starting time f1 1 sec 3)

Coasting down time f1 1 sec 3)

Setpoint f2 50 Hz 3)

Starting time f2 1 sec 3)

Coasting down time f2 1 sec 3)

1) Order no. 3RK1323-5xxxx-xxxx

2) Order no. 3RK1323-6xx7x-xxxx

3) Order no. 3RK1323-6ES84-3AA3

4) Only starters with brake output

8.6.3.6 Dimension drawings

ECOFAST motor starters (electromechanical)





 

Figure 8-49 ECOFAST starters (electromechanical)

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

298 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

ECOFAST motor starters (electronic)









Figure 8-50 ECOFAST starters (electronic)

ECOFAST motor starters (electronic) (duo reversing starters)









Figure 8-51 ECOFAST starters (electronic) (duo reversing starters)

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 299

8.6.4 AS-Interface load feeder modules

8.6.4.1 Overview

Load feeders

AS-Interface load feeders (3RA5) allow circuit-breaker/contactor combinations to be quickly

and easily connected to AS-Interface.

Figure 8-52 Direct-on-line starter 3RA51, reversing starter 3RA52, and fuseless load feeder

3RA5110

Direct-on-line and reversing starters with SIRIUS switching devices of size S00 up to 10 A

and size S0 up to 16 A are available. Complete feeders require an auxiliary voltage of

24 V DC.

A complete feeder comprises an AS-i load feeder module, a circuit breaker, one contactor

(direct-on-line starter) or two contactors (reversing starters), and a holder for busbar systems

(40 mm or 60 mm busbar clearance), including tested pre-wiring.

The components can also be ordered separately if wiring is provided by the customer.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

300 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

AS-i load feeder modules

Figure 8-53 AS-Interface load feeder module

The AS-i load feeder modules are available in the following variants:

● With a 24 V DC auxiliary voltage for outputs

– 2 inputs / 1 output

– 4 inputs / 2 outputs

● With a 120/230 V AC auxiliary voltage for outputs

– 2 inputs / 1 relay output

– 3 inputs / 2 relay outputs

The connection to the higher-level automation system is established via the AS-Interface

interface for the load feeder module. A standard, unshielded litz wire can be used as a data

cable and for supplying the auxiliary voltage.

Two 2-pin connectors with insulation displacement are used to connect the AS-Interface

cable (yellow connector) and auxiliary voltage (black connector for 24 V or red connector for

120 / 230 V). Standard litz wires of between 0.5 mm2 and 0.75 mm2 can be used as

connection cables.

The feedback messages from the circuit breaker and contactor(s) can be queried with the

inputs. The inputs are supplied from the AS-Interface voltage.

The outputs are used for energizing the contactor coils directly. Since the outputs are

equipped with integrated overvoltage protection, no additional measures need to be taken

with regard to the contactors.

The outputs are supplied via the separate auxiliary voltage, which allows a selective

EMERGENCY STOP concept to be easily implemented.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 301

8.6.4.2 Order numbers

Direct starters for busbar systems

Standard three-phase motor

4-pole at 400 V AC

Order no.

Rated power Motor current

Setting range for

thermal overload

release For busbar system

Size

kW A A 40 mm (5-pin) 60 mm (4-pin)

0.06 0.2 0.14 ... 0.2 3RA5110-0BC15-0BB4 3RA5110-0BD15-0BB4

0.06 0.2 0.18 ... 0.25 3RA5110-0CC15-0BB4 3RA5110-0CD15-0BB4

0.09 0.3 0.22 ... 0.32 3RA5110-0DC15-0BB4 3RA5110-0DD15-0BB4

0.09 0.3 0.28 ... 0.4 3RA5110-0EC15-0BB4 3RA5110-0ED15-0BB4

0.12 0.4 0.35 ... 0.5 3RA5110-0FC15-0BB4 3RA5110-0FD15-0BB4

0.18 0.6 0.45 ... 0.63 3RA5110-0GC15-0BB4 3RA5110-0GD15-0BB4

0.25 0.8 0.55 ... 0.8 3RA5110-0HC15-0BB4 3RA5110-0HD15-0BB4

0.25 0.8 0.7 ... 1 3RA5110-0JC15-0BB4 3RA5110-0JD15-0BB4

0.37 1.1 0.9 ... 1.25 3RA5110-0KC15-0BB4 3RA5110-0KD15-0BB4

0.55 1.5 1.1 ... 1.6 3RA5110-1AC15-0BB4 3RA5110-1AD15-0BB4

0.75 1.9 1.4 ... 2 3RA5110-1BC15-0BB4 3RA5110-1BD15-0BB4

0.75 1.9 1.8 ... 2.5 3RA5110-1CC15-0BB4 3RA5110-1CD15-0BB4

1.1 2.7 2.2 ... 3.2 3RA5110-1DC15-0BB4 3RA5110-1DD15-0BB4

1.5 3.6 2.8 ... 4 3RA5110-1EC15-0BB4 3RA5110-1ED15-0BB4

1.5 3.6 3.5 ... 5 3RA5110-1FC15-0BB4 3RA5110-1FD15-0BB4

2.2 5.2 4.5 ... 6.3 3RA5110-1GC15-0BB4 3RA5110-1GD15-0BB4

3 6.8 5.5 ... 8 3RA5110-1HC15-0BB4 3RA5110-1HD15-0BB4

4 9 7 ... 10 3RA5110-1JC16-0BB4 3RA5110-1JD16-0BB4

S00

5.5 11.5 9 ... 12 3RA5110-1KC17-0BB4 3RA5110-1KD17-0BB4

S0 7.5 15.5 11 ... 16 — 3RA51 20-4AD25-0BB4

With one connector each for AS-i and auxiliary voltage (yellow and black).

The starting and rated data of the motor to be protected are crucial factors in the selection.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

302 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Reversing starters for busbar systems

Standard three-phase motors

4-pin at 400 V AC

Order no.

Rated power Motor current

Setting range for

thermal overload

release For busbar system

Size

kW A A 40 mm (5-pin) 60 mm (4-pin)

0.06 0.2 0.14 ... 0.2 3RA5210-0BC15-0BB4 3RA5210-0BD15-0BB4

0.06 0.2 0.18 ... 0.25 3RA5210-0CC15-0BB4 3RA5210-0CD15-0BB4

0.09 0.3 0.22 ... 0.32 3RA5210-0DC15-0BB4 3RA5210-0DD15-0BB4

0.09 0.3 0.28 ... 0.4 3RA5210-0EC15-0BB4 3RA5210-0ED15-0BB4

0.12 0.4 0.35 ... 0.5 3RA5210-0FC15-0BB4 3RA5210-0FD15-0BB4

0.18 0.6 0.45 ... 0.63 3RA5210-0GC15-0BB4 3RA5210-0GD15-0BB4

0.25 0.8 0.55 ... 0.8 3RA5210-0HC15-0BB4 3RA5210-0HD15-0BB4

0.25 0.8 0.7 ... 1 3RA5210-0JC15-0BB4 3RA5210-0JD15-0BB4

0.37 1.1 0.9 ... 1.25 3RA5210-0KC15-0BB4 3RA5210-0KD15-0BB4

0.55 1.5 1.1 ... 1.6 3RA5210-1AC15-0BB4 3RA5210-1AD15-0BB4

0.75 1.9 1.4 ... 2 3RA5210-1BC15-0BB4 3RA5210-1BD15-0BB4

0.75 1.9 1.8 ... 2.5 3RA5210-1CC15-0BB4 3RA5210-1CD15-0BB4

1.1 2.7 2.2 ... 3.2 3RA5210-1DC15-0BB4 3RA5210-1DD15-0BB4

1.5 3.6 2.8 ... 4 3RA5210-1EC15-0BB4 3RA5210-1ED15-0BB4

1.5 3.6 3.5 ... 5 3RA5210-1FC15-0BB4 3RA5210-1FD15-0BB4

2.2 5.2 4.5 ... 6.3 3RA5210-1GC15-0BB4 3RA5210-1GD15-0BB4

3 6.8 5.5 ... 8 3RA5210-1HC15-0BB4 3RA5210-1HD15-0BB4

4 9 7 ... 10 3RA5210-1JC16-0BB4 3RA5210-1JD16-0BB4

S00

5.5 11.5 9 ... 12 3RA5210-1KC17-0BB4 3RA5210-1KD17-0BB4

S0 7.5 15.5 11 ... 16 — 3RA51 20-4AD25-0BB4

With one connector each for AS-i and auxiliary voltage (yellow and black).

The starting and rated data of the motor to be protected are crucial factors in the selection.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 303

Accessories (e.g. for customer installation of a load feeder)

Type Order no.

Holder for AS-Interface load feeder modules

Holder extension for installation on standard load feeders (3RA1) or busbar

adapter (8US1), for installing an AS-Interface load feeder module

—

For installation on busbar adapter with 40 mm center-to-center clearance, with

busbar pick-up for N and PE conductors (two separate busbars),

power connector set 3RK1901-0EA00 required

45 mm width

54 mm width

3RK1901-3AA00

3RK1901-3BA00

For installation on busbar adapter with 60 mm center-to-center clearance, with

busbar pick-up for PEN conductor (one busbar),

power connector set 3RK1 901-0EA00 required

45 mm width

54 mm width

3RK1901-3CA00

3RK1901-3DA00

Without PE and N conductor connection, for installation on busbar adapter with

40 mm or 60 mm center-to-center clearance

45 mm width

54 mm width

3RK1901-3EA00

3RK1901-3FA00

For installation on SIRIUS mounting rail adapter 3RA19 22-1A

45 mm width

3RK1901-3GA00

Power connector set 5-pin, 2.5 mm2

(1 set contains 1 connector and 1 coupling)

3RK1901-0EA00

For additional busbar accessories, see catalog LV 1, "SIRIUS - SENTRON - SIVACON".

Load feeder modules

Type Order no.

AS-Interface load feeder module —

Type Auxiliary voltage —

2 inputs / 1 output 24 V DC 3RK1400-1KG01-0AA1 1)

4 inputs / 2 outputs 24 V DC 3RK1400-1MG01-0AA1 1)

2 inputs / 1 relay output 120/230 V AC 3RK1402-3KG02-0AA1 2)

3 inputs / 2 relay outputs 120/230 V AC 3RK1402-3LG02-0AA1 2)

1) Without connector for AS-i and auxiliary voltage (yellow and black).

2) With connector in each case for AS-i and auxiliary voltage (yellow and red).

Accessories (for load feeder modules)

Type Order no.

Connector for AS-i and auxiliary voltage

with insulation piercing connecting devices for 2 x (0.5 to 0.75 mm2)

standard litz wire

yellow

black

red

3RK1901-0NA00

3RK1901-0PA00

3RK1901-0QA00

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

304 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.6.4.3 Connection

Load feeders with busbar

The devices are fully pre-wired and can be adapted on the busbar. They are available for

busbar systems with a busbar center-to-center clearance of 40 mm and 60 mm.



5$

/

/

/







5$

/

/

/

3(1





Figure 8-54 Load feeders with busbar

The outgoing side to the load is wired via the power connector, which means that the main

conductors L1/L2/L3 and the N or PE conductor have plug-in connections. The power

connector is included in the scope of supply.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 305

Power connector

&RQQHFWRU

3LQQRW

RFFXSLHG

PPt

PPt PPt

PPt

13(7 77





13(

.

.



.



 

3(1.

.



.



 





3(17 77





 





Figure 8-55 Connecting the power connectors

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

306 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Communications connector

The 24 V DC auxiliary power and the AS-Interface cable are routed via two communications

connectors (supplied).

PPt



$6L



$8;32:(5

9'&



1/



Figure 8-56 Connecting the AS-i and AUX-POWER cable

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 307

Internal wiring and data bit assignments

,! ,! ,!

.

/ / /

7 7 7

.

4

287 ,1

0 ,1 ,1

4

,! ,! ,!

.

/ / /

7 7 7

.

. . 4

287 ,1

0 ,1,1

.

287

. .

.

,1

4

5$ 5$

'

' ' '

'

'

Figure 8-57 Load feeder: internal wiring and data bit assignments

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

308 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Connections on the load feeder modules

5..*$$

,1  '

287 '

ืFP

;

287

;



,1

,1

;

;

;

;

;

,1  '

5.0*$$

ืFP

;

287

287

,1

,1

;

;

;

;

;



,1

,1

;

;

;

,1 

287 '



,1 

,1 

,1 

287 '

Figure 8-58 Load feeder module for 24 V DC

5..*$$

ืFP

;

287

;



,1

,1

;

;

;

;

;

5./*$$

ืFP

;

287

,1

,1

;

;

;

;

;

287

;

,1



;

;

,1  '

287 '

,1  '

,1 

287 '



,1 

,1 

287 '

Figure 8-59 Load feeder module for 120/240 V

Note

The sensor connection cables must be no more than 60 cm long.

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 309

8.6.4.4 Diagnostics

LED for AS-i/FAULT

The module has one dual LED for AS-i/FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT (Page 174).

LED display AUX POWER

The module also has an LED for AUX POWER; for a description, see LED status display

AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage (Page 175).

8.6.4.5 Technical specifications

Load feeders

Note

The load feeders have the same technical specifications as the individual devices (e.g. high

short-circuit strength of Iq = 50 kA).

Load feeder modules

Order no. 3RK1400-1KG01-

0AA1

3RK1400-1MG01-

0AA1

3RK1402-3KG02-

0AA1

3RK1402-3LG01-

0AA2

Installed in: 3RA5110-*****-

0BB4

3RA5120-*****-

0BB4

3RA5210-*****-

0BB4

3RA5220-*****-

0BB4

— —

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 2 inputs /

1 output

4 inputs /

2 outputs

2 inputs /

1 relay output

3 inputs /

2 relay outputs

Operating voltage in acc. with

AS-Interface Specification

26.5 ... 31.6 V

Reverse polarity protection UAS-i Integrated

AS-i slave profile IO.ID 3.F 7.F 3.F 7.F

ID2, ID1 code not available (substitute values: F, F)

Total power consumption from

AS-Interface

8 ... 12 mA

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

310 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1400-1KG01-

0AA1

3RK1400-1MG01-

0AA1

3RK1402-3KG02-

0AA1

3RK1402-3LG01-

0AA2

Degree of protection IP20

Ambient temperature 0 ... +55 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85 °C

Inputs

Reverse polarity protection Integrated

Max. input current 6 mA

Max. permissible cable length

between IN + and an input

0.4 m

Outputs

External power supply for outputs

(energizing the contactor coils) via

auxiliary power

24 V DC Max. 230 V AC

Current-carrying capacity Ie 0.5 A (DC-13/DC-14) 3 A (AC-15); 0.1 (DC-13 at 220 V)

Total current (thermal) Ith 2 A 3 A

Reverse polarity protection Integrated Not required

Short-circuit protection Integrated No

Inductive interference protection Integrated Not required

Watchdog Integrated

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 311

8.6.4.6 Dimension drawings

Size S00, for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems

 



   









 %XVEDUDGDSWHUVXLWDEOH

IRUEXVEDUWKLFNQHVVHVRIDQGPP

ZLWKFKDPIHUHGHGJHV

'LUHFWRQOLQHVWDUWLQJ 5HYHUVLQJGXW\

Figure 8-60 Load feeder: size S00

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

312 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Size S0, for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems

 



   













 %XVEDUDGDSWHUVXLWDEOH

IRUEXVEDUWKLFNQHVVHVRIDQGPP

ZLWKFKDPIHUHGHGJHV

'LUHFWRQOLQHVWDUWLQJ 5HYHUVLQJGXW\

Figure 8-61 Load feeder: size S0

Slaves

8.6 Switching devices with integrated AS-i connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 313

Load feeder module















Figure 8-62 Load feeder module

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

314 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

8.7.1 AS-i F adapter for EMERGENCY STOP control devices 3SB3

8.7.1.1 Overview

AS-i F adapter for EMERGENCY STOP control devices 3SB3

The AS-Interface F adapter is used for connecting an EMERGENCY STOP / EMERGENCY

OFF control device (to ISO 13850 or EN 418) from the 3SB3 series to the AS-Interface bus

system.

The AS-i F adapter contains an ASIsafe slave and is snapped on to EMERGENCY STOP /

EMERGENCY OFF (actuating element only) from the rear.

Depending on the version, it can be connected with a screw connection or spring-loaded

terminals.

The AS-Interface F adapter is available:

● Without an additional output

● With an output for controlling an indicator light with an LED

With the adapter, the device fulfills safety category 4 (SIL 3).

Figure 8-63 AS-i F adapter

The version with an output can be used to control the illuminated backing plate for

EMERGENCY STOP control devices, for example.

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 315

Figure 8-64 AS-i F adapter with EMERGENCY STOP control device and illuminated backing plate

Setting the AS-i address

The addressing socket is located under the AS-i terminals. The address is assigned as usual

using the AS-i addressing unit.

8.7.1.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

AS-I slave for front plate mounting with screw connection 2F-DI 3SF5402-1AA03

AS-I slave for front plate mounting with spring-mounted terminal 2F-DI 3SF5402-1AA04

AS-I slave for front plate mounting with screw connection; 2F-DI/1DO; output

for controlling lamp holder with integrated LED

3SF5402-1AB03

AS-I slave for front plate mounting with spring-loaded terminal; 2F-DI/1DO;

output for controlling lamp holder with integrated LED

3SF5402-1AB04

Accessories

Type Order no.

Yellow backing plate, illuminated, labeling can be added 3SB3921-0DA

Yellow backing plate, illuminated, labeled with "EMERGENCY STOP" 3SB3921-0DD

Yellow backing plate, illuminated, labeled with "NOT-HALT" 3SB3921-0DK

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

316 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.7.1.3 Diagnostics

LED for AS-i/FAULT

The module has one dual LED for AS-i/FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT (Page 174) .

8.7.1.4 Technical specifications

AS-i F adapter

Technical specifications

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.B.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F

Total current consumption I ≤ 60 mA

Reverse polarity protection Integrated

Inputs

Low signal range Contact open

High signal range Contact closed

Iin (I

peak ≥ 5 mA)

The PFD value does not have any major effect on the PFD of the system as a whole comprising the

AS-Interface bus and safety monitor.

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 317

8.7.2 Housing and modules for buttons and indicator lights 3SB3

8.7.2.1 Overview

AS-Interface housing can be used to connect distributed control devices of series 3SB3

quickly and easily to AS-Interface.

Figure 8-65 Housing in different versions

The housing is available in metal or plastic with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 control points.

Housing with 1, 2, or 3 control points has cutouts for M20 cable glands.

Housing with 4 or 6 control points has cutouts for M25 cable glands.

The housing with integrated AS-Interface can be:

● supplied in a fully pre-wired condition

● assembled by the customer from individual components or otherwise extended/modified.

The pre-wired housing can be:

● ordered with a fixed range of standard range of components (with 1 to 3 control points)

(see order numbers (Page 321)) or

● assembled (with 1 to 6 control points) and ordered by the customer using a configurator

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

318 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Configurator

You can call up the configurator at the following Internet address:

www.siemens.de/sirius-befehlen

Then choose Online Configurator on the right of the screen.

Figure 8-66 Calling up the configurator on the Internet

You can equip the housing with practically all of the available actuators and indicators in the

3SB3 range (22 mm, round version): indicator lights, acoustic signal devices, buttons, knob

switches, key-operated switches, mushroom pushbuttons, etc.

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 319

AS-Interface slaves

Built-in AS-i modules are available for the housing for integrating AS-i. These slave modules

can be snapped in to the base plate of the housing without the need for tools.

Thanks to the integrated busbar adapter, the modules can also be snapped on to a DIN rail

outside the 3SB3 housing so that they can be used for other configuration concepts.

The modules are available in the following versions:

● Standard module for connecting four switching elements and four LEDs, in two housing

variants

– For installation in plastic housing (with 2-6 control points)

– For installation in metal housing (with 2-6 control points)

● A/B module for connecting four switching elements and three LEDs, in two housing

variants

– For installation in plastic housing (with 2-6 control points)

– For installation in metal housing (with 2-6 control points)

● ASIsafe module for connecting safety-oriented signals with two contacts (e.g.

EMERGENCY STOP) in three housing variants

– For installation in plastic housing without protective collars (with 1-6 control points)

– For installation in metal housing without protective collars (with 1-6 control points)

– For installation in plastic or metal housing with protective collars (with 1 control point)

Figure 8-67 Standard or A/B module (left) and ASIsafe module (right)

Scope of application

In a 3SB3 housing, the AS-Interface modules 4DI/4DO and 4DI/3DO can query four

contacts. AS-Interface module 4DI/4DO can also control four indicator lights, while module

4DI/3DO can control three indicator lights. The required power is provided by the

AS-Interface system. In conjunction with an A/B-capable AS-Interface master, up to

62 4DI/3DO modules can be operated in one AS-Interface network.

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

320 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Installed in a 3SB3 housing, the AS-Interface safety module is used for detecting

safety-related switching statuses of one or two-channel EMERGENCY OFF buttons with

floating contacts. For this purpose, a code table with 8x4 bits is transferred via the

AS-Interface bus and evaluated by the safety monitor.

When operated properly, the system fulfills safety category 4 to EN 954-1. If an

EMERGENCY OFF actuator is queried on just one channel (terminals for F-IN2 jumpered by

means of wire), the system only fulfills safety category 2.

In accordance with IEC 61508, the module can be used in loops up to SIL 3. The PFD value

of the module is insignificant vis-à-vis the PDF value of the evaluation unit (e.g. AS-i

monitor).

Always read the notes in the Safety Integrated manual and operating instructions for the

safety monitor.

Setting the AS-i address

To assign the AS-i address, you need to open the housing. The addressing socket is located

on the side of the built-in AS-i module. The address is assigned as usual using the AS-i

addressing unit. If the housing contains more than one AS-i module, you have to assign

multiple addresses.

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 321

8.7.2.2 Order numbers

Order numbers of the housing and modules

Housing with the standard range of components can be delivered with:

● Vertical mounting type

● Plastic housing with plastic actuators and signaling devices

● Metal housing with metal actuators and signaling devices

The plastic housing versions have a connection for the AS-Interface flat cable (cable is

routed externally past the housing); with metal housing versions, the AS-Interface cable is

routed into the housing.

Order no. Version

(A, B, C = code letters for control points)

No. of

control points For plastic housing For metal housing

A = EMERGENCY OFF mushroom pushbutton via

AS-Interface adapter, top of housing: yellow

1 3SF5811-0AA08 3SF5811-2AA08

A = EMERGENCY OFF mushroom pushbutton via

AS-Interface adapter, top of housing: yellow, with

protective collar

1 3SF5811-0AB08 3SF5811-2AB08

B = green pushbutton, label "I"

A = red pushbutton, label "O"

2 3SF5812-0DA00 3SF5812-2DA00

B = white pushbutton, label "I"

A = black pushbutton, label "O"

2 3SF5812-0DB00 3SF5812-2DB00

C = clear indicator light, blank label

B = green pushbutton, label "I"

A = red pushbutton, label "O"

3 3SF5813-0DA00 3SF5813-2DA00

C = clear indicator light, blank label

B = white pushbutton, label "I"

A = black pushbutton, label "O"

3 3SF5813-0DC00 3SF5813-2DC00

C = black pushbutton, label "II"

B = black pushbutton, label "I"

A = red pushbutton, label "O"

3 3SF5813-0DB00 3SF5813-2DB00

Housing with user-defined configuration See configurator.

Slave modules

Order no. Type

For plastic housing For metal housing

ASIsafe slave, 2 safe inputs,

for housing without protective collar

3SF5500-0BA 3SF5500-0CA

ASIsafe slave, 2 safe inputs,

for housing with protective collar

3SF5500-0DA

A/B slave, 4 inputs / 3 outputs 3SF5500-0BB 3SF5500-0CB

Standard slave, 4 inputs / 4 outputs 3SF5500-0BC 3SF5500-0CC

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

322 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Accessories

Order no. Type No. of

control points For plastic housing For metal housing

Wiring unit for F slave 3SF5900-0BA

Wiring unit for standard or A/B slave 3SF5900-0BB

Connection elements

1 ... 3 3SF5900-0CA — For AS-Interface flat cable,

connection via insulation displacement method 4 ... 6 3SF5900-0CB —

1 ... 3 3SF5900-0CC 3SF5900-2CC For AS-Interface

connection via M12 connector 4 ... 6 3SF5900-0CD 3SF5900-2CD

1 ... 3 3SF5900-0CE 3SF5900-2CE For bringing out unused

inputs/outputs via M12 socket 4 ... 6 3SF5900-0CF 3SF5900-2CF

1 ... 3 3SF5900-0CG For AS-Interface flat cable,

cable routed into housing 4 ... 6 3SF5900-0CH

1 ... 3 3SF5900-0CJ For round cable,

cable routed into housing 4 ... 6 3SF5900-0CK

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 323

8.7.2.3 Connection

Housing and modules

Instead of the standard method using multi-core connection cables, the elements are wired

directly to one or more AS-Interface slave modules in the housing. Switching elements are

connected to inputs and LED elements are connected to outputs. The 2-core AS-i cable is all

that is required for establishing a connection with the PLC.

An auxiliary voltage (black 24 V cable) is not required because the outputs/LED elements

are supplied with power directly via the AS-i voltage.

The following secure connection options are available for connecting the AS-i cable:

● M12 socket

● Cable gland for AS-i flat cable

● Cable gland for round cable

The following quick-assembly option is also available:

● Connection clip with insulation displacement method for AS-i flat cable

Figure 8-68 Different connection options

Inputs or outputs that are not required for switching elements or LED elements can be routed

externally (e.g. to connect external sensors) via an M12 socket through the second cutout in

the housing.

Connecting the AS-Interface slave modules to the control and signaling devices

The modules are connected to the control and signaling devices via connecting cables.

Standard or A/B modules require 14-pin connectors while ASIsafe modules require 8-pin

connectors.

The connectors are available as complete wiring units.

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

324 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Wiring / pin assignment

FOLF

6

287ದ

,1 ,1,1

,1

287

287

287

287

$6,ದ

$6,

),1

),1$6,ದ

$6,),1

Figure 8-69 Connecting the standard or A/B module (left) and ASIsafe module (right)

6WDQGDUGRU$%PRGXOH $6,VDIHPRGXOH

),1

),1

),1

),1

Figure 8-70 Wiring the standard or A/B module (left) and ASIsafe module (right)

Only mechanical contacts can be connected to inputs F-INx and INx.

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 325

Cross-connections between two modules (e.g. S+ (module 1) to INx (module 2)) are not

permitted.

Signal cables must not be connected to external voltages (e.g. actuator between OUTx and

external ground cable) must not be connected nor +24 V wired to INx.



$6,

$6,

ದ

Figure 8-71 Connecting the AS-Interface module to the connection element for AS-Interface

Data assignment of pre-wired (in factory) housing:

The positions of the control points in the housing are labeled with A, B, C, etc. "A" is located

at the bottom (or on the left if the device is mounted horizontally).

1. Safety-oriented control points (e.g. EMERGENCY STOP buttons) require one complete

ASIsafe module.

2. The inputs and outputs on standard and A/B modules are assigned in ascending order in

accordance with the position of the switching elements or LED elements.

3. If more than one standard or A/B modules are installed in the housing:

In the case of illuminated control points (illuminated pushbuttons / knobs), the LED and

switching element are wired to the same AS-i module. If the control point has two switching

elements (illuminated knob with 3 positions), the LED and the "lower" switching element are

wired to the same AS-i module. This means that individual outputs in this consecutive series

may remain unused.

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

326 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Example of data assignment for factory-side assembly: housing with six control points (incl.

EMERGENCY STOP)

287QRWXVHG

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW 2XWSXWV

287QRWXVHG

287QRWXVHG

287/('(

287QRWXVHG

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW 2XWSXWV

287/('&

287/(''

287/('%

,1QRWXVHG

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW ,QSXWV

,13XVKEXWWRQ)

,1QRWXVHG

,1,OOXPLQDWHGNQRE(

3RVLWLRQ

,1,OOXPLQDWHGNQRE(

3RVLWLRQ

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW ,QSXWV

,1,OOXPLQDWHGNQRE&

3RVLWLRQ

,1,OOXPLQDWHG

SXVKEXWWRQ'

,1,OOXPLQDWHGNQRE&

3RVLWLRQ

6DIHW\VLJQDO

(0(5*(1&<6723$

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW ,QSXWV

1RWUHTXLUHGZLWK$%WHFKQRORJ\

'HIDXOW

$%PRGXOH

'HIDXOW

$%PRGXOH

$6,VDIH

0RGXOH

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

''

(

)

(

(

&

&

Figure 8-72 Data assignment: element B LED



(

,

&

&

(

)

'

'

'

287QRWXVHG

'

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW 2XWSXWV

287QRWXVHG

287QRWXVHG

287/('(

'

'

'

287QRWXVHG

'

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW 2XWSXWV

287/('&

287/(''

287/('%

'

'

'

,1QRWXVHG

'

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW ,QSXWV

,1,OOXPLQDWHGNQRE(

3RVLWLRQ

,13XVKEXWWRQ)

,1,OOXPLQDWHGNQRE(

3RVLWLRQ

'

'

'

,1,OOXPLQDWHG

SXVKEXWWRQ'

'

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW ,QSXWV

,1,OOXPLQDWHGNQRE&

3RVLWLRQ

,1,OOXPLQDWHGNQRE&

3RVLWLRQ

,1,OOXPLQDWHG

SXVKEXWWRQ%

6DIHW\VLJQDO

(0(5*(1&<6723$

''

$6LDGGUHVV

'DWD

DVVLJQPHQW ,QSXWV

1RWUHTXLUHGZLWK$%WHFKQRORJ\

'HIDXOW

$%PRGXOH

'HIDXOW

$%PRGXOH

$6,VDIH

0RGXOH

Figure 8-73 Data assignment: element B illuminated pushbuttons

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 327

8.7.2.4 Technical specifications

Technical specifications of the AS-Interface slaves

General technical specifications

Immunity to noise (EN 61000, EN 61496-1)

IEC 61000-4-2 4 kV / 8 kV (encapsulated)

IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m

IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV (A) / 2 kV (B)

Mechanical data

Degree of protection with metal housing IP67

Degree of protection with plastic housing IP65

Shock load (IEC 60068-2-27) 30 g / 11 ms, half-sine

Vibratory load (IEC 60068-2-6) 10 to 100 Hz, 5 g

Temperature range

Rated temperature Tu 25°C

Ambient temperature Ta –25°C to +70°C

Storage temperature Ts –40°C to +80°C

Power requirements

The following table can be used to calculate the power requirements for the AS-i housing:

Components Power requirements for each function used/connected

For each ASIsafe module (incl.

switching elements)

60 mA

For each standard module or A/B

module

40 mA

For each switching element used 6 mA

For each activated LED 20 mA

Standard and A/B module

Technical specifications Standard module A/B module

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.0.F 7.A.E

ID1 code (factory setting) F 7

Total current consumption I ≤ 280 mA ≤ 280 mA

Reverse polarity protection Integrated Integrated

Inputs

Sensor supply (short circuit and overload proof)

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

328 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Technical specifications Standard module A/B module

Voltage range Uout 20 V to 30 V DC 20 V to 30 V DC

Switching current I Approx. 5 mA Approx. 5 mA

Outputs (supplied from AS-Interface)

Load voltage Uout

(depending on current load)

20 V to 30 V DC 20 V to 30 V DC

Max. aggregate current Iout

(max. 4 LEDs / 24 V lamps, 1 W)

≤ 180 mA ≤ 180 mA

Switching frequency 100 Hz 100 Hz

Short-circuit protection Integrated Integrated

ASIsafe module

Technical specifications ASIsafe module

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.B.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F

Total current consumption I ≤ 60 mA

Reverse polarity protection Integrated

Inputs

Low signal range Contact open

High signal range Contact closed

Iin Dynamic (Ipeak ≥ 5 mA)

The PFD value does not have any major effect on the PFD of the system as a whole comprising the

AS-Interface bus and safety monitor.

Example of AS-i housing with an EMERGENCY STOP button and two illuminated pushbuttons:

Max. overall power requirements (from AS-i cable):

ASIsafe module 60 mA

Standard or A/B module 40 mA

2 x switching elements, 6 mA each 12 mA

2 x LEDs, 20 mA each 40 mA

Total 152 mA

When realistic simultaneity factors are taken into account, the actual power requirements

tend to be lower in practice.

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 329

8.7.2.5 Dimension drawings of the housing

Dimension drawings of the housing

Housing without protective collar (plastic)

5HDUYLHZ

)RUVFUHZ0

:LWKNQRFNRXWVRQWRSDQGERWWRP

HDFKIRUVFUHZFRQQHFWLRQ

 



 

Figure 8-74 Housing without protective collar (plastic)

No. of control points Length a Clearance b Clearance c

1 85 54 17.5

2 114 83 17.5

3 154 123 17.5

4 194 163 17.5

6 280 249 20.5

Slaves

8.7 AS-Interface for control and signaling devices

AS-Interface system

330 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Housing without protective collar (metal)

5HDUYLHZ

)RUVFUHZ0

:LWKNQRFNRXWVRQWRSDQGERWWRP

HDFKIRUVFUHZFRQQHFWLRQ

 



 

Figure 8-75 Housing without protective collar (metal)

No. of control points Length a Clearance b Clearance c

1 85 54 21

2 114 83 21

3 154 123 21

4 194 163 21

6 280 249 21

Slaves

8.8 Signaling columns with AS-Interface connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 331

8.8 Signaling columns with AS-Interface connection

8.8.1 Overview

On machines or in automatic processes, the 8WD4 signaling columns are used for

monitoring complex procedures or provide visual/acoustic warnings in emergencies.

In the case of standard signaling columns, the signaling elements (e.g. lamp elements) are

placed vertically on the connection element. In the connection element, a signal cable (and

joint ground cable) must be connected for each signaling element.

In the case of AS-Interface signaling columns, an AS-i adapter element is placed on the

connection element. The signaling elements are placed vertically on top of this. Only the

2-pin AS-i cable (and auxiliary voltage, if required) needs to be connected in the connection

element. The signaling elements are controlled as AS-i outputs. The outputs are connected

to the signaling elements automatically in ascending order.

$UUDQJHPHQWRIWKH

VLJQDOLQJHOHPHQWV $VVLJQPHQWRIWKH

RXWSXWVGDWDELW

QRWDYDLODEOH

IRU$%PRGXOH

$6,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH

&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH

287'

287'6

6

6

6 287'

287'

Figure 8-76 Assignment of the signaling elements to the AS-i outputs

Slaves

8.8 Signaling columns with AS-Interface connection

AS-Interface system

332 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Configuring the signaling columns

For a detailed guide to configuring signaling columns, please visit:

www.siemens.com/automation/infocenter

On the left of the screen, choose the product path:

Automation and Drives ➜ Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution ➜ SIRIUS Industrial

Controls ➜ Commanding and Signaling Devices ➜ 8WD4 Signaling Columns

In the middle of the screen under the "Brochures" tab, download the PDF file onto your PC in

the required language.

Figure 8-77 Brochure: Signaling Columns (as at 08/2007)

8WD44 series (70 mm diameter)

The following AS-i adapter elements are available for the 8WD44 series:

● Standard slave with 4 electronic outputs

● A/B slave with 3 electronic outputs

You can use a slide switch on the bottom of the adapter element to select the cable via

which the signaling elements are supplied:

● Switch position "internal" Power supply for the signaling elements from the AS-i cable.

An auxiliary voltage does not need to be connected.

● Switch position "external" Power supply for the signaling elements from the auxiliary

voltage.

24 V DC auxiliary voltage must be connected.

Depending on the position of the switch, the power requirements for the signaling elements

must be taken into account when the AS-i power supply unit or auxiliary voltage power

supply unit is dimensioned.

In the event of an overload, the outputs are shut down and an I/O error is reported to the

AS-i master.

The following table can be used to calculate the power requirements for the AS-i module:

Components Power requirements 8WD42 Power requirements 8WD44

AS-i module 50 mA 50 mA

Steady light element

incandescent lamp (7 W)

300 mA 300 mA

Slaves

8.8 Signaling columns with AS-Interface connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 333

Components Power requirements 8WD42 Power requirements 8WD44

Steady light element LED 60 mA 45 mA

Buzzer element 25 mA 25 mA

Siren element — 100 mA

8WD42 series (50 mm diameter)

The following AS-i adapter elements are available for the 8WD42 series:

● Standard slave with 4 relay outputs.

Auxiliary voltage 0...24 V DC or 0...230 V AC must be connected.

The max. aggregate current for all the signaling elements is 1.5 A.

The AS-i module for the 8WD42 series is not equipped with overload protection.

Setting the AS-i address

In the 8WD44 series, the addressing socket for setting the AS-i address is located and can

be accessed on the bottom of the adapter element (once it has been removed).

To the set AS-i address with the 8WD42 series, however, the addressing device can be

connected directly using the AS-i connection cable (no addressing socket).

8.8.2 Order numbers

AS-Interface adapter element for signaling columns

Type Order no.

AS-Interface adapter element

with external 24 V DC auxiliary voltage

for 4 signaling elements

8WD4228-0BB

AS-Interface adapter element A/B technology, ASIsafe,

with/without external 24 V DC auxiliary voltage, switchable

for 3 signaling elements

8WD4428-0BD

AS-Interface adapter element standard AS-i,

with external 24 V DC auxiliary voltage,

for 4 signaling elements

8WD4428-0BE

For the configuration of the signaling elements, refer to the order numbers in the relevant

catalog or brochure.

Slaves

8.8 Signaling columns with AS-Interface connection

AS-Interface system

334 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.8.3 Connection

AS-i (+)

AS-i (-)

AUX

(+)

AUX (-)

AS-i (+)

AS-i (-)

Figure 8-78 Signaling columns - AS-i connection (on left without, on right with AUX POWER)

Addressing socket

switch

Supply of

signaling elements

1 = ext: U

AUX

2 = int: U

ASI

Figure 8-79 Signaling columns - ASI module

Slaves

8.8 Signaling columns with AS-Interface connection

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 335

8.8.4 Diagnostics

Figure 8-80 LEDs on the 8WD44 signaling column

In the 8WD44 series, the adapter element is equipped with three diagnostic LEDs on the

side: AS-i, FAULT, and AUX (auxiliary voltage). The LEDs have the same meaning as that

described in "Diagnostics". If the outputs are overloaded, the I/O error bit is set.

No diagnostic LEDs are available in the 8WD42 series.

8.8.5 Technical specifications

AS-Interface adapter elements for signaling columns

Order no. 8WD4228-0BB 8WD4428-0BD 8WD4428-0BE

Slave type Standard slave A/B slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to

Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.1 AS-i Spec. 2.0

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 8.F

(ID2 not available,

replacement value: F)

8.A.E 8.F.F

ID1 code (factory setting) (ID1 not available, substitute

value: F)

7 F

Power supply

Operating voltage

from AS-i cable

18.5 ... 31.6 V

Current consumption

from AS-i cable

without external auxiliary

voltage

with external auxiliary voltage

—

50 mA

≤ 250 mA

50 mA

—

50 mA

Slaves

8.8 Signaling columns with AS-Interface connection

AS-Interface system

336 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 8WD4228-0BB 8WD4428-0BD 8WD4428-0BE

Protective measures

Watchdog Integrated

Short-circuit/overload

protection

Via external back-up fuse

M 1.6 A

Integrated

Reverse polarity protection Integrated

Outputs 4 relay outputs 3 electronic outputs 4 electronic outputs

Load voltage External auxiliary voltage

24 V DC - 120 V DC

max. 230 V AC

Via AS-i cable or external

24 V DC auxiliary voltage,

switchable

External auxiliary voltage

24 V DC

Current-carrying capacity

without external auxiliary

voltage

with external auxiliary voltage

—

1.5 A total current

0.2 A total current

0.3 A per output

Degree of protection IP54 IP65

Operating temperature –20 ... +50°C –25 ... +50°C

Slaves

8.9 AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 337

8.9 AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

8.9.1 Overview

The LOGO! Modular logic module is a user-friendly, cost-effective solution for simple

open-loop and closed-loop control tasks in domestic applications/installation engineering,

cabinet construction, mechanical and apparatus engineering, and so on. It can also be used

for preprocessing signals for other controllers.

To increase the number of inputs and outputs of the basic module LOGO! Modular Basic /

Pure, digital and analog expansion and communication modules can be connected.

LOGO! communications module CM AS-Interface allows a LOGO! module to be connected

to an AS-i system. It can be combined with any LOGO! modular basic and pure variants.

Figure 8-81 LOGO! CM AS-Interface expansion module (right) connected to a LOGO! basic module

(left)

The LOGO! CM AS-Interface is an AS-i slave.

It does not support master functionality, which means that it cannot be used to control other

AS-i slaves.

As a result, data cannot be exchanged directly between two LOGO! devices. Data is always

exchanged via the AS-Interface master.

The LOGO! CM AS-Interface exchanges four digital input and four digital output statuses

with the higher-level controller (PLC) via an AS-i master.

This input and output data can be interconnected in the LOGO! program in the same way as

standard inputs and outputs.

The LOGO! program does not make a distinction here between the virtual inputs/outputs (of

the AS-Interface communication module) and the standard inputs/outputs (which are wired to

physical switches/contactor coils via terminals, for example).

Slaves

8.9 AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

AS-Interface system

338 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Logical assignment

The LOGO! program numbers the inputs and outputs in the same order in which the

modules are connected, starting with I1 (inputs) and Q1 (outputs).

The LOGO! basic module is equipped with eight digital inputs and four digital outputs, which

are addressed in the LOGO! program as I1 ... I8 and Q1 ... Q4. The numbering is continued

if expansion modules are connected.

If a CM AS-Interface communication module is connected next to the basic module, the four

inputs and four outputs on the CM AS-Interface are addressed in the LOGO! program as

I9...I12 and Q5...Q8.

If additional expansion modules with digital inputs/outputs are located between the basic

module and the communication module, the inputs/outputs on the CM AS-Interface shift

accordingly in the LOGO! program.

● In LOGO!, an AS-i output (from the point of view of the PLC) is read as an input.

● In LOGO!, an AS-i input (from the point of view of the PLC) is read as an output.

The assignment is shown in the following table:

AS-Interface system

(from the point of view of

the PLC)

LOGO! system

(use in LOGO! program)

General representation

(index n depends on slot)

Example:

CM AS-Interface directly next

to LOGO! basic module

Output data bits Inputs Inputs

D0 (out)

D1 (out)

D2 (out)

D3 (out)

⇒

In+1

In+2

In+3

I10

I11

I12

Input data bits Outputs Outputs

D0 (in)

D1 (in)

D2 (in)

D3 (in)

⇐

Qn+1

Qn+2

Qn+3

Setting the AS-i address

The addressing socket for setting the AS-i address is located on the left-hand side of the

lower terminal strip. The address is assigned as usual using the AS-i addressing unit.

If the module is to be addressed via the addressing socket once it has been installed, you

must disconnect AS-Interface from the power supply beforehand. This is necessary in the

interests of plant safety.

The AS-i address cannot be set via the display of the LOGO! basic module or via the LOGO!

software.

Slaves

8.9 AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 339

8.9.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

AS-Interface function module LOGO! standard slave IP20 4DI/4DO 3RK1400-0CE10-0AA2

Additional LOGO! modules can be found in the LOGO! manual (reference,

Cont. ID = 21221909 (Page 627)) or in the ST 70 catalog.

8.9.3 Connection

PPt

5816723

$6,QWHUIDFH

$6L

$''5

5.&($$

Figure 8-82 LOGO! CM AS-Interface connection

CAUTION

The LOGO! expansion modules must only be connected/disconnected when they are

disconnected from the power supply.

The AS-Interface and LOGO! system must not be connected electrically.

Slaves

8.9 AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

AS-Interface system

340 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LOGO! can support up to 24 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs. Make sure that enough

space is available in the LOGO! address space for the four inputs and four outputs of

AS-Interface.

You are advised to position the AS-Interface CM on the far right. If the AS-Interface voltage

fails, communication in the LOGO! system with the expansion modules to the right of the

AS-Interface CM is interrupted.

8.9.4 Diagnostics

Two LEDs are located on the front:

LED status display RUN/STOP

RUN/STOP Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Standard operation,

No communication with the LOGO!

module on the left Module OK

—

Red No communication with the LOGO!

module on the left Module

• Sliding contact with the module on the

left must be fully engaged.

• Check whether the module on the left is

functioning properly.

• Check the power supplies: the AS-i

voltage must be connected at the same

timer as or prior to the power supply for

the module on the left. otherwise the

expansion module will not be detected

when the LOGO! basic module is

started.

Yellow Initialization phase of expansion

module active.

Wait until the initialization phase is

complete.

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect

polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage,

connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx.

30 V DC)

Slaves

8.9 AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 341

LED status display for AS-i

AS-i Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

AS-i communication OK

—

Red No AS-i communication:

• The master is switched off or offline.

• The slave is not configured in the

master.

• The incorrect slave type is connected.

• The slave has the wrong address.

Ensure AS-i communication:

• Switch on the master or switch it to

online mode.

• Reconfigure the master.

• Connect the correct module.

• Check/correct the slave address.

Yellow/red

flashing

The slave has the address 0

(on delivery)

Assign an address that is not 0.

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect

polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage,

connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx.

30 V DC)

If AS-i communication is interrupted, the outputs are reset after approx. 40 ... 100 ms.

8.9.5 Technical specifications

CM AS-Interface

Electrical data

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to Spec. ... (or higher) AS-i Spec. 2.0

Slave profile IO.ID 7.F

ID2, ID1 code not available (substitute value: F, F)

Power supply

from AS-Interface cable,

operating voltage in acc. with AS-i

Specification

26.5...31.6 V

Reverse polarity protection Yes

Total current consumption Itot ≤ 70 mA

Degree of protection IP20

RFI suppression Limit value class A

Connections

Digital inputs (I) The next four inputs behind the physical inputs of

the LOGO!

(In ... In+3)

Digital outputs (Q) The next four outputs behind the physical outputs of

the LOGO!

(In ... In+3)

Slaves

8.9 AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

AS-Interface system

342 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

CM AS-Interface

Mechanical data

Dimensions (W x H x D) 36 x 90 x 58 mm

Weight Approx. 90 g

Assembly On DIN rail, 35 mm, 2 MW or wall-mounting

Approvals IEC 61131-2,

EN 50178

cULus to UL 508

CSA C22.2 no. 142

8.9.6 Dimension drawings

LOGO! CM AS-Interface communications module









Figure 8-83 Dimensions: LOGO! CM AS-Interface communication module

Slaves

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 343

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-

Interface

8.10.1 Overview

The contactors 3RT10, 3-pin, sizes S6 ... S12 (for > 45 to 250 kW) with display showing

remaining service life can be ordered with an integrated AS-i connection.

Figure 8-84 Contactor 3RT1056

The contactors require an auxiliary voltage of 96 to 127V or 200 to 277V AC/DC.

An upstream control electronics system supplies the magnet coil with just the power

necessary for ensuring safe switching and stopping,as a result of which a low pick-up and

holding power is required.

The electronic remaining life time (RLT) module determines the actual extent to which the

contact has eroded and outputs a signal message via AS-Interface when the remaining life

time is < 20%. LEDs on the contactor electronics also indicate 40% and 60% remaining life

time.

This means that eroded contacts can be replaced in good time during servicing.

Setting the AS-i address

The addressing socket for setting the AS-i address is located on the front of the electronic

module. The address is assigned as usual using the AS-i addressing unit.

Slaves

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

344 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.10.2 Order numbers

Order no. Power Size Connection

For auxiliary voltage

96-127 V AC/DC

For auxiliary voltage

200-277 V AC/DC

55 kW / 400 V AC-3 S6 Box terminals — 3RT1054-1QP35

75 kW / 400 V AC-3 S6 Busbar 3RT1055-6QF35 3RT1055-6QP35

90 kW / 400 V AC-3 S6 Busbar 3RT1056-6QF35 3RT1056-6QP35

110 kW / 400 V AC-3 S10 Busbar 3RT1064-6QF35 3RT1064-6QP35

132 kW / 400 V AC-3 S10 Busbar 3RT1065-6QF35 3RT1065-6QP35

160 kW / 400 V AC-3 S10 Busbar 3RT1066-6QF35 3RT1066-6QP35

200 kW / 400 V AC-3 S12 Busbar 3RT1075-6QF35 3RT1075-6QP35

250 kW / 400 V AC-3 S12 Busbar 3RT1076-6QF35 3RT1076-6QP35

Order numbers for accessories: see catalog LV1.

8.10.3 Connecting the electronic module

① Electronic module for contactor 3RT1...-.Q

② Plug-in connection, 6-pin

③ Plug-in connection, 4-pin

④ E.g. overload relay 3RB10

S1 S1 selector of automatic control, e.g. via

AS-Interface to local control (S1 open:

automatic operation)

6

6

$ $

+

6)

$6L

+

+

6)

$6L

$6L $6L

574

//

1/

①

②

③

④

S2 S2 local control option

Slaves

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 345

Assignment of the inputs DI 0 - DI 3

Input Status Meaning

0 Device not ready / manual mode DI 0 "ready"

1 Device ready / automatic mode

0 Contactor OFF DI 1 "running"

1 Contactor ON

0 RLT ≥ 20 % DI 2 " remaining life time"

1 RLT ≤ 20 %

0 No input signal at free input SF1/2 DI 3 "free input"

1 Input signal at free input SF1/2

Assignment of outputs DO 0 - DO 3

Output Status Activation

0 Contactor OFF DO 0 "running"

1 Contactor ON

0 — DO 1

1 —

0 — DO2

1 —

0 — DO3

1 —

Slaves

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

346 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.10.4 Diagnostics

&RQWDFWRU21

'LVSOD\VIRU5/7

/('JUHHQ

/('RUDQJH

/('UHG

&DEOHFRQQHFWLRQ

SROH

%XVVWDWXV

$XWRPDWLF

FRQWURO

&DEOHFRQQHFWLRQ

SROH

$GGUHVVLQJVRFNHW

5/75HVHW

+

+

6)

6)

$6L

9

$&'&

$ $

43

9

+]

5757

$872

$6L

5/7







5HVHW

$''5

+









Figure 8-85 LEDs on the electronic module

LED ON

ON Meaning

Green Contactor ON (energized status)

OFF Contactor OFF

LED AUTO

AUTO Meaning

Green Automatic mode (via AS-Interface)

OFF Local control mode

Slaves

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 347

LED AS-i

AS-i Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

AS-i communication OK

—

Red No AS-i communication:

• The master is switched off or offline.

• The slave is not configured in the master.

• The incorrect slave type is connected.

• The slave has the wrong address.

Ensure AS-i communication:

• Switch on the master or switch it to

online mode.

• Reconfigure the master.

• Connect the correct module.

• Check/correct the slave address.

Yellow/red

flashing

The slave has the address 0

(on delivery)

Assign an address that is not 0.

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage,

connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx.

30 V DC)

LED status displays for RLT (remaining life time)

LED Meaning

RLT Green RLT OK

60% Green

40% Orange

20% Red

RLT in acc. with LED labeling

*UHHQ

5HG

2UDQJH

QHZ

5/7

5HVHW









5/7

5HVHW









5/7

5HVHW







5/7

5HVHW







Figure 8-86 Status display of RLT

Slaves

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

348 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

8.10.5 Technical specifications of the electronic module

Electrical data

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to Spec. ... (or higher) AS-i Spec. 2.0

AS-i slave profile IO.ID 7.F

ID2, ID1 code not available (substitute values: F, F)

Power supply

(in acc. with AS-Interface Specification)

26.5 ... 31.6 V

AS-Interface current consumption ≤ 20 mA

Contact load on SF1/2 3...6 mA

Watchdog function Integrated

Additional specifications for the 3RT10 contactors can be found under "3RT10 contactors,

3-pole, 3...250 kW" in catalog LV1 / LV1T or at www.siemens.de/mall (as PDF for all sizes

from S00 to S12).

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 349

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe 9

The safety-related design of AS-Interface was standardized for all manufacturers in the

"Safety at Work" consortium (sub-group of the AS-i International Association) (see

AS-i-Spec. 3.0). It is marketed by Siemens under the copyrighted name "ASIsafe".

The concept allows both standard and safe data to be used in one single bus system.

EMERGENCY STOP buttons, laser scanners, and a range of other I/Os can be easily and

safely connected directly to AS-i. Existing applications can also be quickly and easily

extended to include safety-oriented functions.

"Safety at Work" is certified by the Technical Inspectorate (TÜV) and approved devices bear

the ASIsafe logo.

Integrating safety-oriented components

ASIsafe enables safety-oriented components (e.g. EMERGENCY STOP control devices,

protective door monitors, optoelectronic protective devices, safety light curtains) to be

integrated directly in an AS-Interface network. These are fully compatible with the standard

AS-Interface components (master, slaves, power supply unit, repeater, etc.) to

IEC 62061/EN 50295 and are operated together on the yellow AS-Interface cable.

The signals from the safety sensors are evaluated by a safety monitor, which not only

monitors the switching signals from the safety sensors but also continuously ensures that

data is transferred properly. The safety monitor is equipped with one or two enabling circuits,

which are configured with one or two channels and are used to switch the machine or plant

to safe mode. Sensors and monitors can be connected anywhere within the AS-Interface

network. More than one monitor can also be used in a network.

A failsafe controller or special master is not required. The master treats safety slaves in the

same way as all the other slaves and receives safety data for information purposes only.

This means that all existing AS-Interface networks can also be extended.

ASIsafe ensures a maximum response time of 40 ms. This is the time between the signal

being applied to the input of the safe slave and the output on the safety monitor being

switched off.

Tested safety

The system is tested and released for worldwide use by TÜV (Germany), NRTL (USA), and

INRS (France). The transmission method for safety-oriented signals is designed in such a

way that applications up to category 4 according to EN 954-1 and SIL 3 according to

IEC 61508 can be implemented.

ASIsafe ensures full compatibility with all other AS-Interface components to EN 50295.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

350 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Software

The safety-oriented applications can be compiled and transferred to the monitor using the

configuration software "asimon". The software also supports online diagnosis.

Local ASIsafe solution: the safety monitor

(Page 353)

PROFIsafe ASIsafe solution: the DP/AS-i F-

Link (Page 123)

A number of simple and cost-effective safety

solutions are available. The local ASIsafe

solution only needs two components: a

safety monitor and safe slaves. Failsafe

PLCs or special masters are not required.

The safety monitor monitors the safe inputs

acquired via the safe slaves, links them

using a parameterizable logic, and ensures

safe shutdown by means of a built-in safety

relay.

The data is transferred via a dynamic, safe

protocol. In each cycle, the safety monitor

expects from each slave a specific telegram

that changes continuously in accordance

with a defined algorithm. Configuration

software is used to parameterize the

shutdown logic of the safety monitor,

whereby it can respond accordingly in each

case when the safe nodes trip. If no

telegram is received (e.g. if a fault or alarm

occurs), the safety monitor shuts down after

max. 40 ms (worst case) via its two-channel

enabling circuits.

DP/AS-i F-Link allows you to leverage the

benefits of AS-i in a wide range of safety

applications since it allows the use of AS-i in

failsafe SIMATIC or SINUMERIK controllers.

It closes a crucial gap in bus-based safety

technology in that it ensures that ASIsafe

telegrams are converted to the PROFIsafe

protocol. Safe signals are acquired as usual

with the robust IP67 ASIsafe slaves. The

existing F PLC is responsible for evaluating

them. Responses are also made at the

PROFIsafe level, either by F-DO/F-RO

modules in the central rack or by means of

the failsafe distributed I/Os. F-Link is the

best choice in the following cases:

• When large amounts of safe slaves are

used

• When numerous trip circuits have been

installed

• For safety-oriented further processing at

the higher-level field bus levels

• For extensive, nested logical operations

The safety monitor can be diagnosed via the

controller. This has many benefits, in

particular no additional wiring is necessary

for the safety components. Ready-made

images for operating and monitoring tasks

also allow users to visualize the

safety-oriented events on SIMATIC HMI

panels.

And the level of TIA is greater than ever:

configuration and parameterization is carried

out via STEP 7 HWConfig, as is the case

with PROFIsafe slaves. The safe logic is

programmed with the "unlimited" resources

of STEP 7 Distributed Safety in F-KOP or

F-FUP. The comprehensive library of

TÜV-certified function blocks ensures highly

efficient and structured user programs.

Diagnosis is also carried out using the

system functions provided by STEP 7 as

well as locally on the devices by means of

messages on the display.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 351

ASIsafe

Possible no. of safe slaves 31

Safety integrity level Up to SIL3 (IEC 61508)

Safety category Up to cat. 4 (EN 954-1)

Response time Max. 40 ms (worst case)

6WDQGDUG3/&DQG

GHIDXOWPDVWHU

'HIDXOW

6ODYH

'HIDXOW

6ODYH

'HIDXOW

6ODYH

6DIHW\

PRQLWRU 6DIHVODYH

'HIDXOW

$6L

3RZHUVXSSO\XQLW

/RFDO$6,VDIHVROXWLRQ'HVLJQDQGFRPSRQHQWV

6LJQDOIORZIRUVDIHW\RULHQWHGVLJQDOVDQG

HYDOXDWLRQYLDVDIHW\PRQLWRU

([WHQGHG$6,VDIHGLDJQRVWLFVWKURXJKUHJXODU,2WUDQVLVWRU

$6,QWHUIDFHFDEOH

SAFETY AT WORK

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

8.10 Contactors showing remaining service life and connection to AS-Interface

AS-Interface system

352 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

352),VDIH$6,VDIHVROXWLRQ'HVLJQDQGFRPSRQHQWV

3DUDPHWHUL]LQJ$6,VDIHVODYHVLQ67(3+:&RQILJ

'LDJQRVLQJ$6,VDIHVODYHVLQ67(3+:&RQILJ

6DIH

6ODYH 6WDQGDUGVODYHV

9LVXDOL]DWLRQ

+0,SDQHO

','2DQG$,$2

6$)(7<$7:25.

$6,QWHUIDFHFDEOH

6LJQDOIORZIRUGLJLWDODQGDQDORJVWDQGDUGVLJQDOV

6LJQDOIORZIRUVDIHW\RULHQWHGVLJQDOV

8SWR3/&352),VDIHOHYHO

(0(5

*(1&<

6723

352&(66),(/'%86

(76

'3$6L)/LQN 6,0$7,&

6,0$7,&6)

)',

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 353

9.1 Safety monitor

Functional principle

The safety monitor monitors data communication on the AS-Interface cable. For safe slaves,

dynamic code sequences (8x4 bit data sequence), which are stored in every slave, are

transferred.

These are "learnt" by the safety monitor during commissioning. During operation, the safety

monitor compares in each cycle the target and actual sequence and, if any discrepancies are

identified (e.g. due to device failure, communication faults, etc.), initiates a safe shutdown

within 40 ms. The restart time is 100 ms. A range of safe field and cabinet modules as well

as intelligent safety sensors and control devices with an AS-Interface chip are available as

slaves.

Bus communication and the data protocol have been deemed safe by the BIA and the

technology has been certified by TÜV.

The system can be used up to category 4 to EN 954-1 or up to SIL 3 to IEC 61508 [10] and

can be used for stop category 0 and 1 to EN 60204-1.

Master query

Standard PLC and

standard master

Safe slave

AS-i

power

supply

unit

Safety monitor

Slave reply

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

Comparator

SETPOINT

table

ACTUAL

table

Analog

interface

Opto-

coupler

Pre-

processing

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

“ON”

0 0 0 0

Sensors

Channel 1

sequence

generator

Channel 2

sequence

generator

D3 D2 D1 D0

Channel 1 Channel 2

Pulse

Standard AS-i

slave connection

Occupied

Figure 9-1 ASIsafe functional principle

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

354 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.1.1 Overview

The safety monitor is at the heart of ASIsafe. A safe application is configured with a PC via

the safety monitor. A range of different application-specific operating modes can be selected

here. These include the EMERGENCY OFF function, tumbler, or stop category 0 or 1.

To leverage the benefits of the AS-Interface diagnostic options, the monitor can also be

operated with the AS-Interface address. All the diagnostic options can be used further in the

higher-level PLC by means of the diagnostic block for STEP 7 supplied with the ASIsafe CD.

The monitor is available in two versions:

● Basic safety monitor with an entry-level range of blocks and basic functionality

● Expanded safety monitor with advanced features and functionality

Both versions are each available with one or two two-channel enabling circuits.

The safety monitor is used in an AS-Interface bus system for monitoring protective devices

(e.g. EMERGENCY OFF buttons). It fulfills safety category 4 (to EN 954-1).

In accordance with IEC 61508, the safety monitor can be used in loops up to SIL3. The PFD

value of the entire loop must be calculated by the user.

ON period (in months) Total operation time (in years) PFD PFH

3 10 ≤ 4 × 10-5 —

6 10 ≤ 6 × 10-5 —

12 10 ≤ 9 × 10-5 ≤ 9 × 10-9

ON period

NOTICE

Depending on the safety components selected, the safety system as a whole can also be

classified in a lower safety category.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 355

9.1.2 Function

Comparison between the basic safety monitor and expanded safety monitor

Basic safety monitor Expanded safety monitor

No. of monitoring modules 32 48

No. of OR gates (inputs) 2 6

No. of AND gates (inputs) -- 6

Wildcards for monitoring modules ✓ ✓

deactivation of monitoring modules ✓ ✓

Fault reset ✓ ✓

Diagnostics hold ✓ ✓

A/B slaves for acknowledgement ✓ ✓

Safe time functions -- ✓

"Button" function -- ✓

Contact debouncing -- ✓

No. of monitoring modules

When the expanded safety monitor is used, the number of devices that the safety monitor

can handle increases from 32 to 48. This allows more complex and larger applications to be

simulated in the safety monitor.

OR logic operation

At the logic level, two elements can be ORed in the basic version and up to six elements in

the expanded version.

AND logic operation

With the expanded safety monitor, an AND operation can be added to an OR operation in

addition to the standard AND operation in the main path of an enabling circuit. More than two

elements can be linked in this AND.

Functions of the basic safety monitor

● Wildcards and deactivation of monitoring modules:

wildcards are available for configuration purposes. These wildcards are used during

configuration and diagnosis and, if required, are easy to activate. This allows for simple,

user-friendly configuration, even when the plant configurations vary.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

356 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

● Fault reset:

If a module detects a fault, the AS-Interface safety monitor switches to the fault status. In

this case, a differentiated fault reset is triggered. The fault reset can be activated by a

standard AS-Interface slave (e.g. a button) and is only effective at module level. The main

advantage of this is that only the module locked in a fault is reset rather than the entire

safety monitor.

● Buffer storage and "Diagnostics hold"

Momentary disconnections are saved in a buffer memory for diagnostic purposes.

Disconnections can also be "frozen" until an acknowledgment is received via a standard

slave ("Diagnostics hold" function).

Additional functions of the expanded safety monitor

The following additional features are only available with the expanded safety monitor:

● Safe time functions

Timers with the following functions are available:

– ON delay

– OFF delay

– Pulse

● "Button" function

Additional acknowledgment option for restarting the system by means of an additional

button. In addition to the "Service" button on the safety monitor, its function (restarting the

system) can be assigned to any button on a command and signaling device by

configuring this in the asimon software.

● Contact debouncing

A bounce time after which the system restarts can be set for debouncing contacts.

Compatibility

Existing configurations can be transferred to the "new" safety monitor without changes.

All functions are designed for category 4 to EN 954-1; the safety monitor, monitoring and

evaluation unit, as well as the slaves have been certified by TÜV to IEC 61508, NRTL (USA),

and INRS (France).

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 357

9.1.3 Order numbers

Safety monitor

Order no. Type

Screw connection Spring-loaded terminal

Basic safety monitor

One enabling circuit 3RK1105-1AE04-0CA0 3RK1105-1AG04-0CA0

Two enabling circuits 3RK1105-1BE04-0CA0 3RK1105-1BG04-0CA0

Expanded safety monitor

One enabling circuit 3RK1105-1AE04-2CA0 3RK1105-1AG04-2CA0

Two enabling circuits 3RK1105-1BE04-2CA0 3RK1105-1BG04-2CA0

Accessories

Type Order no.

ASIsafe CD

• asimon V2 plus configuration software

• Diagnostics package for STEP 7 (FB102)

• Complete HMI templates for WinCCflex (OP / TP 177 – 277)

3RK1 802-2FB06-0GA0

Set of cables

• PC configuration cable (RS 232 interface)

• Transmission cable between two safety monitors

3RK1 901-5AA00

Sealable cover 3RP1 902

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

358 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.1.4 Connection

Circuit diagrams for ASi safety monitors

If terminal M is not connected to ground in the immediate vicinity of the device, the protective

conductor must be connected to terminal FE.

/

01



.

 

.

/

.





)(

.









$6L

<

<

$6L



$6L



6WDUW

.

. .

.

6WDUW

/

.

.

<

/

.

.

<

/







$6L



/

01

/

. .



)(



$6L



$6L



<

<

.

.

6WDUW

/

.

.

<

/

Figure 9-2 Safety monitor with one or two enabling circuits

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 359

9.1.5 Diagnostics

LEDs

The LEDs on the front of the AS-Interface safety monitor provide information about the

operating mode and device status.



$6L32:(5















$6L)$8/7

5($'<

21

2)))$8/7

Figure 9-3 Arrangement of the LEDs

(The LED AS-i POWER may also be labeled LED AS-i.

The LED AS-i FAULT may also be an unlabeled LED under the LED AS-i.)

LED: AS-i POWER (AS-i)

AS-i POWER (AS-i) Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF No AS-Interface supply • Check the cable connections.

• Check the AS-Interface power supply unit.

Green Normal operation,

AS-i communication OK

—

LED: AS-i FAULT (LED under LED AS-i)

AS-i FAULT Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF Normal operation,

AS-i communication OK

—

Red No AS-i communication:

• The master is switched off or offline.

Ensure AS-i communication:

• Check the master.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

360 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LED: 1 READY (for each output circuit)

1 READY Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF Normal operation —

Yellow Acknowledgement of startup/restart inhibit active Press the "Start" button.

Flashing yellow External test required.

ON delay active

Open the contacts on the faulty input circuit

simultaneously and in pairs.

Flickering yellow

LED 1, 2, 3

simultaneously

Internal device error Connect the device to the PC, see OFF/FAULT.

Launch the ASIMON software, note down the

error number displayed in the ASIMON message

window, and contact Technical Support.

LED: 2 ON (for each output circuit)

2 ON Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF The contacts of the output switching elements

are open.

—

Green The contacts of the output switching elements

are closed.

—

Flashing green Delay time running for stop category 1 Wait until delay time has elapsed.

Flickering yellow

LED 1, 2, 3

simultaneously

Internal device error Connect the device to the PC, see OFF/FAULT.

Launch the ASIMON software, note down the

error number displayed in the ASIMON message

window, and contact Technical Support.

LED: 3 OFF/FAULT (for each output circuit)

3 OFF/FAULT Possible cause Possible remedial measures

OFF The contacts of the output switching elements

are closed.

—

Red The contacts of the output switching elements

are open.

—

Flashing red Error at level of monitored AS-Interface

components

• Carry out diagnosis with ASIMON.

• If necessary, replace defective AS-Interface

components.

Flickering yellow

LED 1, 2, 3

simultaneously

Internal device error Connect the device to the PC, see OFF/FAULT.

Launch the ASIMON software, note down the

error number displayed in the ASIMON message

window, and contact Technical Support.

Note

When the "Service" button is pressed, this is acknowledged when all the device LEDs light

up once for a brief moment.

As soon as the power supply is applied to the device, the internal system test starts. This

operating status is indicated by the fact that all the LEDs installed in the device light up.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 361

Diagnosis via asimon configuration software

When the safety monitor is connected to the serial PC interface, the online diagnosis

function can be activated in the asimon software. The status of each module (device) is

indicated by a color.

Status display

Color display Meaning

Green Device is switched on.

Flashing green Device is ON, shutdown timer started.

Yellow Device waiting for local acknowledgement or start condition.

Flashing yellow Device (two-channel dependent) was actuated on one channel;

Test (OFF → ON) required, for "start test" too.

Red Device has switched off (standard shutdown).

Flashing red Device has (forcibly) been switched off on one channel, or error with contactor

monitoring.

Press "Service" button.

Gray Device communications error between AS-i module and safety monitor

— Safety monitor is in configuration mode.

Diagnosis via AS-Interface

To forward the diagnosis to the PLC via AS-Interface, the safety monitor requires an

AS-i address. This is assigned using the asimon configuration software (Edit ➜ Information

about Monitor and bus ➜ Diagnosis / Service ➜ AS-interface diagnosis ➜ Monitor base

address).

A function block in the PLC reads the diagnostics data and stores it in a data block. The

function block (incl. description) is supplied with the asimon software.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.1 Safety monitor

AS-Interface system

362 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.1.6 Technical specifications

Order no. 3RK1105-...

Rated operating current

Ie/AC-12 Up to 250 V, 3 A

Ie/AC-15 115 V, 3 A

230 V, 3 A

Ie/DC-12 Up to 24 V, 3 A

Ie/DC-13 24 V, 1 A

115 V, 0.1 A

230 V, 0.05 A

Response time ≤ 40 ms

Ambient temperature 0 ... +60°C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85°C

AS-Interface configuration data (for diagnosis via AS-i)

applies to the basic address and simulated slaves

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to Spec. ... (or higher) AS-i Spec. 2.0

AS-i slave profile IO.ID 7.F

ID2, ID1 code not available (substitute values: F, F)

9.1.7 Dimension drawings









Figure 9-4 Dimension drawing: safety monitor

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 363

9.2 ASIsafe modules

9.2.1 Overview

Figure 9-5 ASIsafe modules

Safety modules for AS-Interface (ASIsafe modules) are available for field use in degree of

protection IP67 (K20F and K45F compact modules) and for the control cabinet (S22.5F

SlimLine modules) in degree of protection IP20.

This means that a highly compact module with an optimum price/performance ratio is

available for all types of application.

The following modules are available:

K20F safe compact modules for operation in the field

The K20F module, which is just 20 mm wide, is ideal for applications in which modules need

to be installed in a confined area. The K20F modules are connected to AS-Interface using a

round cable with an M12 cable plug instead of the AS-Interface flat cable, which allows for

an extremely space-saving design. Since the round cable is so flexible, the modules can also

be easily installed on moving machine parts. The K20 modules are also suitable for

installation on moving parts because their non-encapsulated design means that they are

extremely light.

K45F compact safety modules for operation in the field

The platform for the K45F modules covers the following variations:

● Connection of switches /safety sensors with contacts ("mechanical"):

– K45F 2F-DI: two safety-oriented inputs in operation up to category 2 to EN954-1. If

category 4 is required, the module is equipped with a two-channel input.

– K45F 2F-DI/2DO: two standard outputs are available in addition to the safe inputs.

Supplied via the AS-i cable.

– K45F 2F-DI/2DO Uaux: like K45F 2F-DI/2DO, supplied only via the black 24 V DC

cable.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

364 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

– K45F 4F-DI: four safety-oriented inputs in operation up to category 2, two for category

4. Highly compact double slave (uses two full AS-i addresses).

● Connection of electronic switches / safety sensors (non-contact protective devices, BWS):

– K45F LS (light sensor): safe input module for connecting electronic safety sensors

tested semiconductor outputs (OSSD). In particular, proximity-type protective

equipment, such as active, optoelectronic light curtains and arrays for types 2 and 4 to

IEC / EN 61496, as well as transmitters and receivers are supplied with power by the

yellow AS-i cable. Suitable sensor cables and an optional, separate transmitter supply

module are available as accessories.

SlimLine safety modules S22.5F for use in cabinets and on-site switching boxes.

The SlimLine safety module S22.5F is equipped with two safe inputs. This also ensures that

signals can be safely connected to ASIsafe networks in the cabinet.

In operation up to category 2, both inputs can be assigned separately. If category 4 is

required, the module is equipped with a two-channel input.

Two S22.5F module variants are also available, which are equipped with two standard

outputs in addition to the two safe inputs. These are supplied with power either via the yellow

AS-Interface cable only or via the auxiliary voltage from the 24 V DC cable.

9.2.2 Order numbers

Safe compact modules

Order no. Module Inputs/outputs Slave type Connection

3RK1205-0BQ30-0AA3 K20F 2 safe inputs Standard slave 2 x M12

3RK1205-0BQ00-0AA3 K45F 2 safe inputs Standard slave 2 x M12

3RK1205-0CQ00-0AA3 K45F 4 safe inputs Standard slave 4 x M12

3RK1405-0BQ20-0AA3 K45F 2 safe inputs / 2 standard outputs Standard slave 4 x M12

3RK1405-1BQ20-0AA3 K45F 2 safe inputs / 2 standard outputs

with UAUX

Standard slave 4 x M12

3RK1205-0BQ21-0AA3 K45F LS 2 safe inputs, electronic, type 2 1) Standard slave 3 x M12

3RK1205-0BQ24-0AA3 K45F LS 2 safe inputs, electronic, type 4 2) Standard slave 3 x M12

1) Via socket 1/3 connection of Siemens light curtain FS 400 3RG7843 (type 2)

2) Via socket 1/3 connection of Siemens light curtain FS 400 3RG7846 (type 4), via socket 2/3 for other makes

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 365

Safe SlimLine modules

Order no. Inputs/outputs Slave type Connection type Sensors Output

3RK1205-0BE00-0AA2 Screw terminals —

3RK1205-0BG00-0AA2

2 safe inputs Standard

slave Spring-loaded

terminals

—

3RK1405-0BE00-0AA2 Screw terminals

3RK1405-0BG00-0AA2

2 safe inputs /

2 standard outputs

Standard

slave Spring-loaded

terminals

3RK1405-1BE00-0AA2 Screw terminals

3RK1405-1BG00-0AA2

2 safe inputs /

2 standard outputs with

UAUX

Standard

slave Spring-loaded

terminals

Mechanical

switching

contact

Electronic

Accessories

Order no. Description Comments

3RK1901-2EA00 K45 mounting plate Wall mounting

3RK1901-2DA00 K45 mounting plate DIN rail mounting

3RK1901-1AA00 Input jumper for K45F Black version

3RK1901-1AA01 Input jumper for K45F Red version

3RK1901-1KA01 M12 sealing caps Tamper proof

3RG7848-3EA Straight, 5 m

3RG7848-3EB Straight/angled, 5 m

3RG7848-3EC Straight, 10 m

3RG7848-3ED Straight/angled, 10 m

3RG7848-3EE Straight, 15 m

3RG7848-3EF

Connection cable for K45F LS (light sensor)

for transmitter, 5-pole, M12 connector at

both ends, plug/socket

Straight/angled, 15 m

3RG7848-3CA Straight, 5 m

3RG7848-3CB Straight/angled, 5 m

3RG7848-3CC Straight, 10 m

3RG7848-3CD Straight/angled, 10 m

3RG7848-3CE Straight, 15 m

3RG7848-3CF

Connection cable for K45F LS (light sensor)

for receiver, 8-pole, M12 connector at both

ends, plug/socket

Straight/angled, 15 m

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

366 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.2.3 Connection

Circuit diagrams for ASi safety modules

K20F compact module

Figure 9-6 Logical assignments - safety compact module K20F

Socket Assignment

1 Pole 1 and pole 2: influences bits D0 and D1 = channel 1

Pole 3 and pole 4: influences bits D2 and D3 = channel 2

Pole 5 unassigned

2 Pole 1 and pole 2: influences bits D2 and D3 = channel 2

Pole 5 unassigned

If just a one-channel switch is to be connected to the module, it must be connected to

channel 1. The second channel must be jumpered. This can be carried out with the M12

connector 3RK1901-1AA00 on socket 2. Pole 3 on socket 1 must be connected to pole 1 on

socket 2, and pole 4 on socket 1 must be connected to pole 2 on socket 2.

If both socket pairs are assigned, the inputs are linked.

K45F compact module

ADDR

Figure 9-7 Logical assignments - safety compact module K45F

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 367

Socket Assignment

1 Pole 1 and pole 2: influences bits D0 and D1 = channel 1

Pole 3 and pole 4: influences bits D2 and D3 = channel 2

Pole 5 unassigned

2 Pole 1 and pole 2: influences bits D2 and D3 = channel 2

Pole 5 unassigned

3 Unassigned

4 Unassigned

If just a one-channel switch is to be connected to the module, it must be connected to

channel 1. The second channel must be jumpered. This can be carried out with the M12

connector 3RK1 901-1AA00 on socket 2.

Pole 3 on socket 1 must be connected to pole 1 on socket 2, and pole 4 on socket 1 must be

connected to pole 2 on socket 2. If both socket pairs are assigned, the inputs are linked.

K45F LS compact module (light sensor)



$''5













Figure 9-8 Logical assignments - safe compact module K45F LS

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

368 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Socket Assignment

Type 2 receiver Type 4 receiver 1

M12, 8-pole Pole 2 / 3: sensor supply +

Pin 5: OSSD1

Pole 6: OSSD2

Pole 1 / 4 / 7 sensor supply –

Pole 8: FE

Pole 2 / 3: sensor supply +

Pin 5: OSSD1

Pole 6: OSSD2

Pole 1 / 4 diag

Pole 7 sensor supply –

Pole 8: FE

Type 2/4, alternative receiver 2

M12, 5-pole Pole 1: sensor supply +

Pin 2: OSSD2

Pole 3: sensor supply –

Pole 4: OSSD1

Pole 5: FE

Type 2/4 transmitter 3

M12, 5-pole Pole 1 and pole 4: sensor supply +

Pin 2: unassigned

Pole 3: sensor supply –

Pole 5: FE

SlimLine modules S22.5F



$6L

$6Lದ ),1

$''5









$6L

),1

),1

287 287







),1

6

),1 ),1

/



000

287

287



$6L

$6Lದ ),1

$''5







$6L

),1

),1

287 287





),1

6

),1 ),1

/

6



000

287

287



Wiring for safe SlimLine modules S22.5F, 2F-DI, category 2 / SIL1 (left) and up to

category 4 / SIL3 (right)

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 369

9.2.4 Diagnostics

LED for AS-i/FAULT

The module has one dual LED for AS-i/FAULT for diagnostic purposes; see LED status

displays for modules with a dual LED for AS-i/FAULT (Page 174)

LED display AUX POWER

The module also has an LED for AUX POWER; for a description, see LED status display

AUX POWER for modules with auxiliary voltage (Page 175).

Status display for the switching state

The switching state of the AS-i inputs and outputs is indicated by a yellow LED; see LED

status display for the switching state (yellow) (Page 175).

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

370 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.2.5 Technical specifications

Safe compact modules K20F

Order no. 3RK1205-0BQ30-0AA3

K20F 2F-DI

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to

Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 2 safe inputs

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.B.0

ID1 code (factory setting) F

PFD value The PFD value does not have any major effect on the PFD of the system as a whole

comprising the AS-Interface bus and safety monitor.

Total power consumption ≤ 45 mA

Inputs

Sensors Mechanical switching contact

Input current - high Ipeak ≥ 5 mA

Assignment of inputs Pin 1 and pin 2 = connection / switching contact

Pin 3 and pin 4 = connection / switching contact

Pin 5 = unassigned

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA

Degree of protection IP67

Ground connection —

Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85°C

No. of I/O sockets 2

Status displays

I/O display LED yellow

UAUX —

AS-Interface / diagnostics LED green/red

Connection Direct installation

Address assignment M12 AS-i connection

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 371

Safe compact modules K45F

Order no. 3RK1205-0BQ00-0AA3

K45F 2F-DI

3RK1205-0CQ00-0AA3

K45F 4F-DI

3RK1205-0BQ21-0AA3 LS type 2

3RK1205-0BQ24-0AA3 LS type 4

K45F-LS 2F-DI

Slave type Standard slave 2 x standard slaves

(module contains

2 slaves)

Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to

Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 2 safe inputs 4 safe inputs 2 safe inputs

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.B.F 0.B.F (valid for both slaves) 0.B.1

ID1 code (factory setting) F F (valid for both slaves) F

PFD value The PFD value does not have any major effect on the PFD of the system as a whole

comprising the AS-Interface bus and safety monitor.

Total power consumption ≤ 45 mA ≤ 70 mA ≤ 270 mA

Inputs

Sensors Mechanical switching contact Self-testing semiconductor outputs

(OSSD)

Input current - high Ipeak ≥ 5 mA Ipeak ≥ 5 mA

Assignment of inputs Socket 1:

Pin 1 and pin 2 = connection / switching contact F-IN1

Pin 3 and pin 4 = connection / switching contact F-IN2

Pin 5 = unassigned

Socket 2:

Pin 1 and pin 2 = connection / switching contact F-IN2

Pin 3 and pin 4 = unassigned

Pin 5 = unassigned

Input signal F-IN2 can be wired to either socket 1 only

or socket 2 only.

Socket 3 (with 3RK1205-0CQ00-0AA3 only):

Pin 1 and pin 2 = connection / switching contact F-IN3

Pin 3 and pin 4 = connection / switching contact F-IN4

Pin 5 = unassigned

Socket 4 (with 3RK1205-0CQ00-0AA3 only):

Pin 1 and pin 2 = connection / switching contact F-IN4

Pin 3 and pin 4 = unassigned

Pin 5 = unassigned

Input signal F-IN4 can be wired to either socket 3 only

or socket 4 only.

Type 2 receiver:

Pin 1/4/7: –

Pin 2/3: +

Pin 5: CH1

Pin 6: CH2

Pin 8: FE

Type 4 receiver:

Pin 1/4 diag.

Pin 2/3: +

Pin 5: CH1

Pin 6: CH2

Pin 7: –

Pin 8: FE

Type 2/4, alternative receiver (5-

pin):

Pin 1: +

Pin 2: CH2

Pin 3: –

Pin 4: CH1

Pin 5: FE

Type 2/4 transmitter:

Pin 1/4: +

Pin 3: –

Pin 5: FE

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA

Degree of protection IP67

Ground connection — Via PIN5 on M12 sockets and

outgoing feeder via 2.8 mm flat

connector.

Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 °C

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

372 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1205-0BQ00-0AA3

K45F 2F-DI

3RK1205-0CQ00-0AA3

K45F 4F-DI

3RK1205-0BQ21-0AA3 LS type 2

3RK1205-0BQ24-0AA3 LS type 4

K45F-LS 2F-DI

Storage temperature -40 ... +85°C

No. of I/O sockets 2 4 3

Status displays

I/O display LED yellow

UAUX —

AS-Interface / diagnostics LED green/red

Connection K45 mounting plate

Address assignment Addressing socket

1) Via socket 1/3: connection of Siemens light curtain FS 400 3RG7843 (type 2).

2) Via socket 1/3: connection of Siemens light curtain FS 400 3RG7846 (type 4), via socket 2/3: other manufacturers.

(Only input sockets can be assigned.)

Order no. 3RK1405-0BQ20-0AA3

K45F 2F-DI / 2DO

3RK1405-1BQ20-0AA3

K45F 2F-DI / 2DO UAUX

Slave type Standard slave Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to

Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 2 safe inputs / 2 standard outputs 2 safe inputs /

2 standard outputs with UAUX

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 7.B.0 7.B.0

ID1 code (factory setting) F F

PFD value The PFD value does not have any major effect on the PFD of the system as a whole

comprising the AS-Interface bus and safety monitor.

Total power consumption ≤ 250 mA ≤ 60 mA

Inputs

Sensors Mechanical switching contact

Input current - high Ipeak ≥ 5 mA

Assignment of inputs Pin 1 and pin 2 = connection / switching contact

Pin 3 and pin 4 = connection / switching contact

Pin 5 = unassigned

Outputs

Output type Electronic

Current-carrying capacity

per output

≤ 150 mA ≤ 0.7 A

Total current of all outputs ≤ 150 mA ≤ 1.4 A

Socket assignment: outputs Pin 3 = "-"

Pin 4 = output

Pin 5 = unassigned

Short-circuit protection Integrated

Inductive interference

protection

Integrated

External 24 V DC power

supply

— Via black AS-Interface flat cable

Watchdog Integrated

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 373

Order no. 3RK1405-0BQ20-0AA3

K45F 2F-DI / 2DO

3RK1405-1BQ20-0AA3

K45F 2F-DI / 2DO UAUX

Assignment of outputs

OUT 1 (D0)

OUT 2 (D1)

Socket 3 - pin 4

Socket 4 - Pin 4

AS-Interface certificate Available

Approvals UL, CSA

Degree of protection IP67

Ground connection —

Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85°C

No. of I/O sockets 4 4

Status displays

I/O display LED yellow

UAUX — LED green

AS-Interface / diagnostics LED green/red

Connection K45 mounting plate

Address assignment Addressing socket

Safe SlimLine modules S22.5F

Order no. 3RK1205-0BE00-0AA2

3RK1205-0BG00-0AA2

3RK1405-0BE00-0AA2

3RK1405-0BG00-0AA2

3RK1405-1BE00-0AA2

3RK1405-1BG00-0AA2

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master to

Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.0

No. of inputs/outputs 2 safe inputs 2 safe inputs / 2 standard

outputs

2 safe inputs / 2 standard

outputs with UAUX

Connection type Screw terminal (-.BE..-) or spring-loaded terminal (-.BG..-)

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 0.B.F 7.B.F 7.B.F

ID1 code (factory setting) F F F

PFD value The PFD value does not have any major effect on the PFD of the system as a whole

comprising the AS-Interface bus and safety monitor.

Total power consumption ≤ 45 mA ≤ 270 mA ≤ 60 mA

Inputs

Sensors Mechanical switching contact

Input current - low Contact open

Input current - high Contact closed Ipeak ≥ 5 mA

Assignment of inputs F-IN1.1 and F-IN1.2 = connection for switching contact

F-IN2.1 and F-IN2.2 = connection for switching contact

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.2 ASIsafe modules

AS-Interface system

374 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Order no. 3RK1205-0BE00-0AA2

3RK1205-0BG00-0AA2

3RK1405-0BE00-0AA2

3RK1405-0BG00-0AA2

3RK1405-1BE00-0AA2

3RK1405-1BG00-0AA2

Outputs

Output type — Electronic Electronic

Typ. current-carrying

capacity on each output

12/13 DC

— 0.15 A 0.7 A

Max. total current for each

module

— 0.15 A 1.4 A

Short-circuit protection — Integrated

Inductive interference

protection

— Integrated

External 24 V DC power

supply

— — ✓

Watchdog — Integrated

Assignment of outputs

OUT 1

OUT 2

—

AS-Interface certificate Available Available soon Available soon

Approvals UL, CSA

Mechanical data

Degree of protection IP20

Shock load

(IEC 60068-2-6)

15 g / 11 ms

Vibratory load

(IEC 60068-2-27)

5 ... 500 Hz

5 ... 26 Hz: 0.75 mm amplitude

26 ... 500 Hz: 2 g

Ground connection —

Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85°C

Status displays

I/O display LED yellow

UAUX — — LED green

AS-Interface / diagnostics LED green/red

Address assignment Addressing socket

9.2.6 Dimension drawings

Dimension drawings of the AS-i safety modules

The dimensions of the safe AS-i modules are the same as those for the standard modules of

series K20 (Page 211) , K45 (Page 201), and SlimLine 22.5 (Page 248). They are specified

in the relevant sections.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.3 3SF1 position switches with ASIsafe interface

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 375

9.3 3SF1 position switches with ASIsafe interface

9.3.1 Overview

Position switches are used to convert the mechanical positions of moving machine parts to

electrical signals.

The 3SF1 position switches comprise a standard position switch and an ASIsafe slave in the

switch housing whose safe inputs are wired to the position switch contacts.

Category 3 to EN 954-1 is achieved with the 3SF1 3 position switch with two-channel

interrogation in the appropriate operating mode. Category 4 can be achieved by combining

the 3SF1 position switch with an 3SE5 position switch.

Figure 9-9 ASIsafe position switches, modular system

Type variants

Position switches are available as:

● Standard position switch:

the basic switch and matching actuator head (roller lever, twist lever, plunger, etc.) are

ordered separately.

● Position switches with separate control element:

the basic switch is supplied complete with the actuator head (for inserting the control

element). The corresponding control element (for different assembly types) is ordered

separately.

● Position switches with separate control element and tumbler:

the basic switch is supplied complete with the actuator head (for inserting the control

element). The corresponding control element (for different assembly types) is ordered

separately. The tumbler interlocks the control element in the inserted position.

● Hinge switch:

the basic switch and matching actuator head (for different switching angles, with hollow or

solid shaft) are ordered separately.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.3 3SF1 position switches with ASIsafe interface

AS-Interface system

376 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Enclosure variants

Position switches are available with:

● Plastic enclosures

● Metal enclosures

Variants without tumbler

The standard position switches, position switches with separate control element (without

tumbler), and hinge switches are available in the following widths:

● 31 mm (to EN 50047)

● 40 mm (to EN 50047)

● 50 mm

● 56 mm

The position switches with a width of 31 mm and 40 mm are wired internally as follows:

F-IN1 to NC contact 1

F-IN2 to NC contact 2

AS-i connection via M12 connector (pin 1 = ASI+, pin 3 = ASI-)

The position switches with a width of 50 mm and 56 mm are wired internally as follows:

F-IN1 to NC contact 1

F-IN2 to M12 socket on side (pin 1 and pin 2)

AS-i connection via M12 connector (pin 1 = ASI+, pin 3 = ASI-)

A second standard position switch (without integrated ASIsafe slave) can be connected via

the M12 socket on the side to achieve safety category 4 (to EN 954-1).

The max. power requirements (from the AS-i cable) are 60 mA.

Variants with tumbler

The position switches with a separate control element and tumbler have a width of:

● 54 mm

The locking force is 1300 N with a plastic enclosure and 2600 N with a metal enclosure.

Two versions of the control element interlock are available:

● Spring-locked (failsafe principle) with a range of unlocking options

● Magnetic force (open-circuit principle)

The position switches with a separate control element and tumbler are wired internally as

follows:

● Variant -1BA1:

F-IN1 to NC contact of control element (contact closed when control element inserted)

F-IN2 to NC contact of magnet (contact closed when control element interlocked)

AS-i connection via M12 connector (pin 1 = ASI+, pin 3 = ASI-)

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.3 3SF1 position switches with ASIsafe interface

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 377

● Variant -1BA1:

F-IN1 to NC contact 1 of control element (contact closed when control element inserted)

F-IN2 to NC contact 2 of control element (contact closed when control element inserted)

AS-i connection via M12 connector (pin 1 = ASI+, pin 3 = ASI-)

The max. power requirements (from the AS-i cable) are 230 mA (of which 170 mA required

by magnet).

Setting the AS-i address

The AS-i address can be set by connecting the AS-i M12 connector to the addressing unit.

No additional AS-i addressing socket is available.

9.3.2 Order numbers

Due to the large number of variants and accessories, the orders numbers are not listed here.

For a detailed overview of the range of position switches (ASIsafe variants and standard

switches), please visit:

www.siemens.com/automation/infocenter

On the left of the screen, choose the product path:

Automation and Drives ➜ Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution ➜ SIRIUS Industrial

Controls ➜ Detecting Devices

In the middle of the screen under the "Brochures" tab, download the PDF file onto your PC in

the required language.

Figure 9-10 Brochure for position switches

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.3 3SF1 position switches with ASIsafe interface

AS-Interface system

378 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.3.3 Connection

Figure 9-11 ASIsafe position switches, basic switches, 56 mm wide

Position switches are connected to AS-i via an M12 connector.

In the case of position switches with a width of 50 mm and 56 mm, a second standard

position switch (without integrated ASIsafe slave) can be connected via the M12 socket on

the side to achieve safety category 4 (to EN 954-1).

9.3.4 Diagnostics

The standard position switches, position switches with separate control element (without

tumbler), and hinge switches are equipped with a status display comprising three LEDs:

AS-i/FAULT, F-IN1, and F-IN2.

The position switches with a separate control element and tumbler are equipped with a

status display comprising four LEDs: AS-i, FAULT (Page 173) , F-IN1, and F-IN2

(Page 175), see "Diagnostics".

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.3 3SF1 position switches with ASIsafe interface

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 379

9.3.5 Dimension drawings













0[





6)

6)

























0[











0[



 











Figure 9-12 Basic switch with actuator head, 31 / 50 mm wide, plastic enclosure









0[





















0[









0[























6)6)

Figure 9-13 Basic switch with actuator head, 40 / 56 mm wide, metal enclosure

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.3 3SF1 position switches with ASIsafe interface

AS-Interface system

380 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1



6)9

6)9















 



0[ 





0[

 





























0[

 

Figure 9-14 Basic switch with actuator head, 31 / 50 mm wide, plastic enclosure, with separate

control element

0[



 

















0[





































0[

6)9

6)9

Figure 9-15 Basic switch with actuator head, 40 / 56 mm wide, metal enclosure, with separate control

element

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 381

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

9.4.1 Overview

The non-contact and active optoelectronic light curtains and arrays for categories 2 and 4 to

EN 954-1 protect operating personal working on or near running machines and plants.

A standard light curtain or array comprises a transmitter and receiver, which must be

installed opposite each other. A transceiver combines the transmitter and receiver, whereby

a passive reflecting mirror (additionally required) reflects the light beams. A number of

transmit and receive diodes are placed one above the other depending on the resolution and

length. The infrared LEDs on the transmitter emit short light pulses, which are picked up by

the receive diodes.

Figure 9-16 Optoelectronic protective devices: Light curtain, light array, and transceiver

(a = transmitter, b = receiver, c = transceiver, d = reflecting mirror)

Light curtains have between 8 and 240 beams of light and are designed for protecting

hazardous areas. Depending on the resolution, they can detect fingers, hands, arms, feet,

thighs, etc.

Light arrays have 2, 3, or 4 beams and are designed for detecting people entering hazardous

areas. They are not suitable for protecting hazardous areas since this requires a device that

can detect fingers, hands, or arms etc.

In the case of transceiver light arrays, the transceiver emits a beam of light from the upper

part of the enclosure, which is then reflected by the reflecting mirror with an offset of 500 mm

(beam spacing) and received again in the lower part of the transceiver enclosure. In this

case, the reflecting mirror is a housing with two mirrors. The range of the transceiver is

specified as the distance between the transceiver and reflecting mirror (if one reflecting

mirror is used). If more than one reflecting mirror is used, the range decreases by 15% with

each additional reflecting mirror. To configure interlinked protective zones, light curtains can

be arranged one behind the other by cascading host and guest devices via plug-in cable

connections. This also allows transmitter/receiver pairs with different resolutions to be

combined.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

382 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Figure 9-17 Structure of a cascaded system

a = host transmitter, b = guest transmitter, c = host receiver, d = guest receiver

The light curtains and arrays are available for standard wiring and with an integrated ASIsafe

slave. The type variants for standard wiring are not covered here. The following description

only refers to the type variants with an integrated ASIsafe slave.

For the complete range of light curtains and arrays (ASIsafe and standard variants), see

catalog FS10 or visit the A&D Mall at: www.siemens.com/automation/mall

Choose "Products"

and then the following product path on the left:

Automation and Drives ➜ Sensor, Measuring and Testing Technology ➜ Fail-safe Sensors

Then choose the products you want and download the required information.

3SF7844 light curtains and arrays

All ASIsafe 3SF7844 light curtains and arrays are equipped with the following standard

functions (can be deactivated via the setting switch):

● Contactor monitoring (incl. connection for contactor checkback signals)

● Start inhibit (after voltage OFF/ON) and restart inhibit (after beam interruption) (incl.

connection for "Start" button)

● Option for connecting an additional safety device (e.g. EMERGENCY STOP button).

External sensors can be connected via an 8-pin M12 socket (local interface) on the receiver.

The ASIsafe 3SF7844 light curtains and arrays are each equipped with an integrated

function package (can be deactivated via the setting switch):

The 3SF7844 light curtains and arrays comply with the following standards:

● Safety category 4 to EN 954-1

● Safety Integrity Level SIL 3 to IEC 61508

● Type 4 to IEC 61496-1, -2

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 383

ASIsafe 3SF7844 light curtains

The ASIsafe 3SF7844 light curtains are available in the following versions:

● Standard transmitter and standard receiver

● Host transmitter and host receiver

● Guest transmitter and guest receiver (order no. 3RG7844...)

Available with the following resolutions, protective zone heights (incremental), and ranges:

● Resolution 14 mm, protective zone height 150 ... 1800 mm, range 0 ... 6 m

● Resolution 30 mm, protective zone height 150 ... 1800 mm, range 0 ... 18 m

● Resolution 50 mm, protective zone height 450 ... 3000 mm, range 0 ... 18 m (on request)

Each with an integrated function package (can be deactivated)

● Blanking

● Muting

● Muting with integrated LED indicator light

● Sequence control system

ASIsafe 3SF7844 light arrays

The ASIsafe 3SF7844 light arrays are available in two versions:

● Transmitter and receiver

● Transceiver

With the following no. of beams, beam spacing, and ranges (for transmitters/receivers)

● 2 beams, beam spacing 500 mm, range 0.8 ... 18 m or 6 ... 70 m

● 3 beams, beam spacing 400 mm, range 0.8 ... 18 m or 6 ... 70 m

● 4 beams, beam spacing 300 mm, range 0.8 ... 18 m or 6 ... 70 m

Or with the following no. of beams, beam spacing, and range (for transceivers)

● 2 beams, beam spacing 500 mm, range 0 ... 6.5 m incl. 1 double mirror

● 15% loss

Each with an integrated function package (can be deactivated)

● Muting

● Muting with integrated LED indicator light

The integrated function package can be deactivated by means of a setting switch, which

means that light arrays can also be used without the function package.

All ASIsafe 3SF7844 light curtains are equipped with the following standard functions (can

be deactivated via the setting switch):

● Contactor monitoring (incl. connection for contactor checkback signals)

● Start inhibit (after voltage OFF/ON) and restart inhibit (after beam interruption) (incl.

connection for "Start" button)

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

384 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

● Option for connecting an additional safety device (e.g. EMERGENCY STOP button).

In addition to the 8-pin M12 socket (local interface), the transceiver version is equipped with

five additional 4-pin M12 sockets for connecting muting sensors, for example.

3SF7842 light curtains and arrays

The 3SF7842 light curtains do not have an integrated function package or any other

standard functions.

The 3SF7842 light curtains and arrays comply with the following standards:

● Safety category 4 to EN 954-1

● Type 4 to IEC 61496-1, -2

ASIsafe 3SF7842 light curtains

The ASIsafe 3SF7842 light curtains are available in two versions:

● Standard transmitter and standard receiver

● Host transmitter and host receiver

● Guest transmitter and guest receiver (order no. 3RG7842...)

Available with the following resolutions, protective zone heights (incremental), and ranges:

● Resolution 14 mm, protective zone height 150 ... 1800 mm, range x m

● Resolution 30 mm, protective zone height 150 ... 1800 mm, range x m

● Resolution 50 mm, protective zone height 450 ... 3000 mm, range x m

● Resolution 90 mm, protective zone height 750 ... 3000 mm, range x m

ASIsafe 3SF7842 light arrays

The ASIsafe 3SF7842 light arrays are available in two versions:

● Transmitter and receiver

With the following no. of beams, beam spacing, and ranges:

● 2 beams, beam spacing 500 mm, range 0.8 ... 18 m or 6 ... 60 m

● 3 beams, beam spacing 400 mm, range 0.8 ... 18 m or 6 ... 60 m

● 4 beams, beam spacing 300 mm, range 0.8 ... 18 m or 6 ... 60 m

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 385

Setting the AS-i address

The AS-i address of the receiver (or transceiver) can be set by connecting the AS-i M12

connector (pin 1 = ASI+, pin 3 = ASI–) to the addressing unit.

No additional AS-i addressing socket is available.

For 3SF7844 light curtains and arrays, all the receiver electronics are supplied via the AS-i

connection, that is, a max. current of 140 mA is also required when the AS-i address is set.

You are advised to connect an AS-i power supply unit in parallel with the addressing unit so

that the addressing unit does not output an overload signal.

The transmitter does not require an AS-i address.

9.4.2 Order numbers

3SF7844 light curtains and arrays (with integrated evaluation function)

Light curtains with blanking function package

Protective zone height Receiver Transmitter

Standard device, 14 mm resolution

300 mm 3SF7844-6BB04-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB04-0SS0

450 mm 3SF7844-6BB06-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB06-0SS0

600 mm 3SF7844-6BB08-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB08-0SS0

750 mm 3SF7844-6BB11-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB11-0SS0

900 mm 3SF7844-6BB13-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB13-0SS0

1050 mm 3SF7844-6BB15-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB15-0SS0

1200 mm 3SF7844-6BB17-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB17-0SS0

1350 mm On request On request

1500 mm On request On request

1650 mm On request On request

1800 mm On request On request

Standard device, 30 mm resolution

300 mm 3SF7844-6BD04-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD04-0SS0

450 mm 3SF7844-6BD06-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD06-0SS0

600 mm 3SF7844-6BD08-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD08-0SS0

750 mm 3SF7844-6BD11-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD11-0SS0

900 mm 3SF7844-6BD13-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD13-0SS0

1050 mm 3SF7844-6BD15-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD15-0SS0

1200 mm 3SF7844-6BD17-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD17-0SS0

1350 mm 3SF7844-6BD20-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD20-0SS0

1500 mm 3SF7844-6BD22-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD22-0SS0

1650 mm 3SF7844-6BD24-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD24-0SS0

1800 mm 3SF7844-6BD26-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD26-0SS0

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

386 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Light curtains with muting function package

Protective zone height Receiver Transmitter

Standard device, 30 mm resolution

300 mm 3SF7844-6MD04-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD04-0SS0

450 mm 3SF7844-6MD06-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD06-0SS0

600 mm 3SF7844-6MD08-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD08-0SS0

750 mm 3SF7844-6MD11-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD11-0SS0

900 mm 3SF7844-6MD13-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD13-0SS0

1050 mm 3SF7844-6MD15-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD15-0SS0

1200 mm 3SF7844-6MD17-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD17-0SS0

1350 mm 3SF7844-6MD20-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD20-0SS0

1500 mm 3SF7844-6MD22-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD22-0SS0

1650 mm 3SF7844-6MD24-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD24-0SS0

1800 mm 3SF7844-6MD26-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD26-0SS0

Light curtains with muting function package, integrated LED indicator light

Protective zone height Receiver Transmitter

Standard device, 30 mm resolution

300 mm 3SF7844-6MD04-0KS1 3SF7844-6SD04-0SS0

450 mm 3SF7844-6MD06-0KS1 3SF7844-6SD06-0SS0

600 mm 3SF7844-6MD08-0KS1 3SF7844-6SD08-0SS0

750 mm 3SF7844-6MD11-0KS1 3SF7844-6SD11-0SS0

900 mm 3SF7844-6MD13-0KS1 3SF7844-6SD13-0SS0

1050 mm 3SF7844-6MD15-0KS1 3SF7844-6SD15-0SS0

1200 mm 3SF7844-6MD17-0KS1 3SF7844-6SD17-0SS0

Light curtains with sequence control system function package

Protective zone height Receiver Transmitter

Standard device, 14 mm resolution

300 mm 3SF7844-6TB04-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB04-0SS0

450 mm 3SF7844-6TB06-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB06-0SS0

600 mm 3SF7844-6TB08-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB08-0SS0

750 mm 3SF7844-6TB11-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB11-0SS0

900 mm 3SF7844-6TB13-0SS1 3SF7844-6SB13-0SS0

Standard device, 30 mm resolution

300 mm 3SF7844-6TD04-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD04-0SS0

450 mm 3SF7844-6TD06-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD06-0SS0

600 mm 3SF7844-6TD08-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD08-0SS0

750 mm 3SF7844-6TD11-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD11-0SS0

900 mm 3SF7844-6TD13-0SS1 3SF7844-6SD13-0SS0

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 387

Light arrays with muting function package

No. of beams Beam spacing Receiver Transmitter

Standard device, range 0.8 to 18 m

4 beams 300 mm 3SF7844-6MM50-0SS1 3SF7844-6SM50-0SS0

3 beams 400 mm 3SF7844-6MP50-0SS1 3SF7844-6SP50-0SS0

2 beams 500 mm 3SF7844-6MS50-0SS1 3SF7844-6SS50-0SS0

Standard device, range 6 to 70 m

4 beams 300 mm 3SF7844-6MM51-0SS1 3SF7844-6SM51-0SS0

3 beams 400 mm 3SF7844-6MP51-0SS1 3SF7844-6SP51-0SS0

2 beams 500 mm 3SF7844-6MS51-0SS1 3SF7844-6SS51-0SS0

Light arrays with muting function package

No. of beams Beam spacing Receiver Transmitter

Standard device, range 0.8 to 18 m

4 beams 300 mm 3SF7844-6MM50-0KS1 3SF7844-6SM50-0SS0

3 beams 400 mm 3SF7844-6MP50-0KS1 3SF7844-6SP50-0SS0

2 beams 500 mm 3SF7844-6MS50-0KS1 3SF7844-6SS50-0SS0

Transceiver with muting function package, integrated LED indicator light

No. of beams Beam spacing Type Order no.

Range 6.5 m

2 beams 500 mm Transceiver 3SF7844-6MS50-0ST0

2 beams 500 mm Transceiver with integrated LED

indicator light

3SF7844-6MS50-0MT0

— — Reflecting mirrors for transceiver 3RG7848-1TL

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

388 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

3SF7842 light curtains and arrays

Light curtains

Protective zone height Receiver Transmitter

Standard device, 14 mm resolution

150 mm 3SF7842-6BB01 3SF7842-6BB00

225 mm 3SF7842-6BC01 3SF7842-6BC00

300 mm 3SF7842-6BD01 3SF7842-6BD00

450 mm 3SF7842-6BE01 3SF7842-6BE00

600 mm 3SF7842-6BF01 3SF7842-6BF00

750 mm 3SF7842-6BG01 3SF7842-6BG00

900 mm 3SF7842-6BH01 3SF7842-6BH00

1050 mm 3SF7842-6BJ01 3SF7842-6BJ00

1200 mm 3SF7842-6BK01 3SF7842-6BK00

1350 mm 3SF7842-6BL01 3SF7842-6BL00

1500 mm 3SF7842-6BM01 3SF7842-6BM00

1650 mm 3SF7842-6BN01 3SF7842-6BN00

1800 mm 3SF7842-6BP01 3SF7842-6BP00

Standard device, 30 mm resolution

150 mm 3SF7842-6DB01 3SF7842-6DB00

225 mm 3SF7842-6DC01 3SF7842-6DC00

300 mm 3SF7842-6DD01 3SF7842-6DD00

450 mm 3SF7842-6DE01 3SF7842-6DE00

600 mm 3SF7842-6DF01 3SF7842-6DF00

750 mm 3SF7842-6DG01 3SF7842-6DG00

900 mm 3SF7842-6DH01 3SF7842-6DH00

1050 mm 3SF7842-6DJ01 3SF7842-6DJ00

1200 mm 3SF7842-6DK01 3SF7842-6DK00

1350 mm 3SF7842-6DL01 3SF7842-6DL00

1500 mm 3SF7842-6DM01 3SF7842-6DM00

1650 mm 3SF7842-6DN01 3SF7842-6DN00

1800 mm 3SF7842-6DP01 3SF7842-6DP00

Standard device, 50 mm resolution

450 mm 3SF7842-6EE01 3SF7842-6EE00

600 mm 3SF7842-6EF01 3SF7842-6EF00

750 mm 3SF7842-6EG01 3SF7842-6EG00

900 mm 3SF7842-6EH01 3SF7842-6EH00

1050 mm 3SF7842-6EJ01 3SF7842-6EJ00

1200 mm 3SF7842-6EK01 3SF7842-6EK00

1350 mm 3SF7842-6EL01 3SF7842-6EL00

1500 mm 3SF7842-6EM01 3SF7842-6EM00

1650 mm 3SF7842-6EN01 3SF7842-6EN00

1800 mm 3SF7842-6EP01 3SF7842-6EP00

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 389

Light curtains

Protective zone height Receiver Transmitter

2100 mm 3SF7842-6ER01 3SF7842-6ER00

2400 mm 3SF7842-6ES01 3SF7842-6ES00

2700 mm 3SF7842-6ET01 3SF7842-6ET00

3000 mm 3SF7842-6EU01 3SF7842-6EU00

Standard device, 90 mm resolution

750 mm 3SF7842-6JG01 3SF7842-6JG00

900 mm 3SF7842-6JH01 3SF7842-6JH00

1050 mm 3SF7842-6JJ01 3SF7842-6JJ00

1200 mm 3SF7842-6JK01 3SF7842-6JK00

1350 mm 3SF7842-6JL01 3SF7842-6JL00

1500 mm 3SF7842-6JM01 3SF7842-6JM00

1650 mm 3SF7842-6JN01 3SF7842-6JN00

1800 mm 3SF7842-6JP01 3SF7842-6JP00

2100 mm 3SF7842-6JR01 3SF7842-6JR00

2400 mm 3SF7842-6JS01 3SF7842-6JS00

2700 mm 3SF7842-6JT01 3SF7842-6JT00

3000 mm 3SF7842-6JU01 3SF7842-6JU00

Light arrays

No. of beams Beam spacing Receiver Transmitter

Standard device, range 0.8 to 18 m

4 beams 300 mm 3SF7842-6MH00 3SF7842-6MH01

3 beams 400 mm 3SF7842-6PG00 3SF7842-6PG01

2 beams 500 mm 3SF7842-6SE00 3SF7842-6SE01

Standard device, range 6 to 60 m

4 beams 300 mm 3SF7842-6MH50 3SF7842-6MH51

3 beams 400 mm 3SF7842-6PG50 3SF7842-6PG51

2 beams 500 mm 3SF7842-6SE50 3SF7842-6SE51

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

390 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.4.3 Connection

3SF7844 light curtains and arrays

Transmitter

M12 connector for supply Pin Assignment

1 ASI+

2 Unavailable / unassigned

3 ASI–







4 Unassigned

Receiver / transceiver

M12 connector for supply and

communication

Pin Assignment

1 ASI+

2 GND auxiliary voltage

3 ASI–

4 +24 V DC auxiliary voltage











5 Functional ground FE, can be connected if required

Empfänger/Transceiver (Lokal-Interface, 3SF7844)











Figure 9-18 M12 socket (8-pin)

Additional sensors (e.g. buttons) and actuators (e.g. indicator lights) can be connected to the

local interface in the connection cap of the device.

The assignment of the 8-pin local M12 device socket in the connection cap depends on the

integrated function package. You can use the SafetyLab PC software to individually assign

the inputs/outputs of the local interface to the different device functions.

A local connection box is available as an accessory. This divides the pins of the 8-pin M12

socket into six individual 5-pin M12 sockets, thereby making it easier to connect the sensors

and actuators.

For a description of this, refer to the manual for light curtains/arrays, which is available for

each specific function package.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 391

Receiver / transceiver (optional local connector panel, 3SF7844)

Figure 9-19 Connection example: local connector panel

Depending on the version, five additional 5-pin M12 sockets may be available in the section

of the front panel on the device that does contain any optical equipment. These can be used

to connect muting sensors, for example.

The assignment of the 5-pin M12 sockets in the connection cap depends on the integrated

function package. You can use the SafetyLab PC software to individually assign the

inputs/outputs of the local connector panel to the different device functions. For a description

of this, refer to the manual for light curtains/arrays, which is available for each specific

function package.

3SF7842 light curtains and arrays

Transmitters and receivers (M12 connector for supply, including communication)

Receiver / transceiver

M12 connector for supply and

communication

Pin Assignment

1 ASI+

2 Unassigned

3 ASI–









4 Unassigned

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

392 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.4.4 Diagnostics

3SF7844 light curtains and arrays

Transmitter

When the 7-segment display on the transmitter lights up, this means that the power supply

has been connected.

Operating status display Meaning

8 Hardware reset in start-stop torque

S Sel-test in progress (for approx. 1 s)

1 Normal operation, channel 1 set

2 Normal operation, channel 2 set

. Point next to number: test ON, the transmitter is not

emitting valid pulses (jumpers 3 – 4 not closed)

F / x Device fault

x = fault number, displayed alternating with "F"

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 393

Receiver / transceiver

Four LEDs and two 7-segment displays indicate the operating statuses of the receiver.

Operating status display Description

a LED1, red/green

b LED2, orange

c LED3, yellow

d LED4, blue

e 7-segment displays

f Parameterization interface for MagnetKey,

SafetyKey, or PC adapter cable

The messages on the 7-segment display refer specifically to the integrated function package

(blanking / muting / sequence control system) and are listed in the relevant device manual.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the receiver/transceiver

LED1 Meaning

Red Safety outputs in OFF status

Green Safety outputs in ON status

OFF Device without power supply

LED2 Meaning

Orange LED operating mode with internal start/restart inhibit in OFF status (LED1 red):

protective zone unoccupied

Orange Operating mode without/with internal start/restart inhibit in ON status (LED1 green):

weak beam indicated with unoccupied, effective protective zone

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

394 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LED3 Meaning

Yellow Internal restart inhibit interlocked

Yellow, flashing 2 x Two entries into protective zone expected (sequence control system function

package only)

Yellow, flashing 1 x One entry into protective zone expected (sequence control system function

package only)

OFF Restart inhibit unlocked or not active

LED4 Meaning

Blue Special function in accordance with the integrated function package (blanking /

muting / sequence control system) activated (see device manual)

OFF No special function

3SF7842 light curtains and arrays

Transmitter

When the 7-segment display on the transmitter lights up, this means that the power supply

has been connected.

Operating status display Meaning

8. Hardware reset in start-stop torque

S Sel-test in progress (for approx. 1 s)

1 Normal operation, channel 1 set

2 Normal operation, channel 2 set

. Point next to number: transmitter in test mode

F / x Device fault

x = fault number, fault number, displayed

alternating with "F"

The fault numbers are listed in the device

manual.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 395

Receiver / transceiver

Four LEDs and two 7-segment displays indicate the operating statuses of the receiver.

Operating status display Meaning

8. Hardware reset in start-stop torque

S Sel-test in progress (for approx. 1 s)

1 Normal operation, channel 1 set

2 Normal operation, channel 2 set

. Point next to number: double scan

F / x Device fault

x = fault number, fault number, displayed

alternating with "F"

The fault numbers are listed in the device

manual.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the receiver/transceiver

LED1 (c) Meaning

Red Safety outputs (OSSDs) in OFF status

OFF —

LED2 (d) Meaning

Green Safety outputs (OSSDs) in ON status

OFF —

LED3 (e) Meaning

Orange Weak beam

OFF —

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

396 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LED4 (f) Meaning

Operating mode with internal RES function:

Yellow Internal restart inhibit interlocked and protective zone unoccupied

OFF Both OSSDs in OFF status (LED1=red), internal restart inhibit interlocked and

protective zone occupied

AS-i status LED in the connection cap of receiver:

LED arrangement LED 3SF7844 3SF7842

a PWR (green) AS-i/FAULT (green/red)

b FAULT (red) Not available

3SF7844 3SF7842

AS-i FAULT AS-i/FAULT

Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Off Green AS-i communication OK —

Flashing

green

Red Red The slave has the address 0

(on delivery)

Assign valid address

Green Red Red/yellow

flashing

No AS-i communication:

• The master is switched off

or offline.

• The slave is not

configured in the master.

• The incorrect slave type is

connected.

• The slave has the wrong

address.

Ensure AS-i communication:

• Switch on the master or

switch it to online mode.

• Reconfigure the master.

• Connect the correct

module.

• Check/correct the slave

address.

Green Flashing

red

Flashing red Device fault Send device for repair.

OFF — Off No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with

incorrect polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage,

connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage

(approx. 30 V DC)

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 397

Diagnosis via AS-Interface

The cyclic input/output data is used to transfer exactly one item of safe, binary data from the

ASIsafe slave to the master (or safety monitor):

Cyclic input data (4 bit)

Status of light curtain/array Input data bits

D0 ... D3

Significance of the

safe data

Protective zone unoccupied

and start/restart inhibit is unlocked (if parameterized)

Valid code table 1

Protective zone is occupied

or start/restart inhibit is interlocked (if parameterized)

Value 0 (on all four bits) 0

Cyclic output data (4 bit)

The cyclic output data bits (from the point of view of the PLC) are not evaluated by the light

curtain/array.

Acyclic data

The acyclic parameter data can be used to exchange additional non-safety-oriented data

between the AS-i master and slave. The AS-i master can use a "parameter call" (write

parameter) to send four parameter bits to the slave whereby the slave responds by sending

four parameter echo bits back to the master. The parameter call must be triggered by the

user program. With a SIMATIC S7-300/400, this can be carried out using command 02 of the

AS-i master command interface (FC ASI_3422 (Page 71)). The parameter echo bits can only

be received if the parameter bits were sent.

The following table applies to 3SF7844 light curtains/arrays:

Parameter bit

(PLC / master ➜ light curtain/array)

Signal assignment / meaning

P0 Must be set to 1.

P1 Must be set to 1.

P2 Control data M1, can be assigned to any input function of the receiver using

the SafetyLab PC software.

Factory setting:

no assignment

P3 Control data M2, can be assigned to any input function of the receiver using

the SafetyLab PC software.

Factory setting:

no assignment

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

398 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Parameter echo bit

(light curtain/array ➜ PLC/master)

Signal assignment / meaning

P0 Diagnostic data M3, can be assigned to any output function of the receiver

using the SafetyLab PC software.

Factory setting:

0 = active protective zone unoccupied/ready to unlock

1 = protective zone occupied

Note: The status of the protective zone is indicated here, regardless of any

parameterized start/restart inhibit, that is, the message bit is not the same as

the safety-oriented data received via the cyclic input data.

P1 Diagnostic data M4, can be assigned to any output function of the receiver

using the SafetyLab PC software.

Factory setting:

0 = no fault/signal

1 = fault/contamination group signal.

P2 Not used

P3 Not used

The following table applies to 3SF7842 light curtains/arrays:

Parameter bit

(light curtain/array ➜ PLC/master)

Signal assignment / meaning

P0 Setting for the min. restart time:

0 = 100 ms

1 = 500 ms (default value)

P1 Must be set to 1.

P2 Not used (recommended default value = 1)

P3 Not used (recommended default value = 1)

Parameter echo bit

(light curtain/array ➜ PLC/master)

Signal assignment / meaning

P0 Not used

P1 Fault signal

P2 Not used

P3 Not used

Diagnosis cannot be carried out via the AS-i parameter channel.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 399

9.4.5 Technical specifications

3SF7844 light curtains and arrays

AS-i data

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

Spec 2.0

AS-i slave profile IO.ID 0.B

ID2, ID1 code Not available (replacement values: F, F)

Operating voltage in acc. with AS-Interface

Specification

26.5 ... 31.6 V

Auxiliary voltage UAUX 24 V DC (+/-20%)

Total power consumption from AS-i Typ. 50 mA

Current consumption from auxiliary voltage UAUX Typ. 400 mA

Overcurrent protection: auxiliary voltage 1.25 A fuse, medium time-lag

Cycle time in acc. with AS-i Specification 5 ms

Additional response time of AS-i system 40 ms

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

400 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.4.6 Dimension drawings

3SF7844 light curtains and arrays



 



Figure 9-20 Dimensions: 3SF7844 light curtain

A Protective zone height (see order numbers (Page 385))

B Total length = protective zone height A + 134 mm

(1) Sealing cap Pg 9 (receiver only, for local interface)

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 401





 





Figure 9-21 Dimensions: 3SF7844 light array

Additional dimensions applicable to light arrays only:

Type B C Beams

3SF7844-..M 1184 mm 300 mm 4

3SF7844-..P 1034 mm 400 mm 3

3SF7844-..S 734 mm 500 mm 2

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

402 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

3SF7842 light curtains and arrays











Figure 9-22 Dimensions: 3SF7842 light curtain

A Protective zone height (see order numbers (Page 385))

B Total length = protective zone height A + 84 mm

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and arrays

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 403



 



Figure 9-23 Dimensions: 3SF7842 light array

Type B C Beams

3SF78 42-6M... 499 mm 300 mm 4

3SF78 42-6P… 599 mm 400 mm 3

3SF78 42-6S… 699 mm 500 mm 2

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

404 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

9.5.1 Overview

The laser scanner is a highly versatile optical distance sensor for protecting hazardous

areas.

It uses a laser diode with transmission optics to continuously generate bundled light pulses,

which are scattered over the entire working range by an integrated rotating mirror. If any

objects or people enter the zone, the scanner evaluates the reflected light pulses and uses

the light propagation time to continuously calculate the exact position coordinates. If the

defined protective zone is violated, it initiates an immediate machine shutdown within the

system response time (via a suitable ASIsafe configuration). Depending on the operating

mode, the stop function is reset either automatically or after acknowledgement (via an

optional button that can be fitted on the laser scanner) when the protective zone is free.

The working range of the laser scanner covers 190°. The laser scanner detects people at a

distance of up to 4 meters (protective zone, safety oriented). People and objects can also be

detected at a distance of up to 15 meters for the purpose of outputting warnings (warning

zone, non-safety-oriented).

Four variable (can be set via the PC software) protective zone pairs for the protective and

warning zone mean that the laser scanner can be easily adjusted in line with requirements.

One protective zone pair can be active at any one time. The active protective zone pair can

be selected by means of switching contacts, which are connected to an M12 socket on the

laser scanner.

The laser scanner can be installed in stationary applications (e.g. on machines and in plants)

as well as mobile applications (e.g. vehicles, driverless transportation systems or traversing

trucks). In this way, different working ranges around a robot, for example, can be monitored

whereby the laser scanners operate consecutively with respect to space and time. This can

significantly increase plant availability.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 405

Protecting hazardous areas



DFWLYH



DFWLYH



Figure 9-24 Example of horizontal hazardous area protection with more than one protective zone pair

(SF = protective zone, WF = warning zone)

In driverless transportation systems, the four programmed protective zones (SF) (e.g. fast

(SF2), slow (SF1), left curve (SF3), and right curve (SF4)) can be protected. Unlike bumpers

or hoop guards, the laser scanner offers a larger protective zone and, therefore, allows

vehicles to be driven at higher speeds.

6)

6) 6)

6)

Figure 9-25 Example of route monitoring for driverless transportation systems (SF = protective zone;

optional warning zones not shown).

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

406 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Additional information

Laser scanners are available for standard wiring and with an integrated ASIsafe slave (or

also with integrated PROFIBUS interface).

The type variants for standard wiring and other bus systems are not covered here. The

following description only refers to the device with an integrated ASIsafe slave.

For the complete range of laser scanners, see catalog FS10 or visit the A&D Mall at:

www.siemens.com/automation/mall

Choose "Products".

On the left of the screen, choose the product path:

Automation and Drives ➜ Sensor, Measuring and Testing Technology ➜ Fail-safe Sensors

Then choose the products you want and download the required information.

The ASIsafe laser scanner requires a connection to the AS-i cable for bus communication

and a separate 24 V DC supply. It is connected via a 5-pin M12 connector (X1) on the top of

the housing. The laser scanner is assigned an AS-i address.

The scanner is equipped with a restart inhibit function (when a person/object is detected),

which can be activated/deactivated via the software. The optional "Start" button can be

connected via an additional 5-pin M12 connector (X4). A restart signal can also be sent via

AS-Interface (acyclic parameter data).

You can switch between protective zones via a 5-pin M12 socket (X3). The protective zone

pairs are activated by applying 24 V (pin 5) to the corresponding inputs (pin 1 ...4). The

second protective zone pair must always be activated before the first protective zone pair is

deactivated. The switchover must occur within 1 s. The switchover procedure must never be

configured to deactivate all the protective zone pairs. Except during the switchover

procedure, only one protective zone pair must be active at any one time.

The laser scanner complies with the following standards:

● Safety category 3 to EN 954-1

● Type 3 to IEC 61496-1 or EN 61496-3

LS4soft software

The LS4soft PC software can be used to parameterize and define the protective zones. The

software is required for commissioning and is supplied with the laser scanner. It also offers a

comprehensive range of diagnostic options.

To transfer the configuration and diagnostics data, a special PC cable with an infrared

adapter is required. This must be ordered separately (order no. 3RG7838-1DC). The 9-pin

SUB D connector is connected to the serial interface (e.g. COM1) of the PC. The infrared

adapter is placed in an appropriate position on the top of the ASIsafe laser scanner where it

is secured by a built-in permanent magnet. For more information, refer to the software

manual.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 407

Figure 9-26 Defining the protective zone area using the LS4soft software

Setting the AS-i address

The addressing socket (X2) for setting the AS-i address is located on the top of the laser

scanner. The address is assigned as usual using the AS-i addressing unit.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

408 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.5.2 Order numbers

Laser scanner

Type Order no.

SIMATIC FS620I laser scanners, protective zone 4 m radius

4 protective and warning zones incl. LS4soft software, AS-Interface connection

3SF7834-6DD00

SIMATIC FS660I laser scanners, vertical protection for hazardous areas and

entrances, protective zone 4 m radius,

4 protective and warning zones, incl. software with ASIsafe connection

3SF7834-6DE00

Accessories

Type Order no.

Assembly system, swivel-mounted, for easy adjustment 3RG7838-1AA

Adapter plate for LS4 laser scanner 3RG7838-1AB

Cleaning set comprising: cleaning fluid (1000 ml) cloths (100 pcs) 3RG78 38-7RS

PC connection cable for configuring the ASIsafe laser scanner, with 9-pin SUB D

connector for serial PC interface and infrared adapter for optical interface on laser

scanner

3RG78 38-1DC

M12 jumper plug for fixed assignment of protective zone pair SF1 (connection:

pin 1 - pin 5)

3RG78 38-1DF

9.5.3 Connection

;

; ; ; ;

Figure 9-27 Position of the connections on the laser scanner

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 409

X1: M12 connector for supply and communication

Pin Assignment

1 ASI+

2 GND auxiliary voltage

3 ASI–

4 Auxiliary supply + 24 V DC

5 Functional ground FE (mid contact of M12 connector), connect to plant ground

X2: AS-i addressing socket

For setting the AS-i address with an AS-i addressing unit

X3: M12 socket for switching protective zones

Pin Assignment

1 Input for selecting protective zone pair SF1

2 Input for selecting protective zone pair SF2

3 Input for selecting protective zone pair SF3

4 Input for selecting protective zone pair SF4

5 + 24 V DC for connection with an input

X4: M12 connector for restart button

Pin Assignment

1 Unassigned

2 Input for restart

3 Unassigned

4 + 24 V DC for connection with an input

5 Unassigned

X5: Window for infrared adapter

For configuring and diagnosing (locally) AS-Interface using PC software.

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

410 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

9.5.4 Diagnostics

 

Figure 9-28 LEDs on the laser scanner

LED Color Meaning

1 Green Sensor is active, active protective zone is free

2 Yellow Warning zone is occupied

3 Red OSSD outputs are deactivated

4 Green OSSD outputs are activated

5 Continuous yellow light

slow flashing (approx. 0.25 Hz)

rapid flashing (approx. 4 Hz)

Restart inhibit

Alarm

Fault signal

Diagnosis via AS-Interface

The cyclic input/output data is used to transfer exactly one item of safe, binary data from the

ASIsafe slave to the master (or safety monitor):

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 411

Cyclic input data (4 bit)

Status of laser scanner Input data bits

D0 ... D3

Significance of the

safe data

Protective zone unoccupied

and start/restart inhibit is unlocked (if parameterized)

Valid code table 1

Protective zone is occupied

or start/restart inhibit is interlocked (if parameterized)

Value 0 (on all four bits) 0

Cyclic output data (4 bit)

The cyclic output data bits (from the point of view of the PLC) are not evaluated by the laser

scanner.

Acyclic data

The acyclic parameter data can be used to exchange additional non-safety-oriented data

between the AS-i master and slave. The AS-i master can use a "parameter call" (write

parameter) to send four parameter bits to the slave whereby the slave responds by sending

four parameter echo bits back to the master. The parameter call must be triggered by the

user program. In SIMATIC S7-300/400, this can be carried out using command 02 of the

AS-i master command interface (FC ASI_3422 (Page 71)). The parameter echo bits can only

be received if the parameter bits were sent.

The following table applies to the ASIsafe laser scanner:

Parameter bit

(PLC / master ➜ laser scanner)

Signal assignment / meaning

P0 Must be set to 1.

P1 Must be set to 1.

P2 Must be set to 1.

P3 Must be set to 1.

Parameter echo bit

(laser scanner ➜ PLC / master)

Signal assignment / meaning

0 = diagnostic message "Alarm" P0

1 = no alarm

P1 See "Protective zone display" table

P2 See "Protective zone display" table

P3 Not used

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

412 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

The diagnostic message "Alarm" can be configured using the LS4soft software.

The following alarm signaling types are available:

● No alarm

● Device alarm (e.g. face plate dirty)

● Warning zone violated

● Device alarm, or warning zone violated

Protective zone display

Status of parameter echo bit

P2 P1

Meaning

0 0 Protective zone pair SF1 active

0 1 Protective zone pair SF2 active

1 0 Protective zone pair SF3 active

1 1 Protective zone pair SF4 active

9.5.5 Technical specifications

AS-i data

Slave type Standard slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

Spec 2.0

AS-i slave profile IO.ID 0.B

ID2, ID1 code Not available (replacement values: F, F)

Operating voltage in acc. with AS-Interface

Specification

26.5 ... 31.6 V

Auxiliary voltage UAUX 24 V DC (+/-20%)

Total power consumption from AS-i Typ. 50 mA

Current consumption from auxiliary voltage UAUX Typ. 400 mA

Overcurrent protection: auxiliary voltage 1.25 A fuse, medium time-lag

Cycle time in acc. with AS-i Specification 5 ms

Additional response time of AS-i system 40 ms

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 413

9.5.6 Dimension drawings

FD

FD



FD















5





Figure 9-29 Dimensions of the 3FS7834 laser scanners

Integrated safety systems: ASIsafe

9.5 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanners

AS-Interface system

414 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 415

System accessories 10

10.1 Extension plug

10.1.1 Overview

An extension plug or extension plug plus can be used to increase the maximum possible

cable length in an AS-Interface segment from 100 m to 200 m.

The extension plug / extension plug plus is a passive component and is installed at the point

in the network that is furthest away from the AS-Interface power supply unit. This point does

not need to be determined exactly; it is sufficient just to connect the extension plug /

extension plug plus somewhere near the end of the cable (≤ 10 m).

It is equipped with an M12 connector and can be connected with an AS-Interface M12

branch with degree of protection IP67.

The extension plug / extension plug plus is equipped with integrated undervoltage detector

for monitoring the AS-Interface voltage to ensure that the required voltage is present even at

the end of the bus cable. Undervoltage is indicated on the extension plug by means of a

diagnostics LED. The extension plug plus is equipped with an AS-i A/B slave and

communicates this diagnostics data directly to the AS-Interface master.

Setting the AS-i address

The AS-i address of the extension plug plus can be set by connecting the AS-i M12

connector to the addressing unit. No additional AS-i addressing socket is available.

The extension plug (not "plus") is not assigned an AS-i address.

System accessories

10.1 Extension plug

AS-Interface system

416 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.1.2 Order numbers

Extension plug

Type Order no.

AS-Interface extension plug 3RK1901-1MX00

AS-Interface extension plug plus (with integrated A/B slave) 3RK1901-1MX01

Accessories

Type Order no.

AS-Interface transition from AS-i cable to M12 socket 3RX9801-0AA00

Further transitions: see accessories for the K20 compact module

10.1.3 Connection

The extension plug / extension plug plus is connected to an AS-Interface M12 branch with

degree of protection IP67 (PIN1: UASI +, PIN3: UASI –).

Figure 10-1 Extension plug with M12 branch

Segment with max. 200 m:

0DVWHU

6ODYH

P

$6L

([WHQVLRQSOXJ

6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYH6ODYH6ODYH6ODYH6ODYH

3RZHUVXSSO\XQLW

Figure 10-2 Extension plug in a segment

System accessories

10.1 Extension plug

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 417

10.1.4 Diagnostics

Extension plug

If the minimum voltage as defined by the AS-Interface Specification is undershot, this is

indicated on the extension plug when the green LED starts flashing. If the AS-Interface

voltage is sufficient, however, it is lit up continuously. To detect undervoltage, the LED is

configured with a delay so that even momentary voltage dips can be detected.

LED display

LED Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

AS-i voltage OK

—

Flashing green Undervoltage,

AS-i voltage < 26.5 V

• Move the AS-i power supply unit.

• Increase the cross-section of the

AS-i cable.

• Reduce the load caused by

slaves/sensors.

• Check whether or not the network

quality is still sufficient despite

undervoltage.

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect

polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage, connect it

properly,

measure the AS-i voltage

(approx. 30 V DC)

The condition for undervoltage must be present for at least 5 ms in order to be signaled via

the LED. The undervoltage message is displayed for at least 100 ms, even if the voltage only

drops momentarily.

Extension plug plus

The extension plug plus is equipped with an AS-i A/B slave and does not have a diagnostics

LED.

If the minimum voltage is undershot, this event is sent as digital input data directly to the

AS-Interface master. Two different voltage values can be set as the threshold value; these

can be selected by setting the output bits. Two different input bits can be used to distinguish

between brief and longer voltage dips.

System accessories

10.1 Extension plug

AS-Interface system

418 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Assignment of the inputs DI 2 - DI 3

Input Status Meaning

0 Undervoltage detected with duration > 50 ms DI 2

1 No undervoltage

0 Undervoltage detected with duration > 5 ms DI 3

1 No undervoltage

Assignment of outputs DO 0 - DO 1

Input Status Meaning

DI 0 — Not used

0 Threshold value for undervoltage 26.5 V DI 1

1 Threshold value for undervoltage 23 V

10.1.5 Technical specifications

Order no. 3RK1901-1MX00

Extension plug

3RK1901-1MX01

Extension plug plus

Slave type No integrated slave A/B slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0 AS-i Spec. 2.1

AS-i slave profile IO.ID.ID2 — B.A.E

ID1 code (factory setting) — 7

Operating voltage in acc. with

AS-Interface Specification

26.5 ... 31.6 V

Reverse polarity protection Available

Total power consumption ≤ 10 mA ≤ 15 mA

Degree of protection IP67

Ambient temperature -25 ... +85°C

Connection to AS-Interface Via M12 plug connector

PIN 1: UASI +

PIN 3: UASI –

System accessories

10.1 Extension plug

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 419

10.1.6 Dimension drawings





0[







/('

0[



;0.5;0.5

Figure 10-3 Dimensions of the extension plug / extension plug plus

System accessories

10.2 Repeaters

AS-Interface system

420 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.2 Repeaters

10.2.1 Overview

In its basic configuration, an AS-i network comprises one segment with a maximum cable

length of 100 m. An extension plug can be used to increase the length of the cable to 200 m.

If this is insufficient, however, you can use one or more repeaters.

A repeater extends an existing segment with an additional segment, which can have a

maximum cable length of 100 m (without an extension plug) or 200 m (with an extension

plug).

Each segment requires a separate AS-i power supply unit.

The additional power supply can increase the current supply for slaves/sensors and lower

the voltage drop on the AS-i cable.

Properties of the repeater:

● Slaves can be installed in both segments (upstream and downstream of the repeater).

● The two AS-i cable segments are electrically isolated, that is, fault signals/EMC and

ground faults are blocked on the repeater.

● The repeater reconstructs the bit information in the AS-i telegram.

● A maximum of two repeaters connected in series can be used if an AS-i extension plug is

not used.

● When an AS-i extension plug is used (in segment 1 or/and segment 2), repeaters must

not be connected in series.

● Several repeaters can be connected in parallel (star configuration).

● When several repeaters are used in a combination of parallel and series connections

(tree configuration), the cable length can be extended to several kilometers. For the sake

of clarity, however, catalogs and brochures usually state maximum total lengths of no

more than a few hundred meters. Even when repeaters are used, the maximum number

of slaves that can be connected is 31 (without A/B slaves) or 62 (with A/B slaves).

● Repeaters can also be used in conjunction with ASIsafe slaves and safety monitors or

F-Link.

● The AS-i addresses (and any safety monitors) can be distributed across the segments as

required. The only restriction here is that no more than 35 load equivalents are installed

in each segment to prevent the communications voltage from being attenuated

excessively. The following equivalences apply:

– Standard slave (incl. ASIsafe slave) ≡ 1 load equivalent

– A/B slave ≡ 0.5 load equivalent

– Safety monitor ≡ 1 load equivalent

– Repeater (per segment connection) ≡ 1 load equivalent

System accessories

10.2 Repeaters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 421

– Other components without an AS-i address (e.g. ground fault detector) ≡ 1 load

equivalent,

Example:

Segment with 20 standard slaves (incl. ASIsafe slaves), 10 A/B slaves, 3 safety

monitors, 1 repeater, 1 ground fault detector.

Result:

20 + 10 x 0.5 + 3+ 1 + 1 = 30; this is a permissible configuration because the load

equivalent is ≤ 35.

● The repeater is designed symmetrically, that is, it does not matter whether or not the AS-i

master is installed in segment 1 (upstream of the repeater) or in segment 2 (downstream

of the repeater).

● The repeater can be installed anywhere on an AS-i cable. The AS-i flat cable of each

segment is fed through the repeater without interruption. If necessary, the cable can end

in the repeater.

Setting the AS-i address

A repeater is not assigned an AS-i address.

10.2.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

Repeater for AS-Interface for cable extension, incl. mounting plate 6GK1210-0SA01

System accessories

10.2 Repeaters

AS-Interface system

422 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.2.3 Connection

$6L

$6L







1P

Figure 10-4 Connecting the repeater

To commission the repeater, carry out the following steps:

Step Procedure

1 Insert the AS-i cables into the cable routings on the mounting plate:

top = AS-i cable segment 1 (AS-i 1), bottom = AS-i cable segment 2 (AS-i 2).

2 If a cable ends in the repeater, use the gasket set 3RK1902-0AR00.

3 Screw the repeater onto the mounting plate.

The LEDs light up when the AS-i voltage has been applied.

System accessories

10.2 Repeaters

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 423

Structure

● Slaves can be used on both sides of the repeater

● An AS-Interface power supply is required on both sides

● Electrical isolation of the two AS-Interface shaped cable lines.

Separate display of the correct AS-Interface voltage for each side.

● Max. two repeaters can be connected in series (max. cable length 300 m)

● Several repeaters can be connected in parallel (star configuration)

0DVWHU 3RZHU6XSSO\

HYDO6HYDO6HYDO6HYDO6HYDO6HYDO6HYDO6HYDO6

3RZHU6XSSO\

5HSHDWHU

P P

Figure 10-5 Repeater: integration in the AS-i network

Maximum configuration: 600 m with repeaters

Repeaters can be used to increase the length of the cable. Since repeaters cannot be

connected in series when they are used in conjunction with AS-i extension plugs, this results

in a maximum distance of 400 m between the master and slave and a maximum cable

extension of 600 m (master in the middle of the network). Repeaters can be connected in

parallel in a star configuration each with up to 200 m long segments.

0DVWHU

6ODYH

P

$6L

([WHQVLRQ3OXJ

$6L

([WHQVLRQ3OXJ

5HSHDWHU

3RZHU6XSSO\3RZHU6XSSO\ $6L

([WHQVLRQ3OXJ

P P

P

3RZHU6XSS\

5HSHDWHU6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYH

Figure 10-6 Repeaters in combination with extension plugs for a maximum configuration of 600 m

System accessories

10.2 Repeaters

AS-Interface system

424 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.2.4 Diagnostics

The LED lights up if the AS-Interface voltage is correct.

LED per segment

LED Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green Normal operation,

AS-i voltage OK

—

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage, connect it

properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx. 30 V DC)

10.2.5 Technical specifications

Order no. 6GK1210-0SA01

Slave type No integrated slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

AS-i slave profile IO.ID —

ID2 code —

Operating voltage in acc. with AS-Interface Specification 26.5 ... 31.6 V

Total power consumption from AS-Interface ≤ 40 mA per segment

10.2.6 Dimension drawings

Repeater

The dimensions of the repeater are the same as those for the housing of the K45 compact

modules (Page 201).

System accessories

10.3 Extenders

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 425

10.3 Extenders

10.3.1 Overview

The extender has almost the same function as the repeater, but with the following

differences:

● The AS-i master only is connected in segment 1. The AS-i power supply unit and slaves

must not be installed in segment 1. (Data decoupling required for the AS-i system is

integrated in the extender for segment 1.)

● The AS-i power supply unit, the slaves, and any safety monitors are connected to

segment 2.

● No electrical isolation of the two AS-i cable segments.

Segment 1 is automatically supplied from segment 2, whereby the current for segment 1

is restricted to 100 mA. For this reason, the extender can only be used in conjunction with

AS-i masters that are supplied via a separate voltage source. Extenders cannot be used

in conjunction with DP/AS-i Link20E because Link20E requires approx. 200 mA from the

AS-i cable. The same applies to other AS-i masters (e.g. DP/AS-i Link Advanced with

internal supply via AS-i).

● Several extenders cannot be connected in series or in parallel.

● A maximum of one extender and one repeater connected in series can be used if an AS-i

extension plug is not used.

● When an AS-i extension plug is used (in segment 1 or/and segment 2), extenders and

repeaters must not be connected in series. If an AS-i extension plug is installed in

segment 1, it must be located near the AS-i master.

The extender is used, for example, where the AS-i master (in the cabinet) is installed far

away from the installation location of the slaves (machine configuration).

Setting the AS-i address

The extender is not assigned an AS-i address.

10.3.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

Extender for AS-Interface for remote master installation (up to 100 m) incl. FK-E

base

6GK1210-1SA00

System accessories

10.3 Extenders

AS-Interface system

426 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.3.3 Connection

The FK-E coupling module is suppled with the extender.

/('GLVSOD\

&RXSOLQJPRGXOH

1P

[

/LQH

/LQH

).(





Figure 10-7 Connecting the extender

To commission the extender, carry out the following steps:

Step Procedure

1 Insert the AS-i cables into the cable routings on the coupling module:

top = AS-i cable segment 1 (line 1), bottom = AS-i cable segment 2 (line 2).

If a cable ends in the extender, use the gasket set 3RK1902-0AR00.

2 Screw the extender onto the coupling module.

The LEDs light up when the AS-i voltage has been applied.

System accessories

10.3 Extenders

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 427

Using the extender

The AS-Interface extender is used in applications in which the master is located some

distance away from the actual AS-Interface installation.

The extender has the following characteristics:

● Masters can be located at a distance of up to 100 m from the AS-Interface segment.

● Slaves can only be used on the side of the extender that is not facing the master.

● A power supply is only required on the side that is not facing the master.

● No electrical isolation of the two lines.

● The correct voltage is displayed.

3RZHUVXSSO\XQLW0DVWHU

([WHQGHUV 6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYH

P P

Figure 10-8 Integrating the extender in the AS-i network

10.3.4 Diagnostics

The LEDs have the same function as those for the repeaters (Page 424).

10.3.5 Technical specifications

Order no. 6GK1210-1SA00

Slave type No integrated slave

Suitable for AS-i master

to Spec. ... (or higher)

AS-i Spec. 2.0

AS-i slave profile IO.ID —

ID2 code —

Operating voltage in acc. with AS-Interface

Specification

26.5 ... 31.6 V

Total power consumption from AS-Interface ≤ 100 mA

Note

An extender cannot be operated on DP/AS-Interface Link 20E if it does not have its own

power supply.

System accessories

10.3 Extenders

AS-Interface system

428 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.3.6 Dimension drawings

The dimensions of the extender are the same as those for the housing of the overvoltage

protection module (Page 445) (but without grounding cable).

System accessories

10.4 Addressing unit

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 429

10.4 Addressing unit

10.4.1 Overview

To exchange data with the master, all nodes must be addressed before they are integrated

in the AS-Interface network. This can be carried out:

● Offline with an addressing unit

● Online by the AS-Interface system master

The addresses are the values 1 to 31 (or 1A to 31A and 1B to 31B for the extended

AS-Interface Specification 2.1).

A new slave that has not yet been assigned its own address has the default address 0. It is

identified by the master as a new, non-addressed slave and, as such, does not yet take part

in standard communication.

Addresses can be assigned as required, that is, it does not matter whether the first slave is

assigned address 21 or 1, for example.

Function

● Reads the slave address 0 to 31, A/B

● Reads the IO and ID codes of the slaves

● Standard and extended ID code1 and ID code2

● Standard and extended addressing mode in acc. with AS-Interface version 2.1

● Programs ID code1

● Functional check of slaves: read inputs and write outputs of digital/analog slaves

● AS-Interface test: measure the voltage (measurement range: 0 to 35 V) and current

consumption (measurement range: 0 to 100 mA) of the AS-Interface bus.

● Save: complete plant configurations can be saved (profile of all the slaves, also with

extension in accordance with AS-Interface specification 2.1)

● Detects all plant components

System accessories

10.4 Addressing unit

AS-Interface system

430 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.4.2 Order numbers

Addressing and diagnostic unit

Type Order no.

AS-Interface addressing and diagnostic unit for active AS-i modules,

intelligent sensors, and actuators, with functionality to v2.1 with M12

socket

3RK1904-2AB01

Accessories

Type Order no.

AS-Interface coupling module FK/address, with integrated addressing

socket, for 2 AS-Interface cables (yellow), connection with insulation

displacement method EMS (electromagnetic interface)

3RK1901-1MA00

M12 - M12 connection cable, 3-pin, with 1.5 m PUR cable, black,

3 x 0.34 mm2, straight cable plug, straight connector

3RX8000-0GF32-1AB5

10.4.3 Technical specifications

Order no. 3RK1 904-2AB01

Power supply 4 batteries IEC LR6 (NEDA 15)

Ambient conditions

Ambient temperature 0 ... +55°C

Storage temperature -20 ... +55°C (without batteries)

Relative humidity Max. 75%, (without condensation)

Height above sea level Up to 2,000 m

Location Indoors only

Mechanical design

Degree of protection IP40

Dimensions (W x H x D) 84 x 195 x 35 mm

Connection via M12 socket:

Pin 1:

Pin 3:

Pin 2 / 4 / 5:

ASI+

ASI– / GND

IR addressing

To save the battery, the system is shut down automatically approx. 1 min after the last

operator action to ensure that at least 2,500 device addressing operations can be performed.

System accessories

10.5 Analyzer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 431

10.5 Analyzer

10.5.1 Overview

The AS-Interface analyzer is used for checking AS-Interface networks. This ensures that

faults can be identified systematically and facilitates continuous monitoring.

This device can help identify installation errors (e.g. insecure contacts or EMC faults with

extreme loads).

The user-friendly software allows users without specialist knowledge of AS-Interface to

assess the quality of entire networks. The AS-Interface analyzer also allows commissioning

and servicing tasks to be documented by creating test reports for the recordings performed.

Trigger functions allow expert AS-Interface users to carry out detailed diagnoses.

As a passive node, the AS-Interface analyzer "listens in" on communication in the

AS-Interface network. The device is also supplied from the AS-Interface cable.

The analyzer interprets the physical signals in the AS-Interface network and records

communication.

An RS232 interface is used to transfer the data acquired on a PC (e.g. notebook) where it

can be evaluated using the diagnostics software supplied.

Online statistics

This mode provides an overview of the existing AS-Interface system. The error rates for

each slave are represented in a traffic light format (green, amber, red).

The bus configuration and the slave data that is currently being transferred are clearly

displayed.

The extended statistics function can be used to determine the error rate as the number of

transferred or invalid bus telegrams.

The bundle error overview provides a graded overview of how many telegram repetitions

have occurred so that users can perform a targeted, predictive assessment of the transfer

quality.

Data mode

In this mode, the analyzer displays not only the digital input/output values but also the

current analog values as well as the input status of the safety slaves.

System accessories

10.5 Analyzer

AS-Interface system

432 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Trace mode

This mode provides a comprehensive range of trigger functions as well as trace and view

filters in a similar format to that of the field bus analyzer.

An external trigger input and output round off the functional scope allowing even the most

complex errors to be located.

For troubleshooting in conjunction with safety monitor applications, status changes in the

code tables for safety slaves are detected and evaluated.

Test report

The recorded data of the online statistics can be easily output and documented via a test

report. Verification of the status of the plant for approvals or servicing tasks can then be

provided.

The measurement Wizard records the bus signals for a variable duration, thereby triggering

creation of an automatic test report. This allows the quality of AS-i plants to be checked

using standardized procedures.

10.5.2 Order numbers

Analyzer

Type Order no.

AS-Interface analyzer V2 diagnostic unit with functionality to V2.1

Extended version with ASIsafe evaluation and measurement Wizard

3RK1904-3AB01

Accessories

Type Order no.

M12 cable connector, 4-pin, with 5 m PUR cable, black, 4 X 0.34 mm2 3RX8000-0CD42-1AF0

AS-Interface transition from AS-i cable to M12 socket 3RX9801-0AA00

System accessories

10.5 Analyzer

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 433

10.5.3 Connection

0EUDQFK

0DVWHU

$6,QWHUIDFH$QDO\VHU

6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYH

Figure 10-9 Connecting the analyzer to the AS-i network

System accessories

10.6 Ground fault detection module

AS-Interface system

434 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.6 Ground fault detection module

10.6.1 Overview

"... Ground faults in control circuits must not cause machines to start unintentionally, cause

dangerous machine movements, or prevent machines from shutting down (EN 60204, part 1

or DIN VDE 0113)".

The AS-Interface ground fault detection module can be used to ensure that these

requirements are fulfilled. This SlimLine module reliably detects and reports ground faults in

AS-Interface systems.

The following ground faults are detected:

● AS-i "+" ground fault

● AS-i "-" ground fault

● Ground faults in sensors and actuators supplied by the AS-Interface voltage.

One module for each AS-Interface network is sufficient.

Function

The ground fault is detected by the module, displayed via an LED, and signaled via two

signaling outputs (1. no ground fault / O.K.; 2. ground fault / fault). The ground fault signal is

stored in the module. Once the ground fault has been rectified (and not before), the module

can be reset by switching off the AS-Interface voltage, pressing the "Reset" button, or by

applying a high level at the floating remote reset input.

External auxiliary voltages are not monitored by this module with respect to ground faults.

Test / reset

Carry out regular checks to ensure that the module is functioning properly:

When you press the TEST/RESET button very briefly (< 2 s), this simulates a ground fault

and the FAULT output is set. This status remains until the system is reset with the

TEST/RESET button (> 2 s). This sets the OK output and resets the FAULT output. The

system cannot be reset when a ground fault is present.

The module can also be reset by means of a high level at the floating remote reset input

(R-RES). Again, the system cannot be reset when a ground fault is present.

The test function results in a ground fault. Switch the system to a safe state prior to the test.

Setting the AS-i address

The ground fault detection module is a passive module without IC and, therefore, does not

require its own address in the AS-Interface network.

System accessories

10.6 Ground fault detection module

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 435

10.6.2 Checking for ground faults with a voltage measuring instrument

A ground fault anywhere in the AS-i cable can be detected using a high-resistance voltage

measuring instrument (Ri >= 20 MΩ, e.g. digital multimeter).

Procedure:

1. Set the measuring instrument to voltage measurement (V DC).

2. Connect the minus measuring lead to the system ground/ground.

3a. Connect the plus measuring lead to AS-i plus.

● Without a ground fault, a voltage of approx. 15 V (+/- 3 V) is set. (Since the AS-i cable is

ideally only set via a capacitive voltage divider symmetrically with respect to system

ground, the measured voltage may drift slightly due to the internal resistance of the

measuring instrument.)

● If a ground fault vis-à-vis AS-i plus occurs, the voltage can drop to as low as 0 V

(depending on the resistance in the ground connection).

● If a ground fault vis-à-vis AS-i minus occurs, the voltage can increase to as much as the

maximum AS-i voltage (approx. 30 V, and depending on the resistance in the ground

connection).

Alternative:

3b. Connect the plus measuring lead to AS-i minus.

● Without a ground fault, a negative voltage of approx. -15 V (+/- 3 V) is set. (Since the AS-i

cable is ideally only set via a capacitive voltage divider symmetrically with respect to

system ground, the measured voltage may drift slightly due to the internal resistance of

the measuring instrument.)

● If a ground fault vis-à-vis AS-i plus occurs, the voltage can increase to as much as the

maximum AS-i voltage, that is, a negative voltage as low as approx. -30 V is measured

(depending on the resistance in the ground connection).

● If a ground fault vis-à-vis AS-i minus occurs, the voltage can drop to as low as 0 V, that

is, a slight negative voltage about 0 V is measured (depending on the resistance in the

ground connection).

Note

Since the connected sensors are supplied by the AS-i voltage, a ground fault on the sensor

cable also causes a ground fault on the AS-i cable (with the exception of modules with

floating inputs).

If the outputs are supplied from the AS-i cable, the same applies to the actuator cables.

The cause of a ground fault could be anywhere in the AS-i network. Due to the flexibility of

the topology, no measurement procedure exists for automatically determining the location of

the fault.

System accessories

10.6 Ground fault detection module

AS-Interface system

436 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Tips for locating ground faults:

● Are cables moved constantly?

● Have any cables been driven over or otherwise damaged by vehicles (e.g. fork-lift

trucks)?

● If possible, disconnect the AS-i cable segment by segment (AS-i plus and minus cable)

● Disconnect neuralgic sensor cables one after the other or disconnect entire modules (and

connected sensors) one after the other from the AS-i cable (AS-i plus and minus cable).

Check whether – as described above – a ground fault exists using the voltage measuring

instrument.

● Check the AS-i cable and sensor cables for insulation faults (chafing points, compression,

cuts, frayed litz wires at the terminals, even in prefabricated connectors, wet cable

connectors, etc.) and replace if necessary.

● Make sure that all the cables are properly connected (AS-i cable and sensor cables; see

note above - must not be connected at any point to ground or external voltage).

● Once the errors have been rectified, the ground fault detection module must be reset

(press the RESET/TEST button for ≥ 2 s or remote reset).

10.6.3 Order numbers

Type Order no.

Ground fault detection module, screw terminals 3RK1408-8KE00-0AA2

Ground fault detection module, spring-loaded terminal 3RK1408-8KG00-0AA2

System accessories

10.6 Ground fault detection module

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 437

10.6.4 Connection

7HUPLQDODQGWHUPLQDO

OHDGWRIXQFWLRQDOJURXQG)(

HDFKYLDVHSDUDWHFDEOH

&RQQHFWLRQFDEOHFDQ

DOVREHWHVWHG

5HVHW





9

$6,QWHUIDFH

$6,

$6,



ದ

2. 

)$8/7 

0 

0 

0

55(6

/





7

)(

9

R-RES

O.K.

FAULT

AS-i

TEST/

RESET

M24 M24 M24

L24+

O.K.

FAULT

AS-i-

AS-i+

R-RES

Figure 10-10 Connections on the ground fault detection module

Connection cross-sections

Cable Screw terminals Spring-loaded terminals

Single-core 1 x 0.5 ... 4.0 mm²

2 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²

2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²

Finely stranded with wire end ferrule 1 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²

2 x 0.5 ... 1.5 mm²

2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²

Finely stranded without wire end ferrule — 2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²

AWG cables, single or multi-core 2 x 20 to 14 2 x 24 to 16

System accessories

10.6 Ground fault detection module

AS-Interface system

438 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.6.5 Diagnostics

LED: AS-i

AS-i Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green AS-i voltage present —

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage,

connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx. 30 V DC)

LEDs: OK and FAULT

OK FAULT Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green OFF No ground fault —

Red OFF Ground fault detected —

OFF OFF No AS-i voltage Switch on AS-i voltage

LED: R-RES

R-RES Meaning

Yellow Reset signal present

OFF —

System accessories

10.6 Ground fault detection module

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 439

10.6.6 Technical specifications

Order no. 3RK1408-8KE00-0AA2 3RK1408-8KG00-0AA2

Connection type Screw terminals Spring-loaded terminals

Slave type The ground fault detection module is not equipped with a slave and does not

require an AS-Interface address.

Rated operating voltage 24 ... 48 V

Total power consumption ≤ 40 mA

Approvals

Degree of protection IP20

Ambient temperature -25 ... +70 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85 °C

Low signal range IIN ≤ 1.5 mA

High signal range

UIN

IIN

≥ 10 V

≤ 40 mA

Current-carrying capacity

DC 12

DC 13

1 A (max. 2 A per module)

500 mA (24 V)

200 mA (48 V)

Switches 2 x 106

Assignment of the terminals 1: AS-i - connection

2: Connection for system ground

3: Connection for system ground (for test function)

4: AS-i + connection

5: Remote reset input (R-RES)

6: Remote reset ground (-)

7: External power supply for signaling outputs L24+

8: Signaling output OK

9: Signaling output FAULT (ground fault signal)

10: External power supply for signaling outputs M24

11: Minus connection for signaling output M24

12: Minus connection for signaling output M24

When repeaters are used, note that a ground fault detection module is used for

each AS-Interface segment (no. of AS-Interface power supply units = no. of

ground fault detection modules).

UAUX should be fused with 2 A time-lag fuses.

The service life of the relay increases when inductive consumers with

free-wheeling diodes are used.

Notes

Route terminals 2 and 3 via separate cables to the system.

System accessories

10.6 Ground fault detection module

AS-Interface system

440 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.6.7 Dimension drawings







DEFGH

5.( 

5.* ಧಧ





  

 



 





[











Figure 10-11 Dimensions: ground fault detection module

System accessories

10.7 Overvoltage protection module

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 441

10.7 Overvoltage protection module

10.7.1 Overview

The AS-Interface overvoltage protection module protects downstream AS-Interface devices

or individual system sections in AS-Interface networks against mains-borne overvoltage that

can potentially be caused by switching operations or distant lightning strikes.

In the lightning protection zone concept, the overvoltage protection module is located at the

transition from zone 1 to 2/3. Direct lightning strikes must be handled by additional protective

measures at the transitions from lightning protection zone 0A to 1.

The AS-Interface overvoltage protection module can now also be used to integrate

AS-Interface in the overall overvoltage protection concept of a plant or machine.

The module has the same design and degree of protection (IP67) as the AS-Interface user

modules and is also connected in the same way. It is a passive module without AS-i IC and,

therefore, does not require its own address in the AS-Interface network.

It can be connected to an AS-Interface system via the FK-E or PG-E coupling module. The

EEMS interface can be used to protect the AS-Interface cable and auxiliary voltage cable

against overvoltage.

Overvoltage is discharged via a grounding cable with a green/yellow oil-resistant outer

sheath. This cable is fixed permanently in the module and must be connected with low

resistance to system ground.

Rated discharge current Isn

The rated discharge current is the peak value of a surge current with the wave form

8/20 microseconds for which the overvoltage protection module is rated in accordance with a

specific test program.

With the waveform 8/20, 100 % of the value is achieved after 8 microseconds and 50 % after

20 microseconds.

Protection level Up

The protection level of an overvoltage protection module is the maximum momentary value

of the voltage at the terminals as determined by means of individual tests.

The protection level characterizes the capability of an overvoltage protection module to limit

overvoltage to a residual level.

Accessories

An FK-E or PG-E coupling module is required for connecting the AS-Interface cable and the

auxiliary power supply cable.

System accessories

10.7 Overvoltage protection module

AS-Interface system

442 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Installation guidelines

$6

,QWHU

IDFH

$6

,QWHU

IDFH

66 2YHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ

0RXQWLQJSODWH

$SSOLFDWLRQ

'HYLFHZLWK

JURXQGFRQQHFWLRQ

'HYLFHZLWKRXWJURXQGFRQQHFWLRQ

ൺJURXQGLQJRIPRXQWLQJSODWH

$SSOLFDWLRQ

66

Figure 10-12 Installation guidelines for overvoltage protection modules

The protection modules and devices to be protected must grounded via a joint grounding

point (equipotential bonding). If devices with total insulation are protected, their mounts must

also be included in the grounding points.

Application example

$6

,QWHU

IDFH

$6

,QWHU

IDFH

$6

,QWHU

IDFH

$6

,QWHU

IDFH

66 2YHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQPRGXOH

6666

3URWHFWHGDUHD

=RQH =RQH=RQH

3URWHFWLRQDSSUR[PWRULJKW

(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ

V\VWHPJURXQG

3URWHFWLRQDSSUR[PWROHIW

Figure 10-13 Application example for overvoltage protection modules

Setting the AS-i address

The overvoltage protection module is not equipped with a slave, which means that it does

not require an AS-Interface address.

10.7.2 Order numbers

Type Order no.

Overvoltage protection module 3RK1901-1GA00

FK-E coupling module for AS-i cable (yellow) and

AUX-POWER cable (black)

3RG9030-0AA00

System accessories

10.7 Overvoltage protection module

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 443

10.7.3 Connection

*URXQGLQJFDEOHPD[P

PP$:*

2LOUHVLVWDQW

/('GLVSOD\

&RXSOLQJPRGXOH

1P

[

$6L

$8;32:(5

).(



3**

Figure 10-14 Connecting the overvoltage protection module

To commission the overvoltage protection module, carry out the following steps:

Step Procedure

1 Insert the AS-i cable or 24 V DC auxiliary power cable (AUX POWER) into the cable

routing(s) of the coupling module.

2 Screw the overvoltage protection module onto the coupling module. The LEDs light up

when the AS-i / AUX POWER has been applied.

3 Connect the grounding cable with low resistance to the joint ground for the AS-i device to

be protected.

10.7.4 Diagnostics

LED: AS-i

AS-i Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green AS-i voltage present —

OFF No AS-i voltage,

AS-i voltage connected with incorrect polarity,

AS-i voltage too low

Switch on the AS-i voltage,

connect it properly,

measure the AS-i voltage (approx. 30 V DC)

System accessories

10.7 Overvoltage protection module

AS-Interface system

444 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

LED: AUX POWER

AUX POWER Possible cause Possible remedial measures

Green AUX POWER present —

OFF No AUX POWER Switch on AUX POWER,

connect properly,

10.7.5 Technical specifications

Order no. 3RK1901-1GA00

Slave type The overvoltage protection module is not equipped with a

slave, which means that it does not require an AS-Interface

address.

Overvoltage protection For AS-Interface For AUX power

Rated discharge current Isn with waveform 8/20

• Core-prot. cond.

• Core-core

10 kA

0.5 kA

10 kA

0.5 kA

Protection level Up for Isn

• Core-prot. cond.

• Core-core

≤ 1.8 kV

≤ 100 V

≤ 1.8 kV

≤ 70 V

Protection level Up for 1 kV / μs

• Core-prot. cond.

• Core-core

≤ 700 V

≤ 50 V

≤ 600 V

≤ 40 V

Degree of protection IP67

Ambient temperature -25 ... +85 °C

Storage temperature -40 ... +85 °C

System accessories

10.7 Overvoltage protection module

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 445

10.7.6 Dimension drawings





PD[P











Figure 10-15 Dimensions: overvoltage protection module

&XWRXWVHFWLRQIRUPRXQWLQJRQ

PRXQWLQJUDLOWR',1(1





 









Figure 10-16 Coupling module for installing the overvoltage protection module

System accessories

10.8 Other accessories

AS-Interface system

446 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

10.8 Other accessories

10.8.1 AS-Interface shaped cable

10.8.1.1 Overview

The actuator-sensor interface, the networking system used for the lowest field range, is

characterized by the ease with which it can be assembled and installed. A new connection

system has been specially developed for AS-Interface,

whereby the network nodes are connected by the AS-Interface cable. This two-core cable

has a trapezoidal profile to protect against incorrect polarity.

Connections are established with the insulation displacement method, whereby contact pins

penetrate the shaped AS-Interface cable to provide secure contacting with the two cores.

The cables do not need to be cut or stripped. which means that AS-Interface nodes (e.g. I/O

modules, intelligent devices) can be connected in no time at all. The devices can also be

quickly and easily replaced.

To enable devices to be used in a wide range of different ambient conditions (e.g. in oily

areas), the AS-Interface cable is available in different materials (rubber, TPE, PUR).

A standard round cable is also available for special applications. With AS-Interface, data and

power for the sensors (e.g. BERO proximity switches) and actuators (e.g. indicator lights) are

transferred via the yellow AS-Interface cable.

The black AS-i cable can be used for actuators with a 24 V DC supply (e.g. solenoid valves).

System accessories

10.8 Other accessories

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 447

10.8.1.2 Order numbers

Type

Material Color Quantity

Order no.

100 m roll 3RX9 010-0AA00 Yellow (AS-Interface)

1000 m drum 3RX9 012-0AA00

100 m roll 3RX9 020-0AA00

Rubber

(EPDM: ethylene-propylene-

diene-rubber) Black (24 V DC)

1000 m drum 3RX9 022-0AA00

100 m roll 3RX9 013-0AA00 Yellow (AS-Interface)

1000 m drum 3RX9 014-0AA00

100 m roll 3RX9 023-0AA00

TPE

(thermoplastic elastomer)

Black (24 V DC)

1000 m drum 3RX9024-0AA00

Yellow (AS-Interface) 100 m roll 3RX9 017-0AA00 TPE special version to UL

Class2 Black (24 V DC) 100 m roll 3RX9 027-0AA00

100 m roll 3RX9 015-0AA00 Yellow (AS-Interface)

1000 m drum 3RX9 016-0AA00

100 m roll 3RX9 025-0AA00

PUR1)

(polyurethane, TPE-U)

Black (24 V DC)

1000 m drum 3RX9 026-0AA00

1) Note regarding the towability of the AS-Interface cable with the PUR outer sheath:

to the determine its towability, the AS-Interface cable was tested in "IGUS tow chains" of type

10.2.048 and 20.2.55. The tow chain was fitted with 3 × AS-Interface cables and various round

cables for this purpose. After it was subject to three million bendings (travel), the cores, litz wires, and

outer sheath remained undamaged (tow chain equipped to 50 %).

10.8.1.3 Technical specifications

AS-Interface shaped

cable

EPDM (rubber) TPE (special PVC

compound)

TPE special version to

UL Class 2

PUR (polyurethane)

Temperature application range

Stationary -40 ... +85°C -40 ... +105°C -30 ... +90°C -50 ... +90°C

Moving -25 ... +85°C -30 ... +105°C -20 ... +90°C -50 ... +90°C

Core colors Brown, blue

Flexibility Very good Good

Behavior in fire Flammable Flame resistant to

IEC 60332-1

VDE 0482 T. 265-2-1

UL 1581 sec. 1061 cable flame

UL 1581 sec. 1060 CSA FT1

Flame resistant to

IEC 60332-1

VDE 0482 T. 265-2-1

Halogon free (PVC

free)

Yes No No Yes

Without silicone

precipitation

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ozone and weather

resistant

Partially resistant Resistant Resistant Resistant

System accessories

10.8 Other accessories

AS-Interface system

448 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

AS-Interface shaped

cable

EPDM (rubber) TPE (special PVC

compound)

TPE special version to

UL Class 2

PUR (polyurethane)

Oil resistant Partially resistant Resistant Resistant Resistant

Min. permissible bending radii to DIN VDE 0298, part 300

Fixed 12 mm 12 mm 12 mm 12 mm

Freely movable 24 mm 24 mm 24 mm 24 mm

Bending behavior to DIN VDE 0472, part 603

No breakage after 30,000 movements back and forth

UL approved No UL 758 AWM UL 758 AWM,

UL 13 Class 2,

UL 444 CMG

CSA approved No C22.2 No.210.2 AWM C22.2 No. 214-02 No

Monitored inspection

(VDE)

No No No VDE reg. no. 9971,

300 V / 500 V

stationary: -40 ... +70°C

Transportation:

-25 ... +70°C

Moved: -15 ... +70°C

permitted for marine

and offshore application

up to 300 V / 500 V:

Germanischer Lloyd,

Lloyds Register of

Shipping,

ABS Europe LTD,

Bureau Veritas,

Det Norske Veritas

10.8.1.4 Dimension drawings

EOXH EURZQ







$6L $6L

Figure 10-17 Dimensions of the shaped cable

System accessories

10.8 Other accessories

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 449

10.8.2 Installation material

Type Order no.

AS-Interface standard distributor for AS-I shaped cable 3RK1901-1NN00

AS-Interface compact distributor for AS-I shaped cable 3RK1901-1NN10

AS-Interface M12 branch

For AS-i shaped cable on M12 socket, cable end possible in branch 3RX9801-0AA00

For AS-i shaped cable on M12 socket, cable end not possible in branch 3RK1901-1NR10

For AS-i shaped cable on M12 cable plug, cable length 1 m,

cable end not possible in branch

3RK1901-1NR11

For AS-i shaped cable on M12 cable plug, cable length 2 m,

cable end not possible in branch

3RK1901-1NR12

For AS-i UAUX shaped cable on M12 socket, cable end not possible in branch 3RK1901-1NR20

For AS-i / UAUX shaped cable on M12 cable plug, cable length 2 m,

cable end not possible in branch

3RK1901-1NR21

For AS-i / UAUX shaped cable on M12 cable plug, cable length 2 m,

cable end not possible in branch

3RK1901-1NR22

AS-Interface M12 branch (4 x)

for AS-i / UAUX shaped cable on 4 x M12 socket, delivery incl. coupling module,

cable end possible in branch

3RK1901-1NR00

M12 T distributor

IP68, 1 x M12 connector, 2 x M12 plug

3RK1901-1TR00

M12 Y coupler plug

for connecting two sensors to one M12 socket with Y assignment

6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0

Addressing cable jack plug on M12

for addressing slaves with M12 bus connection,

only required for addressing unit 3RK1904-2AB00

3RK1901-3RA00

AS-Interface M12 sealing caps

for unassigned M12 sockets

3RK1901-1KA00

AS-Interface M12 sealing caps, tamper proof

for unassigned M12 sockets

3RK1901-1KA01

AS-Interface M8 sealing caps

for unassigned M8 sockets

3RK1901-1PN00

AS-Interface M20 seal

for AS-Interface cable, shaped and for insertion in M20 screw glands

3RK1901-1MD00

Cable adapter for flat cables

Connecting the AS-Interface cable to metric screw glands with insulation displacement

method

Further routing via standard cable

for M16 screw gland

for M20 screw gland

3RK1901-3QM00

3RK1901-3QM10

Further routing via pins

for M16 screw gland

for M20 screw gland

3RK1901-3QM01

3RK1901-3QM11

Cable clip for cable adapter 3RK1901-3QA00

Cable end terminator

for sealing open cable ends (AS-i shaped cable) with IP67

3RK1901-1MN00

System accessories

10.8 Other accessories

AS-Interface system

450 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Type Order no.

K45 mounting plate

for wall mounting

for DIN rail installation

3RK1901-2EA00

3RK1901-2DA00

K60 mounting plate

for wall mounting

for DIN rail installation

3RK1901-0CA00

3RK1901-0CB01

Gasket set

for K60 mounting plate and standard distributor (cannot be used for K45 mounting plate)

one set contains one straight and one shaped gasket

3RK1902-0AR00

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 451

System integration 11

11.1 Integration in open-loop control systems

11.1.1 Totally Integrated Automation

System integration with Totally Integrated Automation

Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) is a one-stop, end-to-end, integrated solution platform

from Siemens. Networing covers everything from the plant control level and field/process

level through to the actuator/sensor level where AS-Interface is used.

Figure 11-1 System integration with Totally Integrated Automation

System integration

11.1 Integration in open-loop control systems

AS-Interface system

452 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Benefits of system integration

Totally Integrated Automation provides you with the technology you need to boost

productivity in automation, save time, cut costs, ensure and improve quality, and protect your

investments. You can leverage the benefits of TIA throughout the entire production lifecycle

of a plant or machine. The benefits of integrating AS-Interface are outlined below.

● Benefits during configuration:

the seamless interaction of the software tools and standardized operating concept help

boost productivity in the configuration phase.

You can configure hardware and networks systematically in a graphical development

environment and parameterize the configuration using input dialogs. The bus

configuration can be changed without needing to access the user program. You no longer

have to spend time programming the interfaces. The software checks the configuration

data automatically to ensure that it is plausible and consistent.

Systematic data storage allows you to transfer variable changes automatically during

configuration and within the programs.

● Benefits during installation and commissioning:

The distribution of plant communication across bus systems reduces the time and effort

involved in cabling and installation. Safety technology and standard modules used for

mixed operation can be connected to the same bus systems.

The configuration can be downloaded to the PLC, HMI, drives, and so on centrally. The

documentation for commissioning the plant components is archived in the configuration

environment.

● Benefits during operation and maintenance:

During operation, you can monitor the modular plant components centrally. System-wide

communication can also take place across network boundaries.

Diagnostic and error messages are displayed in plain text and localize the fault or error in

the hardware or software. Downtimes due to maintenance are minimized. When you

replace modular components, the devices receive starting data from the CPU in RUN

mode too. New sensors (e.g. AS-i analog modules) adopt the parameters automatically.

You can use MMCs to transfer the entire configuration to a new CPU even without the

use of a PC / PG. The MMCs ensure that no data goes missing in the CPU during a

power failure.

● Benefits for extending the production plant:

To optimize processes, simulation modules or software can be used in addition to

parameter settings and program changes. The modular and harmonized TIA system

concept allows plants to be easily extended not only during configuration but also when

the hardware is extended.

System integration

11.1 Integration in open-loop control systems

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 453

11.1.2 Integration of AS-i networks in SIMATIC

SIMATIC Technology is an integral part of Totally Integrated Automation. Connecting

AS-Interface to the higher-level controller via modules or routers allows you to leverage the

full range of benefits offered by TIA.

SIMATIC Manager is the starting point for all software tools. Engineering is carried out with

and in STEP 7, the SIMATIC configuration environment. Device-specific function modules

are either already available in STEP 7 or can be specially installed. The Distributed Safety

software package is available for safety applications.

PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet can be configured in a standardized graphical

development environment. Function modules can be parameterized in user-friendly dialogs.

Module libraries containing pre-programmed functions in STEP 7 are available for user

programs.

11.1.3 Integration in third-party controllers

PROFIBUS DP slaves and PROFINET IO devices can be integrated in the relevant networks

as standard DP slaves or standard IO devices using a GSD file. This allows open

communication right down to the operator control level. A GSD file (device master data file)

contains all the information required for communication between the CPU and AS-i master.

You can use the GSD file for the network integration of AS-i masters within a third-party

system.

The device-specific GSD files contain data for the PROFIBUS DP master and slave or the

PROFINET IO controller and device as well as general manufacturer specifications. These

files are provided by the manufacturers of PROFIBUS DP slaves and PROFINET IO

devices.

State-of-the-art configuration tools provide interfaces for the GSD data. The GSD file can

also be used for predecessor versions of STEP 7 that do comply with the device

requirements.

An example of integrating AS-Interface with a GSD file is described with STEP 7. The

configuration procedure and the contents of the dialogs are much the same for third-party

systems.

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

454 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.2 Data storage in the controller

11.2.1 Binary data

The controller accesses the binary inputs and outputs on the AS-i slaves cyclically via the

AS-i master. The input and output data of the AS-i slaves is mapped in a contiguous data

area in the controller.

,QSXW

UDQJH

,QLWLDO

UDQJH

:ULWHELQDU\YDOXHV

5HDGELQDU\YDOXHV

&\FOLFVHUYLFHV

352),%86'3

352),1(7,2

%DFNSODQHEXV

$6L0DVWHU

$6,QWHUIDFH

$6L6ODYHV

$6L

6ODYH

','2

$6L

6ODYH

)',

$6L

6ODYH

$,$2

&38



Figure 11-2 Communications principle for transferring binary data

The acyclic exchange of binary data via data blocks (DB 150) is also possible.

In the data area for binary data in the controller, the AS-i master occupies:

● Max. 32 input and 32 output bytes with up to 62 A/B slaves assigned

● Max. 16 input and 16 output bytes with up to 31 standard A/B slaves assigned

(for CP 343-2 P)

The start addresses of the input/output data depend on how the CPU is configured. When

configuration is carried out using STEP 7, digital output addresses must have the same start

value as the input addresses (system dependent). The arrangement of the I/O bits with

respect to the AS-i addresses also depends on the configuration. The following sort types

are only possible for routers:

● CLASSIC

● LINEAR (with STEP 7 configuration only)

● Packed (with STEP 7 configuration only)

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 455

Assignment of the I/O data bits for an AS-i Slave

An example of how the AS-i connections for the AS-i slaves are assigned to the data bits of

the input/output bytes is shown below for slave no. 1A.

Figure 11-3 Data area of the binary I/O data

In this example, the start addresses for the input and output data area are "0". With the

CLASSIC sort type, bit 0 to bit 3 are assigned to this AS-i slave in byte 0.

,QSXWE\WH

2XWSXWE\WH

&RQQHFWLRQRQ$6LVODYH$

&RQQHFWLRQRQ$6LVODYH$

&RQQHFWLRQRQ$6LVODYH$

&RQQHFWLRQRQ$6LVODYH$

%LW

Figure 11-4 Assignment of the AS-i connections to the data bits of the input/output bytes

CLASSIC sorting

CLASSIC sort type is the standard sort type for configuration with the GSD file. The order

corresponds to the keystroke configuration on the AS-i master. The CLASSIC sort type is

defaulted for configuration with STEP 7.

The table shows the memory assignment for 32 bytes. For a memory assignment of

16 bytes, the table ends at m + 15.

Byte1) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

m + 0 Status nibble / Reserved 2) Slave 1 / 1A

m + 1 Slave 2 / 2A Slave 3 / 3A

m + 2 Slave 4 / 4A Slave 5 / 5A

m + 3 Slave 6 / 6A Slave 7 / 7A

m + 4 Slave 8 / 8A Slave 9 / 9A

m + 5 Slave 10 / 10A Slave 11 / 11A

m + 6 Slave 12 / 12A Slave 13 / 13A

m + 7 Slave 14 / 14A Slave 15 / 15A

m + 8 Slave 16 / 16A Slave 17 / 17A

m + 9 Slave 18 / 18A Slave 19 / 19A

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

456 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Byte1) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

m + 10 Slave 20 / 20A Slave 21 / 21A

m + 11 Slave 22 / 22A Slave 23 / 23A

m + 12 Slave 24 / 24A Slave 25 / 25A

m + 13 Slave 26 / 26A Slave 27 / 27A

m + 14 Slave 28 / 28A Slave 29 / 29A

m + 15 Slave 30 / 30A Slave 31 / 31A

m + 16 Reserved Slave 1B

m + 17 Slave 2B Slave 3B

m + 18 Slave 4B Slave 5B

m + 19 Slave 6B Slave 7B

m + 20 Slave 8B Slave 9B

m + 21 Slave 10B Slave 11B

m + 22 Slave 12B Slave 13B

m + 23 Slave 14B Slave 15B

m + 24 Slave 16B Slave 17B

m + 25 Slave 18B Slave 19B

m + 26 Slave 20B Slave 21B

m + 27 Slave 22B Slave 23B

m + 28 Slave 24B Slave 25B

m + 29 Slave 26B Slave 27B

m + 30 Slave 28B Slave 29B

m + 31 Slave 30B Slave 31B

Key:

1) m = start address of the input/output data

2) Bits 4 to 7 in the first byte of the input data are known as status nibbles. They are

reserved for the command interface of the AS-i master. Bits 4 to 7 in the first byte of the

output data are irrelevant and are also reserved.

Figure 11-5 Example of the CLASSIC sorting

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 457

LINEAR sorting

LINEAR sorting can only be selected for configuration with STEP 7 and with the links.

The data for standard / A slave and B slave with the same AS-i address are combined in one

byte, whereby the standard / A slave is assigned the low nibble and the B slave the high

nibble.

Byte1) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

m + 0 Status nibble / Reserved 2) Reserved

m + 1 Slave 1B Slave 1 / 1A

m + 2 Slave 2B Slave 2 / 2A

m + 3 Slave 3B Slave 3 / 3A

m + 4 Slave 4B Slave 4 / 4A

m + 5 Slave 5B Slave 5 / 5A

m + 6 Slave 6B Slave 6 / 6A

m + 7 Slave 7B Slave 7 / 7A

m + 8 Slave 8B Slave 8 / 8A

m + 9 Slave 9B Slave 9 / 9A

m + 10 Slave 10B Slave 10 / 10A

m + 11 Slave 11B Slave 11 / 11A

m + 12 Slave 12B Slave 12 / 12A

m + 13 Slave 13B Slave 13 / 13A

m + 14 Slave 14B Slave 14 / 14A

m + 15 Slave 15B Slave 15 / 15A

m + 16 Slave 16B Slave 16 / 16A

m + 17 Slave 17B Slave 17 / 17A

m + 18 Slave 18B Slave 18 / 18A

m + 19 Slave 19B Slave 19 / 19A

m + 20 Slave 20B Slave 20 / 20A

m + 21 Slave 21B Slave 21 / 21A

m + 22 Slave 22B Slave 22 / 22A

m + 23 Slave 23B Slave 23 / 23A

m + 24 Slave 24B Slave 24 / 24A

m + 25 Slave 25B Slave 25 / 25A

m + 26 Slave 26B Slave 26 / 26A

m + 27 Slave 27B Slave 27 / 27A

m + 28 Slave 28B Slave 28 / 28A

m + 29 Slave 29B Slave 29 / 29A

m + 30 Slave 30B Slave 30 / 30A

m + 31 Slave 31B Slave 31 / 31A

Key:

1) m = start address of the input/output data

2) Bits 4 to 7 in the first byte of the input data are known as status nibbles. They are

reserved for the command interface of the AS-i master. Bits 4 to 7 in the first byte of the

output data are irrelevant and are also reserved.

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

458 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Figure 11-6 Example of LINEAR sorting

Packed sorting

The "pack" command, which is available during configuration with STEP 7, allows you to

save address space. The I/O addresses of the AS-i slaves are arranged consecutively in

accordance with the corresponding memory requirements.

Figure 11-7 Example of "packed" sorting

11.2.2 Safe binary data

Only DP/AS-i F-Link evaluates the input data of the ASIsafe slaves and transfers the

switching status (safety oriented) cyclically to the PROFIBUS DP master via PROFIsafe

telegrams. The safety program of the F-CPU assigns the safe data to the safe address

range. You can access the F I/Os in the same way as the standard I/Os via the process

image (PII). You cannot access the I/Os directly, however. The channels of an F I/O must

only be accessed from an F run-time group. Non-safe data from the ASIsafe slaves occupy

the same address space as binary AS-i slaves.

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 459

&\FOLFVHUYLFHV

352),%86'3

,QSXW

UDQJH

352),%86'3

,QLWLDO

UDQJH

5HDGVDIHELQDU\

YDOXHV

6DIH

HYDOXDWLRQ

VZLWFKLQJVWDWXVHV

$6,VDIHVODYHV

352),VDIHWHOHJUDP

)&38ZLWK

352),%86'3PDVWHU

352),%86'3 $6,QWHUIDFH

$6L6ODYHV

'3$6L)/LQN

$6L

6ODYH

','2

$6L

6ODYH

)',

$6L

6ODYH

$,$2

352),VDIH



Figure 11-8 Communications principle for transferring safe data

The PROFIsafe message frame occupies the following lengths in the PROFIBUS DP

address space:

● PIO 4 bytes (only PROFIsafe administration information)

● PII 12 bytes (of which the first four 4 bytes are user data). The PII also contains safe

binary input data of the ASIsafe slaves (F-DI)

The start addresses of the safe input/output data depend on how the PROFIBUS DP master

is configured. When configuration is carried out with STEP 7, F-O addresses must have the

same start value as the F-I addresses (system dependent).

Figure 11-9 Assignment of the safe binary data

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

460 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Arrangement of the safe binary data in an F-CPU

The following table shows how the AS-i addresses are assigned to the safe input bits.

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Byte1)

Meaning

m+0 F-DI

Slave 7

F-DI

Slave 6

F-DI

Slave 5

F-DI

Slave 4

F-DI

Slave 3

F-DI

Slave 2

F-DI

Slave 1

Reserved

m+1 F-DI

Slave 15

F-DI

Slave 14

F-DI

Slave 13

F-DI

Slave 12

F-DI

Slave 11

F-DI

Slave 10

F-DI

Slave 9

F-DI

Slave 8

m+2 F-DI

Slave 23

F-DI

Slave 22

F-DI

Slave 21

F-DI

Slave 20

F-DI

Slave 19

F-DI

Slave 18

F-DI

Slave 17

F-DI

Slave 16

m+3 F-DI

Slave 31

F-DI

Slave 30

F-DI

Slave 29

F-DI

Slave 28

F-DI

Slave 27

F-DI

Slave 26

F-DI

Slave 25

F-DI

Slave 24

m+4 Reserved

m+5 Reserved

m+6 Reserved

m+7 Reserved

m+8

m+9

m+10

m+11

PROFIsafe administrative information

1) m = start address of the safe input data in the F-CPU

Representation of the ASIsafe slaves in the non-safe process image

Cyclic interrogation of the ASIsafe slaves writes status information to the PII. The

assignment of the AS-i addresses to the address bytes corresponds to the configured sort

type for the binary data.

The meaning of the data bits of an ASIsafe slave are shown in the following table:

PII bit Description Value Meaning

0 Contact 1 (pin 1 - pin 2) open D.0 F-IN 1

1 Contact 1 (pin 1 - pin 2) closed

0 ASIsafe slave not activated D.1 Status ASIsafe slave

1 ASIsafe slave activated

0 Contact 2 (pin 3 - pin 4) open D.2 F-IN 2

1 Contact 2 (pin 3 - pin 4) closed

0 No I/O error D.3 I/O error bit

1 I/O error pending

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 461

11.2.3 Analog data

AS-i analog data can be transferred by means of two access types:

● Cyclic data exchange:

This data access type is available as an option with the STEP 7 configuration only.

The controller accesses the data of analog AS-i slaves directly in the cyclic process

image. The input or output data of analog AS-i slaves is mapped in a contiguous data

area in the controller.

The priority given to cyclic data exchange ensures that the process image is constantly

refreshed.

● Acyclic data exchange:

Acyclic access to analog data via data blocks is supported with GSD and STEP 7

configuration. For this purpose, authorize write and read access to the analog data blocks

in your user program (e.g. SFC 58 / SFC 59). The transmitted analog value is always

consistent with regard to an AS-i slave. The data is transferred to the channels

sequentially.

You can save space in the address space in the CPU if you configure analog data

exchange using data blocks.

:ULWHDQDORJYDOXHV

&\FOLFVHUYLFHV

5HDGDQDORJYDOXHV

$F\FOLFVHUYLFHV

:ULWHBGDWDBUHFRUG

:ULWHDQDORJYDOXHV

5HDGBGDWDBUHFRUG

5HDGDQDORJYDOXHV

$QDORJYDOXHVYLDF\FOLFVHUYLFHVZLWK

67(3FRQILJXUDWLRQRQO\

352),%86'3

352),1(7,2

%DFNSODQHEXV

&38

$6,QWHUIDFH

$6L6ODYHV

$6L

6ODYH

','2

$6L

6ODYH

)',

$6L

6ODYH

$,$2

$6L0DVWHU



Figure 11-10 Communications principle for transferring analog data

If read access is also assigned, the cyclic process image has priority over the data blocks.

Write access to analog data of an AS-i slave via cyclic and acyclic services is not permitted

at the same time.

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

462 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

NOTICE

Restriction for AS-i slaves to profile 7.1 and 7.2

The following descriptions only apply to AS-i slaves that handle analog value transfer in

accordance with the AS-i slave profile 7.3, 7.4, 7.5.5, 7.A.5, B.A.5, 7.A.A, 7.A.8, 7.A.9, and

6.0 (Combined Transaction Types CTT 1 to 5 in accordance with AS-i Specification V3.0).

AS-i masters do not support analog value transfer in accordance with the AS-i slave profile

7.1 / 7.2. In this case, analog data can be transferred via a user program.

Analog addresses

With STEP 7 configuration, up to 31 AS-i addresses can be assigned to analog slaves.

AS-i masters to Specification 3.0 also support up to 62 analog A / B slaves in the extended

address space. Up to 8 bytes of data are available for each address. You can configure a

maximum of four analog channels for each AS-i address, which all originate from an analog

AS-i slave. A total of 240 bytes are available for the process data.

For the start area, see the analog data in the configuration.

Figure 11-11 Assignment of the analog data

For example, the AS-i slave with address 1A occupies bytes 256 to 259 in the analog input

data area in the controller.

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 463

Arrangement of the analog data in the cyclic process image

Byte no. (start address + offset) Analog value channel

m + 0 Channel 1 / high byte

m + 1 Channel 1 / low byte

m + 2 Channel 2 / high byte

m + 3 Channel 2 / low byte

m + 4 Channel 3 / high byte

m + 5 Channel 3 / low byte

m + 6 Channel 4 / high byte

m + 7 Channel 4 / low byte

Analog A / B slaves only occupy "half an address", which is why they only have a maximum

of 2 channels. A slaves occupy bytes 0 to 3 and B slaves bytes 4 to 7.

Note

Representation of the analog values or the transparent values

• The analog values are arranged as 16-bit values in the two's complement.

• The transparent values must be interpreted as two independent bytes.

With SIMATIC S7 as the CPU, AS-i analog values are accessed with word commands.

Example:

If you have configured an AS-i slave "2AI" with input address 256, you can use the STEP 7

command "L PEW 258" to access the second analog channel of the slave.

Data blocks for analog value transfer

Authorize the commands read_data_block and write_data_block as described in the

AS-i master manuals. The data blocks can be used for the analog input and analog output

area.

● DP/AS-i LINK Advanced and DP/AS-Interface LINK 20E:

To access analog values, choose one of the data blocks from 140 to 147.

The data blocks have different lengths. Each data block is assigned a contiguous address

space of AS-i slaves. If you operate fewer analog AS-i slaves than the AS-i master

supports, optimize the reserved data area in your application program by making the

appropriate selection. For each AS-i address, the data blocks contain one block of

8 bytes of data. The arrangement of the analog data within this data block corresponds to

that in the cyclic process image.

● DP/AS-i F-Link:

The following data blocks are also available:

– DB 151: Analog image of the output data for AS-i slaves 1 ... 29

– DB 152: Analog image of the input data for AS-i slaves 1 ... 29

– DB 153: Analog image of the output data for AS-i slaves 3 ... 31

– DB 154: Analog image of the input data for AS-i slaves 3 ... 31

System integration

11.2 Data storage in the controller

AS-Interface system

464 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

● CP 343-2 and CP 343-2P:

The same assignment applies here as for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced. Data blocks 140 to

143, however, are restricted to 16 AS-i addresses.

● IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

Choose data block 2 (command interface) for calling up the following AS-i commands:

– Read AS-i line analog input data (Read_AIDI, Index 0019H)

– Write AS-i line analog output data (Write_AODI, Index 001AH)

– Read AS-i slave analog input data (Read_Analog_Input_Data, Index 0053H)

– Write AS-i slave analog output data (Write_Analog_Output_Data, Index 0052H)

System integration

11.3 CP 343-2 integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 465

11.3 CP 343-2 integration with STEP 7

11.3.1 Prerequisites

Before you use the CP 343-2, the following additional devices and bus systems must be

assembled, wired, and set up in accordance with the respective documentation:

● SIMATIC S7-300 CPU or ET 200M

● AS-i cable with AS-i power supply and AS-i slaves

● PC / PG equipped with the following:

– STEP 7, as of version 5.2

– PC / PG connected to CPU

11.3.2 Integration procedure

The table below describes a potential procedure for integrating AS-Interface in your system

via the AS-i master.

Step Procedure

1 Configuring the AS-i master in the rack of the CPU module (Page 466)

2 Parameterizing AS-Interface (Page 467)

3 Completing configuration (Page 468)

4 Switching on the AS-i power supply (Page 468)

5 Addressing AS-i slaves (Page 469)

6 Saving the configuration (Page 469)

7 Copying starting data blocks (Page 470)

System integration

11.3 CP 343-2 integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

466 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.3.3 Configuring the AS-i master in the rack of the CPU module

Configure the CP 343-2 as a module in the rack of the S7 300-CPU in HW Config.

Step Action

1 Open your STEP 7 project with a SIMATIC S7-CPU (e.g. CPU 315).

2 Open HW Config for the SIMATIC S7-CPU.

3 Select the CP 343-2 in the "Hardware Catalog" window.

Path: SIMATIC 300 > CP-300 > AS-Interface > CP 343-2 AS-i

4 Drag & drop the selected CP 343-2 to a free slot on the S7-300 station rack.

Result

Figure 11-12 Configuration of the CP 343-2

The CP 343-2 occupies a free slot on the S7-300 station rack. A detailed view of the

CP 343-2 is displayed in the lower part of the station window. The assigned address spaces

depend on the slot configuration.

System integration

11.3 CP 343-2 integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 467

11.3.4 Parameterizing AS-Interface

Parameterize the properties and behavior of the CP 343-2 as an AS-i master in the

"Properties - CP 343-2 -..." dialog.

Step Action

1 Double-click the slot for the CP 343-2.

A window is displayed containing the "Properties - CP 343-2 -..." dialog, which contains the "General" and

"Addresses" tabs.

2 If required, enter the name and a comment for the AS-i line on the "General" tab.

To configure the binary I/O address spaces for the AS-i slaves, choose the "Addresses" tab.

In the analog address space of the S7-300 CPU, the CP 343-2 occupies 16 bytes for binary data. This memory

is available to standard and A slaves. To enable bit-serial access, you first have to transfer the input data to

certain words (data, flags). Data can be accessed by means of load and transfer commands. Depending on the

system, even byte addresses can only be accessed with word or double-word commands.

E.g.:

L PEW 256 // load I/O input word

T PAD 258 // transfer I/O output double word

Move the output data from the words (data, flags) to the analog address space.

You can access binary I/O data of B slaves via data block 150.

3.1 Set the I/O address for the binary input data or accept the value displayed. If you enter an invalid

address, the system proposes a new one.

Input addresses relate to a max. 16-byte memory area in which the input values of the AS-i slaves are

stored (standard and A slaves).

For the digital output addresses, the same starting value as for the input addresses applies depending

on the system.

3.2 If the "Process image" drop-down list contains the entry "- - -", this means that no process image is

available for the specified address space.

If you plan to access data in the area of the process images and the CPU allows the address space to

be shifted, choose a lower input address.

The process image can be used to access I/O data with individual bit commands.

System integration

11.3 CP 343-2 integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

468 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

3.3 If the "Process image" drop-down list contains selection data, this means that the PROFIBUS DP

master is a CPU that manages partial process images (e.g. CPU 416). Choose a partial process image

number (TPA no.) or the OB1 process image for cyclic updates.

11.3.5 Completing configuration

To complete the project and download it to the CPU, carry out the following steps.

Step Action

1 Save and compile the configuration in the current project.

2 Download the hardware configuration to the module.

11.3.6 Switching on the AS-i power supply

Switch on the AS-i power supply unit for supplying AS-Interface.

Step Action

1 Switch on the voltage for the 30 V AS-i power supply unit.

System integration

11.3 CP 343-2 integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 469

11.3.7 Addressing AS-i slaves

Address the AS-i slaves in accordance with the configuration.

Step Action

1 If the addresses of the AS-i slaves do not match the configuration, the CER and SF LEDs light up.

Address the AS-i slaves in one of the following ways:

• With an addressing unit

• With a STEP 7 user program using the "Change_AS-i_slave_address" command in the command interface

11.3.8 Saving the configuration

In "configuration" mode, the CP 343-2 exchanges data with all the connected AS-i slaves.

The CP 343-2 instantly recognizes new AS-i slaves, activates them, and includes them in

cyclic data exchange (except AS-i slaves with the address "0" or if an AS-i address has been

assigned more than once). The CP 343-2 saves the following AS-i slave data to a

non-volatile memory:

● Addresses

● ID codes

● I/O configuration

Note

Button configuration on the device when the CPU is in "STOP" mode only

Before saving the AS-i configuration, you must ensure that no communication is taking

place with the CPU. If necessary, switch the CPU to "STOP" mode.

System integration

11.3 CP 343-2 integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

470 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

1 If the CM LED does not light up, switch to configuration mode with the SET button.

2 Check whether all the connected AS-i slaves are displayed.

The three LEDs at the top encode B slaves and the "tens" digits in the AS-i addresses. The group display is

switched on a time-controlled basis.

The lower LEDs encode the "ones" digit in the AS-i address.

In the graphic above, for example, the AS-i addresses 10B and 17B are recognized within the "tens" group.

3 Save the configuration by pressing the SET button.

The CP 343-2 saves the recognized actual configuration as a target configuration in the internal EEPROM.

11.3.9 Copying starting data blocks

Copy the starting data blocks from the STEP 7 configuration to the CP 343-2P.

Step Action

1 Switch on the CPU.

The CP 343-2P receives its starting data blocks from the CPU and switches to "protected" mode.

System integration

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 471

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

11.4.1 Prerequisites

Before you use the CP 343-2P, the following additional devices and bus systems must be

assembled, wired, and set up in accordance with their application documentation:

● SIMATIC S7-300 CPU or ET 200M

● AS-i cable with AS-i power supply and AS-i slaves

● PC / PG with the following equipment:

– STEP 7, as of version 5.2

– PC / PG connected to CPU

11.4.2 Integration procedure

The table below describes a potential procedure for integrating AS-Interface in your system

via the AS-i master.

Step Procedure

1 Configuring the AS-i master in the rack of the CPU module (Page 471)

2 Parameterizing AS-Interface (Page 473)

3 Configuring AS-i slaves (Page 475)

4 Specifying AS-i slaves (Page 476)

5 Completing configuration (Page 479)

6 Switching on the AS-i power supply (Page 479)

7 Addressing AS-i slaves (Page 479)

8 Copying starting data blocks (Page 479)

11.4.3 Configuring the AS-i master in the rack of the CPU module

Configure CP 343-2P as a module in the rack of the S7 300-CPU in HW Config.

Step Action

1 Open your STEP 7 project with a SIMATIC S7-CPU (e.g. CPU 315).

2 Open HW Config for the SIMATIC S7-CPU.

3 Select the CP 343-2P in the "Hardware Catalog" window.

Path: SIMATIC 300 > CP-300 > AS-Interface > CP 343-2 P AS-i

4 Drag & drop the selected CP 343-2P to a free slot on the S7-300 station rack.

System integration

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

472 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Result

Figure 11-13 Configuration of the CP 343-2P

The CP 343-2P occupies a free slot on the S7-300 station rack. A detailed view of the

CP 343-2P is displayed in the lower part of the station window. The predefined address

spaces depend on the slot configuration.

System integration

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 473

11.4.4 Parameterizing AS-Interface

Parameterize the properties and behavior of the CP 343-2P as an AS-i master in the

"Properties - CP 343-2 P -..." dialog.

Step Action

1 Double-click the slot for the CP 343-2P.

A window is displayed containing the "Properties - CP 343-2 P -..." dialog, which contains the "General",

"Addresses", "Operating Parameters", "Slave Configuration", and "AS-i Slave options" tabs.

2 If required, enter the name and a comment for the AS-i line on the "General" tab.

To configure the binary I/O address spaces for the AS-i slaves, choose the "Addresses" tab.

In the analog address space of the S7-300, the CP 343-2P occupies 16 bytes for binary data. This memory is

available to standard and A slaves. To enable bit-serial access, you first have to transfer the input data to

certain words (data, flags). Data can be accessed by means of load and transfer commands. Depending on the

system, even byte addresses can only be accessed with word or double-word commands.

E.g.:

L PEW 256 // load I/O input word

T PAD 258 // transfer I/O output double word

Move the output data from the words (data, flags) to the analog address space.

You can access binary I/O data of B slaves via data block 150.

3.1 Set the I/O address for the binary input data or accept the displayed value. If you enter an invalid

address, the system proposes a new one.

Input addresses relate to a max. 16 byte memory area in which the input values of the AS-i slaves are

stored (standard and A slaves).

For the digital output addresses, the same starting value as for the input addresses applies depending

on the system.

3.2 If the "Process image" drop-down list contains the entry "- - -", this means that no process image is

available for the specified address space.

If you plan to access data in the area of the process images and the CPU allows the address space to

be shifted, choose a lower input address.

The process image can be used to access I/O data with individual bit commands.

System integration

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

474 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

3.3 If the "Process image" drop-down list contains selection data, this means that the PROFIBUS DP

master is a CPU that manages partial process images (e.g. CPU 416). Choose a partial process image

number (PPI no.) or the OB1 process image for cyclic updates.

On the "Operating Parameters" tab, set the behavior of the CP 343-2P as an AS-i master.

4.1 Activate the alarm enable for diagnostic interrupts (OB82).

Diagnostic interrupts are triggered if the following faults occur:

• Group fault (SF)

• Internal fault (= device fault)

• External fault (e.g. AS-i slave failed)

• At least one AS-i slave does not match the target specification.

• Voltage on AS-i bus too low (AS-i Power Fail, APF)

• Hardware fault (internal watchdog)

• EEPROM defective

4.2 Choose the option for automatic address programming.

When you choose the option "Automatic address programming" (default), an AS-i slave that has failed

can be replaced by a new, identical slave with the address "0" (as-delivered state). The CP 343-2P

automatically assigns the new slave the address of the old one.

If this option is deactivated, you have to program the address into the new slave when the slave is

replaced.

System integration

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 475

11.4.5 Configuring AS-i slaves

Configure the AS-i slaves within the address table.

Note

Reading the actual configuration to the AS-i address table

If an online connection has been established, you can read an existing AS-i configuration to

the AS-i address table.

1. Skip the commissioning procedure until you reach Completing configuration (Page 479).

2. Follow the integration procedure until Copying starting data blocks (Page 479).

3. Copy the current configuration with the command "Upload to PG".

"AS-i Slave Options" tab in the "Properties - CP 343-2 P - ..." dialog.

4. Parameterize the AS-i slaves subsequently in STEP 7.

Step Action

1 Choose the "Slave Configuration" tab.

The AS-i address table contains an overview of all the AS-i slaves that have already been configured on the

CP 343-2P.

Designations, configured I/O address spaces, and the codes of the AS-i slaves are displayed sorted according

to AS-i addresses. One line for standard / A slaves and one line for B slaves are provided for each

AS-i address.

2 You have the following options for assigning empty address lines:

• Via the properties dialog for an AS-i slave:

open the dialog by double-clicking an address line or by choosing "Edit" from the context menu.

• Copy and insert via the clipboard.

3 Note that standard slaves and certain analog slaves use a full AS-i address (A and B address line).

System integration

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

476 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.4.6 Specifying AS-i slaves

Specify the AS-i slaves in the "Properties - CP 343-2 P - ..." dialog in the corresponding

AS-i address line.

Step Action

1 Double-click an address line in the AS-i address table.

A window is displayed with the "Properties - CP 343-2 -..." dialog, which contains the "General" and

"Configuration" tabs.

You can specify the AS-i slaves on the "Configuration" tab in one of the following ways: 2

A In the "Module" drop-down list, select a Siemens module via its order number.

The IO, ID, and ID2 codes are permanently defined by means of the properties of the Siemens modules.

On the other hand, the ID1 code can be variable on certain modules.

System integration

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 477

Step Action

B Choose a Siemens module from the AS-Interface catalog. To do so, click "Selection...".

The following selection options are available for AS-i slaves:

• Navigation through the hierarchical folder structure according to module type

• Search function using a keyword from the infotext

Transfer the module you have selected to the configuration by double-clicking it or selecting it and

clicking "Apply".

The IO code, ID code and ID2 code are permanently assigned by means of the properties of the

Siemens modules. On the other hand, the ID1 code can be variable on certain modules.

System integration

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

478 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

C If you cannot select an AS-i slave via the order number or AS-Interface catalog, use a universal slave.

The following modules are available:

• "AS-i Standard Slave Universal" for AS-i slaves that are assigned a full AS-i address

• "AS-i A/B Slave Universal" for AS-i slaves in the extended address space

Set the IO and ID codes in accordance with the manufacturer guidelines. If the ID1 code and ID2 code

are not specified, choose FH.

Parameterize the AS-i slaves.

3.1 If the selected Siemens modules support special parameter settings, you can select them from a range

of drop-down lists.

The bit checkboxes cannot be changed separately. Their assignment is predefined by the modules or is

based on the entries in the adjacent fields.

3.2 Set the parameter bits for universal slaves in accordance with the manufacturer guidelines.

With an A/B module, the checkbox for parameter bit 3 is not displayed.

4 If required, enter the name and a comment for an AS-i slave on the "General" tab. When you close the dialog,

your entries appear in the AS-i address table.

System integration

11.4 CP 343-2P integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 479

11.4.7 Completing configuration

To complete the project and download it to the CPU, carry out the following steps.

Step Action

1 Save and compile the configuration in the current project.

2 Download the hardware configuration to the module.

11.4.8 Switching on the AS-i power supply

Switch on the AS-i power supply unit for supplying AS-Interface.

Step Action

1 Switch on the voltage for the 30 V AS-i power supply unit.

11.4.9 Addressing AS-i slaves

Address the AS-i slaves in accordance with the configuration.

Step Action

1 If the addresses of the AS-i slaves do not match the configuration, the CER and SF LEDs light up.

Address the AS-i slaves in one of the following ways:

• With an addressing unit

• With a STEP 7 user program using the "Change_AS-i_slave_address" command in the command interface

11.4.10 Copying starting data blocks

Copy the starting data blocks from the STEP 7 configuration to the CP 343-2P.

Step Action

1 Switch on the CPU.

The CP 343-2P receives its starting data blocks from the CPU and switches to "protected" mode.

System integration   
11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7 
 AS-Interface system 
480 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 
11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7 
11.5.1 Prerequisites 
Before you use DP/AS-Interface Link 20E, the following additional devices and bus systems 
must be assembled, wired, and set up in accordance with their application documentation: 
● SIMATIC S7-CPU with PROFIBUS DP master and PROFIBUS cable 
● AS-i cable with AS-i power supply and AS-i slaves 
● PC / PG with the following equipment: 
– STEP 7, as of version 5.0 with Service Pack 3 
– PC / PG connected to CPU 
11.5.2 Integration procedure 
The table below describes a potential procedure for integrating AS-Interface in your system 
via the AS-i master. 
Step  Procedure 
1  Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system (Page 481)  
2  Parameterizing DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a PROFIBUS DP slave (Page 482)  
3  Parameterizing AS-Interface (Page 483)  
4  Configuring AS-i slaves (Page 485)  
5  Specifying AS-i slaves (Page 487)  
6  Completing configuration (Page 490)  
7  Switching on the AS-i power supply (Page 490)  
8  Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-Interface Link 20E (Page 491)  
9  Addressing AS-i slaves (Page 492)  
10  Copying starting data blocks (Page 492)  
 

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 481

11.5.3 Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system

Configure DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a modular PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Open your STEP 7 project with a SIMATIC S7-CPU with the PROFIBUS DP master (e.g. CPU 315-2 DP).

2 Open HW Config for the PROFIBUS DP master.

3 If the DP master system is not yet available on the CPU, you have to create it.

To do so, insert the DP master system in slot X2 (DP) of the CPU (e.g. via the "Insert master system" context

menu).

4 Select the DP/AS-Interface Link 20E in the "Hardware Catalog" window.

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > DP/AS-i > DP/AS-i Link 20E > Product version 3

A DP/AS-Interface Link 20E in product version 1 or 2 is not equipped with the "Load to PG" function.

5 Drag & drop the selected DP/AS-Interface Link 20E to the DP master system.

The "Properties - PROFIBUS interface..." dialog is displayed.

6 Choose the PROFIBUS address for DP/AS-Interface Link 20E and close the dialog.

Result

Figure 11-14 Configuration of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E on the DP master system

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

482 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is attached to the DP master system as an icon. A detailed view of

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E along with its possible slots and DP IDs is displayed in the lower

part of the station window. This is followed by the lines for the AS-i address table, which has

yet to be maintained.

11.5.4 Parameterizing DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a PROFIBUS DP slave

Parameterize DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Double-click the icon for DP/AS-Interface Link 20E on the DP master system. A window is displayed with the

"Properties - DP Slave" dialog, which contains the "General" tab.

On the "General" tab, set the properties of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a node on the PROFIBUS DP.

2.1 Enter the diagnostics address or use the displayed value.

If you enter an invalid address, the system proposes a new one.

The PROFIBUS DP master uses the diagnostics address to find out about a failure or return of a

PROFIBUS DP slave and starts the OB 86. You can also call up the full diagnosis of the slave under

this address with SFC 13 DPNRM_DG and include it in your user program.

2.2 Activate the watchdog so that DP/AS-Interface Link 20E can respond to errors in the PROFIBUS DP

master or if bus data traffic is interrupted.

If the PROFIBUS DP master does not address DP/AS-Interface Link 20E within the configured

monitoring time, the PROFIBUS DP slave switches to safe mode and sets all outputs to "0".

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 483

11.5.5 Parameterizing AS-Interface

Parameterize the properties and behavior of DP/AS-Interface 20E as an AS-i master in the

"Properties - DP/AS-i - ..." dialog.

Step Action

1 In the AS-i address table, double-click the fourth line with the "DP/AS-i" module.

A window is displayed with the "Properties - DP/AS-i - ..." dialog, which contains the "General", "Digital

Addresses", "Operating Parameters", and "AS-i Slave Options" tabs.

2 If required, enter the name and a comment for the AS-i line on the "General" tab.

To configure the binary I/O address spaces for the AS-i slaves, choose the "Digital Addresses" tab.

3.1 Set the I/O address for the binary input data or accept the value displayed. If you enter an invalid

address, the system proposes a new one.

Digital input addresses relate to a max. 32-byte memory area in which the binary input values of the

AS-i slaves are stored.

For the digital output addresses, the same starting value as for the input addresses applies depending

on the system.

3.2 If you use the CLASSIC sort type for the I/O addresses (default setting), you can set the "Reserved

Length" value.

You can use this parameter to suppress unassigned I/O addresses at the lower end of the table or set a

contiguous address space for future extensions to AS-Interface.

The "Assigned Length" shows the amount of memory currently occupied by the AS-i slaves in bytes.

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

484 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

3.3 If the "Process Image" drop-down list contains selection data, this means that the PROFIBUS DP

master is a CPU that manages partial process images (e.g. CPU 416).

Choose a partial process image number (PPI no.) or the OB1 process image for cyclic updates.

3.4 Choose a sort type for the I/O addresses of the AS-i slaves (default: "CLASSIC").

The "Pack" button moves the I/O addresses of the AS-i modules in the AS-i address table in such a way

that they require less room in the address space. In addition, the "Reserved Length" is optimized.

The "CLASSIC sorting" pushbutton sorts the I/O addresses according to AS-i addresses. The

standard / A slaves are at the beginning, followed by the B slaves.

The "LINEAR sorting" pushbutton sorts the I/O addresses in ascending order. Standard / A slaves and

B slaves with the same AS-i address are combined in one byte (standard / A slave in the low nibble,

B slave in the high nibble).

On the "Operating Parameters" tab, set the behavior of DP/AS-Interface 20E as an AS-i master. 4

4.1 Activate the alarm enable for diagnostic interrupts (OB82).

Diagnostic interrupts are triggered if the following faults occur:

• Group fault (SF)

• Internal fault (= device fault)

• External fault (e.g. AS-i slave failed)

• At least one AS-i slave does not match the target specification.

• Voltage on AS-i bus too low (AS-i Power Fail, APF)

• Hardware fault (internal watchdog)

• EEPROM defective

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 485

Step Action

4.2 Choose the option for automatic address programming.

When you choose the option "Automatic address programming" (default), an AS-i slave that has failed

can be replaced by a new, identical slave with the address "0" (on delivery). DP/AS-Interface 20E

automatically assigns the new slave the address of the old one.

If this option is deactivated, you have to program the address in to the new slave when manually.

11.5.6 Configuring AS-i slaves

Configure the AS-i slaves within the address table.

Note

Reading the actual configuration to the AS-i address table

If an online connection has been established, you can read an existing AS-i configuration to

the AS-i address table.

1. Skip the commissioning procedure until you reach Completing configuration (Page 490).

2. Follow the integration procedure until Copying starting data blocks (Page 492).

3. Then copy the current configuration with the command "Download to PG".

"AS-i Slave Options" tab in the "Properties - DP/AS-i - ..." dialog.

4. Parameterize the AS-i slaves subsequently in STEP 7.

Step Action

1 Click the DP/AS-Interface Link 20E icon on the DP master system.

A detailed view of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is displayed in the lower part of the station window. The fourth line

in the table contains address information for the binary signals.

The "DP/AS-i Link 20E" module is followed by the lines for the AS-i address table, which has yet to be

maintained. One line for standard / A slaves and one line for B slaves are provided for each AS-i address.

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

486 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

2 First enter dummy modules in the AS-i address table. You can then specify these later on.

The following dummy modules are available:

• AS-i A/B slave for AS-i slaves in the extended address space

• AS-i standard slave

You have the following options for assigning the AS-i address lines:

• Drag and drop an AS-i slave from the hardware catalog

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > DP/AS-i > DP/AS-i Link 20E > Product version 3

• Select an AS-i slave via the context menu "Insert Object..."

Path: Product Version 3

• Copy and insert via the clipboard.

• Move the line content by pressing down the left mouse button.

A configured slave changes its AS-i address as a result.

3 Note the following rules for assigning addresses:

• The lines containing potential target addresses are highlighted in green.

• Standard slaves and certain analog slaves use a full AS-i address (A and B address line).

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 487

11.5.7 Specifying AS-i slaves

Specify the AS-i slaves in the "Properties - AS-i standard slave - ..." or

"Properties - AS-i A/B slave - ..." dialog.

Step Action

1 Double-click an occupied address line in the AS-i address table.

• For an "AS-i standard slave" module, the window containing the "Properties - AS-i Standard Slave - ..."

dialog is displayed.

• For an "AS-i A/B slave" module, the window containing the "Properties - AS-i A/B Slave - ..." dialog is

displayed.

You can specify the AS-i slaves on the "Configuration" tab in one of the following ways: 2

A In the "Module" drop-down list, select a Siemens module via its order number.

The IO, ID, and ID2 codes are permanently defined by the properties of the Siemens modules. On the

other hand, the ID1 code can be variable on certain modules.

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

488 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

B Choose a Siemens module from the AS-Interface catalog. To do so, click "Selection...".

The following selection options are available for AS-i slaves:

• Navigation through the hierarchical folder structure according to module type

• Search function using a keyword from the infotext

Transfer the module you have selected to the configuration by double-clicking it or selecting it and

clicking "Apply".

The IO code, ID code and ID2 code are fixed by the properties of the Siemens modules. On the other

hand, the ID1 code can be variable on certain modules.

C For AS-i slaves that are not available for selection, set the IO and ID codes in accordance with the

manufacturer guidelines. If the ID1 code and ID2 code are not specified, choose FH.

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 489

Step Action

Parameterize the AS-i slaves.

3.1 If the selected Siemens modules support special parameter settings, you can select them from a range

of drop-down lists.

The bit checkboxes cannot be changed separately. Their assignment is predefined by the modules or

results from the entries in the adjacent fields.

3.2 If the AS-i slaves are not available for selection, set the parameter bits in accordance with the

manufacturer guidelines.

With an A/B module, the checkbox for parameter bit 3 is not displayed.

4 Accept the system proposal for the binary input and output address space.

If you change addresses for binary data exchange, note the I/O configuration of your AS-i slaves.

If a binary AS-i slave has not been assigned any inputs or outputs, the corresponding field is empty.

5 If required, enter the name and a comment for an AS-i slave on the "General" tab. When you close the dialog,

your entries appear in the AS-i address table.

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

490 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.5.8 Completing configuration

To complete the project and download it to the CPU, carry out the following steps.

Step Action

1 Save and compile the configuration in the current project.

2 Download the hardware configuration to the module.

11.5.9 Switching on the AS-i power supply

Note

Only set addresses on the device when PROFIBUS communication has been interrupted

When you make the required settings on DP/AS-Interface Link 20E, you must ensure that no

communication is currently taking place with the PROFIBUS DP master. If necessary, switch

off the CPU or disconnect the PROFIBUS plug.

Switch on the AS-i power supply unit for supplying AS-Interface.

Step Action

1 Switch on the voltage for the 30 V AS-i power supply unit.

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 491

11.5.10 Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

Set the PROFIBUS address of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as specified in the configuration

directly on the device.

Step Action

1 Press the "DISPLAY" button under the front cover until the ADR LED at the top lights up red.

If you start from the status display, for example, you have to press the button 15 times.

On the other 7 LEDs, DP/AS–Interface Link 20E indicates the current PROFIBUS address.

The bit significance of the LEDs yields the set PROFIBUS address.

For example, the LEDs in the diagram above signal the PROFIBUS address: 64 + 4 + 1 = 69.

2 If you want to retain the set PROFIBUS address, press the DISPLAY button.

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E returns to the status display.

Enter the new PROFIBUS address.

Use the same PROFIBUS address as in the configuration. Address 1 to 125 only can be used for exchanging

data with the PROFIBUS DP master.

3.1 Press the "SET" button.

The flashing BF LED indicates the most-significant bit in the PROFIBUS address.

3.2 To set the bit, choose "SET"; to delete the bit, choose "DISPLAY".

When the bit is set, the LED lights up. After you have made the relevant entry, the SF LED starts

flashing to indicate the next bit.

3.3 Set or delete the remaining address bits in the same way.

Once all the address bits have been set, the corresponding LEDs flash, alternating between red/green

or yellow/green.

4 If you want to apply the new PROFIBUS address, press the SET button.

If you want to reject the PROFIBUS address, press the DISPLAY button. To enter a new address, start at step

3.1.

System integration

11.5 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

492 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.5.11 Addressing AS-i slaves

Address the AS-i slaves in accordance with the configuration.

Step Action

1 If the addresses of the AS-i slaves do not match the configuration, the CER and SF LEDs light up.

Address the AS-i slaves in one of the following ways:

• With an addressing unit

• With a STEP 7 user program using the "Change_AS-i_slave_address" command in the command interface

11.5.12 Copying starting data blocks

Copy the starting data blocks from the STEP 7 configuration to DP/AS-Interface Link 20E.

Step Action

1 Switch on the CPU or connect the device to PROFIBUS.

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E receives its starting data blocks from the CPU and switches to "protected" mode.

 System integration 
  11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD 
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  493 
11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD 
11.6.1 Prerequisites 
Before you use DP/AS-Interface Link 20E, the following additional devices and bus systems 
must be assembled, wired, and set up in accordance with their application documentation: 
● CPU with PROFIBUS DP master and PROFIBUS cable 
● AS-i cable with AS-i power supply and AS-i slaves 
● PC / PG with the following equipment: 
– PLC-specific configuration tool (e.g. STEP 7) 
– GSD file for DP/AS-Interface Link 20E 
The GSD file for DP/AS-Interface Link 20E 
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/5281638) can be downloaded 
free of charge from the Internet. 
– PC / PG connected to CPU 
11.6.2 Integration procedure 
The table below describes a potential procedure for integrating AS-Interface in your system 
via the AS-i master. 
Step  Procedure 
1  Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system (Page 494)  
2  Parameterizing DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a PROFIBUS DP slave (Page 496)  
3  Parameterizing AS-Interface (Page 497)  
4  Parameterizing binary AS-i slaves (Page 498)  
5  Completing configuration (Page 499)  
6  Switching on the AS-i power supply (Page 499)  
7  Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-Interface Link 20E (Page 500)  
8  Addressing AS-i slaves (Page 501)  
9  Saving the configuration (Page 501)  
10  Copying starting data blocks (Page 502)  
 

System integration

11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

494 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.6.3 Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system

Configure DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a modular PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Open your STEP 7 project with a CPU with the PROFIBUS DP master (e.g. CPU 315-2 DP).

2 Open HW Config for the PROFIBUS DP master.

3 If the DP master system is not yet available on the CPU, you have to create it.

To do so, insert the DP master system in slot X2 (DP) of the CPU (e.g. via the "Insert master system" context

menu).

4 Select the DP/AS-Interface Link 20E in the "Hardware Catalog" window.

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > Other FIELD DEVICES > Gateway > AS-I > DP/AS-i Link 20E DPV1

5 Drag & drop the selected DP/AS-Interface Link 20E to the DP master system.

The "Properties - PROFIBUS interface..." dialog is displayed.

6 Choose the PROFIBUS address for DP/AS-Interface Link 20E and close the dialog.

7 Drag & drop the module "16/16 Byte (AKF)" or "32/32 Byte (SKF)" to the free slot 1 in the lower part of the

station window.

• "16/16 Byte (AKF)" allows up to 31 standard and A slaves to be used. B slaves cannot be used.

• "32/32 Byte (SKF)" allows A/B slaves to be used that are set to B addresses. In this case, the entire binary

data interface of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E can be used.

• The universal module cannot be used.

System integration

11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 495

Result

Figure 11-15 Configuration of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E on the DP master system

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is attached to the DP master system as an icon. A detailed view of

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E along with the DP ID and the occupied slot 1 is displayed in the

lower part of the station window.

System integration

11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

496 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.6.4 Parameterizing DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a PROFIBUS DP slave

Parameterize DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Double-click the DP/AS-Interface Link 20E icon on the DP master system.

A window is displayed containing the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog, which contains the "General" and

"Parameterization" tabs.

On the "General" tab, set the properties of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a node on the PROFIBUS DP.

2.1 Enter the diagnostics address or use the displayed value.

If you enter an invalid address, the system proposes a new one.

The PROFIBUS DP master uses the diagnostics address to find out about a failure or return of a

PROFIBUS DP slave and starts the OB 86. You can also call up the full diagnosis of the slave under

this address with SFC 13 DPNRM_DG and include it in your user program.

2.2 Activate the watchdog so that DP/AS-Interface Link 20E can respond to errors in the PROFIBUS DP

master or if bus data traffic is interrupted.

If the PROFIBUS DP master does not address DP/AS-Interface Link 20E within the configured

monitoring time, the PROFIBUS DP slave switches to safe mode and sets all outputs to "0".

System integration

11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 497

11.6.5 Parameterizing AS-Interface

Parameterize the properties and behavior of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as a PROFIBUS DP

slave and AS-i Master on the "Parameterization" tab.

Step Action

1 Call up the "Parameterize" tab in the "Properties - DP-Slave" dialog.

2 In the relevant option box, activate the alarm enable for diagnostic interrupts (OB82).

Diagnostic interrupts are triggered if the following faults occur:

• Group fault (SF)

• Internal fault (= device fault)

• External fault (e.g. AS-i slave failed)

• At least one AS-i slave does not match the target specification.

• Voltage on AS-i bus too low (AS-i Power Fail, APF)

• Hardware fault (internal watchdog)

• EEPROM defective

3 When you change the operating mode of the PROFIBUS DP master from DPV1 to DPV0, you first have to

deactivate the "Diagnostic interrupt (OB 82)" option.

Then choose the operating mode from the "Interrupt Mode" drop-down list.

4 Use only the parameters described above to make changes to the parameterization telegram. To prevent any

unforeseen events, do not change any values in the "Hex parameterization" folder.

System integration

11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

498 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.6.6 Parameterizing binary AS-i slaves

Parameterize the AS-i slaves on the "Parameter Assignment" tab and in the

"Properties - DP Slave" dialog for slot 1.

The parameters must match the configuration of the AS-i slaves, which you can configure on

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E later on during commissioning.

Step Action

1 In the "Device-specific parameters" folder, choose the parameter bits of the AS-i slaves from the drop-down

lists.

For explanations of the individual parameters, consult the AS-i slave manuals.

2 To close the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog, confirm your settings with "OK".

3 Double-click line 1 in the configuration table with the selected module (16/16 Bytes (AKF) or

32/32 Bytes (SKF)).

A window is displayed with the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog, which contains the "Address / ID" tab.

4 On this tab, set the I/O address of the binary output data or accept the system proposal.

Depending on the selected module, the system calculates the end address and signals any errors that occur.

When configuration is carried out using the GSD file, the I/O data of the AS-i slaves is sorted according to the

CLASSIC sort type.

5 Set the I/O address for the binary input data or accept the system proposal.

Depending on the selected module, the system calculates the end address and reports any errors that occur.

System integration

11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 499

Step Action

6 If the "Process Image" drop-down list contains selection data, this means that the PROFIBUS DP master is a

CPU that manages partial process images (e.g. CPU 416).

Choose a partial process image number (PPI no.) or the OB1 process image for cyclic updates.

11.6.7 Completing configuration

To complete the project and download it to the CPU, carry out the following steps.

Step Action

1 Save and compile the configuration in the current project.

2 Download the hardware configuration to the module.

11.6.8 Switching on the AS-i power supply

Note

Only set addresses on the device when PROFIBUS communication has been interrupted

When you make the required settings on DP/AS-Interface Link 20E, you must ensure that no

communication is currently taking place with the PROFIBUS DP master. If necessary, switch

off the CPU or disconnect the PROFIBUS plug.

Switch on the AS-i power supply unit for supplying AS-Interface.

Step Action

1 Switch on the voltage for the 30 V AS-i power supply unit.

System integration

11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

500 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.6.9 Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

Set the PROFIBUS address of DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as specified in the configuration

directly on the device.

Step Action

1 Press the "DISPLAY" button under the front cover until the ADR LED at the top lights up red.

If you start from the status display, for example, you have to press the button 15 times.

On the other 7 LEDs, DP/AS–Interface Link 20E shows the current PROFIBUS address.

The bit significance of the LEDs yields the set PROFIBUS address.

For example, the LEDs in the diagram above signal the PROFIBUS address: 64 + 4 + 1 = 69.

2 If you want to retain the set PROFIBUS address, press the DISPLAY button.

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E returns to the status display.

Enter the new PROFIBUS address.

Use the same PROFIBUS address as in the configuration. Address 1 to 125 only can be used for exchanging

data with the PROFIBUS DP master.

3.1 Press the "SET" button.

The flashing BF LED shows the most-significant bit in the PROFIBUS address.

3.2 To set the bit, choose "SET"; to delete the bit, choose "DISPLAY".

When the bit is set, the LED lights up. After you have made the relevant entry, the SF LED starts

flashing to display the next bit.

3.3 Set or delete the remaining address bits in the same way.

Once all the address bits have been set, the corresponding LEDs flash, alternating between red/green

or yellow/green.

4 If you want to apply the new PROFIBUS address, press the SET button.

If you want to reject the PROFIBUS address, press the DISPLAY button. To enter a new address, start at

step 3.1.

System integration

11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 501

11.6.10 Addressing AS-i slaves

Address the AS-i slaves in accordance with the configuration.

Step Action

1 If the addresses of the AS-i slaves do not match the configuration, the CER and SF LEDs light up.

Address the AS-i slaves in one of the following ways:

• With an addressing unit

• With a STEP 7 user program using the "Change_AS-i_slave_address" command in the command interface

11.6.11 Saving the configuration

In "configuration" mode, DP/AS-Interface Link 20E exchanges data with all the connected

AS-i slaves. DP/AS-Interface Link 20E instantly recognizes new AS-i slaves, activates them,

and includes them in cyclic data exchange (except AS-i slaves with the address "0" or if an

AS-i address has been assigned more than once). DP/AS-Interface Link 20E saves the the

following AS-i slave data to a non-volatile memory:

● Addresses

● ID codes

● I/O configuration

●

Step Action

1 Press the "DISPLAY" button.

The LED display switches to "status display" mode.

2 Press the "DISPLAY" button.

The LED display switches to "slave display" mode.

Check whether all the connected AS-i slaves appear in the display.

The three upper LEDs encode a group of five AS-i slaves. The five lower LEDs indicate the recognized slaves.

Standard and A slaves light up green permanently, while B slaves flash.

In the graphic above, for example, AS-i addresses 6 and 8 are recognized within the second group of five.

3.1 To display the next group, press the DISPLAY button.

System integration

11.6 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

502 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

3.2 Once the last group has been displayed, press DISPLAY twice.

The LED display returns to "slave display" mode.

4 Save the configuration by pressing the SET button.

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E saves the recognized actual configuration as a target configuration in the internal

EEPROM.

11.6.12 Copying starting data blocks

Copy the starting data blocks from the configuration to DP/AS-Interface Link 20E.

Step Action

1 Switch on the CPU or connect the device to PROFIBUS.

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E receives its starting data blocks from the CPU and switches to "protected" mode.

 System integration 
  11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7 
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  503 
11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7 
11.7.1 Prerequisites 
Before you use DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, the following additional devices and bus systems 
must be assembled, wired, and set up in accordance with their application documentation: 
● SIMATIC S7-CPU with PROFIBUS DP master and PROFIBUS cable 
● AS-i cable with AS-i power supply and AS-i slaves 
When you use DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a double master, two independent 
AS-i networks can be connected. 
● PC / PG with the following equipment: 
– STEP 7, as of version 5.4 
– PC / PG connected to CPU 
 
  Note 
Power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 
The AS-i shaped cable (line 1) supplies DP/AS-i LINK Advanced with voltage. 
Alternatively, a 24 V DC power supply can be provided via the power supply unit. 
11.7.2 Integration procedure 
The table below describes a potential procedure for integrating AS-Interface in your system 
via the AS-i master. 
Step  Procedure 
1  Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system (Page 504)  
2  Parameterizing DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a PROFIBUS DP slave (Page 505)  
3  Parameterizing AS-Interface (Page 506)  
4  Configuring AS-i slaves (Page 509)  
5  Specifying AS-i slaves (Page 511)  
6  Completing configuration (Page 514)  
7  Switching on the AS-i power supply (Page 514)  
8  Switching on the optional power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced (Page 514)  
9  Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced (Page 515)  
10  Addressing AS-i slaves (Page 515)  
11  Copying starting data blocks (Page 516)  
 

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

504 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.7.3 Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system

Configure DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a modular PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Open your STEP 7 project with a SIMATIC S7-CPU with the PROFIBUS DP master (e.g. CPU 315-2 DP).

2 Open HW Config for the PROFIBUS DP master.

3 If the DP master system is not yet available on the CPU, you have to create it.

To do so, insert the DP master system in slot X2 (DP) of the CPU (e.g. via the "Insert master system" context

menu).

4 Choose DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in the "Hardware Catalog" window.

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > DP/AS-i > DP/AS-i LINK Advanced > 6GK1411-2BA10 > V1.0 (or as double master

6GK1411-2BA20 > V1.0)

5 Drag & drop the selected DP/AS-i LINK Advanced to the DP master system.

The "Properties - PROFIBUS Interface..." dialog opens.

6 Choose the PROFIBUS address for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced and close the dialog.

Results for single and double master

Figure 11-16 Configuration of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as single master on the DP master system

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 505

Figure 11-17 Configuration of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as double master on the DP master system

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is attached to the DP master system as an icon. A detailed view of

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced along with its possible slots and DP IDs is displayed in the lower

part of the station window. This is followed by the lines for the AS-i address table, which has

yet to be maintained.

11.7.4 Parameterizing DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a PROFIBUS DP slave

Parameterize DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Double-click the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced icon on the DP master system. A window is displayed containing the

"Properties - DP Slave" dialog, which contains the "General" tab.

2 On the "General" tab, set the properties of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a node on the PROFIBUS DP.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

506 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

2.1 Enter the diagnostics address or use the displayed value.

If you enter an invalid address, the system proposes a new one.

The PROFIBUS DP master uses the diagnostics address to find out about a failure or return of a

PROFIBUS DP slave and starts the OB 86. You can also call up the full diagnosis of the slave under

this address with SFC 13 DPNRM_DG and include it in your user program.

2.2 Activate response monitoring so that DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can respond to errors in the

PROFIBUS DP master or if bus data traffic is interrupted.

If the PROFIBUS DP master does not address DP/AS-i LINK Advanced within the configured monitoring

time, the PROFIBUS DP slave switches to safe mode and sets all the outputs to "0".

11.7.5 Parameterizing AS-Interface

Parameterize the properties and behavior of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as an AS-i master in

the "Properties - DP/AS-i ..." dialog.

Step Action

1 In the AS-i address table, double-click the first line with the "DP/AS-i 1M" module.

The following settings apply to DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a single master or to AS-i line 1 of a double master.

A window is displayed containing the "Properties - DP/AS-i 1M - ..." dialog, which contains "General", "Digital

Addresses", "Operating Parameters", and "AS-i Slave Options" tabs.

2 If required, enter the name and a comment for the AS-i line on the "General" tab.

3 To configure the binary I/O address spaces for the AS-i slaves, choose the "Digital Addresses" tab.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 507

Step Action

3.1 Set the I/O address for the binary input data or accept the displayed value. If you enter an invalid

address, the system proposes a new one.

Digital input addresses relate to a max. 32 byte memory area in which the binary input values of the

AS-i slaves are stored.

For the digital output addresses, the same starting value as for the input addresses applies depending

on the system.

3.2 If you use the CLASSIC sort type for the I/O addresses (default setting), you can set the "Reserved

lengths" value.

You can use this parameter to suppress unassigned I/O addresses at the lower end of the table or fix an

associated address space for future extensions on AS-Interface.

The "Assigned length" shows the amount of memory currently occupied by the AS-i slaves in bytes.

3.3 If the "Process image" drop-down list contains selection data, this means that the PROFIBUS DP

master is a CPU that manages partial process images (e.g. CPU 416).

Choose a partial process image number (PPI no.) or the OB1 process image for cyclic updates.

3.4 Choose a sort type for the I/O addresses of the AS-i slaves (default: "CLASSIC").

The "Pack" button moves the I/O addresses of the AS-i modules in the AS-i address table in such a way

that they require less room in the address space. In addition, the "Reserved length" is optimized.

The "CLASSIC sorting" pushbutton sorts the I/O addresses according to AS-i address. The

standard / A slaves are at the beginning, followed by the B slaves.

The "LINEAR sorting" pushbutton sorts the I/O addresses in ascending order. Standard / A slaves and

B slaves with the same AS-i address are combined in one byte (standard / A slave in the low nibble,

B slave in the high nibble).

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

508 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

On the "Operating Parameters" tab, set the behavior of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as an AS-i master.

4.1 Activate the alarm enable for diagnostic interrupts (OB82).

Diagnostic interrupts are triggered if the following faults occur:

• Group fault (SF)

• Internal fault (= device fault)

• External fault (e.g. AS-i slave failed)

• At least one AS-i slave does not match the target specification.

• Voltage on AS-i bus too low (AS-i Power Fail, APF)

• Hardware fault (internal watchdog)

• EEPROM defective

4.2 Choose the option for automatic address programming.

When you choose the option "Automatic AS-i address programming" (default), an AS-i slave that has

failed can be replaced by a new, identical slave with the address "0" (on delivery).

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced automatically assigns the new slave the address of the old one.

If this option is deactivated, you have to program the address in to the new slave when manually.

5 To close the "Properties - DP/AS-i 1M - ..." dialog, confirm your settings with "OK".

6 When you parameterize AS-i line 2 of a double master, double-click in the address table the second line with

the module "DP/AS-i 2M".

A window is displayed containing the "Properties - DP/AS-i 2M - ..." dialog, which contains "General",

"Digital Addresses", "Operating Parameters", and "AS-i Slave Options" tabs.

7 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for AS-i line 2.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 509

11.7.6 Configuring AS-i slaves

Configure the AS-i slaves in accordance with the address table.

Note

Reading the pending actual configuration to the AS-i address table

If an online connection has been established, you can read an existing AS-i configuration to

the AS-i address table.

1. Skip the integration procedure until you reach Completing configuration (Page 514).

2. Follow the integration procedure until Copying starting data blocks (Page 516).

3. Then copy the current configuration for each connected AS-i line with the command

"Upload to PG".

"AS-i Slave Options" tab in the "Properties - DP/AS-i ..." dialog.

4. Parameterize the AS-i slaves subsequently in STEP 7.

Step Action

1 Click the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced icon on the DP master system.

A detailed view of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is displayed in the lower part of the station window. The first line in

the table contains address information for the binary signals.

The "DP/AS-i Link Adv." module is followed by the lines for the AS-i address table, which has yet to be

maintained. One line for standard / A slaves and one line for B slaves are provided for each AS-i address.

When you use DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a double master, the following detailed view is displayed:

The second line in the table contains address information for the binary signals of AS-i line 2. The AS-i address

lines (rows) are ordered by line 1 and line 2.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

510 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

2 First enter dummy modules in the lines, which you can specify later on.

You have the following options for assigning the AS-i address lines:

• Drag and drop an AS-i slave from the hardware catalog

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > DP/AS-i > DP/AS-i LINK Advanced > 6GK1411-2BA10 > V1.0

• Select an AS-i slave via the context menu "Insert Object..."

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > 6GK1411-2BA10 > V1.0 > AS-i slave

• Copy and insert via the clipboard

• Move the line content by pressing down the left mouse button.

A configured slave changes its AS-i address as a result.

3 Note the following rules for assigning addresses:

• The lines containing potential target addresses are highlighted in green.

• Standard slaves and certain analog slaves use a full AS-i address (A and B address line).

• Some AS-i slaves (e.g. CTT5) require the following full addresses, depending on whether the slaves are of

type 2, 3, or 4. Make sure that the following addresses remain free.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 511

11.7.7 Specifying AS-i slaves

Specify the AS-i slaves in the "Properties - AS-i Slave - ..." dialog.

Step Action

1 Double-click an occupied address line in the AS-i address table.

For an AS-i slave module, the window containing the "Properties - AS-i Slave - ..." dialog is displayed.

You can specify the AS-i slaves on the "Configuration" tab in one of the following ways: 2

A In the "Module" drop-down list, select a Siemens module via its order number.

The IO, ID, and ID2 codes are permanently defined by the properties of the Siemens modules. On the

other hand, the ID1 code can be variable on certain modules.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

512 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

B Choose a Siemens module from the AS-Interface catalog. To do so, click "Selection...".

The following selection options are available for AS-i slaves:

• Navigation through the hierarchic folder structure according to module type

• Search function using a keyword from the infotext

Transfer the module you have selected to the configuration by double-clicking it or selecting it and

clicking "Apply".

The IO code, ID code and ID2 code are fixed by the properties of the Siemens modules. On the other

hand, the ID1 code can be variable on certain modules.

C For AS-i slaves that are not available for selection, set the IO and ID codes in accordance with the

manufacturer guidelines. If the ID1 code and ID2 code are not specified, choose FH.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 513

Step Action

Parameterize the AS-i slaves.

3.1 If the selected Siemens modules support special parameter settings, you can select them from a range

of drop-down lists.

The bit checkboxes cannot be changed separately. Their assignment is predefined by the modules or

results from the entries in the adjacent fields.

3.2 If the AS-i slaves are not available for selection, set the parameter bits in accordance with the

manufacturer guidelines.

With an A/B module, the checkbox for parameter bit 3 is not displayed.

4 If you activate the "Reserve max. address space" checkbox, the system makes the 4-bit input addresses and

4-bit output addresses available for the AS-i slave in the I/O memory.

The system displays an input and output address range for digital data exchange. If a digital AS-i slave has not

been assigned any inputs or outputs, the corresponding field is empty.

5 If you intend to transfer analog data for an analog AS-i slave via cyclic PROFIBUS DP services, activate the

appropriate option. Otherwise, analog data can only be transferred via data blocks.

The system proposes an input and output address space. The values can be changed. The system reports

incorrect values.

6 If required, enter the name and a comment for an AS-i slave on the "General" tab. When you close the dialog,

your entries appear in the AS-i address table.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

514 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.7.8 Completing configuration

To complete the project and download it to the CPU, carry out the following steps.

Step Action

1 Save and compile the configuration in the current project.

2 Download the hardware configuration to the module.

11.7.9 Switching on the AS-i power supply

Note

Only set addresses on the device when PROFIBUS communication has been interrupted

When you make the required settings on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, you must ensure that no

communication is currently taking place with the PROFIBUS DP master. If necessary, switch

off the CPU or disconnect the PROFIBUS plug.

Switch on the AS-i power supply unit for supplying AS-Interface.

Step Action

1 Switch on the voltage for the 30 V AS-i power supply unit.

When started for the first time, DP/AS-i LINK Advanced performs a self-test. All LEDs light up for 15 s.

11.7.10 Switching on the optional power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

Switch on the 24 V DC power supply unit to provide an optional power supply for

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced.

Step Action

1 If you use an optional power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, switch on the voltage for the additional

24 V DC power supply unit.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 515

11.7.11 Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

Set the PROFIBUS address of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as specified in the configuration

directly on the device.

Step Action

1 Press the "OK" button.

The display for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced switches to the menu view.

2 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "PROFIBUS" and confirm with "OK".

3 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "DP address" and confirm with "OK".

The existing PROFIBUS address is displayed.

4 Use the arrow keys to set the new PROFIBUS address.

Use the same PROFIBUS address as in the configuration.

5 Confirm the new PROFIBUS address with "OK".

11.7.12 Addressing AS-i slaves

Address the AS-i slaves in accordance with the configuration.

Step Action

1 If you use DP/AS-i LINK Advanced for assigning addresses, no AS-i slaves with the same address must be

connected to an AS-i line.

Remove any AS-i slaves with the same address.

New AS-i slaves have the address "0".

2 Press the "OK" button.

The display for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced switches to the menu view.

3 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "AS-i" for a single master and confirm with "OK".

The menu options "AS-i line 1" and "AS-i line 2" are available for a double master.

4 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "Change address" and confirm with "OK".

The lowest AS-i address found is displayed.

5 Use the arrow pointing right to go to the field "New".

6 Use the arrow keys to choose the new AS-i address in accordance with the configuration.

7 When all the existing AS-i slaves have been addressed, connect the nearest configured AS-i slave to

AS-Interface.

8 If you address another AS-i slave on this AS-i line, repeat steps 4 to 7.

9 If you change the AS-i line when using a double master, press "ESC". Repeat steps 3 to 8.

System integration

11.7 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

516 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.7.13 Copying starting data blocks

Copy the starting data blocks from the STEP 7 configuration to DP/AS-i LINK Advanced.

Step Action

1 Switch on the CPU or connect the device to PROFIBUS.

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced receives its starting data blocks from the CPU and switches to "protected" mode.

 System integration 
  11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD 
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  517 
11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD 
11.8.1 Prerequisites 
Before you use DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, the following additional devices and bus systems 
must be assembled, wired, and set up in accordance with their application documentation: 
● CPU with PROFIBUS DP master and PROFIBUS cable 
● AS-i cable with AS-i power supply and AS-i slaves 
When you use DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a double master, two independent 
AS-i networks can be connected. 
● PC / PG equipped with the following: 
– SPS-specific configuration tool (e.g. STEP 7) 
– GSD file for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 
The GSD file for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/113250) can be downloaded 
free of charge from the Internet. 
– PC / PG connected to CPU 
 
  Note 
Power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 
The AS-i shaped cable (line 1) supplies DP/AS-i LINK Advanced with voltage. 
Alternatively, a 24 V DC power supply can be provided via the power supply unit. 
11.8.2 Integration procedure 
The table below describes a potential procedure for integrating AS-Interface in your system 
via the AS-i master. 
Step  Procedure 
1  Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system (Page 518)  
2  Parameterizing DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a PROFIBUS DP slave (Page 519)  
3  Parameterizing AS-Interface (Page 520)  
4  Parameterizing the binary address space (Page 521)  
5  Parameterizing the analog address space (Page 523)  
6  Completing configuration (Page 525)  
7  Switching on the AS-i power supply (Page 525)  
8  Switching on the optional power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced (Page 526)  
9  Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced (Page 526)  
10  Addressing AS-i slaves (Page 526)  
11  Saving the configuration (Page 527)  
12  Copying starting data blocks (Page 528)  
 

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

518 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.8.3 Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system

Configure DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a modular PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Open your STEP 7 project with a CPU with the PROFIBUS DP master (e.g. CPU 315-2 DP).

2 Open HW Config for the PROFIBUS DP master.

3 If the DP master system is not yet available on the CPU, you have to create it.

To do so, insert the DP master system in slot X2 (DP) of the CPU (e.g. via the "Insert master system" context

menu).

4 Choose DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in the "Hardware Catalog" window.

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > Additional FIELD DEVICES > Gateway > AS-I > DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

The same icon is used to indicate single and double masters. A distinction is made between them via the

configuration for the AS-i slaves.

5 Drag & drop the selected DP/AS-i LINK Advanced to the DP master system.

The "Properties - PROFIBUS interface..." dialog is displayed.

6 Choose the PROFIBUS address for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced and close the dialog.

Result

Figure 11-18 Configuration of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced on the DP master system

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 519

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is attached to the DP master system as an icon. A detailed view of

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced along with its possible slots is displayed in the lower part of the

station window.

11.8.4 Parameterizing DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a PROFIBUS DP slave

Parameterize DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Double-click the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced icon on the DP master system.

A window is displayed containing the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog, which contains the "General" and

"Parameterization" tabs.

On the "General" tab, set the properties of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a node on the PROFIBUS DP.

2.1 Enter the diagnostics address or use the displayed value.

If you enter an invalid address, the system proposes a new one.

The PROFIBUS DP master uses the diagnostics address to find out about a failure or return of a

PROFIBUS DP slave and starts the OB 86. You can also call up the full diagnosis of the slave under

this address with SFC 13 DPNRM_DG and include it in your user program.

2.2 Activate response monitoring so that DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can respond to errors in the

PROFIBUS DP master or if bus data traffic is interrupted.

If the PROFIBUS DP master does not address DP/AS-i LINK Advanced within the configured monitoring

time, the PROFIBUS DP slave switches to safe mode and sets all the outputs to "0".

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

520 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.8.5 Parameterizing AS-Interface

Parameterize the properties and behavior of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as a PROFIBUS DP

slave and AS-i Master on the "Parameterization" tab.

Step Action

1 Call up the "Parameterize" tab in the "Properties - DP-Slave" dialog.

2 In the relevant option box, activate the alarm enable for diagnostic interrupts (OB82).

Diagnostic interrupts are triggered if the following faults occur:

• Group fault (SF)

• Internal fault (= device fault)

• External fault (e.g. AS-i slave failed)

• At least one AS-i slave does not match the target specification.

• Voltage on AS-i bus too low (AS-i Power Fail, APF)

• Hardware fault (internal watchdog)

• EEPROM defective

3 When you change the operating mode of the PROFIBUS DP master from DPV1 to DPV0, you first have to

deactivate the "Diagnostic interrupt (OB 82)" option.

Then choose the operating mode from the "Interrupt Mode" drop-down list.

4 Use only the parameters described above to make changes to the parameterization telegram. To prevent any

unforeseen events, do not change any values in the "Hex parameterization" folder.

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 521

11.8.6 Parameterizing the binary address space

Assign the binary AS-i slaves an address space via the slot assignment in the station

window.

Step Action

1 Note the following assignment with the drag & drop slot assignment from the hardware catalog:

• Choose just one ASi-1 module for a single master or line 1 of a double master.

• Choose ASi-2 modules for line 2 of a double master.

2 Position just one binary module for each AS-i line.

The following binary modules are available:

• "Binary Array 32 Byte" allows A/B slaves to be used that are set to B addresses. In this case, the entire

binary data interface of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be used.

• "Binary Array 16 Byte" allows a maximum configuration with 31 standard AS-i slaves. B slaves cannot be

used.

• With "Binary Array 8 Byte", you reserve a reduced memory space. Only standard AS-i slaves with the

addresses 1 ... 15 can be used, however.

• The universal module cannot be used.

You are advised to assign an "ASi-1" binary module to slot 1. For a double master, assign an "ASi-2" binary

module to slot 2.

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

522 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

3 Double-click the line in the configuration table with the selected binary module (binary array) for AS-i line 1.

A window is displayed with the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog, which contains the "Address / ID" and

"Parameter Assignment" tabs.

4 On this tab, set the I/O address of the binary output data or accept the system proposal.

Depending on the selected module, the system calculates the end address and reports any errors that occur.

When configuration is carried out using the GSD file, the I/O data of the AS-i slaves is sorted according to the

CLASSIC sort type.

5 Set the I/O address for the binary input data or accept the system proposal.

Depending on the selected module, the system calculates the end address and signals any errors that occur.

6 If the "Process Image" drop-down list contains selection data, this means that the PROFIBUS DP master is a

CPU that manages partial process images (e.g. CPU 416).

Choose a partial process image number (PPI no.) or the OB1 process image for cyclic updates.

7 If you make changes in the "Hex parameter assignment" folder, you need to know how the parameterization

telegram is structured. Note EN 50170 or IEC 61158 here.

The data for the parameter assignment message is specified in hexadecimal format.

8 To close the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog, confirm your settings with "OK".

9 If you use AS-i line 2 on a double master, repeat steps 3 to 8.

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 523

11.8.7 Parameterizing the analog address space

Assign additional address space to each AS-i slave that occupies more than 4 bits of I/O

address space (e.g. analog slaves).

Step Action

1 Choose a "Word" module for each corresponding AS-i slave.

You have the following options for selecting the modules:

• Drag and drop a module from the hardware catalog.

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > Additional FIELD DEVICES > Gateway > AS-I > DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

• Select a module via the context menu "Insert Object..."

Path: DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

• Copy and insert via the clipboard.

• Move the line content by pressing down the left mouse button.

The modules that can be selected differ with respect to their memory capacity requirements.

• "1 word" for AS-i slaves that require up to 4 bits of address space.

• "2 word" / "4 word" for AS-i slaves that require up to 4 bits of address space (e.g. analog slaves).

• "In" for AS-i slaves that only require input address space.

• "Out" for AS-i slaves that only require output address space.

• "In/Out" for AS-i slaves that require I/O address space.

Example:

the analog module AS-i-1: 2 Word In, for example, is suitable for a two-channel analog input slave.

2 Position the selected modules in empty rows in the station window.

The slots can be assigned as required. Configuration is only complete, however, when there are no more gaps.

The DP ID and I/O addresses are displayed for each module in the station window.

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

524 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

Parameterizing the selected "Word" modules.

3.1 Double-click the line with the selected module in the configuration table.

A window is displayed containing the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog, which contains the "Address / ID"

and "Parameterization" tabs.

3.2 On this tab, set the start address of the output data or accept the system proposal.

Depending on the selected module, the system calculates the end address and reports any errors that

occur.

3.3 Set the start address for the input data or accept the system proposal.

Depending on the selected module, the system calculates the end address and signals any errors that

occur.

3.4 Choose the "Parameterization" tab.

3.5 In the "Device-specific parameters" folder, choose the AS-i address of the selected module via the

drop-down list.

These AS-i addresses must match the configured AS-i configuration on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced.

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 525

Step Action

3.6 If you change any data in the "Hex Parameterization" folder, you need to know how the

parameterization telegram is structured. Note EN 50170 or IEC 61158 here.

The data for the parameterization telegram is specified in hexadecimal format.

11.8.8 Completing configuration

To complete the project and download it to the CPU, carry out the following steps.

Step Action

1 Save and compile the configuration in the current project.

2 Download the hardware configuration to the module.

11.8.9 Switching on the AS-i power supply

Note

Only set addresses on the device when PROFIBUS communication has been interrupted

When you make the required settings on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, you must ensure that no

communication is currently taking place with the PROFIBUS DP master. If necessary, switch

off the CPU or disconnect the PROFIBUS plug.

Switch on the AS-i power supply unit for supplying AS-Interface.

Step Action

1 Switch on the voltage for the 30 V AS-i power supply unit.

When started for the first time, DP/AS-i LINK Advanced performs a self-test. All LEDs light up for 15 s.

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

526 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.8.10 Switching on the optional power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

Switch on the 24 V DC power supply unit to provide an optional power supply for

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced.

Step Action

1 If you use an optional power supply for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, switch on the voltage for the additional 24 V

DC power supply unit.

11.8.11 Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

Set the PROFIBUS address of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as specified in the configuration

directly on the device.

Step Action

1 Press the "OK" button.

The display for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced switches to the menu view.

2 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "PROFIBUS" and confirm with "OK".

3 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "DP address" and confirm with "OK".

The existing PROFIBUS address is displayed.

4 Use the arrow keys to set the new PROFIBUS address.

Use the same PROFIBUS address as in the configuration.

5 Confirm the new PROFIBUS address with "OK".

11.8.12 Addressing AS-i slaves

Address the AS-i slaves in accordance with the configuration.

Step Action

1 If you use DP/AS-i LINK Advanced for assigning addresses, no AS-i slaves with the same address must be

connected to an AS-i line.

Remove any AS-i slaves with the same address.

New AS-i slaves have the address "0".

2 Press the "OK" button.

The display for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced switches to the menu view.

3 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "AS-i" for a single master and confirm with "OK".

The menu options "AS-i line 1" and "AS-i line 2" are available for a double master.

4 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "Change address" and confirm with "OK".

The lowest AS-i address found is displayed.

5 Use the arrow pointing right to go to the "New" field.

6 Use the arrow keys to choose the new AS-i address in accordance with the configuration.

7 When all the existing AS-i slaves have been addressed, connect the next configured AS-i slave to

AS-Interface.

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 527

Step Action

8 If you address another AS-i slave on this AS-i line, repeat steps 4 to 7.

9 If you change the AS-i line when using a double master, press "ESC". Repeat steps 3 to 8.

11.8.13 Saving the configuration

In "configuration" mode, DP/AS-i LINK Advanced exchanges data with all the connected

AS-i slaves. DP/AS-i LINK Advanced instantly recognizes new AS-i slaves, activates them,

and includes them in cyclic data exchange (except AS-i slaves with the address "0" or if an

AS-i address has been assigned more than once). DP/AS-i LINK Advanced saves the the

following AS-i slave data to a non-volatile memory:

● Addresses

● ID codes

● I/O configuration

Step Action

1 Press the "OK" button.

The display for DP/AS-i LINK Advanced switches to the menu view.

2 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "AS-i" for a single master and confirm with "OK".

The menu options "AS-i line 1" and "AS-i line 2" are available for a double master.

Check whether all the connected AS-i slaves have been detected.

3.1 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "Lifelist" and confirm with "OK".

3.2 Switch the address spaces using the arrow keys.

3.3 End the check with "ESC".

4 Use the arrow keys to select the menu option "Detect -> New" and confirm with "OK".

5 Confirm the prompt with "OK".

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced saves the recognized configuration in the internal EEPROM.

6 If you change the AS-i line when using a double master, press "ESC". Repeat steps 2 to 5.

System integration

11.8 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - integration with GSD

AS-Interface system

528 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.8.14 Copying starting data blocks

Copy the starting data blocks from the configuration to DP/AS-i LINK Advanced.

Step Action

1 Switch on the CPU or connect the device to PROFIBUS.

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced receives its starting data blocks from the CPU and switches to "protected" mode.

 System integration 
  11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7 
AS-Interface system 
System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1  529 
11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7 
11.9.1 Prerequisites 
Before you use DP/AS-i F-Link, the following additional devices and bus systems must be 
assembled, wired, and set up in accordance with their application documentation: 
● Failsafe SIMATIC S7-CPU with PROFIBUS DP master and PROFIBUS cable 
A standard PROFIBUS DP master, however, can be used for non-safe communication 
with non-safe AS-i slaves. 
● AS-i cable with AS-i power supply and AS-i slaves or ASIsafe slaves 
● PELV power supply unit (24 V DC) for DP/AS-i F-Link 
● PC / PG equipped with the following: 
– STEP 7, as of version 5.4 with Service Pack 1 
– Option package S7 Distributed Safety, as of version 5.4 with Service Pack 1 (for 
S7-300 / 416 F-CPU). 
– S7 F configuration pack, as of version 5.5 (e.g. for SINUMERIK 840D) 
– Object Manager for DP/AS-i F-Link 
The Object Manager for DP/AS-i F-Link 
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24063754) can be downloaded 
free of charge from the Internet. Choose the "Downloads" tab. 
– PC / PG connected to failsafe CPU 
11.9.2 Integration procedure 
The table below describes a potential procedure for integrating AS-Interface in your system 
via the AS-i master. 
Step  Procedure 
1  Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system (Page 530)  
2  Parameterizing DP/AS-i F-Link as a PROFIBUS DP slave (Page 532)  
3  Parameterizing PROFIsafe communication (Page 533)  
4  Parameterizing AS-Interface (Page 535)  
5  Configuring AS-i slaves (Page 538)  
6  Specifying AS-i slaves (Page 540)  
7  Paremeterizing ASIsafe slaves (Page 543)  
8  Completing configuration (Page 544)  
9  Switching on the AS-i power supply (Page 544)  
10  Switching on the DP/AS-i F-Link power supply (Page 545)  
11  Setting the PROFIsafe address on the DP/AS-i F-Link (Page 545)  
12  Setting the PROFIBUS address on DP/AS-i F-Link (Page 546)  
13  Addressing AS-i slaves (Page 546)  
14  Copying starting data blocks (Page 547)  

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

530 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Procedure

15 Teaching in code tables for ASIsafe slaves (Page 547)

16 Information about the user program (Page 548)

11.9.3 Configuring the PROFIBUS DP master system

Configure DP/AS-i F-Link as a modular PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Open your STEP 7 project with a failsafe SIMATIC S7-CPU with the PROFIBUS DP master (e.g.

CPU 315F-2 DP).

2 Open HW Config for the PROFIBUS DP master.

3 If the DP master system is not yet available on the CPU, you have to create it.

To do so, insert the DP master system in slot X2 (DP) of the CPU (e.g. via the "Insert master system" context

menu).

4 Select the DP / AS-i F-Link in the "Hardware Catalog" window.

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > DP/AS-i > DP/AS-i F-Link > 3RK3141-xCD10 > V1.0

5 Drag & drop the selected DP/AS-i F-Link to the DP master system.

The "Properties - PROFIBUS interface..." dialog is displayed.

6 Choose the PROFIBUS address for DP/AS-i F-Link and close the dialog.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 531

Result

Figure 11-19 Configuration of DP/AS-i F-Link on the DP master system

DP/AS-i F-Link is attached to the DP master system as an icon. A detailed view of

DP/AS-i F-Link along with its possible slots and DP IDs is displayed in the lower part of the

station window. This is followed by the lines for the AS-i address table, which has yet to be

maintained.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

532 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.9.4 Parameterizing DP/AS-i F-Link as a PROFIBUS DP slave

Parameterize DP/AS-i F-Link as a PROFIBUS DP slave in HW Config of the

PROFIBUS DP master.

Step Action

1 Double-click the icon for the DP/AS-i F-Link on the DP master system. A window is displayed with the

"Properties - DP Slave" dialog, which contains the "General", "Identification", "PROFIsafe", and "F Address"

tabs.

On the "General" tab, set the properties of DP/AS-i F-Link as a node on the PROFIBUS DP.

2.1 Enter the diagnostics address or use the displayed value.

If you enter an invalid address, the system proposes a new one.

The PROFIBUS DP master uses the diagnostics address to find out about a failure or return of a

PROFIBUS DP slave and starts the OB 86. You can also call up the full diagnosis of the slave under

this address with SFC 13 DPNRM_DG and include it in your user program.

2.2 Activate response monitoring so that DP/AS-i F-Link can respond to errors in the PROFIBUS DP master

or if bus data traffic is interrupted.

If the PROFIBUS DP master does not address DP/AS-i F-Link within the configured monitoring time, the

PROFIBUS DP slave switches to safe mode and sets all the outputs to "0".

3 You can also maintain the following optional input fields on the "Identification" tab:

• Plant identifier

• Location ID

• Installation date

• Additional information

This describes the assignment of DP/AS-i F-Link within the plant as a whole.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 533

11.9.5 Parameterizing PROFIsafe communication

Parameterize PROFIsafe communication for DP/AS-i F-Link on the "PROFIsafe" and

"F Addresses" tabs.

NOTICE

Setting for the parameter "F_Par_Version"

If the network comprises PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO subnets, set "PROFIsafe V2".

Step Action

1 Enter the password for the safety program.

When you access the PROFIsafe parameters in DP/AS-i F-Link for the first time, STEP 7 prompts you to create

a new password.

You must enter a password if you want to make any changes to the PROFIsafe settings. The last password

entered is valid for one hour. Subsequent password changes can be made in the SIMATIC Manager > menu:

"Tools" > "Edit safety program" dialog > "Authorization" pushbutton.

On the "PROFIsafe" tab, set the safety-oriented parameters for DP/AS-i F-Link for the PROFIsafe protocol.

Change the parameter values by double-clicking the parameter name or by choosing "Change value...".

2.1 Parameter "F_Check_SeqNr":

This parameter defines whether the consistency check (CRC calculation) of the failsafe user data

telegram takes into account the sequence number.

• In PROFIsafe V1 mode, this parameter is set permanently to "No Check".

• In PROFIsafe V2 mode, "F_Check_SeqNr" is irrelevant.

Note here the setting of the PROFIsafe mode in the parameter "F_Par_Version".

2.2 Parameter "F_SIL":

this parameter indicates the safety class of DP/AS-i F-Link and cannot be changed.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

534 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

2.3 Parameter "F_CRC_Length"

Set the following for the "F_CRC_Length" parameter:

• In PROFIsafe V1 mode: "2 Byte CRC"

• In PROFIsafe V2 mode: "3 Byte CRC" (default)

Note here the setting of the PROFIsafe mode in the parameter "F_Par_Version".

2.4 Parameter "F_Par_Version"

The following selection can be made:

• "PROFIsafe V1": If the F CPU only supports PROFIsafe V1, choose this setting.

• "PROFIsafe V2" (default)

If the network comprises PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO subnets, set "PROFIsafe V2".

2.5 Parameter "F_Source_Add"

The "F_Source_Add" parameter uniquely identifies the PROFIsafe source (PROFIBUS DP Master). The

system assigns this parameter automatically. The value range is from 1 to 65534.

2.6 Parameter "F_Dest_Add"

The "F_Dest_Add" parameter uniquely identifies the PROFIsafe target (DP/AS-i F-Link). The parameter

is unique across the network and stations. The value range for "F_Dest_Add" is from 1 to 9999. This

address must match the F-DP (PROFIsafe address) that you set on the device.

2.7 Parameter "F_WD_Time"

In the "F_WD_Time" field, you can set the monitoring time for safety-oriented communication between

the failsafe CPU and failsafe I/O.

DP/AS-i F-Link expects a valid safety message frame from the failsafe CPU within the monitoring time.

As a result, DP/AS-i F-Link can safely respond to failures and errors by either keeping the system in

safe mode or by switching it to a safe mode.

When you choose the monitoring time, make sure that, on the one hand, it is long enough to ensure that

telegram delays caused by communication are tolerated while, on the other hand, the system can still

respond in good time if an error occurs (e.g. interruption of communication connection).

The "F_WD_Time" parameter can be set to anywhere between 10 ms and 10000 ms in 1 ms increments

(default: 150 ms).

3 On the "F Addresses" tab, set the I/O address of the safe input data or accept the value displayed. If you enter

an invalid address, the system proposes a new one.

The safe input data requires 12 bytes of memory space. The end address appears automatically.

Depending on the system, the I/O addresses of the safe outputs match the I/O addresses of the safe inputs.

The process image of safe outputs has a fixed length of 4 bytes and only contains administrative data, but no

user data.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 535

11.9.6 Parameterizing AS-Interface

Parameterize the properties and behavior of DP/AS-i F-Link as an AS-i master in the

"Properties - DP/AS-i -..." dialog.

Step Action

1 In the AS-i address table, double-click the second line with the "DP/AS-i" module.

A window is displayed containing the "Properties - DP/AS-i - ..." dialog, which contains "General",

"Digital Addresses", "Operating Parameters", and "AS-i Slave Options" tabs.

2 If required, enter the name and a comment for the AS-i line on the "General" tab.

To configure the binary I/O address spaces for the AS-i slaves, choose the "Digital Addresses" tab.

3.1 Set the I/O address for the binary input data or accept the displayed value. If you enter an invalid

address, the system proposes a new one.

Digital input addresses relate to a max. 32 byte memory area in which the binary input values of the

AS-i slaves are stored.

For the digital output addresses, the same starting value as for the input addresses applies depending

on the system.

3.2 If you use the CLASSIC sort type for the I/O addresses (default setting), you can set the

"Reserved lengths" value.

You can use this parameter to suppress unassigned I/O addresses at the lower end of the table or fix an

associated address space for future extensions on AS-Interface.

The "Assigned length" shows the amount of memory currently occupied by the AS-i slaves in bytes.

3.3 If the "Process Image" drop-down list contains selection data, this means that the PROFIBUS DP

master is a CPU that manages partial process images (e.g. CPU 416F).

Choose a partial process image number (PPI no.) or the OB1 process image for cyclic updates.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

536 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

Step Action

3.4 Choose a sort type for the I/O addresses of the AS-i slaves (default: "CLASSIC").

The "Pack" button moves the I/O addresses of the AS-i modules in the AS-i address table in such a way

that they require less room in the address space. In addition, the "Reserved length" is optimized.

The "CLASSIC sorting" pushbutton sorts the I/O addresses according to AS-i address. The

standard / A slaves are at the beginning, followed by the B slaves.

The "LINEAR sorting" pushbutton sorts the I/O addresses in ascending order. Standard / A slaves and

B slaves with the same AS-i address are combined in one byte (standard / A slave in the low nibble,

B slave in the high nibble).

On the "Operating Parameters" tab, set the behavior of DP/AS-i F-Link as an AS-i master. 4

4.1 Activate the alarm enable for diagnostic interrupts (OB82).

Diagnostic interrupts are triggered if the following faults occur:

• Code sequence error

• Group fault (SF)

• Internal fault (= device fault)

• External fault (e.g. AS-i slave failed)

• At least one AS-i slave does not match the target specification.

• Voltage on AS-i bus too low (AS-i Power Fail, APF)

• Hardware fault (internal watchdog)

• EEPROM defective

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 537

Step Action

4.2 Choose the options for the behavior of DP/AS-i F-Link when PROFIBUS fails and is then restored.

If PROFIBUS fails (BUS fault), DP/AS-i F-Link continues running as the AS-i master. The inputs are

interrogated cyclically, but the outputs shut down.

When the PROFIBUS is restored, DP/AS-i F-Link is supplied with the start-up parameters again and

switches to protected mode.

When you activate the "AS-i reset on PROFIBUS return" option, a PROFIBUS restart always resets

AS-Interface. The receipt of message frames for parameterization and configuration data from the

PROFIBUS DP master causes AS-i message frame traffic to stop completely and then restart.

Upon deactivation (default), DP/AS-i F-Link checks the discrepancies between the data in the

parameterization and configuration message frame and the actual data when the PROFIBUS restarts.

The comparison is used as a basis for the following responses:

• If all the data is identical, no reset is performed on AS-Interface.

• If certain parameter bits of the AS-i slaves are not identical, just these ones are updated.

• If any other discrepancies are identified, a reset is performed on AS-Interface.

When you choose the option "Automatic AS-i address assignment" (default), an AS-i slave that has

failed can be replaced by a new, identical slave with the address "0" (as-delivered state). DP/AS-i F-Link

automatically assigns the new slave the address of the old one.

If this option is deactivated, you have to program the address into the new slave when the slave is

replaced.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

538 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.9.7 Configuring AS-i slaves

Configure the AS-i slaves in accordance with the address table.

Note

Reading the pending actual configuration to the AS-i address table

If an online connection has been established, you can read an existing AS-i configuration to

the AS-i address table.

1. Skip the integration procedure until you reach Completing configuration (Page 544).

2. Follow the integration procedure until Copying starting data blocks (Page 547).

3. Then copy the current configuration with the command "Download to PG".

"AS-i Slave Options" tab in the "Properties - DP/AS-i - ..." dialog.

4. Parameterize the AS-i slaves subsequently in STEP 7.

Step Action

1 Click the DP/AS-i F-Link icon on the DP master system.

A detailed view of DP/AS-i F-Link is displayed in the lower part of the station window. The first line of the table

contains address space information for the safety-related binary signals. The second line contains address

information for the binary signals.

The "DP/AS-i F-Link" module is followed by the lines for the AS-i address table, which has yet to be

maintained. One line for standard / A slaves and one line for B slaves are provided for each AS-i address.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 539

Step Action

2 First enter dummy modules in the lines. You can then specify these later on.

The following dummy modules are available:

• AS-i F slave modules for ASIsafe slaves

• AS-i slave modules for all the other AS-i slaves

You have the following options for assigning the AS-i address lines:

• Drag and drop an AS-i slave from the hardware catalog

Path: PROFIBUS-DP > DP/AS-i > DP/AS-i F-Link > 3RK3141-xCD10 > V1.0

• Select an AS-i slave via the context menu "Insert Object..."

Path: V1.0 > AS-i F slave or AS-i slave

• Copy and insert via the clipboard.

• Move the line content by pressing down the left mouse button.

A configured slave changes its AS-i address as a result.

3 Note the following rules for assigning addresses:

• The lines containing potential target addresses are highlighted in green.

• Standard slaves, ASIsafe slaves, and certain analog slaves use a full AS-i address (A and B address line).

• Some AS-i slaves (e.g. CTT5) require the following full addresses, depending on whether the slaves are of

type 2, 3, or 4. Make sure that the following addresses remain free.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

540 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1

11.9.8 Specifying AS-i slaves

Specify the AS-i slaves in the "Properties - AS-i Slave - ..." or "Properties - AS-i F-Slave - ..."

dialog.

Step Action

1 Double-click an occupied address line in the AS-i address table.

• For an AS-i slave module, the window containing the "Properties - AS-i Slave - ..." dialog is displayed.

• For an AS-i F slave module, the window containing the "Properties - AS-i F Slave - ..." dialog is displayed.

You can specify the AS-i slaves on the "Configuration" tab in one of the following ways: 2

A In the "Module" drop-down list, select a Siemens module via its order number.

The IO, ID, and ID2 codes are permanently defined by the properties of the Siemens modules. On the

other hand, the ID1 code can be variable on certain modules.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1 541

Step Action

B Choose a Siemens module from the AS-Interface catalog. To do so, click "Selection...".

The following selection options are available for AS-i slaves:

• Navigation through the hierarchic folder structure according to module type

• Search function using a keyword from the infotext

Transfer the module you have selected to the configuration by double-clicking it or selecting it and

clicking "Accept".

The IO code, ID code and ID2 code are fixed by the properties of the Siemens modules. On the other

hand, the ID1 code can be variable on certain modules.

C For AS-i slaves that are not available for selection, set the IO and ID codes in accordance with the

manufacturer guidelines. If the ID1 code and ID2 code are not specified, choose FH.

System integration

11.9 DP/AS-i F-Link - integration with STEP 7

AS-Interface system

542 System Manual, 11/2008, 3RK2703-3BB02-1AA1